Transnet Group Capital a Specialist Unit of Transnet SOC Ltd Region... · transnet group capital a specialist unit of transnet soc ltd registration number 1990/000900/30 tender for

Transnet Group Capital a Specialist Unit of

Transnet SOC Ltd

Registration Number 1990/000900/30

TENDER FOR THE:

REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY

ENQUIRY NUMBER 4228277.001C

ISSUE DATES 23 JANUARY 2020

BRIEFING SESSION 31 JANUARY 2020 AT 09H00

CLOSING DATE 21 FEBRUARY 2020

CLOSING TIME 12H00

BID VALIDITY PERIOD 12 WEEKS FROM CLOSING DATE

TRANSNET GROUP CAPITAL

CONTRACT NUMBER: 4228277.001C

DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY

NEC3 ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Contract Documents FORM: PRO-FAT-0204 Rev02 Page 2 of 2

Contents

Number Heading

The Tender

Part T1: Tendering Procedures

T1.1 Tender Notice and Invitation to Tender

T1.2 Tender Data

Part T2: Returnable Documents

T2.1 List of Returnable Document

T2.2 Returnable Schedules

The Contract

Part C1: Agreements and Contract Data

C1.1 Form of Offer and Acceptance

C1.2 Contract Data (Parts 1 & 2)

Part C2: Pricing Data

C2.1 Pricing Instructions

C2.2 Bill of Quantities

Part C3: Scope of Work

C3.1 Works Information

Part C4: Site Information

C4.1 Site Information

TRANSNET GROUP CAPITAL CONTRACT NUMBER: 4228277.001C


2018 – Rev01 Part T1: Tendering procedures Page 1 of 4 T 1.1: Tender Notice and Invitation

T1.1 Tender Notice and Invitation to Tender

SECTION 1: NOTICE TO TENDERERS

1. INVITATION TO TENDER

Responses to this Tender [hereinafter referred to as a Tender] are requested from persons,

companies, close corporations or enterprises [hereinafter referred to as a Tenderer].

DESCRIPTION The Refurbishment of Old MHA Workshop in the Port of Richards Bay

COMPULSORY

TENDER

CLARIFICATION

MEETING

A Compulsory Tender Clarification Meeting will be conducted at Transnet Group

Capital, Old Naval Base, 01 Commodores Close, Richards Bay, 3900, Anchor Boardroom on the 31 January 2020, at 09:00am [09 O’clock] for a period

of ± 2 (two) hours. [Tenderers to provide own transportation and accommodation].

The Compulsory Tender Clarification Meeting will start punctually and

information will not be repeated for the benefit of Tenderers arriving late.

Certificate of Attendance in the form set out in the Returnable Schedule

T2.2-01 hereto must be completed and submitted with your Tender as proof of

attendance is required for a compulsory site meeting and/or tender briefing.

Tenderers are required to bring this Returnable Schedule T2.2-01 to the

Compulsory Tender Clarification Meeting to be signed by the Employer’s

Representative.

Tenderers failing to attend the compulsory tender briefing will be disqualified.

CLOSING DATE

12:00pm on Friday, 21 February 2020

Tenderers must ensure that tenders are delivered timeously to the correct

address. If a tender is late or delivered to the incorrect address, it will not be

accepted for consideration.

VALIDITY PERIOD

12 weeks from the Tender Closing Date.

Tenderers are to note that they may be requested to extend the validity period

of their tender, at the same terms and conditions, if the internal evaluation

process has not been finalised within the validity period.

However, once the adjudication body has approved the process and award of

the business to the successful Tenderer(s), the validity of the successful

Tenderer(s)’ tender will be deemed to remain valid until a final contract has

been concluded.




2. TENDER SUBMISSION

Tender Offers must be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed as follows:

The Secretariat, Transnet Group Capital Acquisition Council

RFP No: 4228277.001C

Description: The Refurbishment of Old MHA Workshop in the Port of Richards

Bay

Closing date and time: Friday, 21 February 2020 at 12:00

Closing address: [Refer to options in paragraph 3 below]

All envelopes must reflect the return address of the Tenderer on the reverse side.

3. DELIVERY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TENDER

3.1. Delivery by hand

If delivered by hand, the envelope must be deposited in the Transnet tender box which is located at the

address of the regional tender box location at 01 Commodores Close, Old Naval Base, Richards Bay,

3900 and must be addressed as follows:

Fhulufhedzani Kone

Transnet Group Capital

01 Commodores Close

Old Naval Base

Richards Bay

3900

South Africa

The measurements of the "tender slot" are 400mm wide x 100mm high, and Tenderers must please

ensure that tender documents or files are no larger than the above dimensions. Tenders which are too bulky [i.e. more than 100mm thick] must be split into two or more files, and placed in separate

envelopes, each such envelope to be addressed as required in paragraph 0 above.

3.2. Dispatch by courier

If dispatched by courier, the envelope must be addressed as follows and delivered to the Office of The

Secretariat, Transnet Group Capital Acquisition Council and a signature obtained from that Office:




Fhulufhedzani Kone

Transnet Group Capital

01 Commodores Close

Old Naval Base

Richards Bay

3900

South Africa

3.3. If tender offers are not delivered as stipulated herein, such tenders will not be considered.

3.4. No email or faxed tenders will be considered, unless otherwise stated herein.

3.5. The tender offers to this tender will be opened as soon as possible after the closing date and time.

Transnet shall not, at the opening of tenders, disclose to any other company any confidential details

pertaining to the Tender Offers / information received, i.e. pricing, delivery, etc. The names and

locations of the Tenderers will be divulged to other Tenderers upon request.

3.6. Envelopes must not contain documents relating to any Tender other than that shown on the envelope.

4. CONFIDENTIALITY

All information related to this RFP is to be treated with strict confidence. In this regard Tenderers are

required to certify that they have acquainted themselves with the Non-Disclosure Agreement. All information related to a subsequent contract, both during and after completion thereof, will be treated

with strict confidence. Should the need however arise to divulge any information gleaned from provision

of the Goods, which is either directly or indirectly related to Transnet’s business, written approval to divulge such information must be obtained from Transnet.

Kindly note that Transnet will not reimburse any Tenderer for any preparatory costs or other

work performed in connection with this Tender, whether or not the Tenderer is awarded a contract.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF DOCUMENTS

Transnet urges its clients, suppliers and the general public

to report any fraud or corruption to

TIP-OFFS ANONYMOUS: 0800 003 056 OR [email protected]




ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT OF DOCUMENTS

AND INTENTION TO TENDER

(To be returned within 5 days after receipt)

Email to: Transnet Group Capital

Attention: Fhulufhedzani Kone

Project No.: 4228277

Email: [email protected]

Tender No.: 4228277.001C

Closing Date and time

21 February 2020 at 12h00

For: The Refurbishment of Old MHA Workshop in the Port of Richards Bay

Check

We: Do wish to tender for the work and shall return our tender by the due

date above

Yes

Do not wish to tender on this occasion and herewith return all your

documents received

Yes

REASON FOR NOT TENDERING:

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________

COMPANY’S NAME, ADDRESS, CONTACT, PHONE AND TELEFAX NUMBERS

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________

SIGNATURE: ____________________________________

DATE: __________________________________________


DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY ________________________________________________________________________________________________

2019 – Rev03 Page 1 of 10 Part 1: Tendering Procedures T1.2: Tender Data

T1.2 TENDER DATA

The conditions of tender are the Standard Conditions of Tender as contained in Annexure C of the CIDB

Standard for Uniformity in Engineering and Construction Works Contracts. The Standard for Uniformity in

Construction Procurement was first published in Board Notice 62 of 2004 in Government Gazette No 26427 of

9 June 2004. It was subsequently amended in Board Notice 67 of 2005 in Government Gazette No 28127 of

14 October 2005, Board Notice 93 of 2006 in Government Gazette No 29138 of 18 August 2006, Board Notice

No 9 of 2008 in Government Gazette No 31823 of 30 January 2009, Board Notice 86 of 2010 in Government

Gazette No 33239 of 28 May 2010, Board Notice 136 of 2015 in Government Gazette 38960 of 10 July 2015

and Board Notice 423 of 2019 in Government Gazette No 42622 of 8 August 2019.

This edition incorporates the amendments made in Board Notice 423 of 2019 in Government Gazette 42622

of 8 August 2019. (see www.cidb.org.za).

The Standard Conditions of Tender make several references to Tender data for detail that apply specifically to

this tender. The Tender Data shall have precedence in the interpretation of any ambiguity or inconsistency

between it and the Standard Conditions of Tender.

Each item of data given below is cross-referenced in the left-hand column to the clause in the Standard

Conditions of Tender to which it mainly applies.

Clause Data

C.1.1 The Employer is Transnet SOC Ltd

(Reg No. 1990/000900/30)

C.1.2 The tender documents issued by the Employer comprise:

Part T: The Tender

Part T1: Tendering procedures T1.1 Tender notice and invitation to tender

T1.2 Tender data

Part T2 : Returnable documents T2.1 List of returnable documents

T2.2 Returnable schedules

Part C: The contract

Part C1: Agreements and contract data C1.1 Form of offer and acceptance

C1.2 Contract data (Part 1 & 2)

C1.3 Form of Securities

Part C2: Pricing data C2.1 Pricing instructions

C2.2 Bill of Quantities

Part C3: Scope of work C3.1 Works Information

Part C4: Site information C4.1 Site information

C.1.4 The Employer’s agent is: Procurement Officer

http://www.cidb.org.za/




Name: Fhulufhedzani Kone

Address: 01 Commodores Close, Old Naval Base, Richards

Bay, 3900

Tel No. 011 308 1515

E – mail [email protected]

C.2.1 Only those tenderers who satisfy the following eligibility criteria are eligible to submit tenders:

1. Stage One - Eligibility with regards to attendance at the compulsory clarification

meeting:

An authorised representative of the tendering entity or a representative of a tenderer entity that

intends to form a Joint Venture (JV) must attend the compulsory clarification meeting in terms

C.2.7

Any tenderer that fails to meet the stipulated pre-qualifying criteria will be regarded

as an unacceptable tender.

2. Stage Two - Local Production and Content in terms of the Preferential

Procurement Regulations, 2017:

Tenderers must properly complete, duly sign and submit returnable schedule T2.2-02, entitled

“Declaration Certificate for Local Production and Content (SBD 6.2 and Annexures C, D & E)”,

committing to meet the following stipulated minimum thresholds for local production and

content for the following designated sectors as determined by the Department of Trade and

Industry (DTI):

90% for Electrical and Telecom Cables;

70% for Valves Products and Actuators,

100% for Steel Products and Components for Construction; and

70% for Pumps, MV Motor and Associated Accessories

The exchange rate to be used for the calculation of local production and content must be the

exchange rate published by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB) at 12:00 on the date of the

advertisement of the tender. The rates of exchange quoted by the tenderer in paragraph 4.1 of

returnable schedule T2.2-02 (the Declaration Certificate for Local Production and Content for

Designated Sectors) may be verified for accuracy. Only the South African Bureau of Standards

(SABS) approved technical specification number SATS 1286:2011 must be used to calculate local

content.

The SABS approved technical specification number SATS 1286:2011 and the Guidance on the

Calculation of Local Content together with the Local Content Declaration Templates [Annex C

(Local Content Declaration: Summary Schedule), D (Imported Content Declaration: Supporting

Schedule to Annex C) and E (Local Content Declaration: Supporting Schedule to Annex C)] are

accessible to all potential tenderers on the DTI’s official website;

http://www.the dti.gov.za/industrial development/ip.jsp






3. Stage Three – Sub-contracting - Pre-qualification criteria

Tenderer fully and properly completes, sign and submit the Returnable Schedule T2.2-03

with regards to Sub-Contracting criteria. Tenderers accept that failure to submit and commit

to the following sub-contracting requirements shall result in the Tenderer being deemed

non-responsive and therefore eliminated from further evaluation:

• Subcontracting a minimum of 30% to an EME or QSE which is at least 51% owned by

black people.

4. Stage Four - Eligibility in terms of the Construction Industry Development Board:

a) Only those tenderers who are registered with the CIDB, or are capable of being so prior to

the evaluation of submissions, in a contractor grading designation equal to or higher than

a contractor grading designation determined in accordance with the sum tendered or a

value determined in accordance with Regulation 25 (1B) or 25(7A) of the Construction

Industry Development Regulations, designation of 7GB or higher class of construction

work, are eligible to have their tenders evaluated.

b) Joint Venture (JV)

Joint ventures are eligible to submit tenders subject to the following:

1. every member of the joint venture is registered with the CIDB;

2. the lead partner has a contractor grading designation in the 6GB class of construction

work ; or not lower than one level below the required grading designation in the class

of construction works under consideration and possess the required recognition status.

3. the combined Contractor grading designation calculated in accordance with the

Construction Industry Development Regulations is equal to or higher than a Contractor

grading designation determined in accordance with the sum tendered for a 7GB or

higher class of construction work or a value determined in accordance with Regulation

25(1B) or 25(7A) of the Construction Industry Development Regulations

4. The tenderer shall provide a certified copy of its signed joint venture agreement.



5. Stage Five - Functionality:

Only those tenderers who obtain the minimum qualifying score for functionality will be evaluated

further in terms of price and the applicable preference point system. The minimum qualifying

for score for functionality is 60 points.

The evaluation criteria for measuring functionality and the points for each criteria and, if any,

each sub-criterion are as stated in C.3.11.3 below.






C.2.7 The arrangements for a compulsory clarification meeting are as stated in the Tender Notice and

Invitation to Tender. Tenderers must sign the attendance register. Addenda will be

issued to and tenders will be received only from those tendering entities including those the

entities that intends forming a joint venture appearing on the attendance register.

Tenderers are also required to bring their RFP document to the briefing session and

have their returnable document T2.2-01 Certificate of Attendance signed off by the

Employer’s authorised representative.

C.2.12 No alternative tender offers will be considered.

C.2.13.3 Parts of each tender offer communicated on paper shall be as an original and one (1) copy in

the same format as the original submission which shall be in the English Language.

C.2.13.5

C2.15.1

The Employer’s details and address for delivery of tender offers and identification details that

are to be shown on each tender offer package are:

Location of tender box TRANSNET GROUP CAPITAL

Physical address: 01 Commodores Close

Old Naval Base

Richards Bay

3900

South Africa

Identification details: The tender documents must be submitted labelled with:

Name of Tenderer: (insert company name)

Contact person and details: (insert details)

The Tender Number: 4228277.001C

The Tender Description: The Refurbishment of Old MHA

Workshop in the Port of Richards Bay

Documents must be marked for the attention of: Employer’s

Agent: Fhulufhedzani Kone

C.2.13.9 Telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or e-mailed tender offers will not be accepted.

C.2.15 The closing time for submission of tender offers is:

Time: 12:00pm on the 21 February 2020 (Date)

Location: Transnet Group Capital, 01 Commodores Close, Old Naval Base, Richards

Bay, 3900.

NO LATE TENDERS WILL BE ACCEPTED

C.2.16 The tender offer validity period is 12 weeks after the closing date. Tenderers are to note

that they may be requested to extend the validity period of their tender, at the same terms

and conditions, if Transnet’s internal evaluation process has not been finalised within the

validity period.




C.2.23 The tenderer is required to submit with his tender:

1. A valid Tax Clearance Certificate issued by the South African Revenue Services.

Tenderers also to provide Transnet with a TCS PIN to verify Tenderers

compliance status.

2. A valid B-BBEE Certificate from a Verification Agency accredited by the South African

Accreditation System [SANAS], or a sworn affidavit confirming annual turnover and level of

black ownership in case of all EMEs and QSEs with 51% black ownership or more together

with the bid;

3. A valid CIDB certificate in the correct designated grading;

4. Proof of registration on the Central Supplier Database;

5. Certified Letter of Good Standing with the Workmen’s compensation fund.

Note: Refer to Section T2.1 for List of Returnable Documents

C3.4 The time and location for opening of the offers are after the opening submissions at the venue

as stated in C.2.15.

C3.11.1 The minimum number of evaluation points for functionality is: 60

The procedure for the evaluation of responsive tenders is using the tender evaluation methods

and associated evaluation criteria and weightings that are specified in the tender data:

Only those tenderers who attain the minimum number of evaluation points for

Functionality will be eligible for further evaluation, failure to meet the minimum

threshold will result in the tender being disqualified and removed from any further

consideration.

Functionality Criteria

The functionality criteria and maximum score in respect of each of the criteria are as follows:

Quality Criteria

Sub-Criteria Sub-criteria number of points

Maximum Number of Points

T2.2-04:

Programme

The tender must provide a programme which provides the detail that would indicate the order and timing of activities to carry out the services in terms of the Employer's requirements and within the stipulated timeframes. The Tenderer shall produce a level 3 schedule according to the Employer’s objectives

The tenderer shall demonstrate the following:

15

Ability to Provide the Services

8

Provision of Dates

2

Resourcing & Equipment

3

Progress Measurement & Tracking Sheets

2

The tender must be able to demonstrate that the project personnel have sufficient knowledge, experience and qualifications to provide the required service




T2.2-05:

Project

Organogram,

Management

& CVs of Key

Persons

Organizational structure to include a clear indication of roles and responsibilities and specific function of each team member

5

20

Qualification and experience of key staff required but not limited to: Project Manager 4

Construction Manager 4

Civil Design Engineer 4

Construction/Site Supervisor 3

T2.2-06 Quality Plan

Due consideration must be given to the deliverables required to demonstrate to the Employer the effectiveness of the Quality Management System to be used in the performance of the scope. The following standards apply to the quality of the deliverables to be supplied;

QAL-STD-0001 - General Quality Requirements for Contractors and Suppliers;

International Standard ISO 9001: 2015

Project Quality Plan for the contract. 2

10

Valid ISO 9001:2015 certification 2

Index / list of procedures / method statements to be used during the contract.

1

Qualifications and experience of quality manager and officers

1

Quality Policy 1

Project specific Quality Control Plan (For each task).

2

Project specific Quality data book index. 1

T2.2-07 Environmental Management

The tenderer must provide their environmental management policy detailing the Management’s commitment to preventing and controlling environmental impacts.

1

5

The tenderer must provide environmental specific implementation plan1 which describes relevant roles and responsibilities, and how potential environmental impacts will be identified and managed including the monitoring and recording thereof.

1

Organisational charts depicting key environmental staff must be accompanied by staff CV’s showing staff competencies relevant to environmental management functions, together with qualifications and utilization of listed environmental staff.

1

Tenderer to provide a signed declaration of understanding (Form ENV-FAT-0002) as part of the returnable acknowledging understanding thereof and the budget provision for the implementation of environmental management requirements.

1

The tenderer must provide a list of projects where environmental management has been required on contracts executed by his/her company including brief description of environmental management requirements and client reference contact details.

1

Submit the following documents as a minimum with your tender




T2.2-08: Health and Safety Plan

1. Valid letter of good standing with insurance

body 1

15

2. Project specific Health and Safety Plan in

line with Project Specification. 2

3. Company Health and Safety Policy is signed

and dated 2

4. Roles and responsibilities of legal

appointees, including but not limited to

Safety Officer.

2

5. Safety officer’s CV and proof registration

with SACPCMP 2

6. List of job categories for project and competencies required per category and develop a training Matrix for all employees who will be working on the project.

1

7. Overview of Risk Assessment process with project specific examples

2

8. One year synopsis of SHE incidents, description, type and action taken

1

9. Completed Safety Questionnaire (templates

attached) 1

10. Completed Health and Safety Cost Breakdown (template attached)

1

T2.2-09: Previous

Experience

15

20

The tenderer must demonstrate their relevant experience with regards to the delivery and Construction of similar works as detailed in the Works Information with reference to:

Civil works Building works

References to substantiate experience indicated showing:

Project description

5

Customer name and contact details

Contract value and year of completion

Evidence of project completion i.e. Completion Certificate

T2.2-10: Method Statement

The tenderer must sufficiently demonstrate the approach/methodology that he/she will employ to cover the scope of the project.

The method statement must respond to the scope of work (the Works Information) and outline the proposed methodology including that relating to the Programme, quality, health and safety and environmental considerations.

5

15

The method statement should articulate what value add the tenderer will provide in achieving

the stated objectives for the project.

2

The tenderer must as such explain his / her understanding of the objectives of the assignment and the Employer’s stated and implied requirements, highlight the issues of importance, and explain the technical approach they would adopt to address them. The method statement should also correlate with the tenderer’s quality plan outlining the processes, procedures and associated resources, applied by

3




whom and when, to meet the requirements and indicate how risks will be managed and what contribution can be made regarding value management.

Method of construction and commissioning Process: Tender should narratively demonstrate the approach to site establish, pre-construction activities and meetings, interfaces with other discipline including the client, construction logistics, commissioning procedures and handover.

5

Maximum possible score for quality (WQ) 100 100

Functionality shall be scored independently by not less than 3 (three) evaluators and averaged

in accordance with the following schedules:

T2.2-04 Programme

T2.2-05 Project Organogram, Management & CVs of Key Persons

T2.2-06 Quality Management

T2.2-07 Environmental Management

T2.2-08 Health and Safety Requirements

T2.2-09 Previous Experience

T2.2-10 Method Statement

Each evaluation criteria will be assessed in terms of scores of 0, 20, 40, 60, 80 or 100. The

scores of each of the evaluators will be averaged, weighted and then totalled to obtain the

final score for functionality, unless scored collectively. (See CIDB Inform Practice Note #9).

Note: Any tender not complying with the above mentioned requirements, will be

regarded as non-responsive and will therefore not be considered for further

evaluation. This note must be read in conjunction with Clause C.2.1.




C.3.11. Only tenders that achieve the minimum qualifying score for functionality will be evaluated

further in accordance with the 80/20 preference points systems as described in Preferential

Procurement Regulations 6.

80 where the financial value of one or more responsive tenders received have a value equal to

or below R50 million, inclusive of all applicable taxes.

Up to 100 minus W1 tender evaluation points will be awarded to tenderers who complete the

preferencing schedule and who are found to be eligible for the preference claimed. Should

the BBBEE rating not be provided, tenderers with no verification will score zero

points for preferencing.

Note: Transnet reserves the right to carry out an independent audit of the tenderers scorecard

components at any stage from the date of close of the tenders until completion of the contract.

C.3.13 Tender offers will only be accepted if:

1. The tenderer or any of its directors/shareholders is not listed on the Register of

Tender Defaulters in terms of the Prevention and Combating of Corrupt Activities Act

of 2004 as a person prohibited from doing business with the public sector;

2. the tenderer does not appear on Transnet’s list for restricted tenderers and National

Treasury’s list of Tender Defaulters;

3. the tenderer has fully and properly completed the Compulsory Enterprise

Questionnaire and there are no conflicts of interest which may impact on the

tenderer’s ability to perform the contract in the best interests of the Employer or

potentially compromise the tender process and persons in the employ of the state.

4. Transnet reserves the right to award the tender to the tenderer who scores the highest

number of points overall, unless there are objective criteria which will justify the award

of the tender to another tenderer. Objective criteria include but are not limited to the

outcome of a due diligence exercise to be conducted. The due diligence exercise may

take the following factors into account inter alia;

the tenderer:

a) is not under restrictions, or has principals who are under restrictions, preventing

participating in the employer’s procurement,

b) can, as necessary and in relation to the proposed contract, demonstrate that he or

she possesses the professional and technical qualifications, professional and technical

competence, financial resources, equipment and other physical facilities, managerial

capability, reliability, experience and reputation, expertise and the personnel, to perform

the contract,

c) has the legal capacity to enter into the contract,

d) is not insolvent, in receivership, under Business Rescue as provided for in chapter 6

of the Companies Act, 2008, bankrupt or being wound up, has his affairs administered




by a court or a judicial officer, has suspended his business activities, or is subject to

legal proceedings in respect of any of the foregoing,

e) complies with the legal requirements, if any, stated in the tender data and

f) is able, in the option of the employer to perform the contract free of conflicts of

interest.

C.3.17 The number of paper copies of the signed contract to be provided by the Employer is 1 (one).


CONTRACT NUMBER: 4228277.001C DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS

BAY _____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Part T2: Returnable Documents 2018 – Rev01 Page 1 of 1 T2.2: Returnable Schedules

T2.1 List of Returnable Documents

1.1 These schedules are required for pre-qualification and eligibility purposes:

T2.2-01 Eligibility Criteria Schedule - Certificate of attendance at Compulsory Tender Clarification Meeting

T2.2-02 Eligibility Criteria Schedule - Declaration Certificate of Local Production and Content (SBD 6.2)

T2.2-03 Eligibility Criteria Schedule – Sub-Contract

1.2 These schedules will be utilised for evaluation purposes:

T2.2-04 Evaluation Schedule: Programme

T2.2-05 Evaluation Schedule: Project Organogram, Management & CV’s

T2.2-06 Evaluation Schedule: Quality Plan

T2.2-07 Evaluation Schedule: Environmental Management

T2.2-08 Evaluation Schedule: Health and Safety Management

T2.2-09 Evaluation Schedule: Previous experience

T2.2-10 Evaluation Schedule: Method Statement

1.3 Returnable Schedules:

T2.2-11 Authority to submit tender

T2.2-12 Compulsory Enterprise Questionnaire

T2.2-13 Supplier Integrity Pact

T2.2-14 Non-Disclosure Agreement

T2.2-15 RFP Declaration Form

T2.2-16 RFP – Breach of Law

T2.2-17 Record of addenda to tender documents

T2.2-18 Transnet Vendor Registration Form

T2.2-19 BBBEE Socio-Economic Obligations and Plan

T2.2-20 Certificate of Acquaintance with Tender Document

T2.2-21 Risk Elements

T2.2-22 Schedule of Proposed Subcontractors

T2.2-23 Supplier Development Declaration

T2.2-24 Transnet Supplier Development

T2.2-25 Insurance provided by the Contractor

2.2 C1.1 Offer portion of Form of Offer & Acceptance

2.3 C1.2 Contract Data

2.5 C2.1 Pricing Instructions (Bill of Quantities)

2.6 C2.2 Bill of Quantities




2018 Rev01 T2.2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 1 T2.2-01: Eligibility Criteria Schedule:

Certificate of Attendance at Tender Clarification Meeting

T2.2-01: Eligibility Criteria Schedule: Certificate of Attendance at Tender

Clarification Meeting

This is to certify that

(Company Name)

Represented

By:

(Name and

Surname)

Was represented at the compulsory tender clarification meeting

Held at: 01 Commodores Close, Old Naval Base, Richards Bay, 3900

On (date) 31 January 2020 Starting time: 09h00

Particulars of person(s) attending the meeting:

Name Fhulufhedzani Kone Signature

Capacity Procurement Officer

Attendance of the above company at the meeting was confirmed by the TGC Procurement:

Name Fhulufhedzani Kone Signature

For and on Behalf of the

Employers Agent. Date

31 January 2020



2018 Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules 1 of 5 T2.2-02: Eligibility Criteria Schedule:

Declaration Certificate for Local Production and Content for Designated Sectors

SBD 6.2

T2.2-02 Eligibility Criteria Schedule: Declaration Certificate for Local Production and Content for Designated Sectors

This Standard Bidding Document (SBD) must form part of all bids invited. It contains general information

and serves as a declaration form for local content (local production and local content are used interchangeably).

Before completing this declaration, bidders must study the General Conditions, Definitions, Directives

applicable in respect of Local Content as prescribed in the Preferential Procurement Regulations, 2017,

the South African Bureau of Standards (SABS) approved technical specification number SATS 1286:2011 (Edition 1) and the Guidance on the Calculation of Local Content together with the Local Content

Declaration Templates [Annex C (Local Content Declaration: Summary Schedule), D (Imported Content Declaration: Supporting Schedule to Annex C) and E (Local Content Declaration: Supporting Schedule to

Annex C)].

1. General Conditions

1.1. Preferential Procurement Regulations, 2017 (Regulation 8) makes provision for the promotion of

local production and content.

1.2. Regulation 8.(2) prescribes that in the case of designated sectors, where in the award of bids local

production and content is of critical importance, such bids must be advertised with the specific bidding condition that only locally produced goods, services or works or locally manufactured

goods, with a stipulated minimum threshold for local production and content will be considered.

1.3. Where necessary, for bids referred to in paragraph 1.2 above, a two stage bidding process may be

followed, where the first stage involves a minimum threshold for local production and content and the second stage price and B-BBEE.

1.4. A person awarded a contract in relation to a designated sector, may not sub-contract in such a

manner that the local production and content of the overall value of the contract is reduced to

below the stipulated minimum threshold.

1.5. The local content (LC) expressed as a percentage of the bid price must be calculated in accordance with the SABS approved technical specification number SATS 1286: 2011 as follows:

LC = [1 - x / y] * 100

Where x is the imported content in Rand

y is the bid price in Rand excluding value added tax (VAT)

Prices referred to in the determination of x must be converted to Rand (ZAR) by using the

exchange rate published by South African Reserve Bank (SARB) at 12:00 on the date of advertisement of the bid as indicated in paragraph 4.1 below.

The SABS approved technical specification number SATS 1286:2011 is accessible on

http:/www.thedti.gov.za/industrial development/ip.jsp at no cost.

1.6. A bid may be disqualified if this Declaration Certificate and the Annex C (Local Content Declaration:

Summary Schedule) are not submitted as part of the bid documentation;





2. Definitions

2.1. “bid” includes written price quotations, advertised competitive bids or proposals;

2.2. “bid price” price offered by the bidder, excluding value added tax (VAT);

2.3. “contract” means the agreement that results from the acceptance of a bid by an organ of state;

2.4. “designated sector” means a sector, sub-sector or industry that has been designated by the

Department of Trade and Industry in line with national development and industrial policies for local production, where only locally produced services, works or goods or locally manufactured goods

meet the stipulated minimum threshold for local production and content;

2.5. “duly sign” means a Declaration Certificate for Local Content that has been signed by the Chief

Financial Officer or other legally responsible person nominated in writing by the Chief Executive, or senior member / person with management responsibility(close corporation, partnership or

individual).

2.6. “imported content” means that portion of the bid price represented by the cost of components,

parts or materials which have been or are still to be imported (whether by the supplier or its subcontractors) and which costs are inclusive of the costs abroad (this includes labour or

intellectual property costs), plus freight and other direct importation costs, such as landing costs, dock duties, import duty, sales duty or other similar tax or duty at the South African port of entry;

2.7. “local content” means that portion of the bid price which is not included in the imported content,

provided that local manufacture does take place;

2.8. “stipulated minimum threshold” means that portion of local production and content as

determined by the Department of Trade and Industry; and

2.9. “sub-contract” means the primary contractor’s assigning, leasing, making out work to, or

employing another person to support such primary contractor in the execution of part of a project in terms of the contract.

3. The stipulated minimum threshold(s) for local production and content (refer to Annex A

of SATS 1286:2011) for this bid is/are as follows:

Description of services, works or goods Stipulated minimum threshold

Electrical and Telecom Cables 90%

Valves Products and Actuators 70% Steel Products and Components for Construction 100%

Valves Products and Actuators 70%

4. Does any portion of the services, works or goods offered have any imported content? (Tick applicable box)

YES NO





4.1 If yes, the rate(s) of exchange to be used in this bid to calculate the local content as prescribed

in paragraph 1.5 of the general conditions must be the rate(s) published by SARB for the specific

currency at 12:00 on the date of advertisement of the bid.

The relevant rates of exchange information is accessible on www.reservebank.co.za

Indicate the rate(s) of exchange against the appropriate currency in the table below (refer to

Annex A of SATS 1286:2011):

Currency Rates of exchange

US Dollar

Pound Sterling

Euro

Yen

Other

NB: Bidders must submit proof of the SARB rate (s) of exchange used.

5. Where, after the award of a bid, challenges are experienced in meeting the stipulated minimum

threshold for local content the dti must be informed accordingly in order for the dti to verify and in consultation with the AO/AA provide directives in this regard.

http://www.reservebank.co.za/





LOCAL CONTENT DECLARATION

(REFER TO ANNEX B OF SATS 1286:2011)

LOCAL CONTENT DECLARATION BY CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER OR OTHER LEGALLY RESPONSIBLE PERSON NOMINATED IN WRITING BY THE CHIEF EXECUTIVE OR SENIOR MEMBER/PERSON WITH MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY (CLOSE CORPORATION, PARTNERSHIP OR INDIVIDUAL)

IN RESPECT OF BID NO. ISSUED BY: TRANSNET GROUP CAPITAL ON BEHALF OF TRANSNET SOC LTD NB

1 The obligation to complete, duly sign and submit this declaration cannot be transferred to an

external authorized representative, auditor or any other third party acting on behalf of the bidder.

2 Guidance on the Calculation of Local Content together with Local Content Declaration Templates (Annex C, D and E) is accessible on http://www.thdti.gov.za/industrial development/ip.jsp. Bidders should first complete Declaration D. After completing Declaration D, bidders should complete Declaration E and then consolidate the information on Declaration C. Declaration C should be submitted with the bid documentation at the closing date and time of the bid in order to substantiate the declaration made in paragraph (c) below. Declarations D and E should be kept by the bidders for verification purposes for a period of at least 5 years. The successful bidder is required to continuously update Declarations C, D and E with the actual values for the duration of the contract.

I, the undersigned, …………………………….................................................... (full names), do hereby declare, in my capacity as ……………………………………………..of............................................................................(name of bidder entity), the following:

(a) The facts contained herein are within my own personal knowledge.

(b) I have satisfied myself that:

(i) the goods/services/works to be delivered in terms of the above-specified bid comply with the minimum local content requirements as specified in the bid, and as measured in terms of SATS 1286:2011; and

(c) The local content percentage (%) indicated below has been calculated using the formula given in

clause 3 of SATS 1286:2011, the rates of exchange indicated in paragraph 4.1 above and the

information contained in Declaration D and E which has been consolidated in Declaration C:

Total Price of Designated Commodity (Electrical & Telecom Cables) , excluding VAT (y)

R

Imported content (x), as calculated in terms of SATS 1286:2011 R

Stipulated minimum threshold for local content (paragraph 3 above)

90%

Local content %, as calculated in terms of SATS 1286:2011

http://www.thdti.gov.za/industrial%20development/ip.jsp





Total Price of Designated Commodity (Valves Products and Actuators) , excluding VAT (y)

R



70%


Total Price of Designated Commodity (Steel Products and Components for Construction) , excluding VAT (y)

R



100%


Total Price of Designated Commodity (Pumps, MV Motor and Associated Accessories) , excluding VAT (y)

R



70%


If the bid is for more than one product, the local content percentages for each product contained in Declaration C shall be used instead of the table above. The local content percentages for each product has been calculated using the formula given in clause 3 of SATS 1286:2011, the rates of exchange indicated in paragraph 4.1 above and the information contained in Declaration D and E.

(d) I accept that the Procurement Authority / Institution has the right to request that the local content

be verified in terms of the requirements of SATS 1286:2011.

(e) I understand that the awarding of the bid is dependent on the accuracy of the information

furnished in this application. I also understand that the submission of incorrect data, or data that are not verifiable as described in SATS 1286:2011, may result in the Procurement Authority /

Institution imposing any or all of the remedies as provided for in Regulation 13 of the Preferential

Procurement Regulations, 2017 promulgated under the Preferential Policy Framework Act (PPPFA),

2000 (Act No. 5 of 2000).

SIGNATURE: DATE: ___________ WITNESS No. 1 DATE: ___________ WITNESS No. 2 DATE: ___________


DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF

RICHARDS BAY


Sub-contracting

T2.2-03 Eligibility Criteria Schedule: Sub-Contracting:

In an endeavour to grow and develop Black Owned (BO) companies as well as to ensure that Transnet

meets its Shareholder Compact Objectives, Potential Tenderers are required to meet the eligibility

criteria of Sub-contracting.

Transnet requires tenderers to commit to:

Sub-contract of 30% to an EME or QSE which is at least 51% owned by black people.

Tenderer to note that any deviations from this list of proposed sub-contractors will be subject to

acceptance by the Project Manager in terms of the Conditions of Contract.

Provide information of the Sub-contractors below:

Name of proposed Subcontractor

Address and Region

Nature and extent of work

B-BBEEE

Certificates or Sworn Affidavit attached behind this schedule?

Yes/No

Amount of work subcontracted in Rands (excl. 15% Vat)

Percentage (%) of the sub-contracted amount in terms of the tendered total of the prices.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.



RICHARDS BAY


Sub-contracting

Comments:

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________

SIGNED at ___________________________ on this _____ day of _______________20___

___________________________

SIGNATURE OF TENDERER

TRANSNET GROUP CAPITAL TENDER NUMBER: 4228277.001C

DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY

2018 Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules

Page 1 of 4 T2.2-04: Evaluation Schedule: Programme

T2.2-04: Evaluation Schedule: Programme

Note to tenderers:

The Tenderer provides a hard copy proposed programme and/or makes reference to his proposed

programme and attaches it to this schedule along with draft progress tracking sheets and an electronic

native version of the programme developed using a scheduling software tool.

The tenderer shall provide the proposed programme detailed to minimum of level 3 showing as a

minimum the following:-

Ability to provide the services:

Ability to provide the services in terms of the Employer’s requirements within the required timeframe

indicating, in a logical sequence, the order and timing of the services that will take place in order to

Provide the Works clearly indicating the capacity & capability to achieve the dates stated in the

Contract Data.

Provision of Dates:

The Contractor clearly indicates in the schedule all milestones, activities & information related to

the following –

Float,

Time Risk Allowances,

Health and safety requirements,

Procedures set out in this contract,

Work by the Employer and Others,

Access to a part of the site if later than its access date,

Acceptances,

Plant & Materials and other things to be provided by the employer,

Information by Others,

Starting date, access dates, Key Dates and Completion Date

Planned Completion for each Key Date for each option and the complete works

Resourcing & Equipment:

The Contractor indicates for each operation, a statement of how the Contractor plans to do the work

identifying the principal Equipment and other resources which he plans to use. Resources &

equipment are loaded against activities with their associated rates.

Progress Measurement & Tracking Sheets:

The Contractor provides draft progress tracking sheets indicating how he plans to monitor and track

the works at assembly member & commodity level. Sheets to have work steps and weight factors

which roll up to a summary report.





The Programme should indicate the following columns as a minimum:

Activity

Number

Activity description Start date Finish date Successor Time risk

allowances

(TRA)

The scoring of the programme will be as follows:

Programme (15)

Ability to Provide the

Services

(8)

Provision of Dates

(2)

Resourcing &

Equipment

(3)

Progress Measurement

& Tracking Sheets

(2)

Score 0

The tenderer has submitted no information or inadequate information to determine a score.




Score

20

The programme is not acceptable as it will not satisfy project objectives or requirements.

The programme does not meet all the required timeframes.

The programme does not follow a logical sequence or has critical logic errors.

Critical components of the scope is excluded and not to the level required in the scope.

The tenderer has misunderstood the scope of work and does not deal with the critical aspects of the project.

The tenderer has

addressed some but not all date requirements and submission is missing critical activities and dates which renders it unrealistic / unachievable.

The tenderer has addressed some

but not all resource requirements and submission is missing critical resources & equipment which renders it unrealistic / unachievable.

The submission is

generic. The tenderer has addressed some of the works on the tracking sheets but lacks sufficient work steps to track the assembly members and/or commodities from start to finish.

Score 40

The programme is generic, not practical and realistic, therefore is unlikely to satisfy project objectives or Employer’s requirements.

The tenderer has addressed some but not all date requirements and submission is missing some activities and dates which renders it at risk of being

The tenderer has

addressed some but not all resource requirements and submission is missing some resources & equipment which renders it at risk of being

The submission is project specific. The tenderer has addressed some of the works on the tracking sheets but lacks sufficient work steps to track the assembly members





The programme does not meet all the required timeframes.

The programme is missing some logic but is does not influence the tendered timeframe.

Some components of the scope is excluded and not to the level required in the scope.

The tenderer has misunderstood certain aspects of the scope of services and does not deal with the critical aspects of the project.

unrealistic / unachievable.

unrealistic / unachievable.

and/or commodities from start to finish.

Score 60

The programme addresses certain specific project objectives but does not adequately deal with the critical characteristics of the project.

The programme meets all the required timeframes.

The programme is not missing logic but has minor errors or omissions in critical path/s.

The complete scope is captured and decomposed in the programme to the level required in the scope

The tenderer has addressed most date requirements

correctly and submission contains logic and sequencing which is accurate, and renders the submission realistic and achievable.

The tenderer has addressed most resource requirements

correctly and submission contains resources & equipment which is accurate, and renders the submission realistic and achievable.

The submission is project specific. The tenderer has addressed the works on the tracking sheets but lacks some work steps to track the assembly members and/or commodities from start to finish.

Score

80

The programme addresses specific project objectives.

The programme meets all the required timeframes.

The programme is not missing any logic

The tenderer has addressed all date requirements

correctly and submission contains logic and sequencing which is accurate, and renders the submission realistic and achievable.

The tenderer has addressed all resource

requirements correctly and submission contains resources & equipment which is accurate, and renders the submission

The submission is project specific. The tenderer has addressed the works on the tracking sheets and lacks no work steps to track the assembly members and/or commodities from start to finish





Reference to attached submissions to this schedule:

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

The undersigned, who warrants that he I she is duly authorised to do so on behalf of the Tenderer,

confirms that the contents and referenced submissions of this schedule are within my personal knowledge and are to the best of my belief both true and correct.

The complete scope is captured and decomposed in the programme to the level required in the scope

realistic and achievable.

Score 100

Besides meeting the above “80” rating, the important issues are approached in an innovative and efficient way.

Besides meeting the “80” rating, the tenderer has exceeded the required expectations.



Signed Date

Name

Position

Tenderer


TENDER NUMBER: 4228277.001C


2018 Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules 1 of 2 T2.2-05: Evaluation Schedule:

Management & CV’s of Key Persons

T2.2-05: Evaluation Schedule: Management & CV’s of Key Persons

The tender must be able to demonstrate that the project personnel have sufficient knowledge,

experience and qualifications to provide the required service.

Submit the following documents as a minimum with your tender document:

1. Organizational structure to include a clear indication of roles and responsibilities and specific

function of each team member;

2. The experience of assigned key persons in relation to the scope of work will be evaluated from

two different points of view, namely:

a. Relevant experience.

b. The education, training and skills. (Proof of education and training must be attached.

Copies of all qualifications must be certified by a Commissioner of Oaths)

c. Key personnel should include at least, amongst others but not limited to:

Project Manager

Construction Manager

Civil Design Engineer

Construction/site supervisors

No. Key Persons Name and Surname CV attached (Yes/No)

1 Project Manager

2 Construction Manager

3 Civil Design Engineer

4 Construction/Site Supervisor

Note: CV’s and profiles should show experience, background and track record in similar types of projects

Attached submissions to this schedule:

…………………………………………………………………....................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................

…………………………………………………………………....................................................................................




2018 Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules 2 of 2 T2.2-05: Evaluation Schedule:

Management & CV’s of Key Persons

The table below will be used as guidelines for scoring / evaluating the management and CV’s of key persons submitted by the Tenderer:

Score 0 Failed to provide information or inadequate information provided to determine a score.

Score 20

Key staff does not have suitable levels of relevant experience and qualifications or

equivalent specialized training. Inadequate organisation chart,

Incomplete list of Key staff and management structure. No details of the location

and functions of offices where the work will be managed.

Score 40

Key staff has limited recommended levels of relevant experience and qualifications (from 1 but less than 3 years’ experience). Organisation chart show incomplete list

of Key staff and management structure. Details of the location where the work will be managed are defined but functions of offices are not defined.

Score 60

Key staff has acceptable levels of relevant experience (from 3 up to 5 years’

experience). Organisation chart showing onsite and off-site management but not all Key staff have reasonable experience of issues pertinent to the project. Details

of the location where the work will be managed are defined but functions of offices are not clearly defined

Score 80

All Key staff have acceptable levels of relevant experience. Organisation chart

showing onsite and off-site management and Key staff have adequate experience of issues pertinent to the project (more than 5 but up to to 8 years’ experience).

Details of the location and functions of offices from which the works will be

managed are clearly defined.

Score 100

All Key staff have highly acceptable levels of relevant experience (more than 8

years’ experience). Organisation chart showing onsite and off-site management

and Key staff have reasonable experience of issues pertinent to the project. Details of the location and functions of offices from which the works will be

managed are clearly defined. All relevant and required professional registration/certification are provided.

The undersigned, who warrants that he / she is duly authorised to do so on behalf of the enterprise,

confirms that the contents of this schedule are within my personal knowledge and are to the best of my

belief both true and correct.

Signed Date

Name Position

Tenderer




Page 1 of 3 T2.2-06: Evaluation Schedule: Quality

T2.2-06: Evaluation Schedule: Quality Management

Due consideration must be given to the deliverables required to execute and complete the contract as

per the Quality Management Standard, QAL-STD-0001 General Quality Requirements for Contractors

and Suppliers as stated above and should include but not be limited to:

1. Project Specific Quality Plan for the contract

2. Valid ISO 9001:2015 certification

3. Index / list of procedures and method statements to be used during the contract.

4. Project specific Quality Control Plan (QCP’s)

5. Qualifications and experience of Quality Manager and officers

6. A signed Quality Policy based on International Organisation for Standardisation (ISO

9001:2015) that displays the five key policy requirements.

Note:

The policy must include or cover the following requirements:

a. Is appropriate to the purpose of the organisation,

b. Includes a commitment to comply with requirements and continually improve the

effectiveness of the quality management system,

c. Provides a framework for establishing and reviewing quality objectives,

d. Is communicated and understood within the organisation, and

e. Is reviewed for continuing suitability.


TENDER NUMBER: 4228277.001C DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY



The scoring will be as follows

Project Specific Quality Plan for the

contract

Valid ISO 9001:2015

certificate

The contractor

Quality policy

Project specific Quality Control

Plan

Index / List of procedures / method

statements to be used

Qualifications and experience of

Quality Manager

and officers

Score

(0)

No PQP submitted. No ISO 9001:2015

certificate No Signed

Quality policy

No QCPs submitted No list of procedures

and method statement submitted

No CV submitted

Score

(20)

PQP is too general

with not project

specifics

N/A

1 of the 5 key policy

requirements are

recognised and meet the Employer’s

requirements.

QCPs are not

project specific

Index / list of

procedures and method

statement is not project specific

Key staff does not have

suitable levels of

relevant experience and qualifications or

equivalent specialized training

Score

(40)

PQP is project specific

but inadequate to

cover project scope

N/A


requirements are recognised and meet

the Employer’s

requirements.

QPCs are project

specific but inadequate to cover

project scope

Index / list of

procedures and method statements is project

specific but inadequate to cover the project

scope

Key staff has limited

recommended levels of relevant experience

and qualifications (from 1 but less than 3

years’ experience)

Score

(60)

PQP shows adequate understanding of

project quality

requirements

N/A 3 of the 5 key policy requirements are

recognised and meet

the Employer’s requirements.

QCP's shows adequate

understanding of

project quality

requirements

Index / list of procedures and method

statements shows

adequate understanding of project quality

requirements

Key staff has acceptable levels of

relevant experience

(from 3 but less than 5 years’ experience)


TENDER NUMBER: 4228277.001C DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY



Project Specific

Quality Plan for the

contract

Valid ISO

9001:2015

certificate

The contractor

Quality policy

Project specific

Quality Control

Plan

Index / List of

procedures / method statements to be used

Qualifications and

experience of Quality Manager

and officers

Score

(80)

PQP shows above

average understanding

of the project quality

requirements

N/A 4 of the 5 key policy

requirements are

recognised and meet the Employer’s

requirements.

QPC's shows above

average

understanding of the project quality

requirements

Index / list of

procedures and method

statements shows above average understanding

of the project quality requirements

Key staff have

adequate experience of

issues pertinent to the project (from 5 but less

than 8 years’ experience)

Score

(100)

PQP covers all and

above the project quality requirements of

the project scope

ISO 9001:2015

certificate is valid


requirements are recognised and meet

the Employer’s

requirements

QCP's covers all

and above the project quality

requirements of the

project scope

Index / list of

procedures and method statements covers all

and above the project

quality requirements

Key staff have

adequate experience of issues pertinent to the

project (from 8 or more

years’ experience).


......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Signed Date

Name Position

Tenderer


DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY _____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Part T2: Returnable Schedules

2018 Rev01 Page 1 of 2 T2.2-07: Evaluation Schedule: Environmental Management

T2.2-07: Evaluation Schedule: Environmental Management

The Tenderer must review the following documents for context to meet the environmental

requirements, namely:

a) Transnet SOC Limited – Environmental Risk Management Policy

b) Project Environmental Specification (PES) which comprises of the following as a minimum:

- Standard Operating Procedure for Construction Environmental Management

- Minimum Standards for Construction Environmental Management

Where applicable, the following may also apply:

- Environmental Approvals (e.g. Environmental Authorisation, General Authorisation)

- Environmental Management Programme (EMPr) as approved by the Competent Authority

- Any other operational/maintenance environmental plans or specifications

c) The tenderer must provide evidence of how their Environmental Management System (EMS)

will ensure conformance to the abovementioned requirements.

d) The tenderer must provide an environmental policy signed by Top Management which, as a

minimum:

- Is appropriate given the purpose and context of the tenderer’s business;

- Includes a commitment to fulfil the tenderer’s environmental compliance (legal)

obligations;

- Includes a commitment to the protection of the environment, including prevention of

pollution;

- Provides framework for setting environmental objectives; and

- Includes a commitment to continual improvement of their EMS;

e) The tenderer must provide an Organisational Chart depicting key environmental staff and the

chart must be accompanied by CV’s showing staff competencies, experience and qualifications

relevant to project environmental management functions.

f) The tenderer must provide a list of projects where environmental duties of a similar nature

have been executed including a brief description of such duties together with client reference

contact details.

By signing this Tender Schedule, the tenderer confirms that they will comply with the above

requirements and in particular Transnet policy statements and environmental specifications.


DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY _____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Part T2: Returnable Schedules

2018 Rev01 Page 2 of 2 T2.2-07: Evaluation Schedule: Environmental Management

The scoring of the Tenderer’s Environmental Management submission will be as follows: *

Score 0 The tenderer has submitted no information.

Score 20 Environmental staff generally have less than 1 year relevant experience; Policy only

responds to 1 -2 of the items listed under 2 above; Tenderer has only completed 1 project of similar nature; EMS indicates Tenderer has a poor understanding of the Scope.

Score 40 Environmental staff generally have 1 to 5 years’ relevant experience; Policy only responds

to 3 - 4 items listed under 2 above; Tenderer has only completed 2 projects of similar nature; EMS indicates Tenderer has a less than acceptable understanding of the Scope.

Score 60 Environmental staff generally have more than 5 but up to 8 years’ relevant experience; Policy responds to all items listed under 2 above; Tenderer has only completed 3 projects

of similar nature; EMS indicates Tenderer has an acceptable understanding of the Scope.

Score 80 Environmental staff generally have more than 8 but up to 10 years’ relevant experience; Policy responds to all items listed under 2 above and includes additional commitments to

environmental performance; Tenderer has only completed 4 projects of similar nature;

EMS indicates Tenderer has a more than acceptable understanding of the Scope.

Score 100

Environmental staff generally have more than 10 years’ relevant experience; Policy

responds to all items listed under 2 above, includes additional commitments to

environmental performance and has been certified according to international best practice standards; Tenderer has only completed 5 or more projects of similar nature; EMS

indicates Tenderer has an excellent understanding of the Scope.


.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

Signed Date

Name Position

Tenderer




2018 Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 11 T2.2-08: Evaluation Schedule:

Health and Safety Plan

T2.2-08: Evaluation Schedule - Health and Safety Requirements

Submit the following documents as a minimum with your tender:

1. Valid letter of good standing

2. The Tenderers must provide their own project specific Health and Safety Plan addressing the

requirements of TGC health and safety specifications.

3. Safety, Health & Environmental Company Policy signed by the Accounting Officer, must include or

cover the following five elements - 1. Commitment to Safety, prevention of pollution,

2. Continual improvement, 3. Compliance to legal requirements, appropriate to the nature of contractor’s activities,

4. Hold management accountable for development of the safety systems, 5. Include objectives and targets.

4. Table or outline the Roles & Responsibilities, such as S16.2 CEO, Construction manager, Assistant Construction manager, Health & Safety Manager, Health and Safety officer, Construction

Supervisor, Construction assistant supervisor, Risk Assessor, SHE Reps, etc. as per the

Occupational health and safety Act 85 of 1993.

5. Safety officer’s CV, certificates and proof of registration with SACPCMP.

6. List of job categories for project and competencies required per category and develop a training Matrix for all employees who will be working on the project. This matrix must include Management

and highlight training planned dates.

7. Overview of Risk Assessment Methodology and examples, highlighting major activities of the

project.

8. One year synopsis of SHE incidents, description, type and action taken to prevent re-occurrence.

9. Completed Health and Safety cost breakdown sheet.

10. Complete and return with tender documentation the Contractor Safety Questionnaire with

supporting documentation included as an Annexure.


.......................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................






The scoring of the Tenderer’s Health and safety requirements will be as follows:

Valid

letter of

good

standing

The

Tenderers

must

provide

their own

project

specific

Health and

Safety Plan

Signed Policy

covering the

following five

elements

1. Commitment

to Safety, prevention of

pollution, 2. Continual

improvement,

3. Compliance to legal

requirements, appropriate to

the nature of

contractor’s activities,

4. Hold management

accountable for

development

of the safety systems,

5. Include objectives

and targets.

Roles &

Responsibilitie

s, such as

S16.1 CEO,

S16.2

Assistant CEO,

8.1

Construction

manager, 8.2

Assistant

Construction

manager, 8.5

Construction

Supervisor,

8.8

Construction

assistant

supervisor,

9.1 Risk

Assessor, etc.

as per the

Occupational

health and

safety Act 85

of 1993

Safety

officer’s CV,

certificates

and proof

of

registration

with

SACPCMP.

List of job

categories for

project and

competencies

required per

category and

develop a

training

Matrix for all

employees

who will be

working on

the project.

This matrix

must include

Management

and highlight

training

planned dates.

Overview of

the tenderer’s

Risk

Assessment methodology

, and submission

of risk assessments

indicating

major activities of

the project namely, but

not limited

to: Clearing and

grubbing; Construction

and

compaction of all layer

works; Construction

of electrical manholes;

Construction

of culverts; Construction

of high light pole bases.

One year

synopsis of

SHE

incidents,

description,

type and

action

taken to

prevent re-

occurrence.

Completed

Health and

Safety cost

breakdown

sheet.

Complete

and

return

with

tender

document

ation the

Contracto

r Safety

Questionn

aire with

required

supportin

g

document

ation

included

as an

Annexure.






Points 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1

Score

0

No infor. /

Invalid

Certificate

provided

The Tenderer has submitted no information or inadequate information to determine a score.

Score

20

N/A Information

supplied is

totally

insignificant/i

nadequate to

achieve the

required

standard of

service.

1 of the 5 key

policy components

are recognized and

meet the

Employer’s

requirement.

Roles and

responsibilities

do not meet the

Occupational

health and

safety Act as per

construction

regulations and

TGC health and

safety

specification.

Safety officer

does not

have relevant

qualifications

or not

registered

with

SACPCMP.

Key responsible

persons are not

included on

training matrix

as per proposed

organogram

structure.

Information

supplied is

totally

insignificant/in

adequate to

achieve the

required

standard of

service.

Information

supplied is

totally

insignificant/i

nadequate to

achieve the

required

standard of

service.

Information

supplied is

totally

insignificant/i

nadequate to

achieve the

required

standard of

service.

Information

supplied is

totally

insignificant

/inadequate

to achieve

the

required

standard of

service.

Score

40

N/a Poor

response/ans

wer/solution

lacks

convincing

evidence,

medium risk

that stated

employer’s

requirements

will not be

met.

2 of the 5 key

policy components

are recognized and

meet the

Employer’s

requirement.

Roles and

responsibilities

are unlikely to

ensure

compliance as

per the Works

information and

not in line with

OHS Act and

TGC health and

safety

specification.

Safety officer

have below

average

qualifications

but are

registered

with

SACPCMP.

Not all key

responsible

persons are

included in the

training matrix.

Trainings matrix

submitted does

not cover all

SHE training

listed on Health

and Safety

specification.

Training matrix

not signed by

Poor

response/answ

er/solution

lacks

convincing

evidence,

medium risk

that stated

employer’s

requirements

will not be

met.

Poor

response/ans

wer/solution

lacks

convincing

evidence,

medium risk

that stated

Employer’s

requirements

will not be

met.

Poor

response/ans

wer/solution

lacks

convincing

evidence,

medium risk

that stated

Employer’s

requirements

will not be

met.

Poor

response/a

nswer/solut

ion lacks

convincing

evidence,

medium

risk that

stated

Employer’s

requiremen

ts will not

be met.






responsible

personnel.

Score

60

N/a Satisfactory

response/ans

wer/solution

to the

particular

aspect of the

requirement,

evidence

given that

the stated

Employer’s

requirements

will be met.

3 of the 5 key

policy components

are recognized and

meet the

Employer’s

requirements.

Satisfactory

response on

roles and

responsibilities

as per

Employer’s

requirements.

Safety officer

have average

relevant

qualifications

(Diploma or

B-Tech) and

are

registered

with

SACPCMP

and have up

to 5 years of

relevant

experience.

Satisfactory

response on the

list of job

categories and

trainings as per

proposed

project

organogram

structure.

Training matrix

covers most of

the trainings

listed on TGC

Health and

safety

specification.

Satisfactory

response/answ

er/solution to

the particular

aspect of the

requirement,

evidence given

that the stated

Employer’s

requirements

will be met.

Satisfactory

response/ans

wer/solution

to the

particular

aspect of the

requirement,

evidence

given that

the stated

Employer’s

requirements

will be met.

Satisfactory

response/ans

wer/solution

to the

particular

aspect of the

requirement,

evidence

given that

the stated

Employer’s

requirements

will be met.

Satisfactory

response/a

nswer/solut

ion to the

particular

aspect of

the

requiremen

t, evidence

given that

the stated

Employer’s

requiremen

ts will be

met.

Score

80

N/a Good

response/ans

wer/solution

which

demonstrates

real

understandin

g and

evidence of

ability to

meet stated

Employer’s

4 of the five key

policy components

are recognized and

meets the

Employer’s

requirements.

Roles and

responsibilities

are likely to

ensure

compliance as

per Works

Information,

OHS Act and

TGC health and

safety

specification.

Safety officer

have average

relevant

qualifications

(Diploma or

B-Tech) and

are

registered

with

SACPCMP

and have

more than 5

years of

Most of key

persons listed

on the training

matrix as per

proposed

project

organogram

structure.

Trainings

specified on the

matrix are in

line with TGC

health and

Good

response/answ

er/solution

which

demonstrates

real

understanding

and evidence

of ability to

meet stated

Employer’s

requirements.

Good

response/ans

wer/solution

which

demonstrates

real

understandin

g and

evidence of

ability to

meet stated

Employer’s

Good

response/ans

wer/solution

which

demonstrates

real

understandin

g and

evidence of

ability to

meet stated

Employer’s

Good

response/a

nswer/solut

ion which

demonstrat

es real

understandi

ng and

evidence of

ability to

meet stated

Employer’s






requirements

.

relevant

experience.

safety

specification.

requirements

.

requirements

.

requiremen

ts.

Score

100

Valid

certificate

provided.

Very good

response/ans

wer/solution

gives real

confidence

that the

tenderer is

most likely to

ensure

compliance

with stated

Employer’s

requirements

.

All 5 key policy

components are

recognized and

meets the

Employer’s

requirements

Roles and

Responsibilities

most likely to

ensure

compliance as

per

requirements of

OHS Act and

TGC Health and

Safety

Management

Specification and

CV and proof of

professional

registration with

SACPCMP

submitted.

Safety officer

have above

average

relevant

qualifications

(High degree

/ Honors /

Doctorate)

and are

registered

with

SACPCMP

and have

more than 5

years of

relevant

experience.

Training matrix

include

Management

and all

employees

/personnel in

the project.

Training matrix

had been signed

by responsible

personnel.

Very good

response/answ

er/solution

gives real

confidence

that the

tenderer is

most likely to

ensure

compliance

with stated

Employer’s

requirements.

Very good

response/ans

wer/solution

gives real

confidence

that the

tenderer is

most likely to

ensure

compliance

with stated

Employer’s

requirements

.

Very good

response/ans

wer/solution

gives real

confidence

that the

tenderer is

most likely to

ensure

compliance

with stated

Employer’s

requirements

.

Very good

response/a

nswer/solut

ion gives

real

confidence

that the

tenderer is

most likely

to ensure

compliance

with stated

Employer’s

requiremen

ts.






confirms that the contents of this schedule are within my personal knowledge and are to the best of

my belief both true and correct.

Signed Date

Name Position

Tenderer





Tender Health and Safety Cost Breakdown

Tenderer (Company) Responsible Person Designation Date

Project/Tender Title Project/Tender No. Project Location / Description

# Cost element Unit Cost

(R) # of Units

Total Cost (R)

1. Human Resources

2. Systems Documentation

3. Meetings & Administration

4. H&S Training

5. PPE & Safety Equipment

6. Signage & Barricading

7. Workplace Facilities

8. Emergency & Rescue Measures

9. Hygiene Surveys & Monitoring

10. Medical Surveillance

11. Safe Transport of Workers

12. HazMat Management (e.g. asbestos /silica)

13. Substance Abuse Testing

14. H&S Reward & Recognition

Total Health and Safety Cost (R)

Total Tender Value (R)





H&S Cost as % of Tender value %

Contractor Safety Questionnaire

1. Safe Work Performance

1A Injury Experience / Historical Performance – Alberta

Use the previous three years injury and illness records to complete the following:

Year

Number of medical treatment cases

Number of restricted work day cases

Number of lost time injury cases

Number of fatal injuries

Total recordable frequency

Lost time injury frequency

Number of worker manhours

1 Medical Treatment Case Any occupational injury or illness requiring treatment provided by a physician or treatment provided under the direction of a physician

2 Restricted Work Day Case Any occupational injury or illness that prevents a worker from performing any of his/her craft jurisdiction duties

3 Lost Time injury Cases Any occupational injury that prevents the worker from performing any work for at least one day

4 Total Recordable Frequency Total number of Medical Treatment, Restricted Work and Lost Time Injury cases multiplied by 200,000 then divided by total manhours

5 Lost Time Injury Frequency Total number of Lost Time Injury cases multiplied by 200,000 then divide by total manhours

1B Workers’ Compensation Experience

Use the previous three years injury and illness records to complete the following (if applicable):

Industry Code: Industry Classification:

Year

Industry Rate

Contractor Rate

% Discount or Surcharge

Is your Workers’ Compensation account in good standing?

(Please provide letter of confirmation)

Yes No

2. Citations

2A Has your company been cited, charged or prosecuted under Health, Safety and/or Environmental Legislation in the last 5 years?

If yes, provide details:

Yes No

2B Has your company been cited, charged or prosecuted under the above Legislation in another Country, Region or State?

Yes No





If yes, provide details:

3. Citations

Does your company have a Certificate of Recognition? Yes No

If yes, what is the Certificate No: Issue Date:

4. Safety Program

4A Do you have a written safety program manual?

If Yes, provide a copy for review

Yes No

4B Do you have a pocket safety booklet for field distribution?

If Yes, provide a copy for review

Yes No

4C Does your safety program contain the following elements:

Yes No Yes No

Corporate Safety Policy Equipment Maintenance

Incident Notification Policy Emergency Response

Recordkeeping & Statistics Hazard Assessment

Reference to Legislation Safe Work Practices

General Rules & Regulations

Safe Work Procedures

Progressive Discipline Policy

Workplace Inspections

Responsibilities Investigation Process

PPE Standards Training Policy & Program

Environmental Standards Communication Processes

Modified Work Program

5. Training Program

5A Do you have an orientation program for new hire employees?

If Yes, include a course outline. Does it include any of the following:

Yes No

Yes No Yes No

General Rules & Regulations Confined Space Entry

Emergency Reporting Trenching & Excavation

Injury Reporting Signs & Barricades

Legislation Dangerous Holes & Openings

Right to Refuse Work Rigging & Cranes

Personal Protective Equipment

Mobile Vehicles

Emergency Procedures Preventative Maintenance

Project Safety Committee Hand & Power Tools

Housekeeping Fire Prevention & Protection

Ladders & Scaffolds Electrical Safety

Fall Arrest Standards Compressed Gas Cylinders

Aerial Work Platforms Weather Extremes





5B Do you have a program for training newly hired or promoted supervisors?

If Yes, submit an outline for evaluation. Does it include instruction on the following:

Yes No

Yes No Yes No

Employer Responsibilities Safety Communication

Employee Responsibilities First Aid/Medical Procedures

Due Diligence New Worker Training

Safety Leadership Environmental Requirements

Work Refusals Hazard Assessment

Inspection Processes Pre-Job Safety Instruction

Emergency Procedures Drug & Alcohol Policy

Incident Investigation Progressive Disciplinary Policy

Safe Work Procedures Safe Work Practices

Safety Meetings Notification Requirements

6. Safety Activities

6A Do you conduct safety inspections? Yes No Weekly Monthly Quarterly

Describe your safety inspection process (include participation, documentation requirements, follow-up, report distribution)

Who follows up on inspection action items?

6B Do you hold site safety meetings for field employees? If Yes, how often?

Yes No Daily Weekly Biweekly

6C Do you hold site meetings where safety is addressed with management and field supervisors?

Yes No Weekly Biweekly Monthly

6D Is pre-job safety instruction provided before to each new task? Yes No

Is the process documented? Yes No

Who leads the discussion?

6E Do you have a hazard assessment process? Yes No

Are hazard assessments documented? Yes No

If yes, how are hazard assessments communicated and implemented on each project?

Who is responsible for leading the hazard assessment process?

6F Does your company have policies and procedures for environmental protection, spill clean-up, reporting, waste disposal, and recycling as part of the Health & Safety Program?

Yes No

6G How does your company measure its H&S success?

Attach separate sheet to explain

7. Safety Stewardship

7A Are incident reports and report summaries sent to the following and how often?

Yes No Monthly Quarterly Annually

Project/Site Manager





Vice President/Managing Director

Safety Director/Manager

President/Chief Executive Officer

7B How are incident records and summaries kept? How often are they reported internally?


Incidents totalled for the entire company

Incidents totaled by project

Subtotaled by superintendent

Subtotaled by foreman

7C How are the costs of individual incidents kept? How often are they reported internally?


Costs totaled for the entire company

Costs totaled by project

Subtotaled by superintendent

Subtotaled by foreman/general foreman

7D Does your company track non-injury incidents? Yes No Monthly Quarterly Annually

Near Miss

Property Damage

Fire

Security

Environmental

8. Personnel

List key health and safety officers planned for this project. Attach resume.

Name Position / Title Designation

Supply name, address and phone number of your company’s corporate health and safety representative. Does this individual have responsibilities other than health, safety and environment?

Name Address Telephone Number

Other responsibilities:

9. References

List the last three company’s your form has worked for that could verify the quality and management commitment to your occupational Health & Safety program

Name and Company Address Telephone Number




Previous Experience

T2.2-09: Evaluation Schedule: Previous experience

Note to tenderers:

Tenderers are required to demonstrate their overall experience in the delivery of similar works, and to this

end shall supply a sufficiently detailed reference list with contact details of existing customers and also

demonstrate their relevant experience with regards to the Construction of similar works as detailed in the

Works Information with reference to:

Civil works (i.e. Sewer, Stormwater, Paving)

Building works (Brickwork, plastering, tiling, painting, plumbing, domestic electrical installation)

The tenderer to submit the following :

Previous experience based on similar work (specific to the scope)

Sufficient references to substantiate experience indicated (project description, Client name and

contact details, contract value and year of completion)

Civil works (i.e. Sewer, Stormwater, Paving)

Project Description Client name and

contact details

contract value and

duration

Date of project

completion

Building works (Brickwork, plastering, tiling, painting, plumbing, domestic electrical

installation)

Project Description Client name and

contact details

contract value and

duration

Date of project

completion

Attach the index of documentation to this schedule to substantiate your submission:

……………..……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….




Previous Experience

The table below indicate the method of scoring that will be followed to evaluate the previous experience

submitted by the Tenderer:

score 0 Failed to provide information

No response

score 20 The Tenderer generally have less than 5 years of experience and have undertaken less

than 3 projects of a similar nature. No / insufficient references provided to substantiate

experience indicated.

score 40 The Tenderer generally have less than years 5 years of experience and have undertaken

more than 3 projects of a similar nature. No / insufficient references provided to

substantiate experience indicated.

score 60 The Tenderer generally have more than 5 years of experience and have undertaken

more than 3 projects of a similar nature. Sufficient references provided to substantiate

experience indicated and stipulated the contract values for those previous projects.








confirms that the contents of this schedule are within my personal knowledge and are to the best of my

belief both true and correct.

Signed

Date

Name

Position

Tenderer





Method Statement

T2.2-10: Evaluation Schedule: Method Statement

Note to tenderers:

Method statement

1. The method statement must respond to the scope of work (the Works Information) and outline

the proposed methodology including that relating to the Programme, quality, health and safety

and environmental considerations.

2. The method statement should articulate what value add the tenderer will provide in achieving

the stated objectives for the project.

3. The tenderer must as such explain his / her understanding of the objectives of the assignment

and the Employer’s stated and implied requirements, highlight the issues of importance, and

explain the technical approach they would adopt to address them. The method statement

should also correlate with the tenderer’s quality plan outlining the processes, procedures and

associated resources, applied by whom and when, to meet the requirements and indicate how

risks will be managed and what contribution can be made regarding value management.

4. Method of construction and commissioning Process: Tender should narratively demonstrate the

approach to site establish, pre-construction activities and meetings, interfaces with other

discipline including the client, construction logistics, commissioning procedures and handover.

The table below is for information purposes only to indicate the method of scoring that will be followed

to evaluate the previous experience submitted by the Tenderer:

Score 0 The tenderer has submitted no information or inadequate information to

determine a score.

Score 20

The method statements are not acceptable as it will not satisfy project objectives

or requirements. The tenderer has misunderstood the scope of work and does not

deal with any aspects of the project.

Score 40

Tenderer has submitted a method statement with major omissions and/or

irregularities. Tenderers technical approach and / methodology is poor, not

realistic, generic and unlikely to satisfy project objectives or requirements. The

tenderer misunderstood the scope of works and does not deal with the critical

aspects of the project. The approach to managing works too generic.





Method Statement

Score 60

Tenderer has submitted an acceptable method statement with minor omissions

and/or irregularities and / or partially complete, and does encompass and detail

the works objectives and requirements to be undertaken; the approach does not

deal fully with the characteristics of the project.

Score 80

Tenderer has submitted an extensive method statement:

1. Approach clearly articulated and based on this project; the works are aligned

with scope of works and project schedule;

2. The proposed construction methodology will ensure that the design meets the specifications and quality standards. The proposed tools/equipment

meets the requirements set out in the Works Information/applicable technical specifications, and relates to the programme.

3. The method statement covers all the aspects of the Works Information.

4. Sufficiently flexible to accommodate changes that may occur during Executions.

Score 100

Tenderer has submitted an outstanding method statement:

1. Approach clearly articulated and based on this project; the works are aligned

with the scope of works and project schedule;

2. The proposed construction methodology will ensure that the design meets the specifications and quality standards. The proposed tools/equipment

meets the requirements set out in the Works Information/applicable technical specifications, and relates to the programme.

3. Besides meeting the “80” rating, the important issues are approached in an

innovative and efficient way, indicating that the Tenderer has outstanding knowledge of state-of-the-art approaches.

4. The methodology details ways to improve the project outcomes and quality of outputs.

Signed ................................................ Date ............................................................

Name ................................................ Position ............................................................

Tenderer ....................................................................................................................................




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 4 T2.2-11: Authority to submit a Tender

T2.2-11: Authority to submit a Tender

Indicate the status of the tenderer by ticking the appropriate box hereunder. The tenderer must

complete the certificate set out below for his category of organisation or alternatively attach a certified

copy of a company / organisation document which provides the same information for the relevant

category as requested here.

A - COMPANY B - PARTNERSHIP C - JOINT VENTURE D - SOLE PROPRIETOR

A. Certificate for Company

I,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ , chairperson of the board of directors of _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, hereby confirm that by resolution of the

board taken on _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ (date), Mr/Ms _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , acting

in the capacity of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, was authorised to sign all documents in

connection with this tender offer and any contract resulting from it on behalf of the company.

Signed Date

Name Position Chairman of the Board of Directors




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________


B. Certificate for Partnership

We, the undersigned, being the key partners in the business trading as _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ hereby authorise Mr/Ms _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, acting in

the capacity of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, to sign all documents in connection with the

tender offer for Contract _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ and any contract resulting from it on our

behalf.

Name Address Signature Date

NOTE: This certificate is to be completed and signed by the full number of Partners necessary to

commit the Partnership. Attach additional pages if more space is required.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________


C. Certificate for Joint Venture

We, the undersigned, are submitting this tender offer in Joint Venture and hereby authorise Mr/Ms _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, an authorised signatory of the company _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , acting in the capacity of lead partner, to sign all documents in

connection with the tender offer for Contract _ _ _ _ __ _ _ and any contract resulting from it on our

behalf.

This authorisation is evidenced by the attached power of attorney signed by legally authorised

signatories of all the partners to the Joint Venture.

Furthermore we attach to this Schedule a copy of the joint venture agreement which incorporates a

statement that all partners are liable jointly and severally for the execution of the contract and that the

lead partner is authorised to incur liabilities, receive instructions and payments and be responsible for

the entire execution of the contract for and on behalf of any and all the partners.

Name of firm Address Authorising signature, name

(in caps) and capacity




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________


D. Certificate for Sole Proprietor

I, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, hereby confirm that I am the sole owner of the business

trading as _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.

Signed Date

Name Position Sole Proprietor




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 4 T2.2-12: Compulsory Questionnaire

T2.2-12: Compulsory Enterprise Questionnaire

The following particulars must be furnished. In the case of a joint venture, separate enterprise

questionnaires in respect of each partner must be completed and submitted.

Section 1: Name of enterprise: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 2: VAT registration number, if any: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 3: CIDB registration number, if any: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 4: Particulars of sole proprietors and partners in partnerships

Name Identity number Personal income tax number

* Complete only if sole proprietor or partnership and attach separate page if more than 3 partners

Section 5: Particulars of companies and close corporations

Company registration number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . Close corporation number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . Tax reference number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________


Section 6: Record in the service of the state

Indicate by marking the relevant boxes with a cross, if any sole proprietor, partner in a partnership or

director, manager, principal shareholder or stakeholder in a company or close corporation is currently or

has been within the last 12 months in the service of any of the following:

□ a member of any municipal council

□ a member of any provincial legislature

□ a member of the National Assembly or the

National Council of Province

□ a member of the board of directors of any

municipal entity

□ an official of any municipality or municipal

entity

□ an employee of any provincial department,

national or provincial public entity or constitutional institution within the meaning of

the Public Finance Management Act, 1999 (Act 1 of 1999)

□ a member of an accounting authority of any

national or provincial public entity

□ an employee of Parliament or a provincial

legislature

If any of the above boxes are marked, disclose the following:

Name of sole proprietor,

partner, director, manager, principal

shareholder or stakeholder

Name of institution, public office,

board or organ of state and

position held

Status of service (tick

appropriate column)

Current Within last

12 months

*insert separate page if necessary




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________


Section 7: Record of spouses, children and parents in the service of the state

Indicate by marking the relevant boxes with a cross, if any spouse, child or parent of a sole proprietor,

partner in a partnership or director, manager, principal shareholder or stakeholder in a company or

close corporation is currently or has been within the last 12 months been in the service of any of the

following:

□ a member of any municipal council

□ a member of any provincial legislature

□ a member of the National Assembly or the National Council of Province

□ a member of the board of directors of any

municipal entity

□ an official of any municipality or municipal

entity

□ an employee of any provincial department,

national or provincial public entity or constitutional institution within the meaning of the Public Finance

Management Act, 1999 (Act 1 of 1999)

□ a member of an accounting authority of any national or provincial public entity

□ an employee of Parliament or a provincial

legislature

Name of spouse, child or

parent

Name of institution, public

office, board or organ of state

and position held

Status of service

(tick appropriate column)

Current Within last 12

months

*insert separate page if necessary




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________


The undersigned, who warrants that he / she is duly authorised to do so on behalf of the enterprise:

i) authorizes the Employer to obtain a tax clearance certificate from the South African Revenue

Services that my / our tax matters are in order;

ii) confirms that the neither the name of the enterprise or the name of any partner, manager,

director or other person, who wholly or partly exercises, or may exercise, control over the

enterprise appears on the Register of Tender Defaulters established in terms of the Prevention

and Combating of Corrupt Activities Act of 2004;

iii) confirms that no partner, member, director or other person, who wholly or partly exercises, or

may exercise, control over the enterprise appears, has within the last five years been convicted

of fraud or corruption;

iv) confirms that I / we are not associated, linked or involved with any other tendering entities

submitting tender offers and have no other relationship with any of the tenderers or those

responsible for compiling the scope of work that could cause or be interpreted as a conflict of

interest; and

v) confirms that the contents of this questionnaire are within my personal knowledge and are to

the best of my belief both true and correct.

Signed Date

Name Position

Enterprise

name



RICHARDS BAY

Part T2: Returnable Schedules T2.2-13: Service Provider Integrity Pact

2018 – Rev01 Page 1 of 9 Private & Confidential

T2.2-13 Service Provider Integrity Pact

Important Note: All potential tenderers must read this document and certify in the RFX Declaration

Form that that have acquainted themselves with, and agree with the content. The contract with the

successful tenderer will automatically incorporate this Integrity Pact as part of the final concluded

contract.

INTEGRITY PACT

Between

TRANSNET SOC LTD

Registration Number: 1990/000900/30

(“Transnet”)

and

The Contractor (hereinafter referred to as the “Tenderer / Service Provider/Contractor”)

TRANSNET GROUP CAPITAL TENDER NUMBER: 4227578 - 101

DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: CONSTRUCTION OF MECHANICAL AND E&CI WORKS FOR THE

S05 TO N02 TRANSFER POINT IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________



PREAMBLE Transnet values full compliance with all relevant laws and regulations, ethical standards and the principles of

economical use of resources, fairness and transparency in its relations with its Tenderers / Service

Providers/Contractors.

In order to achieve these goals, Transnet and the Tenderer / Service Provider hereby enter into this agreement

hereinafter referred to as the “Integrity Pact” which will form part of the Tenderer’s / Service Provider’s /

Contractor’s application for registration with Transnet as a vendor.

The general purpose of this Integrity Pact is to agree on avoiding all forms of dishonesty, fraud and corruption by

following a system that is fair, transparent and free from any undue influence prior to, during and subsequent to

the currency of any procurement and / or reverse logistics event and any further contract to be entered into

between the Parties, relating to such event.

All Tenderers / Service Providers / Contractor’s will be required to sign and comply with undertakings contained in

this Integrity Pact, should they want to be registered as a Transnet vendor.

1 OBJECTIVES

1.1 Transnet and the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor agree to enter into this Integrity Pact, to

avoid all forms of dishonesty, fraud and corruption including practices that are anti-competitive in

nature, negotiations made in bad faith and under-pricing by following a system that is fair,

transparent and free from any influence / unprejudiced dealings prior to, during and subsequent to

the currency of the contract to be entered into with a view to:

a) Enable Transnet to obtain the desired contract at a reasonable and competitive price in

conformity to the defined specifications of the works, goods and services; and

b) Enable Tenderers / Service Providers / Contractors to abstain from bribing or participating in

any corrupt practice in order to secure the contract.

2 COMMITMENTS OF TRANSNET

Transnet commits to take all measures necessary to prevent dishonesty, fraud and corruption and to

observe the following principles:

2.1 Transnet hereby undertakes that no employee of Transnet connected directly or indirectly with the

sourcing event and ensuing contract, will demand, take a promise for or accept directly or through

intermediaries any bribe, consideration, gift, reward, favour or any material or immaterial benefit or

any other advantage from the Tenderer, either for themselves or for any person, organisation or

third party related to the contract in exchange for an advantage in the tendering process, Tender

evaluation, contracting or implementation process related to any contract.

2.2 Transnet will, during the registration and tendering process treat all Tenderers / Service Providers

with equity, transparency and fairness. Transnet will in particular, before and during the registration

process, provide to all Tenderers / Service Providers the same information and will not provide to

any Tenderers / Service Providers / Contractors confidential / additional information through which

the Tenderers / Service Providers / Contractors could obtain an advantage in relation to any

tendering process.

2.3 Transnet further confirms that its employees will not favour any prospective Tenderer in any form

that could afford an undue advantage to a particular Tenderer during the tendering stage, and will

further treat all Tenderers / Service Providers / Contractors participating in the tendering process.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________



2.4 Transnet will exclude from the tender process such employees who have any personal interest in

the Tenderers / Service Providers / Contractors participating in the tendering process.

3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE TENDERER / SERVICE PROVIDER

3.1 The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent

corrupt practices, unfair means and illegal activities during any stage of its Tender or during any

ensuing contract stage in order to secure the contract or in furtherance to secure it and in particular

the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor commits to the following:

a) The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor will not, directly or through any other person or

firm, offer, promise or give to Transnet or to any of Transnet’s employees involved in the

tendering process or to any third person any material or other benefit or payment, in order

to obtain in exchange an advantage during the tendering process; and

b) The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor will not offer, directly or through intermediaries,

any bribe, gift, consideration, reward, favour, any material or immaterial benefit or other

advantage, commission, fees, brokerage or inducement to any employee of Transnet,

connected directly or indirectly with the tendering process, or to any person, organisation or

third party related to the contract in exchange for any advantage in the tendering, evaluation,

contracting and implementation of the contract.

3.2 The acceptance and giving of gifts may be permitted provided that:

a) the gift does not exceed R1 000 (one thousand Rand) in retail value;

b) many low retail value gifts do not exceed R 1 000 within a 12 month period;

c) hospitality packages do not exceed R5 000 in value or many low value hospitality packages

do not cumulatively exceed R5 000;

d) a Tenderer / Service Provider does not give a Transnet employee more than 2 (two) gifts

within a 12 (twelve) month period, irrespective of value;

e) a Tenderer / Service Provider does not accept more than 1 (one) gift in excess of R750 (seven

hundred and fifty Rand) from a Transnet employee within a 12 (twelve) month period,

irrespective of value;

f) a Tenderer / Service Provider may under no circumstances, accept from or give to, a Transnet

employee any gift, business courtesy, including an invitation to a business meal and /or

drinks, or hospitality package, irrespective of value, during any Tender evaluation process,

including a period of 12 (twelve) months after such tender has been awarded, as it may be

perceived as undue and improper influence on the evaluation process or reward for the

contract that has been awarded; and

g) a Tenderer / Service Provider may not offer gifts, goods or services to a Transnet employee

at artificially low prices, which are not available to the public at those prices.

3.3 The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor will not collude with other parties interested in the

contract to preclude a competitive Tender price, impair the transparency, fairness and progress of

the tendering process, Tender evaluation, contracting and implementation of the contract. The

Tenderer / Service Provider further commits itself to delivering against all agreed upon conditions

as stipulated within the contract.

3.4 The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor will not enter into any illegal or dishonest agreement

or understanding, whether formal or informal with other Tenderers / Service Providers / Contractors.

This applies in particular to certifications, submissions or non-submission of documents or actions

that are restrictive or to introduce cartels into the tendering process.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________



3.5 The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor will not commit any criminal offence under the relevant

anti-corruption laws of South Africa or any other country. Furthermore, the Tenderer /Service

Provider will not use for illegitimate purposes or for restrictive purposes or personal gain, or pass on

to others, any information provided by Transnet as part of the business relationship, regarding plans,

technical proposals and business details, including information contained or transmitted

electronically.

3.6 A Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor of foreign origin shall disclose the name and address of

its agents or representatives in South Africa, if any, involved directly or indirectly in the registration

or tendering process. Similarly, the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor of South African

nationality shall furnish the name and address of the foreign principals, if any, involved directly or

indirectly in the registration or tendering process.

3.7 The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor will not misrepresent facts or furnish false or forged

documents or information in order to influence the tendering process to the advantage of the

Tenderer / Service Provider or detriment of Transnet or other competitors.

3.8 The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor shall furnish Transnet with a copy of its code of conduct,

which code of conduct shall reject the use of bribes and other dishonest and unethical conduct, as

well as compliance programme for the implementation of the code of conduct.

3.9 The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor will not instigate third persons to commit offences

outlined above or be an accessory to such offences.

4 INDEPENDENT TENDERING

4.1 For the purposes of that Certificate in relation to any submitted Tender, the Tenderer declares to fully understand that the word “competitor” shall include any individual or organisation, other than

the Tenderer, whether or not affiliated with the Tenderer, who:

a) has been requested to submit a Tender in response to this Tender invitation;

b) could potentially submit a Tender in response to this Tender invitation, based on their

qualifications, abilities or experience; and

c) provides the same Goods and Services as the Tenderer and/or is in the same line of business

as the Tenderer.

4.2 The Tenderer has arrived at his submitted Tender independently from, and without consultation,

communication, agreement or arrangement with any competitor. However communication between

partners in a joint venture or consortium will not be construed as collusive tendering.

4.3 In particular, without limiting the generality of paragraph 5 above, there has been no consultation,

communication, agreement or arrangement with any competitor regarding:

a) prices;

b) geographical area where Goods or Services will be rendered [market allocation];

c) methods, factors or formulas used to calculate prices;

d) the intention or decision to submit or not to submit, a Tender;

e) the submission of a Tender which does not meet the specifications and conditions of the RFP;

or

f) tendering with the intention of not winning the Tender.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________



4.4 In addition, there have been no consultations, communications, agreements or arrangements with

any competitor regarding the quality, quantity, specifications and conditions or delivery particulars

of the Goods or Services to which his/her tender relates.

4.5 The terms of the Tender as submitted have not been, and will not be, disclosed by the Tenderer,

directly or indirectly, to any competitor, prior to the date and time of the official Tender opening or

of the awarding of the contract.

4.6 Tenderers are aware that, in addition and without prejudice to any other remedy provided to combat

any restrictive practices related to Tenders and contracts, Tenders that are suspicious will be

reported to the Competition Commission for investigation and possible imposition of administrative

penalties in terms of section 59 of the Competition Act No 89 of 1998 and/or may be reported to the

National Prosecuting Authority [NPA] for criminal investigation and/or may be restricted from

conducting business with the public sector for a period not exceeding 10 [ten] years in terms of the

Prevention and Combating of Corrupt Activities Act No 12 of 2004 or any other applicable legislation.

4.7 Should the Tenderer find any terms or conditions stipulated in any of the relevant documents quoted

in the Tender unacceptable, it should indicate which conditions are unacceptable and offer

alternatives by written submission on its company letterhead, attached to its submitted Tender. Any

such submission shall be subject to review by Transnet’s Legal Counsel who shall determine whether

the proposed alternative(s) are acceptable or otherwise, as the case may be.

5 DISQUALIFICATION FROM TENDERING PROCESS

5.1 If the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor has committed a transgression through a violation of

section 3 of this Integrity Pact or in any other form such as to put its reliability or credibility as a

Tenderer / Service Provider into question, Transnet may reject the Tenderer’s / Service Provider’s /

Contractor’s application from the registration or tendering process and remove the Tenderer /

Service Provider from its database, if already registered.

5.2 If the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor has committed a transgression through a violation of

section 3, or any material violation, such as to put its reliability or credibility into question. Transnet

may after following due procedures and at its own discretion also exclude the Tenderer / Service

Provider / Contractor from future tendering processes. The imposition and duration of the exclusion

will be determined by the severity of the transgression. The severity will be determined by the

circumstances of the case, which will include amongst others the number of transgressions, the

position of the transgressors within the company hierarchy of the Tenderer / Service Provider

/Contractor and the amount of the damage. The exclusion will be imposed for up to a maximum of

10 (ten) years. However, Transnet reserves the right to impose a longer period of exclusion,

depending on the gravity of the misconduct.

5.3 If the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor can prove that it has restored the damage caused by

it and has installed a suitable corruption prevention system, or taken other remedial measures as

the circumstances of the case may require, Transnet may at its own discretion revoke the exclusion

or suspend the imposed penalty.

6 TRANSNET’S LIST OF EXCLUDED TENDERERS (BLACKLIST)

6.1 All the stipulations around Transnet’s blacklisting process as laid down in Transnet’s Supply Chain

Policy and Procurement Procedures Manual are included herein by way of reference. Below follows

a condensed summary of this blacklisting procedure.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________



6.2 Blacklisting is a mechanism used to exclude a company/person from future business with Transnet

for a specified period. The decision to blacklist is based on one of the grounds for blacklisting. The

standard of proof to commence the blacklisting process is whether a “prima facie” (i.e. on the face

of it) case has been established.

6.3 Depending on the seriousness of the misconduct and the strategic importance of the Goods/Services,

in addition to blacklisting a company/person from future business, Transnet may decide to terminate

some or all existing contracts with the company/person as well.

6.4 A Service Provider or Contractor to Transnet may not subcontract any portion of the contract to a

blacklisted company.

6.5 Grounds for blacklisting include: If any person/Enterprise which has submitted a Tender, concluded

a contract, or, in the capacity of agent or subcontractor, has been associated with such Tender or

contract:

a) Has, in bad faith, withdrawn such Tender after the advertised closing date and time for the

receipt of Tenders;

b) has, after being notified of the acceptance of his Tender, failed or refused to sign a contract

when called upon to do so in terms of any condition forming part of the Tender documents;

c) has carried out any contract resulting from such Tender in an unsatisfactory manner or has

breached any condition of the contract;

d) has offered, promised or given a bribe in relation to the obtaining or execution of the contract;

e) has acted in a fraudulent or improper manner or in bad faith towards Transnet or any

Government Department or towards any public body, Enterprise or person;

f) has made any incorrect statement in a certificate or other communication with regard to the

Local Content of his Goods or his B-BBEE status and is unable to prove to the satisfaction of

Transnet that:

(i) he made the statement in good faith honestly believing it to be correct; and

(ii) before making such statement he took all reasonable steps to satisfy himself of its

correctness;

g) caused Transnet damage, or to incur costs in order to meet the contractor’s requirements

and which could not be recovered from the contractor;

h) has litigated against Transnet in bad faith.

6.6 Grounds for blacklisting include a company/person recorded as being a company or person

prohibited from doing business with the public sector on National Treasury’s database of Restricted

Service Providers or Register of Tender Defaulters.

6.7 Companies associated with the person/s guilty of misconduct (i.e. entities owned, controlled or

managed by such persons), any companies subsequently formed by the person(s) guilty of the

misconduct and/or an existing company where such person(s) acquires a controlling stake may be

considered for blacklisting. The decision to extend the blacklist to associated companies will be at

the sole discretion of Transnet.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________



7 PREVIOUS TRANSGRESSIONS

7.1 The Tenderer / Service Provider /Contractor hereby declares that no previous transgressions

resulting in a serious breach of any law, including but not limited to, corruption, fraud, theft, extortion

and contraventions of the Competition Act 89 of 1998, which occurred in the last 5 (five) years with

any other public sector undertaking, government department or private sector company that could

justify its exclusion from its registration on the Tenderer’s / Service Provider’s / Contractor’s database

or any tendering process.

7.2 If it is found to be that the Tenderer / Service Provider /Contractor made an incorrect statement on

this subject, the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor can be rejected from the registration

process or removed from the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor database, if already registered,

for such reason (refer to the Breach of Law Form contained in the applicable RFX document.)

8 SANCTIONS FOR VIOLATIONS

8.1 Transnet shall also take all or any one of the following actions, wherever required to:

a) Immediately exclude the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor from the tendering process or call

off the pre-contract negotiations without giving any compensation the Tenderer / Service Provider /

Contractor. However, the proceedings with the other Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor may

continue;

b) Immediately cancel the contract, if already awarded or signed, without giving any compensation to

the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor;

c) Recover all sums already paid by Transnet;

d) Encash the advance bank guarantee and performance bond or warranty bond, if furnished by the

Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor, in order to recover the payments, already made by

Transnet, along with interest;

e) Cancel all or any other contracts with the Tenderer / Service Provider; and

f) Exclude the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor from entering into any Tender with Transnet

in future.

9 CONFLICTS OF INTEREST

9.1 A conflict of interest includes, inter alia, a situation in which:

a) A Transnet employee has a personal financial interest in a tendering / supplying entity; and

b) A Transnet employee has private interests or personal considerations or has an affiliation or a

relationship which affects, or may affect, or may be perceived to affect his / her judgment in action

in the best interest of Transnet, or could affect the employee’s motivations for acting in a particular

manner, or which could result in, or be perceived as favouritism or nepotism.

9.2 A Transnet employee uses his / her position, or privileges or information obtained while acting in

the capacity as an employee for:

a) Private gain or advancement; or

b) The expectation of private gain, or advancement, or any other advantage accruing to the employee

must be declared in a prescribed form.

Thus, conflicts of interest of any Tender committee member or any person involved in the sourcing

process must be declared in a prescribed form.

9.3 If a Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor has or becomes aware of a conflict of interest i.e. a

family, business and / or social relationship between its owner(s) / member(s) / director(s) /




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________



partner(s) / shareholder(s) and a Transnet employee / member of Transnet’s Board of Directors in

respect of a Tender which will be considered for the Tender process, the Tenderer / Service Provider

/ Contractor:

a) must disclose the interest and its general nature, in the Request for Proposal (“RFX”) declaration

form; or

b) must notify Transnet immediately in writing once the circumstances has arisen.

9.4 The Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor shall not lend to or borrow any money from or enter

into any monetary dealings or transactions, directly or indirectly, with any committee member or

any person involved in the sourcing process, where this is done, Transnet shall be entitled forthwith

to rescind the contract and all other contracts with the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor.

10 MONITORING

10.1 Transnet will be responsible for appointing an independent Monitor to:

a) Conduct random monitoring of compliance to the provisions of this Integrity Pact for contracts

entered into between Transnet and the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor for less than

R100,000.000 (one hundred million Rand) in value;

b) Monitor compliance to the provisions of this Integrity Pact for contracts entered into between

Transnet and the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor for greater than R100,000.000 (one

hundred million Rand) in value; and

c) Investigate any allegation of violation of any provisions of this Integrity Pact for contracts entered

into between Transnet and the Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor, irrespective of value.

10.2 The Monitor will be subjected to Transnet’s Terms of Conditions of Contract for the Provision of

Services to Transnet, as well as to Transnet’s Service Provider Code of Conduct.

11 EXAMINATION OF FINANCIAL RECORDS, DOCUMENTATION AND/OR ELECTRONIC DATA

For the purpose of Monitoring, as stipulated above, the Monitor shall be entitled to:

a) Examine the financial records, documentation and or electronic date of Tenderer / Service Provider

/ Contractor / Transnet. The Tenderer / Service Provider / Transnet shall provide all requested

information / documentation / data to the Monitor and shall extend all help possible for the purpose

of such examination.

12 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

12.1 Transnet recognises that trust and good faith are pivotal to its relationship with its Tenderer / Service

Provider / Contractor. When a dispute arises between Transnet and its Tenderer / Service Provider

/ Contractor, the parties should use their best endeavours to resolve the dispute in an amicable

manner, whenever possible. Litigation in bad faith negates the principles of trust and good faith on

which commercial relationships are based. Accordingly, following a blacklisting process as

mentioned in paragraph 6 above, Transnet will not do business with a company that litigates against

it in bad faith or is involved in any action that reflects bad faith on its part. Litigation in bad faith

includes, but is not limited to the following instances:

a) Vexatious proceedings: these are frivolous proceedings which have been instituted without

proper grounds;

b) Perjury: where a Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor make a false statement either in giving

evidence or on an affidavit;




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________



c) Scurrilous allegations: where a Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor makes allegations

regarding a senior Transnet employee which are without proper foundation, scandalous, abusive or

defamatory; and

d) Abuse of court process: when a Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor abuses the court process

in order to gain a competitive advantage during a Tender process.

13 GENERAL

13.1 This Integrity Pact is governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Republic of

South Africa.

13.2 The actions stipulated in this Integrity Pact are without prejudice to any other legal action that may

follow in accordance with the provisions of the law relating to any civil or criminal proceedings.

13.3 The validity of this Integrity Pact shall cover all the tendering processes and will be valid for an

indefinite period unless cancelled by either Party.

13.4 Should one or several provisions of this Integrity Pact turn out to be invalid the remainder of this

Integrity Pact remains valid.

13.5 Should a Tenderer / Service Provider / Contractor be confronted with dishonest, fraudulent or

corruptive behaviour of one or more Transnet employees, Transnet expects its Tenderer / Service

Provider / Contractor to report this behaviour directly to a senior Transnet official / employee or

alternatively by using Transnet’s “Tip-Off Anonymous” hotline number 0800 003 056, whereby your

confidentiality is guaranteed.

The Parties hereby declare that each of them has read and understood the clauses of this Integrity Pact

and shall a Tenderer by it. To the best of the Parties’ knowledge and belief, the information provided in

this Integrity Pact is true and correct.

oooOOOooo


CONTRACT NUMBER: 4228277.001C DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF

RICHARDS BAY

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 5 T2.2-14: Non-Disclosure Agreement

T2.2-14 NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT

[September 2016]

THIS AGREEMENT is made effective as of ........... day of ............................... 20...... by and

between:

Note to tenderers: This Non-Disclosure Agreement is to be completed and signed by an

authorised signatory:

Transnet SOC Ltd (Registration No. 1990/000900/30), a company incorporated and existing under the

laws of South Africa, having its principal place of business at Carlton Centre, 150 Commissioner Street,

Johannesburg, 2001, South Africa,

and

............................................................................... (Registration No. .........................................), a

private company incorporated and existing under the laws of South Africa having its principal place of

business at

.........................................................................................................................................................

.................

...............................................................................................................

WHEREAS

Transnet and the Company wish to exchange Information [as defined below] and it is envisaged that

each party may from time to time receive Information relating to the other in respect thereof. In

consideration of each party making available to the other such Information, the parties jointly agree that

any dealings between them shall be subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement which

themselves will be subject to the parameters of the Bid Document.

IT IS HEREBY AGREED

1. INTERPRETATION

In this Agreement:

1.1 Agents mean directors, officers, employees, agents, professional advisers, contractors or sub-

contractors, or any Group member;



RICHARDS BAY


1.2 Bid or Bid Document means Transnet’s Request for Information [RFI] Request for Proposal

[RFP] or Request for Quotation [RFQ], as the case may be;

1.3 Confidential Information means any information or other data relating to one party [the

Disclosing Party] and/or the business carried on or proposed or intended to be carried on

by that party and which is made available for the purposes of the Bid to the other party [the

Receiving Party] or its Agents by the Disclosing Party or its Agents or recorded in agreed

minutes following oral disclosure and any other information otherwise made available by the

Disclosing Party or its Agents to the Receiving Party or its Agents, whether before, on or after

the date of this Agreement, and whether in writing or otherwise, including any information,

analysis or specifications derived from, containing or reflecting such information but excluding

information which:

1.3.1 is publicly available at the time of its disclosure or becomes publicly available [other than

as a result of disclosure by the Receiving Party or any of its Agents contrary to the terms

of this Agreement]; or

1.3.2 was lawfully in the possession of the Receiving Party or its Agents [as can be

demonstrated by its written records or other reasonable evidence] free of any restriction

as to its use or disclosure prior to its being so disclosed; or

1.3.3 following such disclosure, becomes available to the Receiving Party or its Agents [as can

be demonstrated by its written records or other reasonable evidence] from a source

other than the Disclosing Party or its Agents, which source is not bound by any duty of

confidentiality owed, directly or indirectly, to the Disclosing Party in relation to such

information;

1.4 Group means any subsidiary, any holding company and any subsidiary of any holding

company of either party; and

1.5 Information means all information in whatever form including, without limitation, any

information relating to systems, operations, plans, intentions, market opportunities, know-

how, trade secrets and business affairs whether in writing, conveyed orally or by

machine-readable medium.

2. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

2.1 All Confidential Information given by one party to this Agreement [the Disclosing Party] to

the other party [the Receiving Party] will be treated by the Receiving Party as secret and

confidential and will not, without the Disclosing Party’s written consent, directly or indirectly

communicate or disclose [whether in writing or orally or in any other manner] Confidential

Information to any other person other than in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.



RICHARDS BAY


2.2 The Receiving Party will only use the Confidential Information for the sole purpose of technical

and commercial discussions between the parties in relation to the Bid or for the subsequent

performance of any contract between the parties in relation to the Bid.

2.3 Notwithstanding clause 2.1 above, the Receiving Party may disclose Confidential Information:

2.3.1 to those of its Agents who strictly need to know the Confidential Information for the sole

purpose set out in clause 2.2 above, provided that the Receiving Party shall ensure that

such Agents are made aware prior to the disclosure of any part of the Confidential

Information that the same is confidential and that they owe a duty of confidence to the

Disclosing Party. The Receiving Party shall at all times remain liable for any actions of

such Agents that would constitute a breach of this Agreement; or

2.3.2 to the extent required by law or the rules of any applicable regulatory authority, subject

to clause 2.4 below.

2.4 In the event that the Receiving Party is required to disclose any Confidential Information in

accordance with clause 2.3.2 above, it shall promptly notify the Disclosing Party and cooperate

with the Disclosing Party regarding the form, nature, content and purpose of such disclosure

or any action which the Disclosing Party may reasonably take to challenge the validity of such

requirement.

2.5 In the event that any Confidential Information shall be copied, disclosed or used otherwise

than as permitted under this Agreement then, upon becoming aware of the same, without

prejudice to any rights or remedies of the Disclosing Party, the Receiving Party shall as soon

as practicable notify the Disclosing Party of such event and if requested take such steps

[including the institution of legal proceedings] as shall be necessary to remedy [if capable of

remedy] the default and/or to prevent further unauthorised copying, disclosure or use.

2.6 All Confidential Information shall remain the property of the Disclosing Party and its disclosure

shall not confer on the Receiving Party any rights, including intellectual property rights over

the Confidential Information whatsoever, beyond those contained in this Agreement.

3. RECORDS AND RETURN OF INFORMATION

3.1 The Receiving Party agrees to ensure proper and secure storage of all Information and any

copies thereof.

3.2 The Receiving Party shall keep a written record, to be supplied to the Disclosing Party upon

request, of the Confidential Information provided and any copies made thereof and, so far as

is reasonably practicable, of the location of such Confidential Information and any copies

thereof.

3.3 The Company shall, within 7 [seven] days of receipt of a written demand from Transnet:



RICHARDS BAY


3.3.1 return all written Confidential Information [including all copies]; and

3.3.2 expunge or destroy any Confidential Information from any computer, word processor or

other device whatsoever into which it was copied, read or programmed by the Company

or on its behalf.

3.4 The Company shall on request supply a certificate signed by a director as to its full compliance

with the requirements of clause 3.3.2 above.

4. ANNOUNCEMENTS

4.1 Neither party will make or permit to be made any announcement or disclosure of its

prospective interest in the Bid without the prior written consent of the other party.

4.2 Neither party shall make use of the other party’s name or any information acquired through its

dealings with the other party for publicity or marketing purposes without the prior written

consent of the other party.

5. DURATION

The obligations of each party and its Agents under this Agreement shall survive the termination of

any discussions or negotiations between the parties regarding the Bid and continue thereafter for

a period of 5 [five] years.

6. PRINCIPAL

Each party confirms that it is acting as principal and not as nominee, agent or broker for any

other person and that it will be responsible for any costs incurred by it or its advisers in

considering or pursuing the Bid and in complying with the terms of this Agreement.

7. ADEQUACY OF DAMAGES

Nothing contained in this Agreement shall be construed as prohibiting the Disclosing Party from

pursuing any other remedies available to it, either at law or in equity, for any such threatened or

actual breach of this Agreement, including specific performance, recovery of damages or

otherwise.

8. PRIVACY AND DATA PROTECTION

8.1 The Receiving Party undertakes to comply with South Africa’s general privacy protection in

terms Section 14 of the Bill of Rights in connection with this Bid and shall procure that its

personnel shall observe the provisions of such Act [as applicable] or any amendments and re-

enactments thereof and any regulations made pursuant thereto.

8.2 The Receiving Party warrants that it and its Agents have the appropriate technical and

organisational measures in place against unauthorised or unlawful processing of data relating



RICHARDS BAY


to the Bid and against accidental loss or destruction of, or damage to such data held or

processed by them.

9. GENERAL

9.1 Neither party may assign the benefit of this Agreement, or any interest hereunder, except

with the prior written consent of the other, save that Transnet may assign this Agreement at

any time to any member of the Transnet Group.

9.2 No failure or delay in exercising any right, power or privilege under this Agreement will

operate as a waiver of it, nor will any single or partial exercise of it preclude any further

exercise or the exercise of any right, power or privilege under this Agreement or otherwise.

9.3 The provisions of this Agreement shall be severable in the event that any of its provisions are

held by a court of competent jurisdiction or other applicable authority to be invalid, void or

otherwise unenforceable, and the remaining provisions shall remain enforceable to the fullest

extent permitted by law.

9.4 This Agreement may only be modified by a written agreement duly signed by persons

authorised on behalf of each party.

9.5 Nothing in this Agreement shall constitute the creation of a partnership, joint venture or

agency between the parties.

9.6 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with South African law and

the parties irrevocably submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the South African courts.

Signed Date

Name Position

Tenderer




____________________________________________________________________________________

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 2 T2.2-15: Tender Declaration Form

T2.2-15: TENDER DECLARATION FORM

NAME OF COMPANY: _______________________________________________________

We ___________________________________________________________ do hereby certify that:

1. Transnet has supplied and we have received appropriate tender offers to any/all questions (as

applicable) which were submitted by ourselves for tender clarification purposes;

2. we have received all information we deemed necessary for the completion of this Tender;

3. at no stage have we received additional information relating to the subject matter of this tender

from Transnet sources, other than information formally received from the designated Transnet

contact(s) as nominated in the tender documents;

4. we are satisfied, insofar as our company is concerned, that the processes and procedures

adopted by Transnet in issuing this TENDER and the requirements requested from tenderers in

responding to this TENDER have been conducted in a fair and transparent manner; and

5. furthermore, we acknowledge that a direct relationship exists between a family member and/or

an owner / member / director / partner / shareholder (unlisted companies) of our company and

an employee or board member of the Transnet Group as indicated below: [Respondent to

indicate if this section is not applicable]

FULL NAME OF OWNER/MEMBER/DIRECTOR/

PARTNER/SHAREHOLDER: ADDRESS:

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

Indicate nature of relationship with Transnet:

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

[Failure to furnish complete and accurate information in this regard may lead to the

disqualification of your response and may preclude a Respondent from doing future

business with Transnet]

We declare, to the extent that we are aware or become aware of any relationship between ourselves

and Transnet (other than any existing and appropriate business relationship with Transnet) which

could unfairly advantage our company in the forthcoming adjudication process, we shall notify

Transnet immediately in writing of such circumstances.




____________________________________________________________________________________

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 2 of 2 T2.2-15: Tender Declaration Form

6. We accept that any dispute pertaining to this tender will be resolved through the

Ombudsman process and will be subject to the Terms of Reference of the

Ombudsman. The Ombudsman process must first be exhausted before judicial

review of a decision is sought. (Refer “Important Notice to respondents” below).

7. We further accept that Transnet reserves the right to reverse a tender award or

decision based on the recommendations of the Ombudsman without having to

follow a formal court process to have such award or decision set aside.

For and on behalf of

…………………………………………………………………………

duly authorised thereto

Name:

Signature:

Date:

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO RESPONDENTS

Transnet has appointed a Procurement Ombudsman to investigate any material complaint in respect

of tenders exceeding R5,000,000.00 (five million S.A. Rand) in value. Should a Respondent have any

material concern regarding an tender process which meets this value threshold, a complaint may be

lodged with Transnet’s Procurement Ombudsman for further investigation.

It is incumbent on the Respondent to familiarise himself/herself with the Terms of Reference for the

Transnet Procurement Ombudsman, details of which are available for review at Transnet’s website

www.transnet.net.

An official complaint form may be downloaded from this website and submitted, together with any

supporting documentation, within the prescribed period, to [email protected]

For transactions below the R5,000,000.00 (five million S.A. Rand) threshold, a complaint may be

lodged with the Chief Procurement Officer of the relevant Transnet Operating Division.

All Respondents should note that a complaint must be made in good faith. If a complaint is made in

bad faith, Transnet reserves the right to place such a bidder on its List of Excluded Bidders.

http://www.transnet.net/

mailto:[email protected]




_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 1 T2.2-16: RFP – Breach of Law

T2.2-16: REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL – BREACH OF LAW

NAME OF COMPANY: _______________________________________________________

I / We ___________________________________________________________ do hereby certify that

I/we have/have not been found guilty during the preceding 5 (five) years of a serious breach of

law, including but not limited to a breach of the Competition Act, 89 of 1998, by a court of law, tribunal

or other administrative body. The type of breach that the Tenderer is required to disclose excludes

relatively minor offences or misdemeanours, e.g. traffic offences.

Where found guilty of such a serious breach, please disclose:

NATURE OF BREACH:

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

DATE OF BREACH: _________________________________________________________________

Furthermore, I/we acknowledge that Transnet SOC Ltd reserves the right to exclude any Tenderer from

the bidding process, should that person or company have been found guilty of a serious breach of law,

tribunal or regulatory obligation.

Signed on this _____ day of _________________ 20____

_______________________

SIGNATURE OF TENDER



DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS

BAY

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules

Page 1 of 1 T2.2-17: Record of Addenda to Tender documents

T2.2-17: Record of Addenda to Tender Documents

We confirm that the following communications received from the Employer before the submission of this tender offer, amending the tender documents, have been taken into account in this tender offer:

Date Title or Details

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Attach additional pages if more space is required.

Signed Date

Tenderer



2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 5 T2.2-18: Transnet Vendor Registration

T2.2-18 Transnet Vendor Registration Form

Transnet Vendor Management has received a request to load / change your company details onto the Transnet

vendor master database. Please return the completed Supplier Declaration Form (SDF) together with the

required supporting documents as per Appendix A to the Transnet Official who is intending to procure your

company’s services / products, to enable us to process this request. Please only submit the documentation

relevant to your request.

Please Note: all organisations, institutions and individuals who wish to provide goods and/or services to

organs of the State must be registered on the National Treasury’s Central Supplier Database (CSD). This needs

to be done via their portal at https://secure.csd.gov.za/ before applying to Transnet.

General Terms and Conditions:

Please Note: Failure to submit the relevant documentation will delay the vendor creation / change process.

Where applicable, the respective Transnet Operating Division processing your application may request further

or additional information from your company.

The Service Provider warrants that the details of its bank account (“the nominated account”) provided herein,

are correct and acknowledges that payments due to the Supplier will be made into the nominated account. If

details of the nominated account should change, the Service Provider must notify Transnet in writing of such

change, failing which any payments made by Transnet into the nominated account will constitute a full

discharge of the indebtedness of Transnet to the Supplier in respect of the payment so made. Transnet will

incur no liability for any payments made to the incorrect account or any costs associated therewith. In such

an event, the Service Provider indemnifies and holds Transnet harmless in respect of any payments made to

an incorrect bank account and will, on demand, pay Transnet any costs associated herewith.

Transnet expects its suppliers to timeously renew their Tax Clearance and B-BBEE certificates (Large

Enterprises and QSEs less than 51% black owned) as well as sworn affidavits in the case of EMEs and QSEs

with more than 51% black ownership as per Appendices C and D.

In addition, please take note of the following very important information:

1. If your annual turnover is R10 million or less, then in terms of the DTI Generic Codes of Good Practice,

you are classified as an Exempted Micro Enterprise (EME). If your company is classified as an EME, please

include in your submission a sworn affidavit confirming your company’s most recent annual turnover is less

than R10 million and percentage of black ownership and black female ownership in the company (Appendix

C) OR B-BBEE certificate issued by a verification agency accredited by SANAS in terms of the EME scorecard

should you feel you will be able to attain a better B-BBEE score. It is only in this context that an EME may

submit a B-BBEE verification certificate. These EME sworn affidavits must be accepted by the . Government

introduced this mechanism specifically to reduce the cost of doing business and regulatory burden for these

entities and the template for the sworn affidavit is available at no cost on the website www.thedti.gov.za or

EME certificates at CIPC from www.cipic.co.za.

https://secure.csd.gov.za/

http://www.thedti.gov.za/

http://www.cipic.co.za/




The B-BBEE Commission said “that only time an EME can be verified by a SANAS accredited verification

professional is when it wishes to maximise its B-BBEE points and move to a higher B-BBEEE recognition level,

and that must be done use the QSE Scorecard”.

2. If your annual turnover is between R10 million and R50 million, then in terms of the DTI codes,

you are classified as a Qualifying Small Enterprise (QSE). A QSE which is at least 51% black owned, is required

to submit a sworn affidavit confirming their annual total revenue of between R10 million and R50 million and

level of black ownership (Appendix D). QSE ‘that does not qualify for 51% of black ownership, are required to

submit a B-BBEE verification certificate issued by a verification agency accredited by SANAS their QSEs are

required to submit a B-BBEE verification certificate issued by a verification agency accredited by SANAS.

Please Note: B-BBEE certificate and detailed scorecard should be obtained from an accredited rating agency

(e.g. SANAS Member).

3. If your annual turnover exceeds R50 million, then in terms of the DTI codes, you are classified as a

Large Enterprise. Large Enterprises are required to submit a B-BBEE level verification certificate issued by a

verification agency accredited by SANAS.

Please Note: B-BBEE certificate and detailed scorecard should be obtained from an accredited rating agency

(e.g. SANAS Member).

4. The supplier to furnish proof to the procurement department as required in the Fourth

Schedule of the Income Tax Act. 58 of 1962 whether a supplier of service is to be classified as an

“employee”, “personal service provider” or “labour broker”. Failure to do so will result in the supplier being

subject to employee’s tax.

5. No payments can be made to a vendor until the vendor has been registered / updated, and no vendor

can be registered / updated until the vendor application form, together with its supporting documentation,

has been received and processed. No payments can be made to a vendor until the vendor has met / comply

with the procurement requirements.

6. It is in line with PPPFA Regulations, only valid B-BBBEE status level certificate issued by an unauthorised

body or person OR a sworn affidavit as prescribed by the B-BBEE Codes of Good Practice, OR any other

requirement prescribed in terms of the Broad- Based Black Economic Empowerment Act.

7. The B-BBEE Commission advises entities and organs of state to reject B-BBEE certificates that have been

issues by verification agencies or professionals who are not accredited by South African National

Accreditation Systems (“SANAS) as such B-BBEE certificates are invalid for lack of authority and mandate to

issue them. A list of SANAS Accredited agencies is available on the SANAS website at www.sanas.co.za.

8. Presenting banking details. Please note: Banks have decided to enable the customers and provide the

ability for customers to generate Account Confirmation/Bank Account letters via their online platform; this is

a digital approach to the authentication of banking details.

http://www.sanas.co.za/




SUPPLIER DECLARATION FORM

Supplier Declaration Form

Important Notice: all organisations, institutions and individuals who wish to provide goods and/or services to organs of the State must be registered on the National Treasury Central Supplier Database (CSD). This needs to be done via their portal at https://secure.csd.gov.za/ before applying to Transnet.

CSD Number (MAAA xxxxxxx):

Company Trading Name

Company Registered Name

Company Registration No Or ID No If a Sole Proprietor

Company Income Tax Number

Form of Entity

CC Trust Pty Ltd Limited Partnership Sole Proprietor

Non-profit (NPO’s or

NPC)

Personal Liability Co

State Owned Co

National Govt Provincial Govt Local Govt

Educational Institution

Specialised Profession

Financial Institution

Joint Venture Foreign

International Foreign Branch Office

Did your company previously operate under another name? Yes No

If YES state the previous details below:

Trading Name

Registered Name

Company Registration No Or ID No If a Sole Proprietor

Form of Entity

CC Trust Pty Ltd Limited Partnership Sole Proprietor

Non-profit (NPO’s or

NPC)

Personal Liability Co

State Owned Co

National Govt Provincial Govt Local Govt

Educational Institution

Specialised Profession

Financial Institution

Joint Venture Foreign

International Foreign Branch Office

Your Current Company’s VAT Registration Status

VAT Registration Number

If Exempted from VAT registration, state reason and submit proof from SARS in confirming the exemption status

If your business entity is not VAT Registered, please submit a current original sworn affidavit (see example in Appendix I). Your Non VAT Registration must be confirmed annually.

Company Banking Details Bank Name

Universal Branch Code Bank Account Number

Company Physical Address

Code

Company Postal Address

Code

Company Telephone number

Company Fax Number

https://secure.csd.gov.za/




Company E-Mail Address

Company Website Address

Company Contact Person Name

Designation

Telephone

Email

Is your company a Labour Broker? Yes No

Main Product / Service Supplied e.g. Stationery / Consulting / Labour etc.

How many personnel does the business employ? Full Time Part Time

Please Note: Should your business employ more than 2 full time employees who are not connected persons as defined in the Income Tax Act, please submit a sworn affidavit, as per Appendix II.

Most recent Financial Year’s Annual Turnover <R10Million

EME

>R10Million <R50Million

QSE

>R50Million Large

Enterprise

Does your company have a valid proof of B-BBEE status? Yes No

Please indicate your Broad Based BEE status (Level 1 to 9)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Majority Race of Ownership

% Black Ownership % Black Women

Ownership

% Black Disabled

person(s) Ownership

% Black Youth Ownership

% Black Unemployed

% Black People

Living in Rural Areas

% Black Military Veterans

Please Note: Please provide proof of B-BBEE status as per Appendix C and D:

Large Enterprise and QSEs with less than 51% black ownership need to obtain a B-BBEE certificate and detailed scorecard from an accredited rating agency;

EMEs and QSEs with at least 51% black ownership may provide an affidavit using the templates provided in Appendix C and D respectively;

Black Disabled person(s) ownership will only be accepted if accompanied with a certified letter signed by a physician on the physician’s letterhead confirming the disability;

A certified South African identification document will be required for all Black Youth Ownership.

Supplier Development Information Required EMPOWERING SUPPLIER

An Empowering Supplier is a B-BBEE compliant Entity which complies with at

least three criteria if it is a large Entity, or one criterion if it is a Qualifying

Small Enterprise (“QSE”), as detailed in Statement 400 of the New Codes.

In terms of the requirements of an Empowering Supplier, numerous companies found it challenging to meet the target of 25% transformation of raw materials or beneficiation including local manufacturing, particularly so, if these companies imported goods or products from offshore. The matter was further compounded by the requirement for 25% of Cost of Sales, excluding labour cost and depreciation, to be procured from local producers or suppliers.

YES NO

FIRST TIME SUPPLIER

YES NO




A supplier that we haven’t as yet Traded within Transnet and will be registered via our database for the 1st time.

SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT PLAN Supplier Development Plan is a plan that when we as Transnet award a supplier a long term contract depending on the complexity of the Transaction. We will negotiate supplier development obligations that they must meet throughout the contract duration. e.g. we might request that they (create jobs or do skills development or encourage procurement from designated groups. (BWO, BYO & BDO etc.).

YES NO

DEVELOPMENT PLAN DOCUMENT Agreed plan that will be crafted with the supplier in regards to their development (It could be for ED OR SD in terms of their developmental needs they may require with the company.

YES NO

*If Yes- Attach supporting documents

ENTERPRISE DEVELOPMENT BENEFICIARY A supplier that is not as yet in our value chain that we are assisting in their developmental area.

YES NO

SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT BENEFICIARY A supplier that we are already doing business with or transacting with and we are also assisting them assisting them in their developmental area e.g. (They might require training or financial assistance etc.)

YES NO

GRADUATION FROM ED TO SD BENEFICIARY When a supplier that we assisted with as an ED beneficiary then gets awarded a business and we start Transacting with.

YES NO

ENTERPRISE DEVELOPMENT RECIPIENT A supplier that isn’t in our value chain as yet but we have assisted them with

an ED intervention

YES NO

By signing below, I hereby verify that I am duly authorised to sign for and on behalf of firm / organisation and that all information contained herein and attached herewith are true and correct Name and Surname

Designation

Signature

Date



RICHARDS BAY

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 8 T2.2-19: B-BBEE Socio-Economic Obligations

and Plan

T2.2-19: B-BBEE SOCIO-ECONOMIC OBLIGATIONS AND PLAN

As described in more detail in the attached B-BBEE Claim Form and as prescribed in terms of the Preferential

Procurement Policy Framework Act (PPPFA), Act 5 of 2000 and its Regulations. Tenderers are to note that

Transnet will allow a “preference” to companies who provide a valid B-BBEE Verification Certificate.

Tenderers are required to submit a SANAS accredited B-BBEE Certificate or a Sworn Affidavit as prescribed for

QSE’s or EME’s in Returnable Schedule T2.2-18 Transnet Vendor Registration Form.

The Table below indicates the various options available to Large Enterprises, QSEs and

EMEs to verify their B-BBEE status.

Enterprise Certificate

Large Certificate issued by SANAS accredited verification agency

QSE Certificate issued by SANAS accredited verification agency

Sworn Affidavit (only black-owned EMEs - 51% to 100% Black owned)

EME Certificate issued by SANAS accredited verification agency

Sworn Affidavit

5.1 B-BBEE Joint Ventures or Consortiums

Tenderers who would wish to respond to this tender as a Joint Venture [JV] or consortium with B-BBEE

entities, must state their intention to do so in their tender submission. Such Tenderers must also submit

a signed JV or consortium agreement between the parties clearly stating the percentage [%] split of

business and the associated responsibilities of each party. If such a JV or consortium agreement is

unavailable, the partners must submit confirmation in writing of their intention to enter into a JV or

consortium agreement should they be awarded business by Transnet through this tender process. This

written confirmation must clearly indicate the percentage [%] split of business and the responsibilities

of each party. In such cases, award of business will only take place once a signed copy of a JV or

consortium agreement is submitted to Transnet.

Note: Failure to submit a valid and original Consolidated B-BBEE certificate for the JV or a certified copy

thereof at the Closing Date of this tender will result in a score of zero being allocated for B-BBEE.

5.2 Subcontracting

Transnet fully endorses Government’s transformation and empowerment objectives and when

contemplating subcontracting Tenderers are requested to give preference to companies which are Black



RICHARDS BAY


and Plan

Owned, Black Women Owned, Black Youth Owned, owned by Black People with Disabilities, EMEs and

QSEs including any companies designated as B-BBEE Facilitators1.

First preference should be given to companies with 100% ownership by designated groups;

Second preference should be given to companies with less than 100% but greater than 51%

ownership by designated groups;

Final preference should be given to companies with less than 51% ownership by designated

groups but are South African owned.

If contemplating subcontracting, please note that a Tenderer will not be awarded points for B-BBEE if

it is indicated in its Tender that such Tenderer intends subcontracting more than 25% [twenty-five

percent] of the value of the contract to an entity/entities that do not qualify for at least the same points

that the Tenderer qualifies for, unless the intended subcontractor is an EME with the capability to

execute the contract.

A person awarded a contract may not subcontract more than 25% [twenty-five percent] of the value

of the contract to any other enterprise that does not have an equal or higher B-BBEE status level than

the person concerned, unless the contract is subcontracted to an EME that has the capability and ability

to execute the subcontract.

5.3 B-BBEE Improvement Plan

Transnet encourages Service Provider(s) to constantly strive to improve their B-BBEE rating. Whereas

Tenderers will be allocated points in terms of a preference point system based on its B-BBEE scorecard

to be assessed as detailed in paragraph 5.1 above, in addition to such scoring, Transnet also requests

that Tenderers submit a B-BBEE improvement plan.

Bidders with less than 51% black ownership are requested to commit to transform their business to be

at least 51% (fifty one percent) black owned within 1 (one) year. Failure for bidders to comply with this

may result in penalties until such time as they improve their black ownership to 51%.

Tenderers are to insert their current status (%) and future targets (%) for the B-BBEE Improvement

Plan [i.e. not the % change but the end-state quantum expressed as a percentage] in the table below.

This will indicate how you intend to sustain or improve your B-BBEE rating over the contract period. On

agreement, this will represent a binding commitment to the successful Tenderer.

Transnet reserves the right to request supporting evidence to substantiate the commitments made in

the B-BBEE Improvement Plan.

1 The Minister of the Department of Trade and Industry has the power to designate certain Organs of State or Public

Entities as B-BBEE Facilitators. For example, the South African National Military Veterans’ Association (SANMVA) has been designated as a B-BBEE Facilitator. As such they will be treated as having rights of ownership held 100% by Black People, 40% by Black Women and 20% by Black designated groups.



RICHARDS BAY


and Plan

OWNERSHIP INDICATOR Required Responses Current

Status (%) Future

Target (%)

1. The percentage of the business owned by Black2 persons.

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which ownership in the hands of Black persons as a percentage of total ownership of the organisation would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

2. The percentage of your business owned by Black women.

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which ownership in the hands of Black women as a percentage of total ownership of the organisation would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

3. The percentage of the business owned by Black youth3

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which ownership in the hands of Black youth as a percentage of total ownership of the organisation would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

4. The percentage of the business owned by Black persons living with disabilities

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which ownership in the hands of Black disabled persons as a percentage of total ownership of the organisation would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

5. New Entrants4 (Early stage business)

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which new entrants will be supported over the contract period.

2 “Black” means South African Blacks , Coloureds and Indians , as defined in the B-BBEE Act, 53 of 2003

3 “Black youth” means Black persons from the age of 16 to 35 4 “New Entrants” means an early stage business which is similar to a start-up. However, an early stage business is typically 3

years old or less.



RICHARDS BAY

May 2018 Part T2: Returnable Schedules T2.2-19: BBBEE and Socio-Economic

Obligations and Plan Page 4 of 8

MANAGEMENT CONTROL INDICATOR

Required Responses Current Status (%)

Future Targets (%)

6. The percentage of Black Board members in relation to the total number of Board members

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the number of Black Board members, as a percentage of the total Board, would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

7. The percentage of Black female Board members in relation to the total number of Board members

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the number of Black female Board members, as a percentage of the total Board, would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

8. Black Executives directors as a percentage of all executive

directors

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the number of Black executive Directors as a percentage of all Executive Directors would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

9. Black female Executives directors as a percentage of all executive directors

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the number of Black female executive Directors as a percentage of all Executive Directors would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

Other Executive Management Required Response Current

Status (%)

Future

Targets (%)

10. Black Executive Management as a percentage of all executive directors

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the number of Black executive Managers as a percentage of all Executive Directors would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

11. Black Female Executive Management as a percentage of all executive directors

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the number of Black female executive Managers as a percentage of all Executive Directors would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

Senior Management Required Response Current

Status (%) Future

Targets (%)

12. Black employees in Senior Management as a percentage of all senior management

Provide the percentage of Blacks that would be appointed or retained by the Board and would be operationally involved in the day to day senior management of the business, with individual responsibility for overall and/or financial management of the business and actively involved in the development and implementation of overall strategy, over the contract period.

13. Black female employees in Senior Management as a percentage of all senior management

Provide the percentage of Black females that would be appointed or retained by the Board and would be operationally involved in the day to day senior management of the business, with



RICHARDS BAY



individual responsibility for overall and/or financial management of the business and actively involved in the development and implementation of overall strategy, over the contract period.

Middle Management Required Response Current

Status (%) Future

Targets (%)

14. Black employees in Middle Management as a percentage of all middle management

Provide the percentage of Blacks that would be retained or appointed by the organisation in the middle management cadre and would be operationally involved in the day to day management of the business, with individual responsibility for a particular area within the business and actively involved in the day to day management of the organisation, over the contract period.

15. Black female employees in Middle Management as a percentage of all middle management

Provide the percentage of Blacks females that would be retained or appointed by the organisation in the middle management cadre and would be operationally involved in the day to day management of the business, with individual responsibility for a particular area within the business and actively involved in the day to day management of the organisation, over the contract period.

Junior Management Required Response Current

Status (%) Future

Targets (%)

16. Black employees in Junior management as a percentage of all junior management

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the number of Black Junior Managers as a percentage of the total junior Managers, would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

17. Black female employees in Junior management as a percentage of all junior management

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the number of Black female Junior Managers as a percentage of the total junior Managers, would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

Employees with disabilities Required Response Current

Status (%) Future

Targets (%)

18. Black employees with

disabilities as a percentage of all employees

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which the percentage of Black disabled employees, in relation to the total of all employees in the organisation, would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

PREFERENTIAL PROCUREMENT INDICATOR

Required Responses Current

Status (%) Future

Targets (%)



RICHARDS BAY



19. B-BBEE procurement spend from all Empowering Suppliers5 based on the B-BBEE procurement recognition level as a percentage of total measured procurement spend

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which B-BBEE spend from all Empowering Suppliers would be sustained or increased over the contract period.

20. B-BBEE procurement spend from all Empowering Suppliers QSEs based on the applicable B-BBEE Procurement Recognition Levels as a percentage of Total Measured Procurement

Spend

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which B-BBEE spend from Empowering Supplier QSEs would be sustained or increased over the contract period

21. B-BBEE procurement spend from Exempted Micro- Enterprise based on the applicable B-BBEE procurement recognition Levels as a percentage of Total Measured Procurement Spend

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which B-BBEE spend from EMEs would be sustained or increased over the contract period

22. B-BBEE procurement spend from Empowering Suppliers that are at least 51% black owned based on the applicable B-BBEE Procurement Recognition Levels as a percentage of

Total Measured Procurement Spend

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which spend from Empowering Suppliers who are more than 51% Black-owned would be maintained or increased over the contract period.

23. B-BBEE procurement spend from Empowering Suppliers that are at least 30% black women owned based on the applicable B-BBEE Procurement Recognition Levels as a percentage of Total Measured Procurement Spend

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which spend from Empowering Suppliers who are more than 30% Black women-owned would be maintained or increased over the contract period.

24. B-BBEE Procurement Spent from Designated Group6

Provide a commitment based on the extent to which spend from suppliers from

5 “Empowering Suppliers” means a B-BBEE compliant entity, which should meet at least three of the following criteria if it is a

Large Enterprise or one if it is a QSE: (a) At least 25% of cost of sales excluding labour cost and depreciation must be procured from local producers or local supplier in SA, for service industry labour cost are included but capped to 15%. (b) Job creation - 50% of jobs created are for Black people provided that the number of Black employees since the immediate prior verified B-BBEE Measurement is maintained. (c) At least 25% transformation of raw material/beneficiation which include local manufacturing, production and/or assembly,

and/or packaging. (d) Skills transfer - at least spend 12 days per annum of productivity deployed in assisting Black EMEs and QSEs beneficiaries to increase their operation or financial capacity.

6 “Designated Groups” means:



RICHARDS BAY



Suppliers that are at least 51% Black owned

Designated Group Suppliers that are at least 51% Black owned would be maintained or increased over the contract period.

SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT INDICATOR

Required Response Current

Status (%) Future

Target (%)

25. Annual value of all Supplier Development7 Contributions made by the Measured entity as a percentage of the target

Provide a commitment based on the percentage in your organisation’s annual spend on Supplier Development initiatives, will be maintained or improved over the contract period.

ENTERPRISE DEVELOPMENT INDICATOR

Required Response Current Status (%)

Future Target (%)

26. The organisation’s annual

spend on Enterprise Development8 as a percentage of Net Profit after Tax [NPAT]

Provide a commitment based on the retention or increase in your organisation’s annual spend on Enterprise Development initiatives, as a percentage of its Net Profit after Tax, over the contract period.

5.4 Supplier Development Initiatives

Historically in South Africa there has been a lack of investment in infrastructure, skills and capability

development and inequality in the income distribution and wealth of a significant portion of the

population. There have been a number of Government initiatives developed to address these

challenges. In particular, the New Growth Path [NGP] and New Development Plan [NDP] aligns and

builds on previous policies to ensure the achievement of Government’s development objectives for

South Africa.

Transnet fully endorses and supports Government’s economic policies through its facilitation of Supplier

Development [SD] initiatives. As this (the first phase) RFP is to frame an approved list, there will be a

second phase where Transnet will issue individual RFP’s to the market for specific work packages. SD

a) unemployed black people not attending and required by law to attend an educational institution and not awaiting admission

to an educational institution; b) black people who are youth as defined in the National Youth Commission Act of 1996; c) black people who are persons with disabilities as defined in the Codes of Good Practice on employment of people with

disabilities issued under the Employment Equity Act; d) black people living in rural and under developed areas; and e) black military veterans who qualifies to be called a military veteran in terms of the Military Veterans Act 18 of 2011. 7 “Supplier Development” means monetary or non-monetary contributions carried out for the benefit of value-adding suppliers

to the Measured Entity, with the objective of contributing to the development, sustainability and financial and operational independence of those beneficiaries: (a) Supplier Development Contributions to suppliers that are Exempted Micro-Enterprises or Qualifying Small Enterprises which

are at least 51% black owned or at least 51% black women owned. Supplier Development within the contest of the B-BBEE scorecard must be differentiated from Transnet’s Supplier Development Initiatives. Whereas the former relates to the definition above, the latter relates to improving the socio-economic environment through initiatives that are committed to as part of a contract award that contribute to the development of a competitive supplier base in relation to a particular industry.

8 “Enterprise Development” means monetary and non-monetary contributions carried out for the following beneficiaries, with the objective of contributing to the development, sustainability and financial and operational independence of those beneficiaries: (a) Enterprise Development Contributions to Exempted Micro-Enterprises or Qualifying Small Enterprises which are at least 51% Black owned or at least 51% Black women owned;



RICHARDS BAY



responses will be evaluated as part of the second phase and as such, no SD evaluation will take place

in this first phase. The aim of the revised approach to Supplier Development is intended to ensure

that TCP maximises the value and impact of Supplier Development initiatives executed on its

projects. Bidders are however required to be aware that they will be required to adhere to Supplier

Development obligations stipulated by TCP, as and when bids are solicited from the approved list.

These obligations may include, but are not limited to, Transnet prescribing the required Joint Venture

or Subcontracting portions and value to be added in terms of the contractor and subcontractor

agreements (this may include a number of skills development and job creation requirements [please

refer to Section 9, paragraph 1.2a for a full list of potential SD requirements]). The intention of this is

to ensure that subcontractors add value, improve their skills and increase their experience in order to

be able to tender as a standalone party in future engagements.

Transnet reserves the right to use Supplier Development as an objective criterion to justify the award

of business to a bidder other than the highest scoring bidder. All Tenderers are therefore advised that

Transnet may decide at its sole discretion to use SD as an objective criteria on the following basis:

The extent by which bidders are prepared to exceed the minimum SD prequalification

threshold to be stated in each of the subsequent award of work RFP’s.

In order to maximise compliance to SD requirements, the suppliers will be required to submit auditable

SD reports against the signed requirements on a project by project basis. Transnet reserves the right

to complete audits of these reports as well as the suppliers business to ensure that SD commitments

are delivered as agreed.

_______________________

Tenderer Name

________________________ ____________________________

Tenderer’s Signature Date




2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 2 T2.2-20: Certificate of Acquaintance with Tender Documents

T2.2-20: Certificate of Acquaintance with Tender Documents

NAME OF TENDERING ENTITY:

__________________________________________________________________________________

1. By signing this certificate I/we acknowledge that I/we have made myself/ourselves thoroughly

familiar with, and agree with all the conditions governing this RFP. This includes those terms

and conditions of the Contract, the Supplier Integrity Pact, Non-Disclosure Agreement etc.

contained in any printed form stated to form part of the documents thereof, but not limited to

those listed in this clause.

2. I/we furthermore agree that Transnet SOC Ltd shall recognise no claim from me/us for relief

based on an allegation that I/we overlooked any TENDER/contract condition or failed to take it

into account for the purpose of calculating my/our offered prices or otherwise.

3. I/we understand that the accompanying Tender will be disqualified if this Certificate is found

not to be true and complete in every respect.

4. For the purposes of this Certificate and the accompanying Tender, I/we understand that the

word “competitor” shall include any individual or organisation, other than the Tenderer,

whether or not affiliated with the Tenderer, who:

a) has been requested to submit a Tender in response to this Tender invitation;

b) could potentially submit a Tender in response to this Tender invitation, based on their

qualifications, abilities or experience; and

c) provides the same Services as the Tenderer and/or is in the same line of business as

the Tenderer

5. The Tenderer has arrived at the accompanying Tender independently from, and without

consultation, communication, agreement or arrangement with any competitor. However

communication between partners in a joint venture or consortium will not be construed as

collusive Tendering.

6. In particular, without limiting the generality of paragraph 5 above, there has been no

consultation, communication, agreement or arrangement with any competitor regarding:

a) prices;

b) geographical area where Services will be rendered [market allocation]

c) methods, factors or formulas used to calculate prices;




2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 2 of 2 T2.2-20: Certificate of Acquaintance with Tender Documents

d) the intention or decision to submit or not to submit, a Tender;

e) the submission of a Tender which does not meet the specifications and conditions of

the TENDER; or

f) Tendering with the intention not winning the Tender.

7. In addition, there have been no consultations, communications, agreements or arrangements

with any competitor regarding the quality, quantity, specifications and conditions or delivery

particulars of the Services to which this TENDER relates.

8. The terms of the accompanying Tender have not been, and will not be, disclosed by the

Tenderer, directly or indirectly, to any competitor, prior to the date and time of the official

Tender opening or of the awarding of the contract.

9. I/We am/are aware that, in addition and without prejudice to any other remedy provided to

combat any restrictive practices related to Tenders and contracts, Tenders that are suspicious

will be reported to the Competition Commission for investigation and possible imposition of

administrative penalties in terms of section 59 of the Competition Act No 89 of 1998 and/or

may be reported to the National Prosecuting Authority [NPA] for criminal investigation. In

addition, Tenderers that submit suspicious Tenders may be restricted from conducting business

with the public sector for a period not exceeding 10 [ten] years in terms of the Prevention and

Combating of Corrupt Activities Act No 12 of 2004 or any other applicable legislation.

Signed on this _____ day of ___________________20___

_____________________________





2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 1 T2.2-21: Risk Elements

T2.2-21: Risk Elements

Tenderers to review the potential risk elements associated with the Project. The risk elements are

to be listed separately in this Schedule. If No Risks are identified “No Risks” must be stated on

this schedule.

Notwithstanding this information, all costs related to risk elements which are at the Contractor’s

risk are deemed to be included in the tenderer’s offered total of the Prices.

Signed

Date

Name Position

Tenderer



2018 Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 3 T2.2-22: Supplier Development

Commitment

T2.2-22: Supplier Development Commitment

Tenderers are required to commit a minimum of 15% of the cumulative contract value on Supplier

Development Initiatives. This commitment must be discharged against the following Supplier

Development categories as outlined in the T2.2-24: Supplier Development Plan [Annexure B]:

Focus area: Description Percentage

Job creation All Jobs created must be from black people within the project area.

Skills

Development

Future skills transfer within the industry, with an emphasis on the

accumulation of the knowledge and experience, which will occur as

a result of the transaction.

Regional

Spend and

Local

Economic

Development

Social up-liftmen program targeted at health, safety and/or education

around where the project is taking place.

I/We do hereby agree to the following should I/we fail to meet the required commitments in relation

to SD:

Non-Compliance Penalties:

a) If the Supplier fails, at any agreed milestone, to achieve its commitments under and

in accordance with the Supplier Development Implementation Plan (“a Non-

Compliance”), the Supplier shall pay a Non-Compliance penalty (“Non-compliance

Penalty”) to Transnet in respect of such Non-compliance as set out in paragraph (e)

below. The penalties shall be imposed per milestone measurement or for non-delivery

of committed values.

b) Tenderers are to note that Transnet will determine the size of the entity (i.e. EME,

QSE and Large) and the applicable Non-compliance Penalties annually based on the

Supplier’s turnover in the year the penalty applies.

c) Failure to adhere to the milestones and targets defined in an Implementation Plan

shall result in the invocation of financial penalties. To the extent that the Actual

Supplier Development Spend is lower than the Required Supplier Development

Spend (or the Adjusted Required Supplier Development Spend, as the case may be),

the Supplier shall be liable for Penalties calculated which is the difference in value

between the Actual Supplier Development Spend and the Required Supplier




Commitment

Development Spend (or the Adjusted Required Supplier Development Spend, as the

case may be) plus an additional percentage as indicated in the Table under paragraph

e) below. Such Non-compliance Penalties shall be calculated and levied at the relevant

milestones as stipulated in the Supplier Development Implementation Plan in

accordance with the table below.

d) Breach of SD obligations also provide Transnet cause to terminate the contract in

certain cases where material milestones are not being achieved.

e) Table: SD Non Compliance Penalties

In relation to Supplier Development Implementation Plan, Non Compliance Penalties shall apply as

follows:

Company Size SD Penalty

Large Measured Entities

(LME)

The difference in value between the committed and

delivered SD value plus an additional 10% (ten per

cent) of such difference

Qualifying Small Enterprise

(QSE)


delivered SD value plus an additional 5% (five per


Exempted Micro Enterprises

(EME)


delivered SD value plus an additional 3% (three per


For the purposes of this paragraph –

Actual Supplier Development Spend means the monetary value of SD initiatives

actually delivered by the Supplier during the period under review;

Required Supplier Development Spend means the monetary value of SD obligations

that the Supplier has agreed to deliver during the period under review;

Adjusted Required Supplier Development Spend means any adjustment to the

Required SD spend as agreed to between the parties, reduced to writing and signed

by the parties.

Non-compliance Penalty Certificate:

f) If any Non-compliance Penalty arises, the Supplier Development Manager shall issue

a Non-compliance Penalty Certificate on the last day of each month during such Non-




Commitment

compliance indicating the Non-compliance Penalties which have accrued during that

period.

g) A Non-compliance Penalty Certificate shall be prima facie proof of the matters to which

it relates. If the Supplier disputes any of the amounts set out in a Non-compliance

Penalty Certificate:

the dispute shall be resolved in accordance with the provisions of the Agreement;

and

if pursuant to that referral, it is determined that the Supplier owes any amount to

Transnet pursuant to the Non-compliance Penalty Certificate, then the Supplier shall

pay such amount to Transnet within 10 (ten) Business Days of the determination

made pursuant to such determination and an accompanying valid Tax Invoice.

Payment of Non-compliance Penalties:

h) Subject to Clause (g) above, the Supplier shall pay the Non-compliance Penalty

indicated in the Non-compliance Penalty Certificate within 10 (ten) Business Days of

Transnet issuing a valid Tax Invoice to the Supplier for the amount set out in that

certificate. If Transnet does not issue a valid Tax Invoice to the Supplier for Non-

compliance Penalties accrued during any relevant period, those Non-compliance

Penalties shall be carried forward to the next period.

i) The Supplier shall pay the amount due within 10 (ten) days after receipt of a valid Tax

Invoice from Transnet, failing which Transnet shall, without prejudice to any other

rights of Transnet under this Agreement, be entitled to call for payment which may be

in any form Transnet deems reasonable and/or appropriate.

j) Should the Supplier fail to pay any Non Compliance Penalties within the time indicated

above (as applicable), Transnet shall be entitled to deduct (set off) the amount not

paid by the Supplier from the account of the Supplier in the ensuing month.

SIGNED at ___________________________ on this _____ day of _______________20___

___________________________




DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY _____________________________________________________________________________________________

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 23 T2.2-23: Transnet Supplier Development

T2.2-23: Returnable Schedule - Transnet Supplier Development

1.0 Aim and Objectives:

Historically in South Africa there has been a lack of investment in infrastructure, skills, capability and

inequality in the income distribution and wealth of a significant portion of the population. There have

been a number of Government initiatives developed to address these challenges. In particular, the New

Growth Path (NGP) developed in 2010 aligns and builds on previous policies to ensure the achievement

of Government’s development objectives for South Africa. The key focuses of the NGP include:

Increasing employment intensity of the economy;

Increasing the responsiveness of infrastructure and addressing competitiveness;

Balancing spatial development of rural areas and poorer provinces;

Reducing the carbon intensity of the economy;

Creating opportunities in changing regional and global environments, and

Enabling transformation that benefits a wider range of social actors in society e.g. workers,

rural communities, women etc.

Transnet, as a State Owned Company (SOC) plays an important role to ensure these objectives are

met. Therefore, the purchasing of goods and services needs to be aligned to government objectives of

developing and transforming the local supply base. Transnet’s mission is to transform its supplier base

by engaging in targeted supplier development (SD) initiatives to support localisation and

industrialisation whilst providing meaningful opportunities for black South Africans with a particular

emphasis on:

Youth;

Black women;

Small businesses;

People with disabilities.

2.0 Tenderer Requirements:

Failure to submit and comply with the eligibility criteria relating to F2.1 of tender data will result in a

tender being disqualified or being deemed non responsive.

3.0 Supplier Development:

To aid its implementation of SD, Transnet has adapted an existing framework from the Department of

Public Enterprises (DPE). This framework allows for a basic set of principles to be applied to

appropriately target SD initiatives. Supplier development initiatives aim to build local suppliers that are

competitive through building capability and capacity. Hence the framework has been termed the

Increased Competitiveness, Capability and Capacity (IC3) Supplier Development Classification Matrix.





For a detailed understanding of the IC3 Matrix, the respective SD initiatives and their objectives please

refer to Transnet’s SD Guideline Document for completion of the SD Plan in Annexure A. Currently there

are four quadrants of SD initiatives which Transnet considers according to the IC3 Matrix. This tender

has been identified as a Focused which involves lower industrial leverage and high value.

Transnet fully endorses and supports Government’s New Growth Path Policy which aims to create five

million jobs by the year 2020. Accordingly, the contractor shall submit Supplier Development Plan

demonstrating their commitment and support to the New Growth Path Policy and how an appointment

in terms of this agreement would assist the policy in achieving its objectives.

The table below sets out the categories that the comprehensive Supplier Development Plan should

contain.

The following Supplier Development (SD) focus areas have been identified which forms part of the

evaluation criteria, namely:

Category Description

Skills development Future skills transfer within the industry, with an

emphasis on the accumulation of the knowledge and

experience, which will occur as a result of the

transaction.

Job creation The increase in the number of jobs, by the Contractor,

as a result of the award of business from Transnet.

Rural Integration and Local

Economic Development

The Monetary Value of CSI to be spent on the rural

community development projects.

Regional Spend The encouragement of growth and expansion of

emerging microenterprises, qualifying small

enterprises and start-ups through procurement and

support mechanisms provided by the potential

Contractor.

In response to this tender all tenderers are required to submit an appropriate SD Plan. Annexure A

provides a SD Guideline Document for completion of the SD Plan.

This is to be developed in the format provided in Annexure B which will represent a binding

commitment on the part of the successful tenderers. The SD Plan should outline the type of activities





the tenderer intends embarking upon should they be awarded the contract. This plan should provide an

overview of what they intend to achieve and the mechanisms through which they will achieve their

objectives.

Annexure B further indicates the detailed areas which need to be completed for each of the evaluation

criteria listed above. The tenderer is required to address each aspect detailed in this document and

indicated in Annexure B as a minimum in their submission. This list is not exhaustive and the tenderer

must not be limited to these areas when completing each section. The tenderer must provide

supported calculations on how the Estimated Rand Values (ZAR) are derived.

SD Plan Document: Your SD Plan constitutes an offer to perform all SD commitments at the price

indicated in Annexure B and will represent a binding commitment at Contract Date (Refer to as per the

additional conditions of the contract ( Z1.1 –Z1.8) found in the contract data (C1.2))

Attached herewith the following documentation:

SD Plan Guideline Document – Annexure A

This document must be used as a guideline to complete the SD Plan Document.

SD Plan Template – Annexure B

Note:

Should a JV be envisaged, the principal respondent is required to submit the required response

as indicated above.

Signed Date

Name Designation

Tenderer



DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY _______________________________________________________________________________________________________


Annexure A

GUIDELINES FOR COMPLETION OF A SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT PLAN

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 WHAT IS SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT?...................................................................................... 5

2 BACKGROUND AND GUIDANCE ON THE SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT OBJECTIVES FOR SOUTH

AFRICA ................................................................................................................................. 5

3 TRANSNET’S SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT OBJECTIVES ............................................................. 6

4 RESPONSE BASED ON THE IC3 MATRIX QUADRANTS ............................................................. 7

5 SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT CATEGORY DEFINITIONS AND HIGH LEVEL DESCRIPTIONS .......... 10

6 MARKET INTELLIGENCE ASSISTANCE .................................................................................. 15

7 GOVERNMENT POLICY DOCUMENTS .................................................................................... 16

8 OTHER REFERENCE WEBSITES ............................................................................................ 16

GLOSSARY OF WORDS ............................................................................................................... 17

Note

For the purposes of this document, any reference to a/the “Service Provider” shall be construed

to mean a reference to a Respondent (in terms of this RFT) and/or to a successful Respondent (to

whom the business is to be awarded), as so indicated by the context hereinafter.





WHAT IS SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT?

The Supplier Development (SD) Programme is an initiative of the Department of Public Enterprises (DPE)

supported by Transnet. The aim of SD is to increase the competitiveness, capacity and capability of the

South African supply base where there are comparative advantages and potential competitive advantages

of local or regional supply. This can be achieved through skills transfer, increasing the local content of

items procured, as well as building new capability in the local supplier base. In addition, SD has its roots

grounded firmly around the transformation of South Africa and the empowerment of previously

disadvantaged individuals and enterprises.

BACKGROUND AND GUIDANCE ON THE SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT OBJECTIVES FOR SOUTH

AFRICA

As a developing economy with inherent structural and social imbalances, South Africa is facing the

significant economic challenge of increasing growth in a manner that includes all South Africans. The

historical lack of investment in infrastructure in South Africa has had significant negative impacts on local

industry, resulting in a loss of key skills and a decrease in manufacturing industry capabilities. To respond

to this, Government policies have been designed to address these imbalances and to act as a catalyst of

change for the benefit of South Africa.

One of these Government policies, the New Growth Path (NGP) aims to enhance growth, employment

creation and equity by reducing the dependencies of South African industries on imports, and promoting

the development of skills and capabilities that are in short supply within the country. It identifies strategies

that will enable South Africa to grow in a more equitable and inclusive manner and promotes the

development of new industry to attain South Africa’s developmental agenda.

Transnet’s SD is closely aligned to the NGP objectives and as a result is able to fulfil its commitment to

sustainability within South Africa whilst at the same time addressing other corporate objectives, including

increasing productivity and efficiency, volume growth, capital investment, financial stability, funding,

human capital, SHEQ regulatory compliance and improving customer service.

The combined objectives of Transnet and Government can be realised through:

Aggressively implementing capital investment plans which will result in competitive local

industries;

Improving operational efficiency;

Using procurement to influence the development of the local supplier industry; and

Ensuring it creates sufficient opportunities for the participation of previously disadvantaged

groups in the economy.

This will lead to Transnet achieving its long-term objective of increasing both shareholder and societal

value using its procurement expenditure to ensure local development through sustainable localisation of

its supply chain, and the inclusion of the previously disadvantaged individuals in the economy in a manner

that is beneficial to Transnet, South African industry, and the population of South Africa. As a result this





State Owned Company (SOC) is able to fulfil its responsibility as the biggest player in the South African

freight logistics chain whilst complementing the objectives of Government.

TRANSNET’S SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT OBJECTIVES

To aid its implementation of SD, Transnet has adapted an existing framework from the DPE. This

framework allows for a basic set of principles to be applied to appropriately target SD initiatives. Supplier

Development initiatives aim to assist local suppliers in developing their competitive advantage through

increasing their capability and capacity potential. Hence the framework has been termed the Increased

Competitiveness, Capability and Capacity (IC3) Supplier Development Classification Matrix.

This contract encapsulates the types of SD opportunities which Transnet currently considers effective and

allows Transnet to move its SD structure away from a dynamic policy environment towards a contract

that is designed around general Supplier Development objectives. This enables Transnet to adopt a

standard structure but also allows the flexibility to reconsider emphasis on certain aspects as objectives

change. The IC3 Matrix (refer to Figure 1 below) categorises SD opportunities in a matrix based on their

value, extent of industrial leverage and strategic importance to Transnet. Further categorisation of

opportunities into the relevant quadrants is based on supplier-buyer power, industrial complexity, risk

and the length of procurement period.

Figure 1: The IC3 Supplier Development Classification Matrix

In order for Service Providers to successfully meet the needs of a particular initiative, a detailed

understanding of each quadrant is required.

Value Leverage refers to transactions where the financial scale of the transaction allows the buyer the opportunity to negotiate supplier developmentIndustrial Leverage refers to transactions whereby the nature of the procurement is such that the scale and the industrial complexity of the item being purchased allows for local supply chain development around a particular industryStrategic Importance to Transnet refers to the extent to which the product to be procured has a impact on Transnet’s core business

Value leverage

Hig

hLo

w

HighLow

Focused

Small

Enterprise

Development

Programmatic

Strategic

Ind

ustr

ial le

ve

rag

e

Stra

teg

ic Im

po

rtan

ce

to T

ran

sn

et

Industrialisation

Localisation and Supplier Development

SkillsDevelopment

To ease implementation of SD within Transnet, a framework to encompass all types of SD opportunities was developed by the DPE

The IC3 supplier development classification matrix assists in categorising opportunities according to their industrial leverage, value leverage and strategic importance to Transnet

Once opportunities are identified it will be possible to identify the policy/procedural tools that should be implemented to maximise the full supplier development potential from the opportunities

IC3 Supplier Development Classification Matrix Not currently a focus area





Programmatic

Programmatic initiatives follow a longer than normal planning horizon and generally exceed

the funding capacity of Transnet’s balance sheet. They are identified either in the Industrial

Policy Action Plan II (IPAP II) or through the SOC as a strategic fleet. Collaboration between

the SOC and Government is achieved through focused task teams whereby infrastructure

development and industrialisation is achieved through joint support and in some cases public

spending. Investment is focused in plant, technology and skills in both intermediate and

advanced capabilities to develop competitive advantage.

Strategic

Strategic initiatives follow a three to five year planning horizon, involving investment in at

least plant, technology and/or skills in intermediate capabilities. This enforces the need for

multinational corporations and Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) to develop a

certain percentage of their products locally. Strategic initiatives can therefore be used to

achieve localisation objectives by increasing the competitiveness, capability and efficiency

of local suppliers. Strategic initiatives can sometimes focus on advanced capabilities but will

in most cases require Government support to develop local capability.

Focused

Focused initiatives include all high value transactions with limited industrial leverage and

medium to low strategic importance. These initiatives address short to medium-term

contracts that can be leveraged to encourage Supplier Development, with a focus on

investment in technology or skills to enhance existing local capability. Emphasis will largely

be placed on benefiting previously disadvantaged individuals. The overall result improves

the socio-economic environment by creating competitive local suppliers and furthers

objectives of empowerment, transformation and regional development.

Small Enterprise Development

Small Enterprise Development initiatives are typically of low value and have no industrial

leverage as they are characterised by typically low complexity goods and high competition.

These initiatives concentrate on increasing the capability of small local suppliers and are

targeted toward historically disadvantaged individuals and communities, providing basic

skills development and improving local employment and quality job creation. It includes a

wide range of non-financial services that help entrepreneurs start new business and grow

existing ones.

RESPONSE BASED ON THE IC3 MATRIX QUADRANTS

Based on the supplier-buyer power, industrial complexity, risk and the length of procurement period, the

Service Provider is expected to formulate a SD Plan to identify the opportunities that it will pursue. Ideally

the SD Plan should address factors that are specific to the applicable quadrant of the IC3 matrix.





Transnet has identified a number of opportunities which may aid a Service Provider in formulating its

response based on each quadrant. Each of the opportunities identified by the Service Provider should

have a direct or indirect effect on the value it creates for the country in order to maximise the socio-

economic impact.

Figure 2: Transnet value capture through supplier influence

Programmatic

The strategic objective of “Programmatic transactions” is to assist Government to achieve

its industrialisation objectives through the development of the local supplier base, in order

to increase the cost efficiency of SOE procurement, support and maintenance programmes.

In order to satisfy this objective a number of focus areas and key outcomes have been

identified:

Programmatic Focus Areas -

Technology transfer;

Skills development related to the manufacturing process and the industry

Development of new technology and innovation;

Investment in plant;

Development of local companies aligned to empowerment objectives.

Small Enterprise

Development

Focused

Strategic

Programmatic

Strategic Focused Small ED

*Points allocated in further recognition of certain components of BBBEE in line with Transnet and government objectives

Programmatic

• Localisation

• Technology transfer/ sustainability

• Skills development

• Job creation / preservation

• Small business promotion

• Further recognition*

• Rural development and regional

integration

• Industrialisation

• Technology transfer/ sustainability


• Job creation/ preservation




integration

• localisation

• . Job creation/ preservation




integration



• Job preservation

Decreasing

emphasis on

evaluation

criteria

categories

Sphere of

influence

**

** Indicative and varies on business and Macro Economic need

**





Key Outcomes -

Industrialisation/localisation;

Technology transfer;

Skills development.

Strategic

The main objective of Strategic transactions is to leverage local downstream suppliers

through large-scale SOE procurement in order to develop a competitive local supplier base.

In response to these objectives the following are the specific focus areas and key outcomes

applicable:

Strategic Focus Areas -

Transfer of technology and innovation to local suppliers from foreign OEM’s;

Skills development related to the industry;

Development of local companies aligned to empowerment objectives.

Key Outcomes -

Localisation;

Increased technology transfer;

Skills development;

Job creation.

Focused

Focused initiatives assist local suppliers to improve their performance, enhance their existing

production and skills capabilities with emphasis being placed on benefiting previously

disadvantaged individuals and rural development. In order to satisfy these objectives a

number of focus areas and key outcomes have been identified:

Focused Focus Areas -

Developing a local supplier base that supports preferential procurement

outcomes;

Developing skills within the specific industry;

Creating opportunity for jobs;

Reducing income inequality in specific regions.

Key Outcomes -

Empowerment;





Skills development;

Rural development;

Job creation.

Small Business Development

Enterprise Development (ED) objectives are centred around assisting local suppliers to

improve their skills by placing increased emphasis on benefiting previously disadvantaged

individuals and rural development in line with the Broad-Based Black Economic

Empowerment (B-BBEE) strategy. The following focus areas and key outcomes have been

identified:

Small Business Development Focus Areas -

Providing small businesses with opportunities and preferential trading terms,

increased focus on black woman-owned enterprises, focus on the youth, people

with disabilities and region- specific initiatives;

Empowering previously disadvantaged individuals to create their own businesses

resulting in quality job creation.

Key Outcomes -

Empowerment;

Rural development;

Skills development;

Job creation.

Based on these focus areas and key outcomes, a Service Provider would need to actively focus on the

quadrant-specific requirements in order to maximise the potential commercial benefit for Transnet, South

Africa and themselves. In doing so value can be created across all lines of reporting resulting in continued

relations.

SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT CATEGORY DEFINITIONS AND HIGH LEVEL DESCRIPTIONS

Industrialisation

Refers specifically to industrial capability building that will result in globally leading

capabilities developed within South Africa.

Criteria Description

Value of investment in plant Quantification of the monetary value invested

in machinery, equipment and/or buildings as

a result of this RFP





Percentage of local spend utilised in

the investment of plant

Percentage value invested in machinery,

equipment and/or buildings that are sourced

from local companies

Reduction in import leakage A percentage indication of the increase in

locally supplied products and therefore the

resultant decrease in imports as a result of the

award of a contract

Potential increase in export content The percentage increase in exports that will

result from increased industrial capability

locally in relation to the award of a contract

Regional Spend

Refers specifically to industrial capability building that focuses on value-add activities of the

local industry through manufacturing or service-related functions.


Value of local parts in relation to a

bill of materials

Planned monetary value of the local parts

utilised in a bill of materials (as a percentage

of the total spend)

Value spent on local suppliers Planned percentage monetary value spend on

procurement of goods and services from SA

suppliers

Number of local suppliers in the

supply chain

Number of South African suppliers that are to

be utilised in the fulfilment of a contract

Technology transfer/sustainability

Technology improvements are intangible assets with significant economic value. The Service

Provider will be measured on its plan to transfer knowledge and IP to contribute towards

capability building of the local supply base, which ultimately leads to improved efficiency

and capability. Plans to assist in this by a Service Provider must be assessed to enable the

local supply base to potentially export its newly-acquired technological know-how, thereby

decreasing capital leakage.


Technology transfer including:

Methods of manufacturing Introduction of a new/improved method

of manufacturing





Introduction of new

technologies

Provision of new technologies:

o For processes

o ICT

IP transfer (number and

value)

The provision of patents, trademarks and

copyrights

Number of local suppliers to be

evaluated for integration into the

OEM supply chain

An indication of the number of South African

suppliers that an OEM/Service Provider plans

to evaluate for possible inclusion into its

supply chain, should it meet the requirements

Skills Development

Indicates the company’s commitment to education and whether that fits in with targeted

groups (artisans, technicians, etc.). Consideration needs to be directed towards the

adequate quality and value of skills so developed in order to allow for better evaluation in

line with Government’s objectives.


Number of downstream supply

chain individuals to be trained

including:

• Number of artisans trained

• Number of technicians trained

• Number of black people trained

• Total number of people

trained

Number of individuals that the Service

Provider plans to train in the local industry

over the contract period; training undertaken

in the previous year will be taken into account

Number of company employees to

be trained

Number of individuals within the company (in

South Africa) that the Service Provider plans

to train over the contract period; training

undertaken in the previous year will not be

taken into account as past employee training

appears in the skills development pillar of the

B-BBEE scorecard; criteria broken down as for

industry training above

Certified training (yes/ no) Compliance with local and/or international

skills accreditation






Rand value spent on training Total planned monetary value spend (as a %

of contract value) on skills

development/training for the contract period

within the industry; money spent in the

previous year will be included in year 1 to

make allowance for Service Providers who

have just completed a training drive within

the industry

Number of bursaries/ scholarships

(specify field of study)

The number of higher education

bursaries/scholarships provided in the

previous year and planned for the length of

the contract

Number of apprentices (sector must

be specified)

The number of apprentices that the Service

Provider plans to enlist during the course of

the contract

Investment in Schools in specific

sectors e.g. engineering

The monetary value that the Service Provider

is prepared to invest in the development and

running of schools to increase technical skills

development

Job creation

Allows assessment of Government’s objectives to increase labour absorption, focusing on

unskilled workers and the youth.


Number of jobs created including: Number of jobs to be created during the

period of the contract

New skilled jobs created Jobs for people who have undergone

training in and/or outside the work

environment and are in possession of a

minimum level of secondary

qualification

New unskilled jobs created Jobs for people who have not undergone

any formal training or from whom no

minimum level of education is required





Number of jobs created for

youth

Jobs created for individuals aged 16 – 30

years

Small Business Promotion

These criteria give an indication of the Service Provider’s commitment to developing small

business in line with NGP and B-BBEE requirements.


Percentage procurement from:

• QSEs

• EMEs

• Start-ups

Refers to the planned procurement from

small business as a % of the total planned

procurement spend

Non-financial support provided to

small business

Service Providers will be credited for each

non-financial ED support that they are

planning to give to small business e.g.

Professional support; employee time

allocated to assisting small business

Financial support provided to small

business

Service Providers will be credited for each

financial ED support initiative that they are

planning to undertake during the contract

period e.g. Shorter payment terms; interest

free loans

Joint ED initiatives with Transnet The number of ED initiatives that the Service

Provider will jointly run with Transnet:

• That are aligned to Transnet’s

objectives

• That are non-financial in nature

Rural Development/Integration

The Service Provider’s planned use of local labour and business will contribute to

Governments NGP objectives and result in supply chain efficiencies. Commitment to rural

development will result in the alleviation of poverty and thereby contribute to development

objectives. The development must be sustainable in order to have a long-term and

meaningful impact.






Number of local employees Number of people employed from within the

town/city of operation

Value spent on local business Monetary value spent on business within the

town/city of operation

Proximity of business to operations The locality of the business in relation to

operations, preference is given for regional

(provincial) locality

Number of rural businesses to be

developed

The number of rural businesses that the

Service Provider plans to develop as a result

of the contract

Value of development to local

community (sustainable)

The monetary value spent on rural

community development that will result in

long–term social improvements

Market Intelligence Assistance

Service Providers with limited knowledge of the local market, supply base and its capabilities may require

assistance in identifying local suppliers and the development needs in order to develop its SD plan. The

United Nations Industrial Development Organisation (UNIDO) supplies a benchmarking service in South

Africa which will be able to assist Service Providers in identifying potential local suppliers with which to

work. In addition, this service will provide insight as to the type of support that these local suppliers

require in order to become more competitive. UNIDO’s benchmarking tool gives insight into the

performance levels being seen in Service Providers’ businesses and the practices used to deliver the

products or services being offered. The benchmarking tool focuses on:





Performance data relating to -

Financial performance

Customer data

Processes

Learning & growth

Company’s current business situation -

Plans for the business and capabilities to manage their fulfilment

Ability to generate business

Employee relationships

Developing new markets

Developing products and services

Managing money

The UNIDO benchmarking tool provides a basic framework through which an understanding of the South

African market can be established. Whilst the list of criteria may not be exhaustive, Service Providers are

free to meet with UNIDO to further understand how they can work together to develop a deeper

understanding of the market and the SD opportunities available.

GOVERNMENT POLICY DOCUMENTS

NIPP http://www.thedti.gov.za/industrial_development/nipp.jsp

IPAP2 http://www.thedti.gov.za/DownloadFileAction?id=561

CSDP http://www.dpe.gov.za/res/transnetCSDP1.pdf

NGP http://www.thepresidency.gov.za/pebble.asp?relid=2323

OTHER REFERENCE WEBSITES

References Website

Department of Public Enterprise (DPE) www.dpe.gov.za

United Nations Industrial Development

Organisation (UNIDO)

www.unido.org/spx

http://www.thedti.gov.za/industrial_development/nipp.jsp

http://www.thedti.gov.za/DownloadFileAction?id=561

http://www.dpe.gov.za/res/transnetCSDP1.pdf

http://www.thepresidency.gov.za/pebble.asp?relid=2323

http://www.dpe.gov.za/

http://www.unido.org/spx





GLOSSARY OF WORDS

Broad-Based Black Economic

Empowerment (B-BBEE)

A South African legal requirement that require all

entities operating in the South African economy to

contribute to empowerment and transformation

Enterprise Development (ED) An element contained within the B-BBEE scorecard

whereby a Measured Entity can receive recognition for

any Qualifying Enterprise Development Contributions

towards Exempted Micro-Enterprises or Qualifying

Small Enterprises which are 50% black owned or 30%

black woman owned. Enterprise Development

Contributions consists of monetary and non-monetary,

recoverable and non-recoverable contributions actually

initiated in favour of a beneficiary entity by a measured

entity with the specific objective of assisting or

accelerating the development, sustainability and

ultimate financial independence of the beneficiary. This

is commonly accomplished though the expansion of a

beneficiaries financial and/ or operation capacity.

Industrial Policy Action Plan II (IPAPII) The implementation plan for the National Industrial

Policy Framework (NIPF) which details key action plans

(KAPs) and timeframes for the implementation of

industrial policy actions in line with the NIPF.

Integrated Supply Chain Management

(iSCM)

Refers to an integrated “one supply chain management”

strategy within Transnet which has been developed

with Centres of Excellence (COEs) with cross-functional

teams comprising divisional and corporate task team

members, to deliver value through improved

efficiencies and compliance with the regulatory

environment.

New Growth Path (NGP) Developed by the Economic Development Department

tabled in January 2010 frames a new approach to

unlocking economic growth by knitting together the

IPAP2 as well as policies and programmes in rural

development, agriculture and, sciences & technology,

education, skills development, labour, mining and

beneficiation, tourism and social development with the





aim to target limited capital and capacity at activities

that maximise the creation of decent work

opportunities. Key indicators include: Quality job

creation, Youth employment, Labour intensive growth,

and Equity.

Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) Refers to a manufacturing company that owns the

intellectual property rights and patents for the

equipment it sells and services

Socio-economic Development Refers to development which addresses social and

economic aspects such as job creation, poverty

reduction and increased national value add and which

not only focuses on the business’s financial bottom line.

State Owned Company (SOC) Refers to Government-owned corporations. They are

legal entities created, and owned, by Government to

undertake commercial activities on behalf of an owner

Government, and are usually considered to be an

element or part of the state. They are established to

operate on a commercial basis.

Supplier Development (SD) Improving the socio-economic environment by creating

competitive local suppliers via Enterprise Development,

CSDP and other initiatives such as Preferential

Procurement. This results in a supply base that can

eventually be competitive to market its goods on the

international market leading to increased exports.

United Nations Industrial Development

Organisation (UNIDO)

A specialised agency of the United Nations. Its mandate

is to promote and accelerate sustainable industrial

development in developing countries and economies in

transition, and work towards improving living conditions

in the world's poorest countries by drawing on its

combined global resources and expertise.





ANNEXURE B

Supplier Development Plan (Refer to guide above to populate)

Tenderers must complete this Annexure B which summarises your Supplier Development (SD) obligations and your related

commitments.

For the purposes of completing the SD Value Indicators, where applicable Tenderers must calculate their SD commitments as

a percentage (%) of their estimated total value of the contract over the Contract Period1

Please include a SD plan narrative elaborating on the contents of the below completed Templates.

The Contractor’s SD Plan constituents an offer to perform all its SD commitments to the minimum percentage of the tender value as stated in the Tender Data (F2.1)

and within the time periods (every six months), identified by Key Dates, indicated in Returnable schedule, Annexure B, and will constitute a binding agreement at the

Contract Date.

1 “Contract Period” means a period of 10 months from the effective date of the contract





Supplier Development (SD) Category 1. Job Creation

Description

Occupational Level

i.e. Skilled, semi-skilled, unskilled

labour etc.

Job Title Race Gender Youth

(Yes/No) Disabled (Yes/No)

Target

Number

Target Spend

The potential for job creation directly due to the award of this business, allows for assessment of your Company’s intentions in terms of the Government’s objective to increase labour absorption focusing on unskilled workers and the youth

Jobs within Richards Bay

R

Jobs within the Kwazulu

Natal

R

Jobs in South Africa

R

TOTAL VALUE OF JOB CREATION

R





Supplier Development (SD) Category: 2. Skills Development

Description Course name/

Description

Training Type

(i.e

Bursaries,

Learnership

etc)

Race and Gender

Occupational

Level of

employees to be

trained

i.e. Skilled, semi-

skilled, unskilled

labour etc.

Target Number of

Employees to be

Trained

Cost of Training

Future skills transfer

within the industry,

with an emphasis on

the accumulation of

the knowledge and

experience, which

will occur as a result

of the transaction.

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Total Ex Vat R





Supplier Development (SD) Category: 3. Regional Spend and Local Economic Development

Supplier Name

Supplier

Size

( EME,

QSE,

Start-up)

Supplier

core

business

Supplier

Location

from Site

(km)

Supplier

Location

(Town/City

)

Area Type

(urban,

Peri-Urban,

Rural)

%Black

Ownersh

ip

%Black

Woman

Ownersh

ip

% Youth

Ownersh

ip

%

Ownership

By Disabled

Target spend

km

R

km

R

km

R

km

R

km

R

km

R

km

R

km

R

Total (Ex Vat)

R

*The encouragement of growth and expansion of EME, QSEs and start-ups through procurement and support mechanisms provided by the Tenderer

#Please ensure that the bidder provides the B-BBEE certificates of the sub-contractors under category 3 (Small Business Promotion)

#Tenderers will be credited for each non-financial ED support that they are planning to give to small business e.g. Professional support; employee time allocated to

assisting small business





Supplier Development Plan Declaration

The Tenderer hereby agrees to the committed SD values and targets stated within this SD plan.

Job Creation R 1

Skills Development R 2

Regional Spend and Local Economic Development R 3

TOTAL OF SD COMMITMENT, ZAR

R (1 + 2 + 3) Addition of all categories

TOTAL TENDER VALUE TENDER VALUE (EXC VAT) R

SD COMMITMENT EXPRESSED AS A PERCENTAGE (%)

%

OF TENDER VALUE : (1 + 2 + 3)/Tender Value

CUMULATIVE

MILESTONES

MILESTONE 1 MILESTONE 2 MILESTONE 3 MILESTONE 4

DATE three months

after contract

date*

six months after

contract date*

nine months after

contract date*

12 months after

contract date*

% Total

Cumulative SD

Spend

(To be

completed by

tenderer)

* See Z1.4, of the contract data (C1.2)

Tenderer Signature Date

Name Position




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

2018 – Rev01 Part T2: Returnable Schedules Page 1 of 1 T2.2-24: Insurance provided by the Contractor

T2.2-24: Insurance provided by the Contractor

Clause 84.1 in NEC3 Engineering & Construction Contract (June 2005)(amended June 2006 and April

2013) requires that the Contractor provides the insurance stated in the insurance table except any

insurance which the Employer is to provide as stated in the Contract Data.

Please provide the following details for insurance which the Contractor is still to provide.

Notwithstanding this information all costs related to insurance are deemed included in the tenderer’s

rates and prices.

Insurance against

(See clause 84.2 of the ECC)

Name of Insurance

Company Cover Premium

Loss of or damage to the works, Plant

and Materials

Loss of or damage to Equipment

Liability for loss of or damage to property (except the works, Plant and

Materials and Equipment) and liability

for bodily injury to or death of a person (not an employee of the Contractor) caused by activity in connection with

this contract.

Liability for death of or bodily injury to

employees of the Contractor arising out of and in the course of their

employment in connection with this

contract

(Other)

Signed Date

Name Position

Tenderer



Page 1 Part C1.1. Form of Offer & Acceptance

2019 – Rev 03

C1.1 Form of Offer & Acceptance

Offer

The Employer, identified in the Acceptance signature block, has solicited offers to enter into a contract for the procurement of:

THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY

The tenderer, identified in the Offer signature block, has examined the documents listed in the Tender Data and addenda thereto as listed in the Returnable Schedules, and by submitting this Offer has accepted the

Conditions of Tender.

By the representative of the tenderer, deemed to be duly authorised, signing this part of this Form of Offer

and Acceptance the tenderer offers to perform all of the obligations and liabilities of the Contractor under the contract including compliance with all its terms and conditions according to their true intent and

meaning for an amount to be determined in accordance with the conditions of contract identified in the Contract Data.

The offered total of the Prices exclusive of VAT is R

Value Added Tax @ 15% is R

The offered total of the Prices inclusive of VAT is R

(in words)

This Offer may be accepted by the Employer by signing the Acceptance part of this Form of Offer and

Acceptance and returning one copy of this document including the Schedule of Deviations (if any) to the tenderer before the end of the period of validity stated in the Tender Data, or other period as agreed,

whereupon the tenderer becomes the party named as the Contractor in the conditions of contract identified in the Contract Data.

Signature(s)

Name(s)

Capacity

For the

tenderer:

Name & signature of

witness

(Insert name and address of organisation)

Date

Tenderer’s CIDB registration number:




2019 – Rev 03

Acceptance

By signing this part of this Form of Offer and Acceptance, the Employer identified below accepts the tenderer’s Offer. In consideration thereof, the Employer shall pay the Contractor the amount due in

accordance with the conditions of contract identified in the Contract Data. Acceptance of the tenderer’s Offer shall form an agreement between the Employer and the tenderer upon the terms and conditions

contained in this agreement and in the contract that is the subject of this agreement.

The terms of the contract, are contained in:

Part C1 Agreements and Contract Data, (which includes this Form of Offer and Acceptance)

Part C2 Pricing Data

Part C3 Scope of Work: Works Information

Part C4 Site Information

and drawings and documents (or parts thereof), which may be incorporated by reference into the above

listed Parts.

Deviations from and amendments to the documents listed in the Tender Data and any addenda thereto listed in the Returnable Schedules as well as any changes to the terms of the Offer agreed by the tenderer

and the Employer during this process of offer and acceptance, are contained in the Schedule of Deviations

attached to and forming part of this Form of Offer and Acceptance. No amendments to or deviations from said documents are valid unless contained in this Schedule.

The tenderer shall within two weeks of receiving a completed copy of this agreement, including the Schedule

of Deviations (if any), contact the Employer’s agent (whose details are given in the Contract Data) to

arrange the delivery of any securities, bonds, guarantees, proof of insurance and any other documentation to be provided in terms of the conditions of contract identified in the Contract Data at, or just after, the date

this agreement comes into effect. Failure to fulfil any of these obligations in accordance with those terms shall constitute a repudiation of this agreement.

Notwithstanding anything contained herein, this agreement comes into effect at the contract start date given

in the Contract Data Part 1.

Signature:

Witness:

Name(s)

Capacity

for the

Employer

Transnet SOC Ltd

Date

Date




2019 – Rev 03

Schedule of Deviations Note:

1. To be completed by the Employer prior to award of contract. This part of the Offer & Acceptance would not be required if the contract has been developed by negotiation between the Parties and is not the result of a process of competitive tendering.

2. The extent of deviations from the tender documents issued by the Employer prior to the tender closing date is limited to those permitted in terms of the Conditions of Tender.

3. A tenderer’s covering letter must not be included in the final contract document. Should any matter in such letter, which constitutes a deviation as aforesaid be the subject of agreement reached during the process of Offer and Acceptance, the outcome of such agreement shall be recorded here and the final draft of the contract documents shall be revised to incorporate the effect of it.

No. Subject Details

1

2

3

4

5

By the duly authorised representatives signing this Schedule of Deviations below, the Employer and the

tenderer agree to and accept this Schedule of Deviations as the only deviations from and amendments to the documents listed in the Tender Data and any addenda thereto listed in the Tender Schedules, as well as

any confirmation, clarification or changes to the terms of the Offer agreed by the tenderer and the Employer

during this process of Offer and Acceptance.

It is expressly agreed that no other matter whether in writing, oral communication or implied during the period between the issue of the tender documents and the receipt by the tenderer of a completed signed

copy of this Form shall have any meaning or effect in the contract between the parties arising from this Agreement.

For the tenderer:

For the Employer

Signature

Name

Capacity

On behalf of

(Insert name and address of organisation)

Transnet SOC Ltd

Name &

signature of witness

Date



PAGE 1 Part C1: Contract Data 2019 – Rev 03 Contract Data provided by the Contractor

C1.2 Contract Data

Part one - Data provided by the Employer

Clause Statement Data

1 General

The conditions of contract are the

core clauses and the clauses for main

Option

B: Priced contract with bill of quantities

dispute resolution Option W1: Dispute resolution procedure

and secondary Options

X2: Changes in the law

X7: Delay damages

X13: Performance Bond

X16: Retention

X18: Limitation of liability

Z: Additional conditions of contract

of the NEC3 Engineering and

Construction Contract June 2005

(amended June 2006 and April 2013)

10.1 The Employer is: Transnet SOC Ltd

(Registration No. 1990/000900/30)

Address

Having elected its Contractual

Address for the purposes of this

contract as:

Registered address:

Transnet Corporate Centre

Waterfall Business Estate

9 Country Estate Drive

Midrand

1662

Transnet Group Capital 01 Commodores Close

Old Naval Base

Richards Bay

3900




10.1 The Project Manager is: (Name) Nobahle Mncube

Address Transnet Group Capital 01 Commodores Close

Old Naval Base

Richards Bay 3900

Tel 035 905 4647

e-mail [email protected]

10.1 The Supervisor is: (Name) To be advised

Address

Tel No.

e-mail

11.2(13) The works are THE REFURBISHMENT OF OLD MHA WORKSHOP IN THE PORT OF RICHARDS BAY

11.2(14) The following matters will be included

in the Risk Register

Operational activities. Working in confined space

Working at heights.

Limited access. Unknown underground services.

Granting of occupations

11.2(15) The boundaries of the site are As stated in Part C4.1.”Description of the Site and

its surroundings”

11.2(16) The Site Information is in Part C4

11.2(19) The Works Information is in Part C3

12.2 The law of the contract is the law of the Republic of South Africa subject to the

jurisdiction of the Courts of South Africa.

13.1 The language of this contract is English

13.3 The period for reply is 2 weeks

2 The Contractor's main

responsibilities

No additional data is required for this section of

the conditions of contract.

3 Time

11.2(3) The completion date for the whole of

the works is

12 February 2021




30.1 The access dates are Part of the Site Date

1 Whole of the Construction

Site

31.1 The Contractor is to submit a first

programme for acceptance within

2 weeks of the Contract Date.

31.2 The starting date is 06 July 2020

32.2 The Contractor submits revised

programmes at intervals no longer

than

2 weeks.

35.1 The Employer is not willing to take

over the works before the Completion

Date.

4 Testing and Defects

42.2 The defects date is 52 (fifty two) weeks after Completion of the

whole of the works.

43.2 The defect correction period is 2 weeks

5 Payment

50.1 The assessment interval is monthly

on the

25th (twenty fifth) day of each successive month.

51.1 The currency of this contract is the South African Rand.

51.2 The period within which payments

are made is

Payment will be effected on or before the last day

of the month following the month during which a

valid Tax Invoice and Statement were received.

51.4 The interest rate is the prime lending rate of Standard Bank of South

Africa.

6 Compensation events

60.1(13) The weather measurements to be

recorded for each calendar month

are,

the cumulative rainfall (mm)

the number of days with rainfall more than 10 mm

the number of days with minimum air

temperature less than 0 degrees Celsius

the number of days with snow lying at 08:00

hours South African Time

and these measurements:




The place where weather is to be

recorded (on the Site ) is:

The Contractor’s Site establishment area

The weather data are the records of

past weather measurements for each

calendar month which were recorded

at:

Richards Bay, Kwazulu Natal

and which are available from: South African Weather Service 012 367 6023 or

[email protected].

7 Title No additional data is required for this section of

the conditions of contract.

8 Risks and insurance

80.1 These are additional Employer's risks None

84.1

The Employer provides these

insurances from the Insurance Table

1 Insurance against: Loss of or damage to the works, Plant and

Materials is as stated in the Insurance policy for

Contract Works/ Public Liability.

Cover / indemnity: to the extent as stated in the insurance policy for

Contract Works / Public Liability

The deductibles are: as stated in the insurance policy for Contract

Works / Public Liability

2 Insurance against: Loss of or damage to property (except the works,

Plant and Materials & Equipment) and liability for

bodily injury to or death of a person (not an

employee of the Contractor) arising out of or in

connection with the performance of the

Contract as stated in the insurance policy for

Contract Works / Public Liability

Cover / indemnity Is to the extent as stated in the insurance policy

for Contract Works / Public Liability

The deductibles are as stated in the insurance policy for Contract


3 Insurance against: Loss of or damage to Equipment (Temporary

Works only) as stated in the insurance policy for

contract Works and Public Liability

mailto:[email protected]




Cover / indemnity Is to the extent as stated in the insurance policy

for Contract Works / Public Liability

The deductibles are: As stated in the insurance policy for Contract


4 Insurance against: Contract Works SASRIA insurance subject to the

terms, exceptions and conditions of the SASRIA

coupon

Cover / indemnity Cover / indemnity is to the extent provided by the

SASRIA coupon

The deductibles are The deductibles are, in respect of each and every

theft claim, 0,1% of the contract value subject to

a minimum of R2 500 and a maximum of R25 000.

Note: The deductibles for the insurance as stated above

are listed in the document titled “Confirmation of

Insurance: Transnet (SOC) Limited Principal

Controlled Insurance” appended to Part One of

this Contract Data (Data Provided by the

Employer).

84.1

The minimum limit of indemnity for

insurance in respect of death of or

bodily injury to employees of the

Contractor arising out of and in the

course of their employment in

connection with this contract for any

one event is

The Contractor must comply at a minimum with

the provisions of the Compensation for

Occupational Injuries and Diseases Act No. 130 of

1993 as amended.

The Contractor provides these

additional Insurances

1 Where the contract requires that the design of

any part of the works shall be provided by the

Contractor the Contractor shall satisfy the

Employer that professional indemnity

insurance cover in connection therewith has

been affected

2 Where the contract involves manufacture,

and/or fabrication of Plant & Materials,

components or other goods to be incorporated

into the works at premises other than the site,

the Contractor shall satisfy the Employer that

such plant & materials, components or other

goods for incorporation in the works are

adequately insured during manufacture

and/or fabrication and transportation to the

site.




3 Should the Employer have an insurable

interest in such items during manufacture,

and/or fabrication, such interest shall be noted

by endorsement to the Contractor’s policies of

insurance as well as those of any

subContractor

4 Motor Vehicle Liability Insurance comprising

(as a minimum) "Balance of Third Party" Risks

including Passenger and Unauthorised

Passenger Liability indemnity with a minimum

indemnity limit of R 5 000 000.

5 Marine Craft Hull insurance in respect of all

marine craft or vessels utilised in performance

of the Works for a sum sufficient to provide for

their replacement

6 Protection and Indemnity Insurance in respect

of all marine craft or vessels utilised in

performance of the Works extended for

Specialist Operations with a minimum

indemnity limit of R 20,000,000

7 The insurance coverage referred to in 1, 2, 3,

4, 5 and 6 above shall be obtained from an

insurer(s) in terms of an insurance policy

approved by the Employer. The Contractor

shall arrange with the insurer to submit to the

Project Manager the original and the

duplicate original of the policy or policies of

insurance and the receipts for payment of

current premiums, together with a certificate

from the insurer or insurance broker

concerned, confirming that the policy or

policies provide the full coverage as required.

The original policy will be returned to the

Contractor.

84.2 The minimum limit of indemnity for

insurance in respect of loss of or

damage to property (except the

works, Plant, Materials and

Equipment) and liability for bodily

injury to or death of a person (not an

employee of the Contractor) caused

by activity in connection with this

contract for any one event is

Whatever the Contractor requires in addition

to the amount of insurance taken out by the

Employer for the same risk.




84.2 The insurance against loss of or

damage to the works, Plant and

Materials as stated in the insurance

policy for contract works and public

liability selected from:

Principal Controlled Insurance policy for

Contract OR Project Specific Insurance for the

contract

9 Termination There is no additional Contract Data required for

this section of the conditions of contract.

10 Data for main Option clause

B Priced contract with Bill of

Quantities

No additional data is required for this Option.

60.6 The method of measurement is SANS 1200A Standards as published by South African National Standards.

11 Data for Option W1

W1.1 The Adjudicator is Both parties will agree as and when a dispute

arises. If the parties cannot reach an agreement

on the Adjudicator, the chairman of the

Association of Arbitrators will appoint an

Adjudicator.

W1.2(3) The Adjudicator nominating body is: The Chairman of the Association of Arbitrators

(Southern Africa)

If no Adjudicator nominating body is

entered, it is:

the Association of Arbitrators (Southern Africa)

W1.4(2) The tribunal is: Arbitration

W1.4(5) The arbitration procedure is The Rules for the Conduct of Arbitrations of the

Association of Arbitrators (Southern Africa)

The place where arbitration is to be

held is

Durban, South Africa

The person or organisation who will

choose an arbitrator

- if the Parties cannot agree a

choice or

- if the arbitration procedure does

not state who selects an

arbitrator, is

The Chairman of the Association of Arbitrators

(Southern Africa)

12 Data for secondary Option

clauses

X2 Changes in the law No additional data is required for this Option




X7 Delay damages

X7.1 Delay damages for Completion of the

whole of the works are

R 2,500.00 per day

X13 Performance bond

X13.1 The amount of the performance bond

is

10% of the total of the Prices at Contract Date

X16 Retention

X16.1 The retention free amount is

The retention percentage is

NIL

5% on all payments certified.

X18 Limitation of liability

X18.1

X18.2

X18.3

X18.4

X18.5

The Contractor’s liability to the

Employer for indirect or

consequential loss is limited to:

For any one event, the Contractor’s

liability to the Employer for loss of or

damage to the Employer’s property

is limited to:

The Contractor’s liability for Defects

due to his design which are not

listed on the Defects Certificate is

limited to:

The Contractor’s total liability to the

Employer for all matters arising

under or in connection with this

contract, other than excluded

matters, is limited to:

The end of liability date is

Nil

The deductible of the relevant insurance policy

The cost of correcting the Defect

The Total of the Prices

5 years after Completion of the whole of the

works

Z Additional conditions of contract

The additional conditions of contract

are:

Z.1

Obligations in respect of

Subcontracting




Z1.1 It will be a material term of this contract that the

Contractor must subcontract a minimum of 30% of the

value of the contract.

Z1.2

The Contractor’s Subcontracting percentage as

indicated in the tender submission Returnable T.2.2-03

will constitute a binding agreement throughout the

duration of the contract until Completion, if not, it will

be deemed that the Contractor has failed in full to meet

the material term of the contract, which may constitute

a reason for termination.

Z1.3 The Contractor shall report to the Employer on a

monthly basis during the term of the Contract, the

amounts spent on each sub-Contractor.

Z1.4 The Contractor shall provide to the Employer, upon

receiving an instruction to do so, any documentation

and/or evidence required by the Employer which in the

Employer’s opinion would be necessary to verify

whether the Contractor has maintained the

subcontracting percentage. The Contractor shall

provide the said documentation and/or evidence within

the period stated in the instruction. The provision of the

documentation and/or evidence shall not constitute a

compensation event.

Z2

Additional clause relating to

Performance Bonds and/or

Guarantees

Z2.1

The Performance Guarantee under X13 above shall be

an irrevocable, on-demand performance guarantee, to

be issued exactly in the form of the Pro Forma

documents provided for this purpose under C1.3

(Forms of Securities), in favour of the Employer by a

financial institution reasonably acceptable to the

Employer.

Z3

Obligations in respect of Joint

Venture Agreements




Z3.1 Insert the additional core clause 27.5

27.5. In the instance that the Contractor is a joint

venture, the Contractor shall provide the Employer with

a certified copy of its signed joint venture agreement,

and in the instance that the joint venture is an

‘Incorporated Joint Venture,’ the Memorandum of

Incorporation, within 4 (four) weeks of the Contract

Date.

The Joint Venture agreement shall contain but not be

limited to the following:

A brief description of the Contract and the

Deliverables;

The name, physical address, communications

addresses and domicilium citandi et executandi

of each of the constituents and of the Joint

Venture;

The constituent’s interests;

A schedule of the insurance policies, sureties,

indemnities and guarantees which must be

taken out by the Joint Venture and by the

individual constituents;

Details of an internal dispute resolution

procedure;

Written confirmation by all of the constituents:

i. of their joint and several liabilities to

the Employer to Provide the Works;

ii. identification of the lead partner in the

joint venture confirming the authority

of the lead partner to bind the joint

venture through the Contractor’s

representative;

iii. Identification of the roles and

responsibilities of the constituents to

provide the Works.

Financial requirements for the Joint Venture:

i. the working capital requirements for the

Joint Venture and the extent to which and

manner whereby this will be provided

and/or guaranteed by the constituents

from time to time;

the names of the auditors and others, if any,

who will provide auditing and accounting

services to the Joint Venture




Z3.2

Insert additional core clause 27.6

27.6. The Contractor shall not alter its composition or

legal status of the Joint Venture without the prior

approval of the Employer.

Z4 Additional obligations in respect

of Termination

Z4.1 The following will be included under core clause 91.1:

In the second main bullet, after the word ‘partnership’

add ‘joint venture whether incorporate or otherwise

(including any constituent of the joint venture)’ and

Under the second main bullet, insert the following

additional bullets after the last sub-bullet:

commenced business rescue proceedings

(R22)

repudiated this Contract (R23)

Z4.2 Termination Table The following will be included under core clause 90.2

Termination Table as follows:

Amend “A reason other than R1 – R21” to “A reason

other than R1 – R23”

Z4.3

Amend “R1 – R15 or R18” to “R1 – R15, R18, R22 or

R23.”

Z5 Local Content Obligations (If

applicable)

Z5.1 In terms of Local Production and Content (SBD 6.2),

Annexure A and Annexure C of the Returnable Schedule

T2.2- 02 Eligibility Criteria Schedule: Declaration

Certificate of Local Production and Content, the

Contractor has undertaken to fulfil its obligations of the

Local Production and Content for the following

designated sectors:

1. 90% for Electrical and Telecom Cables;

2. 70% for Valves Products and Actuators,

3. 100% for Steel Products and Components for

Construction; and

4. 70% for Pumps, MV Motor and Associated

Accessories




Z5.2 The Contractor is required to note that the Employer,

the Department of Trade and Industry [DTI] and/or the

body appointed by the DTI as the verification authority

for local content may conduct compliance audits with

regard to the Local Production and Content

requirements as prescribed in Regulation 8 of the

Preferential Procurement Regulations, 2017 issued in

terms of the Preferential Procurement Policy

Framework Act no. 5 of 2000.

Z5.3 The Contractor is required to continuously update

Declarations C, D and E of the Local Production and

Content Declaration commitments with the actual local

content values for the duration of the contract. The

Contractor shall report to the Employer on a monthly

basis during the term of the Contract, the amounts

spend on Local Content and Production for the

designated sectors for the duration of the contract.

Z5.4 Breach of Local Production and Content commitments

provides the Employer cause to terminate the contract

for non-compliance.

Z5.5 Non-Compliance Penalties for

Local Production and Content

The Contractor must refer to Schedule A attached to

this Contract Data with regards to non-compliance

penalties applicable to Local Production and Content.

Z6 Right Reserved by the Employer

to Conduct Vetting through SSA

Z6.1 The Employer reserves the right to conduct vetting

through State Security Agency (SSA) for security

clearances of any Contractor who has access to

National Key Points for the following without

limitations:

1. Confidential – this clearance is based on any

information which may be used by malicious,

opposing or hostile elements to harm the

objectives and functions of an organ of state.

2. Secret – clearance is based on any information

which may be used by malicious, opposing or

hostile elements to disrupt the objectives and

functions of an organ of state.

3. Top Secret – this clearance is based on

information which may be used by malicious,

opposing or hostile elements to neutralise the

objectives and functions of an organ of state.




Z7 Additional Clause Relating to

Collusion in the Construction

Industry

The contract award is made without prejudice to any

rights the Employer may have to take appropriate

action later with regard to any declared bid rigging

including blacklisting.

Z8 Protection of Personal

Information Act

The Employer and the Contractor are required to

process information obtained for the duration of the

Agreement in a manner that is aligned to the Protection

of Personal Information Act.

Z.9

Obligations in respect of Supplier

Development Programme (SDP)

Z9.1 It will be a material term of this contract that the

Contractor contributes to the Supplier Development

Programme promoted by the Department of Public

Enterprises of the Government of South Africa, as

applied by the Employer. In response to this

requirement, the Contractor undertakes to implement

the Supplier Development (SD) initiatives as per the

Contractor’s Supplier Development Plan. Breach of

Contractor’s Supplier Development Plan provides the

Employer cause to terminate the contract for non-

compliance.

Z9.2

The Contractor’s SD Plan constitutes an offer to

perform all its SD commitments identified by the SD

Milestone Dates, indicated in Returnable Schedule

T2.2-22: Supplier Development Plan - Annexure B, and

will constitute a binding agreement.

Z9.3 In order to prevent any doubt, the Contractor’s SD

obligations shall not constitute a separate activity in the

Bill of Quantities. The value of the Contractor’s SD

commitments shall be included in the total of the Prices

to Provide the Works. No specific payment for SD will

therefore be made by the Employer.

Z9.4 The milestones for the implementation of SD targets

will be every 3 (three) months after Contract Date. The

Employer will verify the exact dates, constituting the

milestones for SD, by instruction after Contract

Date. This instruction will not constitute a

compensation event. The Contractor shall in its SD

Plan state the Condition (completed value of its total

SD commitment) to be met by each SD Milestone Date

(every 3 months).




Z9.5 The Contractor shall provide Employer with Supplier

Development Implementation Plan within 20 days from

the signature date of the Contract setting out the

nature, extent and monetary value of the Contractor’s

commitments which the Contractor shall undertake, as

well as the mechanisms to allow for access to

information and verification of the Contractor’s

compliance with the Implementation Plan, as shall be

agreed with the Employer. The Contractor shall deliver

and action its SD commitments as outlined in the SD

Implementation Plan, which progress will be reported

by the Contractor to the Employer on a monthly basis

during the term of the Contract.

Z9.6 The Contractor shall provide to the Employer, upon

receiving an instruction to do so, any documentation

and/or evidence required by the Employer which in the

Employer’s opinion would be necessary to verify

whether the Contractor has met the Condition of any

SD Milestone. The Contractor shall provide the said

documentation and/or evidence within the period

stated in the instruction. Where the Contractor fails to

provide the documentation and/or evidence within the

period stated, it will be deemed that the Contractor has

failed in full to meet the Condition of the SD Milestone

Date in question. The provision of the documentation

and/or evidence shall not constitute a compensation

event.

Z9.7 If the Contractor fails to achieve any SD milestone

Condition, the Contractor shall be liable and pay to the

Employer a non-compliance penalty to the value of the

full outstanding amount each SD milestone Date

Condition not fully met.

Z9.8

The Contractor shall pay the amount due under this

clause within 10 days after receipt of an invoice from

the Employer, failing which the Employer shall, without

prejudice to any other rights of the Employer under this

Agreement, be entitled to deduct this amount not paid

by the Contractor from the next assessment of the

amount as certified by the Project Manager.




C1.2 Contract Data

Part two - Data provided by the Contractor

The tendering Contractor is advised to read both the NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract - June 2005

(with amendments June 2006 and April 2013) and the relevant parts of its Guidance Notes (ECC3-GN) in order

to understand the implications of this Data which the tenderer is required to complete. An example of the

completed Data is provided on pages 156 to 158 of the ECC3 Guidance Notes.

Completion of the data in full, according to Options chosen, is essential to create a complete contract.

Clause Statement Data

10.1 The Contractor is (Name):

Address

Tel No.

Fax No.

11.2(8) The direct fee percentage is %

The subcontracted fee percentage is %

11.2(18) The working areas are the Site and

24.1 The Contractor's key persons are:

1 Name:

Job:

Responsibilities:

Qualifications:

Experience:

2 Name:

Job

Responsibilities:

Qualifications:

Experience:

CV's (and further key persons data including

CVs) are appended to Tender Schedule

entitled.




11.2(14) The following matters will be included in

the Risk Register

31.1 The programme identified in the Contract

Data is

B Priced contract with bill of quantities

11.2(21) The bill of quantities is in

11.2(31) The tendered total of the Prices is (in figures)

(in words), excluding VAT

Data for Schedules of Cost

Components

Note “SCC” means Schedule of Cost Components

starting on page 60 of ECC, and “SSCC” means

Shorter Schedule of Cost Components starting on

page 63 of ECC.

B Priced contract with bill of quantities Data for the Shorter Schedule of Cost

Components

41 in

SSCC

The percentage for people overheads is: %

21 in

SSCC

The published list of Equipment is the last

edition of the list published by

The percentage for adjustment for

Equipment in the published list is

% (state plus or minus)

22 in

SSCC

The rates of other Equipment are: Equipment Size or

capacity

Rate

61 in

SSCC

The hourly rates for Defined Cost of

design outside the Working Areas are

Category of employee

Hourly rate

62 in

SSCC

The percentage for design overheads is %

63 in

SSCC

The categories of design employees

whose travelling expenses to and from the

Working Areas are included in Defined

Cost are:




Schedule A – Non-compliance for Local Content

Non-compliance Penalties for Local Content:

a) If for any reason the Contractor is unable to achieve the local content undertaking, the

Contractor must approach the Department of Trade and Industry (“DTI”) to obtain exemption

in order to supply the goods at a lower local content threshold. The Contractor is obliged to

approach DTI for exemption within 10 (ten) days of determining that it is unable to achieve

any milestone target or local content threshold.

b) Should the DTI provide exemption, the Contractor shall be entitled to provide the goods at

the lower local content threshold set by DTI. In such event, the Parties shall in good faith

renegotiate the milestone targets or local content undertaking to ensure that the lowered local

content thresholds are achieved.

c) Should DTI not provide the necessary exemption, the Contractor shall be obliged to meet each

milestone target as stated in the Local Content Plan or the local content undertaking.

d) Should the Contractor fail to meet any milestone target or the local content undertaking, the

following remedies shall apply without limiting any of the Employer’s other rights in law:

i. The Employer shall afford the Contractor a period of thirty (30) days to remedy its

non-compliance.

ii. Should the Contractor fail to meet its obligations within the further 30 day period, the

Contractor shall pay a Non-Compliance penalty (“Non-compliance Penalty”) to the

Employer in respect of such Non-compliance as set out in clause iv below. The

penalties shall be imposed per milestone measurement for non-delivery of committed

values in the case of a Local Content Plan or shall be imposed against the non-delivery

of committed values where local content undertakings must be met immediately.

iii. To the extent that the Actual Local Content Spend1 is lower than the Required Local

Content Spend2 (or the Adjusted Required Local Content Spend3, as the case may

be), the Contractor shall be liable for Penalties which is the difference in value between

the Actual Local Content Spend and the Required Local Content Spend (or the

Adjusted Required Local Content Spend, as the case may be) plus an additional

percentage of such difference. Such Non-compliance Penalties shall be calculated and

levied at the relevant milestones as stipulated in the Local Content Plan or shall be

imposed against the non-delivery of committed values where local content

undertakings must be met immediately, in accordance with clause iv below.

iv. Non-compliance penalties shall apply at the following rate: the difference in value

between the Required Local Content Spend and the Actual Local Content Spend, plus

5% of such difference.

v. In order to guarantee that the Contractor meets its obligations in terms of the Local

Content Plan or its committed local content undertaking, the Employer shall be entitled

to retain a Non-compliance Penalty at the rate of 1% of every monthly payment due

1 Actual Local Content Spend means the monetary value of local content initiatives actually delivered by the Supplier during the

period under review. 2 Required Local Content Spend means the monetary value of local content obligations that the Supplier has agreed to deliver

during the period under review. 3 Adjusted Required Local Content Spend means any adjustment to the Required Local Content Spend as prescribed by DTI

through the process of exemption referred to in clause c) above and as agreed to between the parties, reduced to writing and signed by the parties.




by the Employer to the Contractor over the contract period (“the Local Content

Retention Amount”). The Local Content Retention Amount shall be set off against any

penalties payable by the Contractor at any milestone assessment.

e) Should no penalties be imposed during the duration of the contract, the Employer shall refund

the full value of the Local Content Retention Amount to the Contractor at the end of the

contract period.

f) Should any unpaid penalties remain at the end of the contract period, then without limiting

other rights that the Employer may have in law, the Contractor shall forfeit the Local Content

Retention Amount and shall have no further claim against the Employer for the repayment of

such amount.

Non-compliance Penalty Certificate:

a) If any Non-compliance Penalty arises, the Employer shall issue a Non-compliance Penalty

Certificate on the last day of each month during such Non-compliance indicating the Non-

compliance Penalties which have accrued during that period.

b) A Non-compliance Penalty Certificate shall be prima facie proof of the matters to which it

relates. If the Contractor disputes any of the amounts set out in a Non-compliance Penalty

Certificate:

the dispute shall be resolved in accordance with the provisions of the Contract; and

if pursuant to that referral, it is determined that the Contractor owes any amount to

the Employer pursuant to the Non-compliance Penalty Certificate, then the Contractor

shall pay such amount to the Employer within 10 (ten) Business Days of the

determination made pursuant to such determination and an accompanying valid Tax

Invoice.

Payment of Non-compliance Penalties:

a) Subject to Clause i) above, the Contractor shall pay the Non-compliance Penalty indicated

in the Non-compliance Penalty Certificate within 10 (ten) Business Days of the Employer

issuing a valid Tax Invoice to the Contractor for the amount set out in that certificate. If

the Employer does not issue a valid Tax Invoice to the Contractor for Non-compliance

Penalties accrued during any relevant period, those Non-compliance Penalties shall be

carried forward to the next period.

b) The Contractor shall pay the amount due within 10 (ten) days after receipt of a valid Tax

Invoice from the Employer, failing which Transnet shall, without prejudice to any other rights

of the Employer under this Agreement, be entitled to call for payment which may be in any

form the Employer deems reasonable and appropriate.

c) It is agreed that the Employer, the DTI, the South African Bureau of Standards and/or any of

their appointed agents shall be entitled to monitor, evaluate and audit the Contractor’s

compliance with its obligations under the Local Content Plan. To this end, the Contractor shall

provide its full cooperation to the respective bodies referred to in this clause to ensure that

effective monitoring, evaluation and auditing takes place.

The Non Compliance Penalties set forth in this Clause are stated exclusive of VAT. Any VAT payable on Non

Compliance Penalties will be for the account of the Contractor.

September 2016

C1.3 Forms of Securities

Pro forma Performance Guarantee

For use with the NEC3 Engineering & Construction Contract - June 2005 (with amendments June 2006 and April 2013).

The conditions of contract stated in the Contract Data Part 1 include the following Secondary Option:

Option X13: Performance bond

The pro forma document for this Performance Guarantee is provided here for convenience but is to be

treated as part of the Works Information.

The organisation providing the Performance Guarantee does so by copying the pro forma document onto its

letterhead without any change to the text or format and completing the required details. The completed document is then given to the Employer within the time stated in the contract.

September 2016

Pro forma Performance Guarantee (for use with Option X13)

(to be reproduced exactly as shown below on the letterhead of the Guarantor)

Transnet SOC Ltd c/o Transnet Group Capital

2nd Floor Waterfall Business Estate

9 Country Estate Drive

MIDRAND 1662

Date:

Dear Sirs,

Performance Guarantee for Contract No:

With reference to the above numbered contract made or to be made between

{Transnet SOC Ltd, Registration No. 1990/000900/30} (the Employer) and

{Insert registered name and address of the Contractor} (the Contractor), for

{Insert details of the works from the Contract Data} (the works).

I/We the undersigned

on behalf of the

Guarantor

of physical address

and duly authorised thereto do hereby provide the following Performance Guarantee, as required under the above Contract, subject to the following conditions:

1. Any reference in this Performance Guarantee to the above Contract / works is made for the purpose of convenience and shall not be construed as any intention whatsoever to create an accessory

obligation or any intention whatsoever to create a Suretyship.

2. The Guarantor’s obligation under this Performance Guarantee is restricted to the payment of money.

3. The terms Employer, Contractor, Project Manager, works and Completion have the meaning as

assigned to them by the conditions of contract stated in the Contract Data for the aforesaid Contract.

4. We renounce all benefits from any legal exceptions which might or could be pleaded against the

validity of this Performance Guarantee.

5. The Employer has the absolute right to arrange his affairs with the Contractor in any manner which

the Employer deems fit and without being advised thereof the Guarantor shall not have the right to claim his release on account of any conduct alleged to be prejudicial to the Guarantor. Without

derogating from the foregoing compromise, extension of the construction period, indulgence,

release or variation of the Contractor's obligation shall not affect the validity of this Performance Guarantee.

6. This Performance Guarantee will lapse on the earlier of:

September 2016

the date that the Guarantor receives a notice from the Project Manager stating that the Completion Certificate for the whole of the works has been issued, that all amounts due from the

Contractor as certified in terms of the Contract have been received by the Employer and that the

Contractor has fulfilled its obligations under the Contract, or

the date that the Guarantor issues a replacement Performance Guarantee for such lesser or

higher amount as may be required by the Project Manager.

7. Always provided that this Performance Guarantee will not lapse in the event the Guarantor is

notified by the Project Manager, (before the dates above), of the Employer's intention to institute claims and the particulars thereof, in which event this Guarantee shall remain in force until all such

claims are paid and settled.

8. Subject to the Guarantor’s total liability referred to in clause 9 below, the Guarantor undertakes to

pay the Employer the Guaranteed Sum or the full outstanding balance upon receipt of a first written demand from the Project Manager to the Guarantor calling up this Performance Guarantee stating

that:

8.1 The Contract has been terminated due to the Contractor’s default or failure to fulfil its obligations under the Contract and that the Performance Guarantee is called up in terms of this clause 8. A

copy of the termination certificate shall be enclosed with the demand;

9. Our total liability hereunder shall not exceed the Guaranteed Sum of:

(say) _________________________________________________________________________

R ____________________________________________________

10. This Performance Guarantee is neither negotiable nor transferable and is governed by the laws of

the Republic of South Africa, subject to the jurisdiction of the courts of the Republic of South Africa.

11. This Performance Guarantee, accompanied by the required demand notice and termination

certificate as per clause 8, shall be regarded as a liquid document for the purpose of obtaining a court order.

Signed at on this day of 201_

Signature(s)

Name(s) (printed)

Position in Guarantor company

Signature of Witness(s)

Name(s) (printed)



July 2019 C2.2: Bill of quantities

Page 1 of 39

PART 2: PRICING DATA

Document reference

Title No of pages

C2 Cover Page 1

C2.1 Pricing instructions: Option B 4

C2.2 The bill of quantities




Page 2 of 39

C2.1 Pricing instructions: Option B

1. The conditions of contract

1.1. How the contract prices work and assesses it for progress payments

Clause 11 in NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract, June 2005 (with amendments June 2006 and

April 2013) (ECC) Option B states:

Identified and defined terms

11 11.2

(21) The Bill of Quantities is the bill of quantities as changed in accordance

with this contract to accommodate implemented compensation events and for

accepted quotations for acceleration. (22) Defined Cost is the cost of the components in the Shorter Schedule of

Cost Components whether work is subcontracted or not excluding the cost of preparing quotations for compensation events.

(28) The Price for Work Done to Date is the total of

the quantity of the work which the Contractor has completed for each item

in the Bill of Quantities multiplied by the rate and

a proportion of each lump sum which is the proportion of the work covered by the item which the Contractor has completed.

Completed work is work without Defects which would either delay or be

covered by immediately following work.

(31) The Prices are the lump sums and the amounts obtained by multiplying

the rates by the quantities for the items in the Bill of Quantities.

This confirms that Option B is a re-measurement contract and the bill comprises only items measured using

quantities and rates or stated as lump sums. Value related items are not used. Time related items are

items measured using rates where the rate is a unit of time.

1.2. Function of the Bill of Quantities

Clause 55.1 in Option B states, “Information in the Bill of Quantities is not Works Information or Site Information”. This confirms that instructions to do work or how it is to be done are not included in the Bill,

but in the Works Information. This is further confirmed by Clause 20.1 which states, “The Contractor Provides the Works in accordance with the Works Information”. Hence the Contractor does not Provide the Works in accordance with the Bill of Quantities. The Bill of Quantities is only a pricing document.

1.3. Guidance before pricing and measuring

Employers preparing tenders or contract documents, and tendering contractors are advised to consult the

sections dealing with the bill of quantities in the NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract (June 2005)

Guidance Notes before preparing the bill of quantities or before entering rates and lump sums into the bill.

Historically bill of quantities based contracts in South Africa have been influenced by the different approaches of the civil engineering and building sectors of the industry through their respective discipline

based standard forms of contract and methods of measurement. This is particularly apparent in the




Page 3 of 39

approach to the Preliminary and General bill. On the other hand, because ECC caters for a number of disciplines in the same contract, including electrical works, a different approach not currently found in

local methods of measurement to the Preliminary & General bill items may have been used.

The NEC approach to the P & G bill assumes use will be made of method related charges for Equipment

applied to Providing the Works based on durations shown in the Accepted Programme, fixed charges for the use of Equipment that is required throughout the construction phase, time related charges for people

working in a supervisory capacity for the period required, and lump sum charges for other facilities or services not directly related to performing work items typically included in other parts of the bill.

2. Measurement and payment

2.1. Symbols

The units of measurement described in the Bill of Quantities are metric units abbreviated as follows:

Abbreviation Unit

% percent

h hour

ha hectare

kg kilogram

kl kilolitre

km kilometre

km-pass kilometre-pass

kPa kilopascal

kW kilowatt

l litre

m metre

mm millimetre

m2 square metre

m2-pass square metre pass

m3 cubic metre

m3-km cubic metre-kilometre

MN meganewton

MN.m meganewton-metre

MPa megapascal

No. number

Prov sum1 provisional sum

PC-sum prime cost sum

R/only Rate only

1 Provisional Sums should not be used unless absolutely unavoidable. Rather include specifications and associated bill items for the most likely scope of work, and then change later using the compensation event procedure if necessary. This is because tenderers cannot programme effectively for unknown scopes of work




Page 4 of 39

sum Lump sum

t ton (1000kg)

W/day Work day

2.2. General assumptions

2.2.1. Unless otherwise stated, items are measured net in accordance with the drawings, and no

allowance has been made in the quantities for waste.

2.2.2. The Prices and rates stated for each item in the Bill of Quantities shall be treated as being fully

inclusive of all work, risks, liabilities, obligations, overheads, profit and everything necessary as

incurred or required by the Contractor in carrying out or providing that item.

2.2.3. Clause 63.13 in Option B provides that these rates and Prices may be used as a basis for

assessment of compensation events instead of Defined Cost.

2.2.4. Where this contract requires detailed drawings, designs or other information to be provided,

and no rates or prices are included in the bill specifically for such matters, then the Contractor is deemed to have allowed for all costs associated with such requirements within the tendered

rates and Prices in the Bill of Quantities.

2.2.5. An item against which no Price is entered will be treated as covered by other Prices or rates in

the bill of quantities. If a number of items are grouped together for pricing purposes, this will

be treated as a single lump sum.

2.2.6. The quantities contained in the Bill of Quantities may not be final and do not necessarily

represent the actual amount of work to be done. The quantities of work assessed and certified for payment by the Project Manager at each assessment date will be used for determining

payments due and not the quantities given in the Bill of Quantities.

2.2.7. The short descriptions of the items of payment given in the bill of quantities are only for the purposes of identifying the items. More detail regarding the extent of the work entailed under

each item is provided in the Works Information.

2.3. Departures from the method of measurement

2.3.1. Not Applicable

2.4. Amplification of or assumptions about measurement items

For the avoidance of doubt the following is provided to assist in the interpretation of descriptions given in the method of measurement. In the event of any ambiguity or inconsistency between the statements in

the method of measurement and this section, the interpretation given in this section shall be used.




Page 5 of 39

C2.2 the bill of quantities




ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT

CLAUSE DESCRIPTION AMOUNT

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Earthworks

Concrete, Reinforcement and Formwork

Masonry

Waterproofing

Roof covering

Carpentry and Joinery

Ceilings and Partitions

Ironmongery

Metal Works

Plastering

Paintwork

Tiling

floor covering

Rain water disposal

Storm water

Sewer

Sanitary fitting

Water reticulation

Fire Protection

TOTAL EXCLUDING VAT CARRIED TO FORM OF OFFER AND

ACCEPTANCE

SECTION 2 - ALTERATIONS

SECTION 3 - MHA WORKSHOP

SECTION 4 - PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

SECTION 5 - MECHANICAL

SECTION 6 - EXTERNAL WORKS

SECTION 7 - REFUSE AREA

SECTION 8- PROVISIONAL SUMS

Page 53 of 53

EXECUTIVE SUMMARYRev 3

ALTERATIONS




Item

No.

Payment

clauseDescription Unit Qty Rate Amount

SECTION 2BILL 1: ALTERATIONS

REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORKbreaking up and removing reinforced concrete

2.1.1 200 mm thick surface bed m² 701

200-250mm thick roof slab m² 80

Breaking up and removing unreinforced concrete

2.1.2 ramps m3

7

2.1.3 200mm thick slabs m² 24

breaking up and removing brickwork etc

2.1.4 280mm brick walls m² 49



Taking out and removing doors, windows, etc, including

thresholds, sills, etc and make good where necessary(building

up openings elsewhere measured)

2.1.7 Timber single door and frame not exceeding 2.5 m2

No 5

2.1.8 Timber double door and frame not exceeding 2.5m2

No 7

2.1.9 Standard type aluminium window 1.4x1.1m high No 2



2.1.12 Standard type aluminium window 1x0.6m high No 34


2.1.14 Aluminium sliding door 3.6x2.1m high No 2

2.1.15 Roller shutter door 1.73 X 2.09 high No 2

2.1.16 Roller shutter door 3.6 X 4.1m high No 13

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SECTION SUMMARY

Page 9 of 54

ALTERATIONS




Item

No.

Payment



Taking out and removing doors, windows, etc, including

thresholds, sills, etc and building up openings in brick walls,

including making good facebrick on both sides as per

engineers detail

2.1.17 Standard type aluminium louvred window 1x1m high No 2


2.1.19 Timber single door and frame not exceeding 2.5 m2 No 1



Taking out and removing doors, windows, etc from brickwork

to be demolished. Including sills, threshold etc (building up

openings and making good finishes elsewhere)

2.1.22 Timber single door and frame not exceeding 2.5 m2

No 12

2.1.23 Timber double door and frame not exceeding 2.5m2 No 1

Taking down and removing roofs, floors, panelling,

ceilings,partitions, etc

2.1.24Asbestos roof covering and timber purlins, including carting

away from site as per specifications m² 806

2.1.25 Chromadek roof covering m² 992

2.1.26Gypsum plasterboard ceilings, including cornices, timber

brandering, etc m² 499

2.1.27

Drywall partitions 2.9m high, including doors, glazed borrowed

lights, etc m 27

2.1.28 existing sisalation m² 152


Page 10 of 54

ALTERATIONS




Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 2BILL 1: ALTERATIONSTaking out and removing sundry joinery work, fittings, etc

2.1.29 Timber skirtings m 299

Hacking up/off and removing ceramic tiles including

removing mortar bed or adhesive from concrete or

brickwork and preparing surfaces for new screed, plaster, tile

finish, etc2.1.30 Tiles to floors m² 499

Taking out and removing piping, sanitary fittings, etc,

including cutting off as necessary, disconnecting piping

from fittings and making good floor and wall finishes

(making good tiling and paintwork elsewhere2.1.31 Stainless steel sink and drainer No 3

2.1.32

Stainless steel wash hand basin, with two centre bowls

including short lengths ofpiping, etc No 3

2.1.33Stainless steel sink and drainer including timber cupboard 1x 1

x 1mm high No 3

2.1.34

Vitreous china wash hand basin, including short lengths

ofpiping, etc No 5

2.1.35 Vitreous china WC pan with cistern No 5

BUILDING UP OPENINGS

Brickwork in NFP bricks in class II mortar in building up

openings including cutting toothings and bonding new to

existing.

2.1.36 One brick walls m² 15

AGATE SATIN FBX face bricks,zone 2 in class II mortar

pointed with wheather struck joints, including making good to

match existing:

2.1.37

280mm facebrick wall in cement mortar pointed both sides as

described,in building up openings m² 118

2.1.38


described,in building up openings m² 45

2.1.39


described,in raising existing brickwork m2

14


Page 11 of 54

ALTERATIONS




Item

No.

Payment



MAKING GOOD OF FINISHES, ETC

Making good face brickwork

2.1.40 Walls where half brick 280mm walls removed m² 1

2.1.41 reveals of walls to receive new roller shutter doors m 36

Making good cement screedsFloors where brick walls removed

2.1.42 Floors where half brick 280mm walls removed m² 4



Making good internal cement plaster




Page 12 of 54

ALTERATIONS




Item

No.

Payment



OPENINGS THROUGH EXISTING WALLS ETC

Breaking out and forming openings through brick walls for

new walls, including preparation to recieve new face

brickwork and bond to existing ( building up opening

elsewhere)2.1.47 Opening 3600 x 4100mm high through 280mm brick wall No 11

Breaking out for and forming openings through brick walls for

new windows, including brick lintels, facebrick on edge cills

and make good face brickwork on both sides and into reveals

2.1.48Opening for window 1.77x 1.15m high through one brick wall

No 4

2.1.49Opening for window 0.61x 0.61m high through one brick wall

No 2

ALTERING OPENINGS

2.1.50

Altering opening in one brick wall where 0.9 x 1.5m high

standard aluminium type window removed to form opening

for new window 0.61 x 0.61m high overall by breaking out

brickwork on both sides and bottom where necessary,

including cills,brick lintels and making good face brickwork on

both sides and into reveals (new windows elsewhere and

frame ) No 6

2.1.51

Ditto, where 0.9x1.5 window removed to form opening for

1.5x1.2m high window No 8

2.1.52

Altering opening in one brick wall where 3.6 x 2.1m high

standard aluminium type sliding door removed to form

opening for new window 2.44 x 0.61m high overall by

breaking out brickwork on both sides and bottom where

necessary, including cills,brick lintels and making good face

brickwork on both sides and into reveals (new windows

elsewhere and frame ) No 1


Page 13 of 54

ALTERATIONS




Item

No.

Payment



2.1.53

Altering opening in one brick wall where 1 x 0.6m high


for new window 0.61 x 0.61m high overall by breaking out


including new cills,brick lintels and making good face

brickwork on both sides and into reveals (new windows

elsewhere and frame ) No 18

2.1.54



2.1.55



2.1.56

Ditto, where 1x0.6 window removed to form opening for


2.1.57

Ditto, where 1x0.6 window removed to form opening for


2.1.58



for new wall louvre 0.61 x 0.61m high overall by breaking out



brickwork on both sides and into reveals (new wall louvres

elsewhere ) No 7

Breaking out for and forming openings through brick walls for

new doors and frames, including brick lintels, making good

cfacebrickwork on both sides and into reveals (new doorsand

frames and making good paintwork elsewhere

2.1.59

Opening for door with steel frame 929 x 2032m high overall

through half brick one brick wall No 1

Altering floors to suit purpose

2.1.60

break up floor , excavate for 1.1 x 1.1mm Brick sumps,

800mm deep internally and with 1.1 x1.1x0.3mm concrete

base,including risk of collapse,surface blinding,waterproofing,

cast iron gratings and covers etc as per engineers

specifications

No 2.00

2.1.61

Allow a sum of R 160 000.00 (one Hundred and Sixty

thousand rands) for removal and disposal of rubble from the

demolisions and claening and setting aside of materials for

reuse, as instructed by Project Manager

sum 1.00


Page 14 of 54




Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

sans1200 BILL 1: EARTHWORKS (PROVISIONAL)

SITE CLEARANCE ETC Site clearance

3.1.1

Digging up and removing rubbish, debris, vegetation,

hedges, shrubs, bush, etc and trees not exceeding 200mm

girth m² 100

EXCAVATION, FILLING, ETCEXCAVATIONS, ETC

Excavation in earth not exceeding 2m deep

3.1.2 under surface beds etc m³ 210

3.1.3 Trenches m³ 25

3.1.4 holes m³ 3

3.1.5 under ramps and walkways m³ 44

Extra over excavations in earth for excavations in3.1.6 soft rock m³ 25

3.1.7 hard rock m³ 25

CARTING AWAY

Extra over all excavations for loading, carting and

dumping surplus excavated material (no allowance made for

increase in bulk):

3.1.8 Off site to a dumping site loacted by the client m³ 284

Risk of collapse of excavations

3.1.9 Sides of trench and hole excavations not exceeding 1,5m deep m2

130

De-watering of seepage water and water from other sub-soil

sources

3.1.10 allow for pumping Hrs 168

FILLING ETCFilling with material from the excavations compacted to a

density of at least 95% Mod. AASHTO maximu density:

3.1.11 Backfilling to trenches, holes, etc. m3

10





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3BILL 1: EARTHWORKS (PROVISIONAL)

Filling with Approved material supplied and carted onto site by

the Contractor, compacted to a density of at least 95% Mod.

AASHTO maximum density:

3.1.12 G5 under floors M3

110

3.1.13 G5 in making up levels under ramps and walkways M3

60

3.1.14

G7 under floors compacted tp 98% Mod AASHTO maximum

density M3

110

SOIL POISONINGSoil insecticide in accordance with SANS 5859

3.1.15 To bottoms and sides of trenches etc m2

85

3.1.16

Under floors etc including forming and poisoning shallow

furrows against foundation walls etc, filling in furrows and

ramming m2

700

3.1.17 under ramps and walkways m2

101

DEMOLITIONS ETCTaking down and removing

3.1.18

Steel mesh security fence with steel posts and barbed wire

overhang, 2.4m high overall, including a double welded wire

gate 4.5x2.4m high. m 24





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL 2: CONCRETE, FORMWORK AND REINFORCEMENT

UNREINFORCED CONCRETE CAST AGAINST

EXCAVATED SURFACES

15Mpa/19mm conrete

3.2.1 Surface blinding under footings and bases m3

7

UNREINFORCED CONCRETE

15Mpa/19mm conrete

3.2.2 surface blinding under surface bed m3

35

3.2.3 walkway m3

6

30mpa/19mm concrete

3.2.4 ramps m3

4

30Mpa/19mm conrete

3.2.5 roof slab m3

10

REINFORCED CONCRETE CAST AGAINST

EXCAVATED SURFACES30MPa/19mm concrete

3.2.6 Strip footings m3

15

REINFORCED CONCRETE

3.2.7 Surface beds on waterproofing m3

125

3.2.8 bases :Foundations m

3 6

Water tank base m3

4

3.2.9 Columns in foundations(provisional) m3

1

3.2.10 Columns m3

3

TEST CUBES

3.2.11

Making and testing 150 x 150 x 150mm concrete strength test

cube (Provisional) No 15

CONCRETE SUNDRIES

Finishing top surfaces of concrete smooth with a steel

trowel

3.2.12 surface bed m2

700

Finishing top surfaces of concrete to a broom finish

3.2.13 on ramps m2

32





Item

No.

Payment


ROUGH FORMWORK

rough formwork to columns

3.2.14 Square columns in foundations (Provisional) m2

1

Rough formwork to sides

3.2.15

Edges, risers, ends and reveals not exceeding 300mm high or

wide m2

13

rough formwork to soffits

3.2.16 slabs propped not exceeding 1,5m high m2

48

SMOOTH FORMWORK

smooth formwork to columns

3.2.17 square columns m2

5

Rough formwork to sides

3.2.18

Edges, risers, ends and reveals not exceeding 300mm high or

wide m 32

MOVEMENT JOINTS ETC

horizontal keyed construction joints through concrete

including bitumen sealant to one face

3.2.19 Surface beds not exceeding 300mmm thick m 215

Saw-cut joints (3.2mm wide) sealed with sikaflex- 11 FC

sealant on backing cord (sealing according to manufacturers

specifications)

3.2.20 6.4 x 20mm Saw-cut joints in top of concrete m 215

Isolation joints including raking out concrete to 20mm depth

and seal with sikaflex- 11fc sealant on backing cord between

horizontal concrete surface and brick surfaces(sealing

according to manufacturers specifications)

3.2.21 Not exceeding 300mm high to edges of surface beds m 185

REINFORCEMENTMild steel reinforcement to structural concrete work

3.2.22 Y12 Diameter bars t 0.803.2.23 Y10 Diamter bars t 0.75

Fabric reinforcement

3.2.24 Mesh reinforcement Ref 193 in surface beds m2

2203.2.25 Mesh reinforcement Ref 395 in surface beds m

2 475

Privisional sum

3.2.26allow R 60 000.00 ( Sixty Thousand rands) for replacement of

damaged pirlins, as per Project Manager's InstructionSum 1.00





Item

No.

Payment

clause Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

SECTION 3

BILL 3: MASONRY

BRICKWORK

FOUNDATIONS (PROVISIONAL)Brickwork of NFX bricks (14 MPa nominal compressive

strength) in class II mortar

3.3.1 230mm brick walls m2

45

3.3.2 Piers m3

5

SUPERSTRUCTURE

Brickwork of NFX bricks (14 MPa nominal compressive



365

BRICKWORK SUNDRIES

3.3.4 Cutting toothings and bonding new brickwork to existing m2

3

2,5mm Brickwork reinforcement

3.3.5 150mm Wide reinforcement built in horizontally m 1337

Prestressed fabricated concrete lintels including necessary

temporary supports

3.3.6

150 x 150mm Lintels in lengths not exceeding 3m and not

4.5m m 60

3.3.7

Allow a sum of R 180 000.00 (One hundred and Eighty

Thousnad Rands) for washing and cleaning existing brickwork





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL NO 4: WATERPROOFING

DAMPPROOFING OF WALLS AND FLOORS

One layer 250 UPVC sheeting

3.4.1 under surface beds m2

715

3.4.2 under paving and walkways m2

101

waterpoofing to roofs, basements etc

3.4.3

Unigum Visp 4mm with silvakote eco wrapped around the over

hand off slab as per manufacturers recommendations m2

76





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL NO 5: ROOF COVERING

PROFILED FIBRE-CEMENT SHEETING AND

ACCESSORIES

Nutec fibre cement roof sheeting to match existing, fixed to

steel purlins, including fixing and painting etc

3.5.1 Roof covering with pitches not exceeding 25 degrees M2

992

3.5.2

allow a sum of R 90 000.00 (ninety Thousand rands) for

repair, fixing or replacing existing gutters and ridges sum 1





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3BILL NO 6: CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

CUPBOARDS TO KITCHENS, BEDROOMS, ETC

The following cupboard fittings have been given as complete units

i.e. the components of the units have not been given separately.

Descriptions of such units shall, therefore, be deemed to include all

components, assembling, housing, notching, glueing, blocking,

planting-on and screwing with countersunk screws, edge strips,

thermosetting plastic laminate, glass, ironmongery, metalwork,

paint or varnish finishes, etc as per furniture and kitchen detailNote

Kitchen cupboards etcKitchen cupboards etc with type PR concealed spring hinges, type

RAIEL Solid 188/220mm 12mm diameter ss Handles and type SS

RIH 552 UTA 45mm drawer slides

3.6.1

Sink cupboard type 2996 x 647 x 900mm high with sides, bottom,

divisions, shelf, back and double hinged doors

(sink elsewhere) No 1

Eaves, verges EtcMedium density plain Nutec fibre-cement fascias and barge boards

fixed with all necessary joining and fixing brackets as per

manufacturers recommendations

3.6.2

9 x 225mm Fascias including jointing connectors, brass

screws and adhesive. m 120

3.6.3

9 x 225mm barge including jointing connectors, brass


DOORS ETC

SEMI SOLID CORE FLUSH DOORS

3.6.4

44mm Door 813 x 2090mm high with rebated meeting styles,20

mm undercut No 1

3.6.5

44mm Door 813 x 2090mm high with rebated meeting styles,

200mm undercut No 2

Thick solid timber doors

3.6.6

44mm thick solid hardwood (813X2090) doors with diagonal slats,

hardboard covering on both sides,20mm undercut, hung to

hardwood frames No 9

3.6.7

44mm thick solid hardwood double doors (1614x2090)with

diagonal slats, hardboard covering on both sides, hung to

hardwood frames No 1

3.6.8

44mm thick solid hardwood double doors(16148x2090) with full

louvres, hardboard covering on both sides, hung to hardwood

frames No 8





Item

No.

Payment


GALVANISED PRESSED STEEL COMBINATION

DOORS AND FRAMES

Bitcon strong room doors:

3.6.9

Door 813 x 2032mm high with rebated frame suitable for one

brick wall and with 7 lever mortice lock. No 1

FRAMED FRAMES ETC

3.6.10 108 x 108mm Rebated frames m 32

BEADS, ARCHITRAVES, ETC

3.6.11 19mm Quadrant beads both sides m 63





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL 7: CEILINGS, PARTITIONS, ETC

Partitions

"GypRoc Standard System" steel stud partitions with both sides

clad with one layer of 12,5mm "Taper-edge

Rhinoboard"

3.7.1

Partitions 2.72m high with bottom track plugged and top track

fixed to suspended ceiling tees m 60

SUSPENDED CEILINGSCeilings shall comprise 8mm Jumbo H-strip ceiling System,

plasterboard boards screwed to steel brandering at maximum 400

centres and including screw-up suspension grid fixed to new

timbers rafters at 800mm centres as per manufacturers

instructions and Jumbo galvanised steel angle 25 x 25mm at ceiling

level to the wall perpendicular to steel brandering

3.7.2 Ceilings suspended not exceeding 1m below timber rafters M2

52

3.7.3

Ceilings suspended exceeding 4m and not exceeding 5m below

timber rafters M2

23

pelican Econocoust plus safeguarder ceilings tiles 600 x 600 x

15mm with square edge and white painted finish laid onto pelican

Econolok pre-painted white exposed tee grid system including fire

safety punch outs. Main tees suspended to existing roof system as

per manufactures instruction.

3.7.4


steel purlins M2

116

3.7.5


steel purlins M2

167

INSULATION

3.7.6

Isotherm board sisalation fixed as per manufacturers

recommendations between steel rafters M2

152





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL NO 8: METALWORK

STEEL ROLLER DOORS, ETC.

galvanised industrial heavy duty roller shutter door including

ironmongery, centre lift lock, guide rails, springs, rubber weather

strip to bottom, etc. and white powder coated finish:

3.8.1 Electrically operated slatted roller shutter for 3600 x 4100mm high

opening, including supply of electrical connection and motor as per

specifications and commissioning

No 4

ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, DOORS, ETC

Refer to attached window schedules for details of windows

Powder coated casement window units as per "wispeco 340 series

profile" system, complete with subframes, ironmongery, glass,

sealing, etc and fixing to brickwork or concrete

3.8.2 Standard window type 610 x 610mm high No 6



Epoxy powder coated aluminium doors glazed with 6.4mm

laminated safety glass, complete with ironmongery and frames as

per schedule and plugged to brickwork or concrete:

3.8.5 double door in two leaves size 1730 x 2090mm high overall (D25)No 1


DOORS AND FRAMES


3.8.6Door 813 x 2032mm high with rebated frame suitable for one

brick wall and with 7 lever mortice lock.No 1

ALUMINIUM SHOPFRONTSPowder coated shopfronts as per " wispeco shopfront clip 44"

system complete with subframes, ironmongery, glass,10x10 solid

bars to open sections, solar shield, sealing, etc and fixing to

brickwork or concrete

3.8.7 Standard door type 2967x2600 mm high No 1

3.8.8 Standard door type 2967x2600 mm high No 1

3.8.9

Allow a sum of R 280 000.00 (Two Hundred and Eighty Thousand

Rands) for cleaning existing metal work, steel corrotion and

painting to Transnet's Ports standards for metal works

sum 1





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL NO 9: IRONMONGERYHINGES, FLOOR SPRING HINGES, BOLTS, PANIC

BOLTS, ETC.

3.9.1 dorma DBB SS 09 butt hinge No 11

3.9.2 dorma D037 euro profile cylinder dead lock No 11

3.9.3 Dorma DCE 002 steel euro profile escutcheon No 7

3.9.4 Dorma D038R conversion kit No 2

3.9.5 Erebus heavy duty adjustable roller bolt No 6

3.9.6 Howick H400 150X20mm aluminium lever flush bolts No 2

3.9.7 Howick H409 600X20mm aluminium lever action flush bolts No 2

3.9.8 Dorma DBB SS 009 stainless steel two ball but hinge No 7

3.9.9 Dorma DBB SS 017 steel floor stop No 2

3.9.10 weather bar No 2

3.9.11 Dorma dust proof socket No 1

HANDLES, FLUSH PULLS, ETC.

Handles, flush pulls, etc.:

3.9.12

25mm 'Dorma DPH207 SS' 200mm long T-shaped straight bolt

through pull handle. No 1

3.9.13

25mm 'Dorma DPH301 C' 200mm long D-shaped straight bolt

through pull handle. No 19

3.9.14 Dorma pht lever handle No 1

3.9.15 Dorma TS83 arm door closer, push side fitting No 2

3.9.16 Dorma PHB 3000 series 2 point locking panic touch bar No 2

3.9.17 Dorma pht 3901 fire escape access with lever handle No 1

3.9.18 Cisa C2000 single lever, grade 3 security lock, nickel plated No 3

3.9.19 stainless steel hat and coat hook No 2

3.9.20 300x200x1mm stainless steel push plate No 2

BATHROOM FITTINGS

Franke':

3.9.21 'Chronos' SS single toilet roll holder (code RH140HD) size 140 x No 4

SUNDRIES

3.9.22 Union CZ8731SC' door stop plugged. No 2





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL NO 10: PLASTERING

SCREEDS

Screeds wood floated, on concrete

3.10.1 Average 40mm thick on floors to falls with 'ABE Duraproof'additive. m2

30

INTERNAL PLASTER

Cement plaster steel trowelled on brickwork:

3.10.2 On walls. m2

565

Cement plaster steel trowelled, on concrete

3.10.3 under slabs m2

48





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL NO 11: PAINTWORK

Previously painted plastered surfaces

Surfaces shall be thoroughly washed down and allowed to dry

completely before any paint is applied. Blistered or peeling paint

shall be completely removed and cracks shall be opened, filled with

a suitable filler and finished smooth

Previously painted metal surfacesSurfaces shall be thoroughly rubbed and cleaned down.

Blistered or peeling paint shall be completely removed down to

bare metal

PAINTWORK ETC TO NEW WORK

prepare and paint with plascon double velvet, colour artists canvas,

code y2-e2-3

3.11.1 On walls m2

565

prepare and paint with white plascon wall paint

3.11.2 under slabs m2

48





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL NO 12: TILING

310 x 310 x first grade porcelain floor tiles (PC R ?/m²) fixed with

adhesive to power floated concrete and flush pointed with

waterproof grout as per specifications

3.12.1 On floors M2

328

Epoxy coating as per 'flowcrete' peran as per manufacturers

recommendations

3.12.2 on floors M2

557

300 x 100mm porcelain tile skirt to match porcelain floor tile

3.12.3 skirting 100mm high m 198

Plastered coved skirting, with epoxy finish

3.12.4 skirting 75mm high m 147

WALL TILING

200 x 200mm, 1st grade white glazed ceramic tiles fixed to

drywalls, including fixing to drywall with the necessary items and

flushed pointed

3.12.5 On Walls m2

117





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 3

BILL NO 13: FLOOR COVERING

3.13.1

Prepare existing floor and apply Rubber floor bunding 38mm x

75mm wide all around the floor for spillage containment purposes. m 30


Plumbing and drainage (rainwate




Item No.Payment


SECTION 4 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

BILL NO1: RAINWATER DISPOSAL150mm diameter seamless aluminium prepainted white gutters with all

necessary fixing brackets as per manufacturers recommendations and

rainwater pipes

4.1.1 150mm Half-round roof gutters m 131

4.1.2 Extra over gutter for stopped end No 4

4.1.3 Extra over gutter for outlet for 125mm pipe No 22

PVC PIPES

4.1.4 120mm diameter pipes to wall m 96

Extra over:

4.1.5 Extra over rainwater pipe for swan-neck No 18

Extra over rainwater pipe for bend No 184.1.6

Extra over rainwater pipe for shoe No 18


Page 31 of 54




Item

No.

Payment


SANS 1200 SECTION 4

DEMOLITIONS & ALTERATIONS

8.2.8

4.2.1 m 34.74

4.2.2 no 1.00

4.2.3no 2.00

4.2.4 sum 1.00

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

4.2.5

Rip and compact in-situ material to 95% mod AASHTO density m2 8.80

SPIGOT AND SOCKET PIPES WITH RUBBER RINGS

LE 8.2.1

(b) Spigot and socket class 100D with rubber rings

4.2.6 450mm Diameter m 20.00

CONCRETE , FORMWORK AND REINFORCEMENT

GA 8.2.1 ROUGH FORMWORK

Rough formwork to narrow widths

4.2.7 GA 8.2.3 (a) Edges , risers , etc not exceeding 300mm wide m 4.22

REINFORCEMENT

GA 8.3.1 Steel bars

(b) High tensile steel

4.2.8 Y10 ton 0.64

GA 8.3.2 High tensile welded mesh

4.2.9 (a) Ref no.193 m² 8.80


BILL NO 2: STORM WATER DRAINAGE (MHA)

Demolish and remove structures/buildings and dismantle

steelwork, etc. (Provisional)

Breakup and remove manholes bases including reinforcement

complete.

Allow provisional sum of R100 000.00 for Removal of 500x500mm

concrete block paving for pipeline with an avarage 0.68m width,

set aside for reuse and make good

Supply, lay, bed (class C bedding) and test concrete pipe culverts

including all cutting to ends

Repair or clean where necessarry existing 300mm dia x 100mm

deep 30Mpa/19mm stones precast concrete channel with an

overall size of 500mm x 310mm high

Repair existing road side catchpit type D3 Dwg No. A04223745-2-

009-C-DE-0002-05-1TD




Item

No.

Payment


SANS 1200 SECTION 4

STRENGTH CONCRETE

GA 8.4.2 Strength concrete 15Mpa/19mm

4.2.10 (a) Blinding layer 15mm thick m³ 0.13


4.2.11 Concrete base m³ 2.20

SURFACE FINISHES

Unformed surface finishes

(a) Wood floated finish

4.2.12 Concrete base m² 8.80

SOILCRETE

Soilcrete (5% OPC)

4.2.13 (a) Backfilling around pipe culverts m³ 50.00

CATCHPITS,SUMPS, INSPECTION CHAMBERS, etc

LE 8.2.8

LE 8.2.8 (b) 1840 x 1380mm catchpit single connection of 450mm Diameter

pipe culvert (Straight & Angle)

4.2.14 1,5 - 2,0m Deep no 2.00


NFX bricks Catchpits in Class 2 Motar complete with type A catchpit

cover and frame including concrete benching rendered in 1:3

cement mortar Dwg A04223745-2-009-C-DE-0002-05-.1-TD

BILL NO 2: STORM WATER DRAINAGE (MHA)




Item

No.

Payment


SANS 1200 SECTION 4:

SEWER

DEMOLITIONS & ALTERATIONS

8.2.8

no 2.00

m² 173.03

EARTHWORKS

CLEAR AND GRUB SITE

DB 8.3.1 (a) Clear and grub strips for (where not cleared within other clear

and grub areas)

Pipeline 0.76m wide m 176.51

REMOVE TOPSOIL

DB 8.3.1 (b) Remove topsoil to a depth of 150mm and

Stockpile on site within freehaul distance and maintain m3 26.48

cart away by the Contractor m3 26.48


DB 8.3.2

(a) Up to 1m wide

Up to 1m deep m3 20.77

Over 1m and up to 2m deep m3 152.36



(b) Extra over reference 8.3.2 (a) for

Intermediate excavation m3 28.16

Hard rock excavation m3 14.08


BILL 1 : PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE


steelwork, etc. (Provisional)

Breakup and remove manholes, bases, brickwork including

reinforcement complete and re-fill with suitable imported material

compacted to 90% mod AASHTO density

Remove 500x500mm concrete block paving and reistate and make

good

Excavate in all materials, backfill and compact to 90% mod

AASHTO density, and dispose of surplus and unsuitable materials

for trenches




Item

No.

Payment


SANS 1200 SECTION 4

SEWER

DB 8.3.2 Excavate unsuitable material from trench bottom, dispose of

material, and re-fill with suitable imported material compacted

to 90% mod AASHTO density

m3 61.71

Rib and compact in-situ material to 95% mod AASHTO density m2 38.88

FINISHING, TOPSOILING AND GRASSING

D 8.3.10 Top soiling with material from stockpiles on site

(a) Spread over site m3 26.48

BEDDING (PIPES)

BEDDING FROM COMMERCIAL SOURCES

LB 8.2.2

(a) Selected granular material m³ 34.88

(b) Selected fill material m³ 26.83

uPVC SEWER PIPES

LD 8.2.1 (a) Supply, lay, joint, bed (class C bedding) and test uPVC class 34

spigot and socket sewer pipes with moulded rubber rings to

SABS 791

160mm Diameter m 176.51

MANHOLES

LD 8.3.2

(a) 1680 x 1680mm Manholes (straight & angle)

Up to 1,0m deep no 2.00

1,0 - 1,5m Deep no 4.00

1,5 - 2,0m Deep no 1.00

2,0 - 2,5m Deep no 1.00

2,5 - 3,0m Deep no 2.00

(b) 1680 x 1680mm Manholes (Y-junction Connection)

2,5 - 3,0m Deep no 1.00


NFX Bricks manholes in class 2 cement motar complete with

precast concrete heavy duty cover and frame to SANS 558 Type 2A

including concrete benching rendered in 1:3 cement motar Dwg

A1223745-2-009-DE-0003-03-1TD

Provision of bedding material by importation from commercial

sources selected by the Contractor




Item

No.

Payment


SANS 1200 SECTION 4

SEWER

BILL NO 3: CONCRETE , FORMWORK AND REINFORCEMENT



4.3.1 GA 8.2.3 (a) Edges , risers , etc not exceeding 300mm wide m 82.72

REINFORCEMENT

GA 8.3.1 Steel bars

(b) High tensile steel

4.3.2 Y12 ton 26.25


4.3.3 (a) Ref no.193 m² 38.88

STRENGTH CONCRETE


4.3.4 (a) Blinding layer 15mm thick m³ 0.31


4.3.5 m³ 7.78

Concrete base

SURFACE FINISHES



4.3.6 Concrete base m² 38.88

SOILCRETE

Soilcrete (5% OPC)

4.3.7 (a) Backfilling around pipes m³ 13.41

MARKER POSTS

LD 8.2.9 Markings and marker posts , Etc

(a) Inscribed and painted marking on kerbing

4.3.8 Kerb marking No 10.00





Item

No.

Payment


SANS 1200 SECTION 4

SEWER

CONNECTIONS

LD 8.2.11 Connection to Existing Sewer at

4.3.9sum 1.00

SEWER PUMP

Sewer pump

4.3.10sum 1.00


Provide provisional sum at R20 000 ( Twenty thoussand Rand) for

sewer connection at existing sewer

Provide provisional sum at R40113 ( Fourty Thousand One

hundred and Thirteen Rand) for sewer pump at existing sewer

PD SANITARY FITTINGS




Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 4

BILL NO 4: SANITARY FITTINGS

SANITARY FITTINGS

Vaal':

4.4.1

vaal sanitaryware springbok ceramic fireclay heavy duty basin

colour white (code 7031), size 550 x 400mm with two tapholes,

including integrated overflow and chainstay hole fixed to wall on

and including two semi concealed cast iron brackets (code

8118Z0) and sealed with silicone sealant where basin meets wall,

with a bottle trap

No 3

4.4.2Orchid 439020 and flushmaster FJ2100, including double flap seat

and all fittings, white in colour No 3

4.4.3

vaal orchid 439004 as supplied with timber seat and cradle bracket

8082zo, white in colour with flushmaster FM1.100 with c-fm.80

extension lever No 3

4.4.4

vaal sanitaryware 415 x 275 x 315mm flatback white vitreous

china wall mounted urinal( code 705326) including 38mm

chromium plated domical grating (code 8787zo) and chromium

plated top inlet spreader (code 8543zo), flush valve Cobra FJ6000

and flush pipr Cobra FJT5.5 fixed on and including two hanger

brackets (code 8127zo), with cobra 360 bottle trapNo 1

cobra

4.4.5vulcan DCBS 18DBR Bowl prep.sink 1850mm 430 type SS/ pot sink

No 1

TAPS, VALVES, ETC.

4.4.6

Cobra watertech star 15mm pillar tap with flanged backnut (code

128-15) manufactured in accordance with SANS 226:2004 type

1(BS5412).(1 HOT 1 COLD) No 4

4.4.7Toilet roll holder: tuff roll lockable holding 5 rolls by as 'tuff" as

supplied by 'tuff" systems No 3

4.4.8

20mm Bevelled mirror, 6mm silver backed float glass 400 x

800mm above basin bevelled edge mounted flush tiles as per

achitect details, mirror to be fixed with dome capped mirror screwsNo 3

4.4.9hands free hand dryer hf2400 hd product code 359961 by "franke"

No 3

4.4.10 waste disposal bin strx 605 product code 359730 by "franke" No 4

4.4.11paper towel dispenser strx 600 product code 359700 by "franke'

No 4

4.4.12

zip stainless steel 5 litre Hydroboil pro, size 289 x 180 x 43mm

high with instant boiling water, two way tap control tap and sub

micron filtration, connected to 15mm cold water supply and 220

volt 15 amp electrical power supply, plugged and screwed to wall

and fiited under 1 year guarantee. No 1

4.4.13 hands free soap dispenser hf950 sd No 3


Page 38 of 54




Item

No.

Payment



EARTHWORKS ( PIPE TRENCHES )

CLEAR AND GRUB SITE

8.2.8

4.5.1

Remove 500x500mm concrete block paving for pipeline with an

avarage 0.68m width, set aside for reuse and make good m 97.91

REMOVE TOPSOIL

DB 8.3.1 (b) Remove topsoil to a depth of 150mm and

4.5.2 Stockpile on site within freehaul distance and maintain m3 14.69

4.5.3 carting away by the Contractor m3 81.48


DB 8.3.2

(a) Up to 1m wide

4.5.4 Up to 1m deep m3 88.35

4.5.5 Over 1m and up to 2m deep m3 35.27

(b) Extra over reference 8.3.2 (a) for

4.5.6 Intermediate excavation m3 12.36

4.5.7 Hard rock excavation m3 6.18

4.5.8DB 8.3.2

Excavate unsuitable material from trench bottom, dispose of

material, and re-fill with suitable imported material compacted

to 90% mod AASHTO density m3

42.14



BILL NO 5: WATER RETICULATION (MHA)

Excavate in all materials, backfill and compact to 90% mod




Item

No.

Payment



FINISHING, TOPSOILING AND GRASSING

D 8.3.10 Top soiling with material from stockpiles on site

4.5.9 (a) Spread over site m3 14.69

BEDDING (PIPES)

BEDDING FROM COMMERCIAL SOURCES

LB 8.2.2

4.5.10 (a) Selected granular material m³ 24.50

4.5.11 (b) Selected fill material m³ 17.63

PE 100 HDPE PIPES

L 8.2.1

(a) Class 12 pipes

4.5.12 50mm Diameter m 14.99

4.5.13 75mm Diameter m 118.09

4.5.14 100mm Diameter m 6.00

4.5.15 110mm Diameter m 6.00

DISINFECT PIPES

(b) Disinfect pipes

4.5.16 50mm Diameter m 14.99

4.5.17 75mm Diameter m 118.09

4.5.18 100mm Diameter m 6.00

4.5.19 110mm Diameter m 6.00


Provision of bedding material by importation from commercial

Supply, lay, joint, bed (class B bedding) and test HDPE spigot and




Item

No.

Payment



PIPE FITTINGS

L 8.2.2

HDPE Class 12 pressure bends

75mm Diameter 90° no 38.00

75x75x75mm no 5.00

HDPE Class 12-ended female reducers to SABS 966

50x32mm no 4.00

75x50mm no 4.00

110x75mm no 2.00

FIRE HOSE REEL ASSEMBLIES

(a) Extra over items 8.2.1(a) for supply, install, bed and testing

fire hose reel assemblies complete including cutting of pipes,

couplings, tee pieces, etc

On 75mm pipeline no 5.00

VALVES ASSEMBLIES

L 8.2.3(a) Extra over items 8.2.1 for supply, install, bed and test "cap

top" line valve assembly as SABS 543, including cutting of

pipes, couplings, etc

25mm Dia galvanised mild steel pipe (75mm pipeline) no 5.00

SUNDRIES

L 8.2.4(a) Extra over item 8.2.1(a) for cutting of pipe and supplying and

fixing of extra coupling

25mm dia no 3.00

DRIP TRAYS, TANKS, ETC

15 000 Litre tank 2440 x 4880 x 1220mm high, approximately

150mm high above ground level

no 1.00


Extra over items 8.2.1(a) for supply, install, bed and test the

HDPE Class 12 tee's, including all adaptors, reducers, etc to SABS

ABECO (SG1) domestic water tank with black lining internally or





Item

No.

Payment



1000 Littre no 2.00

1200 Littre no 2.00

HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TESTING

Hydraulic pressure testing of pipelines

75mm ND pipes m 118.09

110mm ND pipes m 6.00

DISINFECT PIPES AND WATER TANKS

Disinfect water tanks

1000 Littre no 2.00

1200 Littre no 2.00

15000 Litre no 1.00

CONCRETE , FORMWORK AND REINFORCEMENT



GA 8.2.3 (a) Edges , risers , etc not exceeding 300mm wide m 21.08

REINFORCEMENT


(a) Ref no.193 m² 14.49

STRENGTH CONCRETE


(a) Blinding layer 15mm thick m³ 2.17


Concrete plinth m³ 2.99



12 KW Heat Transfare water tanks model No. HT1000S with




Item

No.

Payment



SURFACE FINISHES



Concrete base m² 14.49

CONCRETE ENCASEMENT AND THRUST BLOCKS

(b) Measured per m³

Thrust blocks m³ 11.13

Casing around pipes m³ 15.14

SOILCRETE

Soilcrete (5% OPC)

(a) Backfilling around pipes m³ 5.00

ERF CONNECTIONS MEASURED IN NUMBER

LF 8.2.1

Single erf connection

Near side Type (to existing water supply line) no 1.00

LF 8.2.2

110mm Nominal diameter m 6.00

110mm Diameter no 1.00

LF 8.2.4 Supply and Install meters complete with couplings

80mm Diameter Watermain Type (???) no 1.00


Anchor/thrust blocks and pedestals in strength concrete

Encasement of pipes in strength concrete 25Mpa/19mm including

Supply and install erf connections complete with all fittings as

Supply, lay, bed and test additional PE100 HDPE class 12 piping

Supply and install Plasson uPVC saddles to PE100 HDPE water





Item

No.

Payment



LF 8.2.5 Site testing of meters, when ordered (Provivisional)

sum 1.00

LF 8.2.6 Supply and Install stop taps complete with special fittings

80mm Diameter gate valve no 2.00

SURFACE BOXES

LF 8.2.7 Supply and install Surface boxes

80mm Diameter gate valve no 2.00

MARKER POSTS

LD 8.2.9 Markings and marker posts , etc Dwg ???

(a) Inscribed and painted marking on surface boxes

Surface box marking Item 1.00

MECHANICAL WORK

PUMPS SETS

Pumps

no 1.00

no 2.00


Provide provisional sum of R (20 000) for testing meter when

6.60 KW input floor mounted cold water ZILMENT booster pump

4.25 KW input floor mounted ITS direct heat pump model No. ITS-


WATER SUPPLY IN BUILDING




Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 4BILL NO 6: WATER SUPPLIES IN BUILDINGGalvanised steel pipes:

4.6.1 15mm pipes m 50

4.6.2 15mm pipes chased m 30



Extra over galvanised pipes for fittings

4.6.5 15mm fittings No 20




Page 45 of 54

FIRE SERVICE




Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 4

BILL 7 :FIRE SERVICE

WATER SUPPLIES TO FIRE APPLIANCES

Fixing of pipes

Unless specifically otherwise stated, descriptions of pipes

shall be deemed to include for fixing to walls, etc. casting in,

building in or suspending not exceeding 1m below suspension

level. No allowance for holes and drilling for pipes through

walls has been made in these Bills of quantities, the price for

all holes and making good shall be deemed to be included in

the descriptions of the pipes. Note

Galvanised steel pipes:

4.7.1 25mm Pipes. m 120

Extra over galvanised steel pipes for steel fittings:

4.7.2 25mm fittingsNo 40

FIRE APPLIANCES, ETC.TYCO OR OTHER APRROVED:

rates must include supplying and putting up signages as per

drawing specifications Note

4.7.3

Kama Industries or similar,Emergency Air Horn type Sirenco

Blaster 300ML, including Sirenco Wall box enclosure and fixing

on wal. No 2

4.7.4

36 x 19m Fire Hose Reel with 220kpa minimum Inlet pressure,

1000kpa maximum inlet pressure, approximately 22kg with

steel signal red back and front plate supported with mild steel

zinc plate, including swivel zinc plate guide arm, zinc coated

ball valve, brass nozzel and rubber gasket

No 2

4.7.5 5kg Carbon dioxide fire extinguisher. No 6


4.7.7

Allow a sum of R 30 000 (Thirty Thousand Rands) for

connection to main, including profit and attendance sum 1

4.7.8

Allow a sum of R 20 000 (twenty Thousand Rands ) for pipe

protection and insulation sum 1

TESTING:

4.7.9 Testing fire water pipe system. sum 1


Page 46 of 54




Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 5 MECHANICAL WORKBILL 1: MECHANICAL

MECHANICAL BUILDERS WORK

Altering existing openings

5.1.1


standard aluminium type window removed to form opening for

new wall louvre 0.61 x 0.61m high overall by breaking out



brickwork and reveals (new wall louvres elsewhere ) No 6

5.1.2

ditto, where 1 x 0.6m high standard aluminium type window

removed to form opening for 0.70 x 0.70 wall louvreNo 1

5.1.3ditto, where 0.4 x 0.4m high standard aluminium type window

removed to form opening for 1.8 x 0.8 wall louvre No 3

Openings through wall other than where windows

were removed for New mechanical installations

The following shall include openings through walls, ceilings,

roofs etc and make good to look as before including all

necessary supports, fixing etc Note

FAN SCHEDULEsupply and install

XPELAIR

5.1.4

GX9 wall mounted fan, including mounting.Fan with 41w

power input and capable of taking 1ph/220v/50Hz power

supply No 6

5.1.5



supply No 2

5.1.6

XPRS355 Inline fan, including mounting.Fan with160w power

input and capable of taking 1ph/220v/50Hz power supply No 1

5.1.7



supply No 5

5.1.8

XPRS250 Inline fan with filter box, including mounting.Fan

with 200w power input and capable of taking 1ph/220v/50Hz

power supply No 2

5.1.9

XPRS315 Inline fan with filter box, including mounting.Fan

with 600w power input and capable of taking 1ph/220v/50Hz

power supply No 1





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 5 MECHANICAL WORKBILL 1: MECHANICAL

VORTICE:

5.1.10

E 254 Inline fan with filter box, including mounting.Fan with

167w power input and capable of taking 1ph/220v/50Hz

power supply No 1

VENT SCHEDULESupply and install

Trox-Techniks

5.1.11

445 x 225mm type X-Grille basic vent including installation and

finished with epoxy colour coat No 9

LOUVER, AIR BALANCING, VENTILATORS & FILTER

SCHEDULE

TROX:Supply and Install,including opening for duct through

walls/roofs where necessary and make good.

5.1.121800 x 800mm AWK-Weather proof Louver , finished with

Epoxy colour coating. No 12





5.1.15AK manual operated air balancing damper, finished with epoxy

coating. No 12

Supply and Install,including opening for duct through

walls/roofs where necessary and make good.

PINNACLE OR OTHER APPROVED:

5.1.16

CPT400 Turbine Ventilator with a flow rate of 1083 L/S @

15km/h, 560mm head dimension, 600sqaure mm base plate,

540mm high overall and 400mm throat size No 8

5.1.17597 x 597mm AWK-Weather Louver with type WP-PS 597

x597x50mm Filters, finished with Epoxy colour coating. No 21

5.1.18697 x 697mm AWK-Weather Louver, finished with Epoxy

colour coating. No 1

5.1.19497 x 497mm AWK-Weather Louver with type GC-M 495

x495x50mm Filters, finished with Epoxy colour coating. No 2





Item

No.Payment


GRILL/DIFFUSER SCHEDULESupply and install

TROX TECHNIKS:

5.1.20 550X400 Door grill finished with Epoxy colour coating No 2

5.1.21600x600mm Swirl type Diffuser, finished with Epoxy colour

coating No 2

EUROPAIR OR OTHER APPROVED:

5.1.22 550X400 Door grill finished with Epoxy colour coating No 16

RAFFsupply and installEUROPAIR OR OTHER APPROVED:

5.1.23 600X600 Raff finished with Epoxy colour coating No 6

AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONSupply and install

Descriptions of ducts shall be deemed to include stiffeners,

jointing materials, sealants, couplers in the running length

and access/inspection panels in accordance with the

specification note

SPLIT TYPE" UNITSOUTDOOR AC EQUIPMENT DAIKIN OR OTHER APPROVED

5.1.24

24 amps Condensing Unit capable of taking 3ph/380-

400V/50Hz power supply, model RXYQ12T, inculding

excavations,concrete bases, connections, ducts , etc as per

enigeers drawing No 1

5.1.25

40.1kw Condensing Unit capable of taking 3ph/380-400V/50Hz

power supply, model RXYQ12T, inculding excavations,

concrete bases, connections, ducts , etc as per enigeers

drawing No 1





Item

No.Payment


AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONSupply and install

INDOOR AC EQUIPMENT

DAIKIN:

5.1.26

40.9kW Wall mounted unit with condensor section mounted

on external wall No 1

5.1.27

115w round flow cassette capable of taking 1ph/220-

240V/50Hz power supply, model FXFQ100A No 2

5.1.28

43w fully flat cassette capable of taking 1ph/220-240V/50Hz

power supply, model FXZQ25A No 4

5.1.29

92w round flow cassette capable of taking 1ph/220-

240V/50Hz power supply, model FXFQ80A No 1

PROVISIONAL SUMS

Mechanical budgetary allowances:

5.1.30

Provide the amount of R90 000.00 (Ninty thousand rands) for

Air conditioning installation including piping,ducts, fittings, etc.

installed complete item 1





Item

No.

Payment

clause

Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO 2: CRAWL BEAM

Sika non-shrink grout

5.2.1

Bedding approximately 25mm thick under 310 x 310mm base

plate including chamfered edges all round No 1

Welded beams in single lengths with flat bearer and

connection plates, bolted to steel

5.2.2 305x165x46kg/m I section t 2.3

5.2.3 20mm end plate kg 0.785

5.2.4 20mm base plate kg 0.30144

BOLTS, FASTENERS, ETC

5.2.5

20mm grade 8.8 HD bolts, 700mm long cast on top of

concrete in exact position No 4

5.2.6 20mm grade 8.8 chemical anchors No 4

5.2.7 20 mm grade 8.8 No 32

CRAWL BEAM, including supply and certification

5.2.8

5T Electric Crawl Trolley - to meet all SANS and OHS Act

requirements. Refer to specification. No 1

5.2.9

5T Electric Hoist - to meet all SANS and OSHAct requirements.

Refer to specification. No 1





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 6 EXTERNAL WORKSBILL 1: CARPORTS

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Supply, Fabrication, Delivery and erection of steelwork, Grade

300W, to SABS 1200H, ultimate tensile strength of 450mpa,

minimum yield stress of 250mpa, all welds shall be 6mm fillet

welds all round where possible, all structural steel shall be hot

dip galvanised to SABS ISO 1461(frame and uprights 50 x

2mm), 2720mm high to ceiling level , with Bonnet: high

density polyethylene shade cloth(86%) supported on steel

structures on sides and tops,all painting to be done to portnets

specification(HE/9/2/8 and manufacturers instruction, Bolts to

grade 8.8 hot dip galvanised, 500 x 500 x 500mm 30mpa

unreinforce concrete foundation for carports and making good

existing pave ,includin shop detail drawings,

6.1.1

Prepare and submit shop detail drawings as described in the

Project Specification and to the approval of the Engineer sum 1

Two Bay Carport:

6.1.2

Supply and install 5571 x 5000mm Parking Bays to park 20

cars. (two banks of five parking bays). No 10

6.1.3

Supply and install 5571 x 3000mm Parking Bays to park 1 car

for people with disabilities No 1





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 6 EXTERNAL WORKSBILL 1: HEIGHT RESTRICTION STRUCTURE

EXTERNAL WORKS: HEIGHT RESTRICTION

STRUCTURES

Builders work

EXCAVATIONS, FILLING ETC

Excavations in earth not exceeding 2m deep in:

6.1.4 holes m3

8

extra over for excavations in:

6.1.5 soft rock m3

1

6.1.6 hard rock m3

1

FILLING ETCFilling with material from the excavations compacted to a

density of at least 95% Mod. AASHTO maximu density:

6.1.7 Backfilling to trenches, holes, etc. m3

4




6.1.8

G2 base- graded crushed stones compacted to 98%

Mod.AASHTO maximum density M3

1

6.1.9

G5 base- cement stabilised compacted to 95% Mod.AASHTO

maximum density M3

1

CARTING AWAY



increase in bulk):

6.1.10 Off site to a dumping site loacted by the client m³ 4



8





Item

No.Payment


SECTION 6 EXTERNAL WORKS

BILL 1: HEIGHT RESTRICTION STRUCTURE

CONCRETE, FORMWORK AND REINFORCEMENT

UNREINFORCED CONCRETE

10Mpa/19mm conrete

6.1.12 surface blinding under bases m3

10

REINFORCED CONCRETE CAST IN FORMWORK

6.1.13 Bases m3

3

6.1.14 Footings m3

0.33

Sika non-shrink grout

6.1.15

Bedding approximately 25mm thick under 900 x 300mm base

plate including chamfered edges all round No 2

REINFORCEMENT

Mild steel reinforcement

6.1.16 Y10mm diameter bars t 0.283

6.1.17 Y12mm diameter bars t 0.423

High tensile steel reinforcement

6.1.18 R8 diameter bars t 0.142

Welded columns in single lengths with flat base, cap, bearer

and connection plates, bolted to concrete

6.1.19



Supply and fabrication of steelwork

Fabricate in Workshop

6.1.20 102 x 5 x12.0 KG/m H section Columns t 1.027

6.1.21 20mm base plate kg 0.424

6.1.22 6mm column stiffeners kg 0.133

6.1.23 63mm x 4 x 5.82 KG/m t 0.407

BOLTS, FASTENERS, ETC

6.1.24

20mm grade 8.8 HD bolts, 700mm long cast on top of

concrete in exact position No 12

6.1.25 16mm grade 8.8 bolts No 32

Welded beams in single lengths with flat bearer and

connection plates, bolted to steel

6.1.26







Item

No.Payment


SECTION 6 EXTERNAL WORKS

BILL 1: HEIGHT RESTRICTION STRUCTURE

Supply and fabrication of steelwork

Fabricate in Workshop

6.1.27 102 x 5 x12.0 KG/m beams t 0.394

6.1.28 12mm gusset plate kg 0.128

6.1.29 51 x 5mm CHS t 0.735

6.1.30 18 x 2 Kg/m solid bars t 3.520

6.1.31 20mm diameter solid bars t 1.492

6.1.32 550mm long galvanised chain No 6

6.1.33 flush mount 350mm wide chevron boards No 2





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 7 REFUSE AREA EARTHWORKS (PROVISIONAL)

SITE CLEARANCE ETC Site clearance

7.1.1


hedges, shrubs, bush, etc and trees not exceeding 200mm

girth m² 64.976

EXCAVATION, FILLING, ETCEXCAVATIONS, ETC


7.1.2 for new surface slab m³ 19.2685

Extra over excavations in earth for excavations in7.1.3 soft rock m³ 8

7.1.4 hard rock m³ 8

CARTING AWAY



increase in bulk):

7.1.5 Off site to a dumping site loacted by the client m³ 19.2685



17.12

De-watering of seepage water and water from other sub-soil

sources

7.1.7 allow for pumping Hrs 400

FILLING ETC




7.1.8 G5 in making up levels under surface bed M3

30

SOIL POISONINGSoil insecticide in accordance with SANS 5859

7.1.9 To bottoms and sides of excavations etc m2

43.7656





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 7


REINFORCED CONCRETE CAST AGAINST

EXCAVATED SURFACES

30MPa/19mm concrete

7.1.10 surface beds on waterproofing m3

7.22568

TEST CUBES

7.1.11

Making and testing 150 x 150 x 150mm concrete strength test

cube (Provisional) No 4

CONCRETE SUNDRIES

Finishing top surfaces of concrete smooth with a steel trowel


24.0856

MOVEMENT JOINTS ETC

horizontal keyed construction joints through concrete including

bitumen sealant to one face


REINFORCEMENT

Fabric reinforcement

7.1.14 Mesh reinforcement Ref 193 in surface beds m2

24.0856





Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 7

MASONRY

BRICKWORKCorobrik "Agate Satin FBX' Facebrick to match existing in class

II mortar point with wheather struck joints


39.4468

7.1.16 facebrick columns m3

0.29247

Brick-on-edge header course copings, sills, etc of "Corobrik

"Agate Satin FBX" face bricks, pointed with wheather joints on

all exposed faces

7.1.17 220mm Copings on top of one brick walls m 21.62



WATERPROOFINGDAMPPROOFING OF WALLS AND FLOORSOne layer 250 UPVC sheeting

7.1.19 under surface beds m2

32

ROOF COVERING

PROFILED FIBRE-CEMENT SHEETING AND

ACCESSORIES

7.1.20

design and supply roof structure design to project manager

prior construction and obtain approval as per project

specification sum 1

supply and install:Hulamin Aluminium roof sheeting A7 profile, with PVDF coating

one side , including timber rafters with purlins and all the

necessary accessories

7.1.21 Roof covering with pitches not exceeding 25 degrees M2

18

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

Eaves, verges Etc

Aluminium fascias and barge boards fixed with all necessary

joining and fixing brackets as per manufacturers

recommendations

7.1.22



7.1.23

9 x 225mm barge including jointing connectors, brass






Item

No.

Payment


PLASTERING

GRANOLITHIC

Untinted granolithic, on concrete

7.1.24 Average 40mm thick on floors with upper surface to falls M2

10

SCREEDS


7.1.25

Average 40mm thick on floors to falls with 'ABE

Duraproof'additive. m2

20

PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

RAINWATER DISPOSAL

100mm diameter seamless aluminium prepainted white

gutters with all necessary fixing brackets as per manufacturers

recommendations and rainwater pipes

7.1.26 100mm Half-round roof gutters m 4

7.1.27 Extra over gutter for stopped end No 2

7.1.28 Extra over gutter for outlet for 125mm pipe No 2

PIPES AS PER marley 75mm diameter with all necessary

brackets and fixing

7.1.29 75mm diameter pipes to wall m 5.8

7.1.30 Extra over rainwater pipe for swan-neck No 2

7.1.31 Extra over rainwater pipe for bend No 2

7.1.32 Extra over rainwater pipe for shoe No 2

SOIL DRAINAGE

7.1.33 150 Precast gulley as per St.Gobain, with natural finish No 1

TAPS, VALVES, ETC.

7.1.34

Cobra brass bip tap with union hose code 100-15 type 1010

rough brass No 1


FURNITURE




Item

No.

Payment


SECTION 8

FURNITURE

furniture

8.1.1

L- shaped 2200 x 2200 cedar alpine finish with panel leg and

modesty and pedastle with 3 lockable drawers, including desk

topNo 10

8.1.2Open plan desk,smoked alpine with 3 lockable drawers with

aluminium frame black fabric screensNo 6

8.1.31650 x 450 x 900 cupboards smoke cedar alpine finish with

shelving and bracingNo 10

8.1.4 Highback chair with nylon arms and base black leather No 18

8.1.5Boardroom table, 22 seater smoke cedar alpine finish,

including power and dataNo 6

8.1.6 2200 x 1200 aluminium frame fabric screens No 6

8.1.7

Allow a sum of R 220 000.00 ( Two Hundred and Twenty

Thousand Rands) for removal of rubish, scrap metal,

redundant furniture and stack neatly or dispose as per project

manager's instruction

sum 1


Page 60 of 54




Item

No.

Payment


Provisional Sums

BUDGETARY ALLOWANCES

The following budgetary allowances are for work to be

executed by the principal contractor at bill rates or at rates to

be agreed in terms of the contract:

9.1.1Provide an amount of R 1,000,000.00 (0ne Million Rands) for

removal and disposal of contaminated soil.sum 1

9.1.2

Provide an amount of R 400,000.00 (Four hundred thousand

Rands) for removal and stacking neatly of current equipment

as advised by project manager and also removal and disposal

of current surplus material

sum 1

9.1.3Provide an amount of R 600,000.00 (Six hundred thousand

Rands) for removal and rerouting of existing servicessum 1


dewatering and disposal as advised by the project manager. sum 1

9.1.5Provide an amount of R 190,000.00 (0ne hundred and Ninty

Thousand Rands) for Saw cuttingsum 1

9.1.6Provide an amount of R 200,000.00 (Two hundred Thousand

Rands) for replacing damaged G-blocks and road marking sum 1





ITEM

NO. TRADE AMOUNT

OLD MHA ABLUTION FACILITIES

PRELIMINARIES AND GENERALS

EARTHWORKS


MASONRY

WATER PROOFING

ROOF COVERERING

CARPENTARY AND JOINERY

CEILINGS

FLOOR COVERINGS

IRONMONGERY

METAL WORKS

PLASTERING

PAINTING

TILING

PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

ELECTRICALS

FURNITURE

FIRE PROTECTION

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO EXECUTIVE SUMMARY




Item

No.

Payment


Bill no1

SANS 1200 SECTION 1: PRELIMINARIES AND GENERALS

FIXED CHARGED AND VALUE RELATED ITEMS

Contractual requirements:

1.1.1 A 8.3.1 Contractual requirements. Sum 1.00

Establishment of facilities for engineer:

1.1.2 A 8.3.2.1 (a) Furnished offices (Rate Only). Sum 1.00

1.1.3 A 8.3.2.1 (b) Telephone(Rate Only). Sum 1.00

1.1.4 A 8.3.2.1 (c) Nameboards(Rate Only). Sum 1.00

Establishment of facilities for contractor:

1.1.5 A 8.3.2.2 (a) Offices and storage sheds. Sum 1.00

1.1.6 A 8.3.2.2 (b) Workshops. Sum 1.00

1.1.7 A 8.3.2.2 (c) Laboratories. Sum 1.00

1.1.8 A 8.3.2.2 (d) Living accommodation. Sum 1.00

1.1.9 A 8.3.2.2 (e) Ablution and latrine facilities. Sum 1.00

1.1.10 A 8.3.2.2 (f) Tools and equipment. Sum 1.00

1.1.11 A 8.3.2.2 (g) Water supplies, electric power and communications. Sum 1.00

1.1.12 A 8.3.2.2 (h) Dealing with water. Sum 1.00

1.1.13 A 8.3.2.2 (i) Access. Sum 1.00

1.1.14 A 8.3.2.2 (j) Plant. Sum 1.00

Other Fixed-charge Obligations:

1.1.15 A 8.3.3 Survey, setting out and preparation of as-built drawings. Sum 1.00

1.1.16 A 8.3.3 Soil testing equipment. Sum 1.00

1.1.17 A 8.3.3 Environmental management. Sum 1.00

1.1.18 A 8.3.3 Occupational Health and Safety. Sum 1.00

1.1.19 A 8.3.3

Items in terms of the Industrial Relations Act and Employment

conditions for tender purposes.Sum 1.00

Removal of site establishment:

1.1.20 A.8.3.4 Removal of site establishment. Sum 1.00





Item

No.

Payment


SANS 1200 SECTION 1: PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL

TIME RELATED ITEMS

Contractual requirements:

1.1.21 A 8.4.1 Contractual requirements. Sum 1.00

Establishment of facilities for engineer:

1.1.22 A 8.4.2.1 (a) Furnished offices (Rate Only). Sum 1.00

1.1.23 A 8.4.2.1 (b) Telephone(Rate Only). Sum 1.00

1.1.24 A 8.4.2.1 (c) Nameboards(Rate Only). Sum 1.00

1.1.25 A 8.4.2.1 (d) Survey assistants and materials(Rate Only). Sum 1.00

Establishment of Facilities for contractor:

1.1.26 A 8.4.2.2 (a) Offices and storage sheds. Sum 1.00

1.1.27 A 8.4.2.2 (b) Workshops. Sum 1.00

1.1.28 A 8.4.2.2 (c) Laboratories. Sum 1.00

1.1.29 A 8.4.2.2 (d) Living accommodation. Sum 1.00

1.1.30 A 8.4.2.2 (e) Ablution and latrine facilities. Sum 1.00

1.1.31 A 8.4.2.2 (f) Tools and equipment. Sum 1.00

1.1.32 A 8.4.2.2 (g) Water supplies, electric power and communications. Sum 1.00

1.1.33 A 8.4.2.2 (h) Dealing with water. Sum 1.00

1.1.34 A 8.4.2.2 (i) Access. Sum 1.00

1.1.35 A 8.4.2.2 (j) Plant. Sum 1.00

Supervision:

1.1.36 A 8.4.3 Supervision for the duration of Construction. Sum 1.00

Company and Head office Overhead Cost:

1.1.37 A 8.4.4

Company and Head office Overhead Cost for the duration for the

contract.Sum 1.00

Other time related obligations:

1.1.38 A 8.4.5 Survey, setting out and preparation of as-built drawings. Sum 1.00

1.1.39 A 8.4.5 Soil testing equipment. Sum 1.00

1.1.40 A 8.4.5 Environmental management. Sum 1.00

1.1.41 A 8.4.5 Occupational Health and Safety. Sum 1.00

1.1.42 A 8.4.5

Items in terms of the Industrial Relations Act and Employment

conditions for tender purposes.Sum 1.00





Item

No.

Payment


SANS 1200 SECTION 1: PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL

TEMPORARY WORKS

Temporary works:

1.1.43 8.8.1 Main access roads to works. Sum 1.00

1.1.44 8.8.2 Dealing with traffic at road crossings & level crossings. Sum 1.00

1.1.45 Contaminated soil Sum 1.00





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT

CLAUSE DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

Bill no 2

SECTION 1

BILL 2: EARTHWORKS (PROVISIONAL)

SITE CLEARANCE ETC

Site clearance

1.2.1


hedges, shrubs, bush, etc. and trees not exceeding

200mm girth m² 487.87

EXCAVATION, FILLING, ETC

EXCAVATIONS, ETC


1.2.2 Trenches m³ 15.639

De-watering of seepage water and water from other sub-

soil sources

1.2.3

allow provisonal sum of R 1 000 000.00 for pumping out

water sum 1

SOIL POISONING

Soil insecticide in accordance with SANS 5859

1.2.4 To bottoms and sides of trenches etc. m2

52.129





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 3

SECTION 1BILL 3: CONCRETE, FORMWORK AND

REINFORCEMENT

UNREINFORCED CONCRETE CAST AGAINST

EXCAVATED SURFACES

15Mpa/19mm concrete

1.3.1 Strip footings m3

15.64

TEST CUBES

1.3.2

Making and testing 150 x 150 x 150mm concrete

strength test cube (Provisional) No 30

CONCRETE SUNDRIES

Finishing top surfaces of concrete smooth with a steel

trowel


31.97

MOVEMENT JOINTS ETC

Vertical construction joints through concrete including

thick cement slurry to one face


Saw-cut joints (3.2mm wide) sealed with Sikaflex- 11 FC

sealant on backing cord (sealing according to

manufacturers specifications)

1.3.5 6.4 x 20mm Saw-cut joints in top of concrete m 139





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 4

SECTION

BILL 4: MASONRY

BRICKWORKSUPERSTRUCTUREBrickwork of NFX bricks (14 MPa nominal compressive


1.4.1 Half brick walls m2

59.81


232

1.4.3 Extra over facebrick (demolished openings) m2

30.41

BRICKWORK SUNDRIES

1.4.4

Cutting toothings and bonding new brick work to

existing m2

10.56



Pre-stressed fabricated concrete lintels including

necessary

temporary supports

1.4.6 150 x 150mm Lintels in lengths not exceeding 3m m 4.44

Paving of 500 x 500 x 30mm precast concrete grey

paving slabs with brushed finish, on concrete

1.4.7

Paving of slabs laid loose with open joints on polythene-

bags filled with stabilised sand/cement mixture under

corners and centres of slabs, on waterproofing to walk

way (external) m2

374.2





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 5

BILL NO 5: WATERPROOFING

Cementitious waterproofing system (suitable for tiling)

comprising patching defects with polymer modified

flexible

(PMF) waterproofing slurry and three full coats PMF

waterproofing slurry applied with a brush to a final dry

film thickness of 2 to 3mm

1.5.1 On shower floors m2

38.6





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 6

BILL NO 6: ROOF COVERING

PROFILED ROOF COVERING AND

ACCESSORIES

Hulamin Aluminium roof sheeting A7 Profile to be fixed

to the existing timber roof structure as per roof sheeting

manufacture's instruction

1.6.1 Roof covering with pitches not exceeding 25 degrees m2

906.6

New 150 dia Aluminium industrial seamless gutter,

colour white with all necessary fixing brackets as per

manufactures recommendations

1.6.2 Gutter m 129.5

Rain water pipe to be marley 125 dia PVC rain water

pipe, colour white, with all necessary fixing brackets as

per manufacture's recommendation

1.6.3 Down pipe m 24





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 7

BILL NO 7: CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

CUPBOARDS TO KITCHENS, BEDROOMS, ETC

The following cupboard fittings have been given as

complete units i.e. the components of the units have not

been given separately. Descriptions of such units shall,

therefore, be deemed to include all components,

assembling, housing, notching, glueing, blocking,

planting-on and screwing with countersunk screws,

edge strips, thermosetting plastic laminate, glass,

ironmongery, metalwork, paint or varnish finishes, etc.

as per furniture and kitchen detailNote

Kitchen cupboards etc.

Kitchen cupboards etc. with type PR concealed spring

hinges, type RAIEL Solid 188/220mm 12mm diameter ss

Handles and type SS RIH 552 UTA 45mm drawer slides

1.7.1

Sink cupboard type 2996 x 647 x 900mm high with

sides, bottom,

divisions, shelf, back and double hinged doors

(sink elsewhere) No 2

Eaves, verges Etc.

Medium density plain Nutec fibre-cement fascias and

barge boards fixed with all necessary joining and fixing

brackets as per manufacturers recommendations

1.7.2


screws and adhesive. m 129.5

1.7.3

9 x 225mm Barge including jointing connectors, brass


Doors

Solid core flush doors

1.7.4

44mm thick solid hardwood doors with diagonal slats,

hardboard covering on both sides,20mm undercut, hung

to hardwood frames No 8

1.7.5

44mm thick solid hardwood double doors with diagonal

slats, hardboard covering on both sides, hung to

hardwood frames (as per door Schedule) No 2

1.7.6

44mm thick solid hardwood double doors with full

louvres, hardboard covering on both sides, hung to

hardwood frames (as per door Schedule) No 2


DOORS AND FRAMES


1.7.7

Door 813 x 2090mm high class B fibre door as per

'Bitcoin Industries' with 2mm Aluminium sheeting both

sides. No 3

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD




ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


BROUGHT FORWARD

FRAMED FRAMES ETC

1.7.8 108 x 108mm Rebated frames m 20

BEADS, ARCHITRAVES, ETC

1.7.9 19mm Quadrant beads both sides m 43





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 8

BILL 8: CEILINGS, PARTITIONS, ETC

SUSPENDED CEILINGS

pelican Econocoust plus safeguarder ceilings tiles 600 x

600 x 15mm with square edge and white painted finish

laid onto pelican Econolok pre-painted white exposed

tee grid system including fire safety punch outs. Main

tees suspended to existing roof system as per

manufactures instruction.

1.8.1

Ceilings suspended exceeding 1m and not exceeding

2m below steel purlins m2

487.87





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 9

BILL NO 9: FLOOR COVERINGS

Epoxy coating as per 'flowcrete' peran pt colour light

grey applied on a clean dust free floor as per

manufactures recommendation

1.9.1 On floors m² 21.07

30mm smooth granolithic floor finish

1.9.1 On floors m² 40.78





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 10

BILL NO 10: IRONMONGERY

HINGES, FLOOR SPRING HINGES, BOLTS, PANIC

BOLTS, ETC.

1.10.1

Dorma TS83/BC/EN2-6 Parallel arm door closer-push

side fitting No 4

1.10.2 dorma D037 euro profile cylinder dead lock No 12

1.10.3 Dorma DCE 002 steel euro profile escutcheon No 20

1.10.4 Dorma D038R conversion kit No 5

1.10.5 Erebus heavy duty adjustable roller bolt No 30

1.10.6 Howick H400 150X20mm aluminium lever flush bolts No 5

1.10.7

Howick H409 600X20mm aluminium lever action flush

bolts No 5

1.10.8 Dorma DBB SS 009 stainless steel two ball but hinge No 60

1.10.9 Dorma DBB SS 017 steel floor stop No 6

1.10.10 weather bar 9

1.10.11 Dorma dust proof socket No 5

1.10.12 Stainless steel coat hook with rubber buffer No 8

1.10.13

Dorma DSS6 'tea cup' Pictogram on 76mm dia stainless

steel plate No 3

BATHROOM FITTINGS

Franke':

1.10.14

'Chronos' SS single toilet roll holder (code RH140HD)

size 140 x 110 x 110mm high with satin finish and

lockable delivery spindle, cylinder lock with 'Franke'

standard key including stainless steel screws and

dowels. No 8

SUNDRIES

1.10.15 Union CZ8731SC' door stop plugged. No 17





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 11

BILL NO 11: METALWORK

ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, DOORS, ETCRefer to attached window schedules for details of

windows

Powder coated casement window units as per "wispeco

340 series profile" system, complete with subframes,

ironmongery, glass, sealing, etc. and fixing to brickwork

or concrete

1.11.1Standard window type 610 x 610mm high ( as per

window schedule) No 22











ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 12

BILL NO 10: PLASTERING

SCREEDS


1.12.1

Average 40mm thick on floors to falls with 'ABE

Duraproof' additive. m2

487.87

INTERNAL PLASTER

Cement plaster steel trowelled on brickwork:

1.12.2 On walls. m2

583.77





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 13

BILL 13:PAINTWORK

Previously painted plastered surfaces

Surfaces shall be thoroughly washed down and allowed

to dry completely before any paint is applied. Blistered

or peeling paint shall be completely removed and cracks

shall be opened, filled with a suitable filler and finished

smooth

1.13.1

prepare and paint with Plascon double velvet, colour

artists canvas, code y2-e2-3 m2

538.3

PAINTWORK ETC TO NEW WORK

prepare and paint with Plascon double velvet, colour

artists canvas, code y2-e2-3

1.13.2 On walls m2

583.8





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 14

BILL NO 14: TILING

310mmx 310mm full body first grade porcelain tile pi 5

rated as per 'tile Africa' kerastar range colour: crons

laid strict accordance to manufacture's specification

with 'gold star porcelain fix and Goldstar light grey grout

1.14.1 On floors m² 427.39

300 x 100mm porcelain tile skirt to match porcelain floor

tile

1.14.2 skirting 100mm high m 310.41

Plastered coved skirting, with epoxy finish

1.14.3 skirting 75mm high m 26.448

WALL TILING

1.14.4

200 x 200mm 1st Grade white glazed ceramic tiles to

the soffits m² 515.15





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 15

BILL NO 15: PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

SANITARY FITTINGS

Vaal sanitaryware springbok ceramic fireclay heavy duty

basin colour white 550mm 400mm with two tap holes,

including integrated overflow and chainstay hole fixed to

wall fixed to wall with two semi concealed cast iron

brackets

1.15.1 Basin No 12

Orchid flushmaster FJ2100 including double flap seat

and all fittings colour white

1.15.2 Water closet No 8

Vaal sanitaryware 415x 275x315mm flat back white

vitreous china wall mounted urinal (code 705326)

including 38mm chromium plated domical grating and

chromium plated to inlet spreader( as per sanitary

schedule)

1.15.3 Urinal No 7

1.15.4

Cobra watertech Star FI x FI under tile stop tap with

sliding wall flange (code128-15) manufactured in

accordance with SANS 226:2004 type (5412) 1 hot and 1

cold No 22

Miscellaneous/General

1.15.5

Toilet roll holder, tuff roll lockable holding 5 rolls by 'tuff'

as supplied No 8

1.15.6

Soap dish: Vaal recessed vitreous china , colour white

mounted in wall with tiles No 22

1.15.7

20mm Bevelled mirror, 6mm silver backed float glass

400 x 800mm above basin bevelled edge mounted flush

tiles as per architect details, mirror to be fixed with

dome capped mirror screws No 4

1.15.8 hands free soap dispenser HF950 No 10

1.15.9 hands free hand drier HF2400 No 4

CONNECTIONS OF APPLIANCES ETC

1.15.10 Geysers and heat pumps as per engineers specification No 4

1.15.11

Zip stainless steel 5litre Hydroboil Pro with instant

boiling water two way tap control and sub-micron

filtration , connected to 15mm cold water supply No 2

1.15.12

Allow a provisional sum R 57 694.00 for water supply

and connections and to all taps, geysers, flush master,

hydro boil etc. Item 1

1.15.13

Allow a provisional sum R 28 800.00 for water supply

and connections and to all taps, geysers, flush master,

hydro boil etc. Item 1





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


BILL NO 16: ELECTRICALS

Connections to appliances geyser and plugs

Allowance for making safe, dismantling and stripping of

existing electrical equipment including lights, sockect

outlest, conduit, distribution boards and assoicaited

electrical installation. All electrical removed shall be

handed over to the TPT maintenance department sum 1

Allowance for making safe, dismantling and stripping of

existing kiosk electrical installation. All electrical removed

shall be handed over to the tpt maintenance department sum 1

PROPOSED INSTALLATION

Power & Socket Outlets (SABS/IEC approval documents

to be provided on request for any of the proposed

equipment)

Provision of new 630A, 3P, 25kA Moulded Case Circuit

Breaker into existing substation B Low Voltage

compartment as shown on drawing: 4223745-2-002-E-

LA-0004-01 ea 1

Supply and installation of 185mm² 4 Core PVC Insulated

PVC bedded SWA PVC sheathed 600/1000V ECC cable in

accordance to Transnet specification TPD:003-

CABLESPEC and SANS 10142-1 as shown on drawing:

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0004-01 m 110

Supply and installation of 70mm² 4 Core PVC Insulated

PVC bedded SWA PVC sheathed 600/1000V ECC cable in

accordance to Transnet specification TPD:003-

CABLESPEC and SANS 10142-1 as shown on drawing:

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0004-01 m 75

Allowance for manufacturing, testing and installtion of a

floor mounted weather proof kiosk. Kiosk to be

manufactured in accordance to Transnet Group Projects

TPD:002-DBSPEC and SANS 10142-1 as shown drawing:

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0004-01. Contractor shall provide

GA's for approval prior to manufacturing of the

distribution kiosk. ea 1

Allowance for manufacturing, testing and installtion of a

surface mounted weather proof Distribution Board B.

Distribution board to be manufactured in accordance to

Transnet Group Projects TPD:002-DBSPEC and SANS

10142-1 as shown drawing: 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0005-

01. Contractor shall provide GA's for approval prior to

manufacturing of the distribution board. ea 1





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT



Equal or similar approved to Legrand 16A 230V single

switched socket outlets, complete with recessed mount

box and coverplate. ea 12

Equal or similar approved to Legrand Provision of 16A

230Vsingle switched water tight socket outlets, complete

with recessed mount box and coverplate. ea 2

Equal or similar approved to Legrand 16A 230V double

switched socket outlets, complete with recessed mount

box and coverplate. ea 19

Equal or similar approved to Legrand 20A 230V surface

mounted rotatary lockable IP67 isolator switch

wheatherproof. ea 4

Equal or similar approved to Legrand 40A 400V surface

mounted rotatary lockable IP67 isolator switch

wheatherproof. ea 9

Equal or similar approved to Legrand 20A 230V isolator

switch, complete with recessed mount box and

coverplate. ea 8

Equal or similar approved to Legrand 20A 230V switched

cordgrip, complete with recessed mount box and cover

plate. ea 3

Termination of new 185mm² 4 Core Unarmoured PVC

insulated PVC sheathed 600/1000V cable from kiosk to

low voltage distribution board B ea 2

Termination of new 70mm² 4 Core Unarmoured PVC

insulated PVC sheathed 600/1000V cable from

substation B to low voltage Kiosk ea 2

Lighting & Luminaires (SABS/IEC approval documents to

be provided on request for any on the proposed

equipment)

Equal or similar approved to Philips Pacific LED 28W light

fitting/EMG. ea 30

Equal or similar approved to Philips Pacific LED 28W light

fitting. ea 48

Equal or similar approved to DTS 59W LED Fixture

Hazardous Area Light Fitting ea 4

Equal or similar approved to Beka 31007 15W LED

bukhead light fitting.EMG ea 0

Equal or similar approved to Beka 31007 15W LED

bukhead light fitting. ea 19





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT



Equal or smilar approved to Schneider single load 360°

PIR ocupational sensor. ea 18

16A Photo electric switch/ Photocell, complete with IP65

enclosure with clear window. ea 2

Wiring (High annealed PVC insulated stranded copper

conductors (house wire).

6mm² - red m 70

6mm² - white m 70

6mm² - blue m 70

6mm² - black m 70

6mm² - yellow/green m 70

10mm² - red m 40

10mm² - white m 40

10mm² - blue m 40

10mm² - black m 40

10mm² - yellow/green m 40

2.5mm² - red m 1200

2.5mm² - white m 1200

2.5mm² - blue m 1200

2.5mm² - black m 1200

2.5mm² - yellow/green m 1200

Conduit, Wireways & Trunking

PVC conduit

20 mm Diameter PVC conduit, boxes,couples adapters

and accessories sum 1

32 mm Diameter PVC conduit, boxes,couples adapters


50mm Diameter PVC conduit, boxes,couples adapters






ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT



Channels &Trunking

PVC trunking Wiring Consumable acessories including

Lugs, Ferrules, Terminal Blocks, Screws,connections,

compression glands etc sum 1

Earthing & Lightning Protection

Design,supply and installation of Earthing & Lightning

Protection for Building including all distribution boards in

accordance with SANS 10313 and Transnet TPD: 004-

EARTHINGSPEC sum 1

Issue of certificate for Lighting and Surge protection in

according with SANS 10313. ea 1

Testing and commissioning

Testing and commissioning of complete electrical

installation in accordance to SANS 10142-1 (including

issuing of compliance certificates) sum 1

Sundry Electrical Works

Allow a provisional Sum of R50 000,00 for Sundry

Electrical work not covered above, to be used as

directed by the engineer and be deducted wholly or in

part as required. sum 1

GENERAL

Three sets of manuals, software, asbuilt drawings and

test certificates. One set in plastic sleeves and "as built"

of electrical infrastructure in AutoCad format. (3 OFF) sum 1





ITEM

NO.

PAYMENT


Bill no 17

BILL NO 17: Furniture

Kitchen

1.17.1 Vulcan SST 1050 SS Table with plain top No 8

1.17.2

tuff floors shower mat flexible PVC. interlocking self

draining safety flooring mats, colour black size 500 x

500 x 7mm laid loose on floor in accordance with the

manufacture's recommendation No 24

Seat and table combination

1.17.3

provide a seat and table combination for the mess room

as per drawing 4223745-2-A-DE-006-01-2-TD No 15

Food locker

1.17.4

Provide food locker with 1mm steel sheet/panels, all

steel to be pre-drilled electro galv and epoxy powder

coated ref 5403, as per drawing 4223745-2-A-DE-006-

01-2-TD No 46

Bench

1.17.5Seat type A: as per drawing 4223745-2-A-DE-006-01-2-

TD

1.17.6 800 x 450 x 3936mm No 2

1.17.7 800 x 450 x 5800mm No 1

1.17.8 800 x 450 x 2100mm No 1

1.17.9 800 x 450 x 3000mm No 1

1.17.10 800 x 450 x 3177mm No 1

Seat type B: as per drawing 4223745-2-A-DE-006-01-2-

TD

1.17.11 450 x 450 x 3079mm No 2

1.17.12 450 x 450 x 3067mm No 1

1.17.13

Shower curtains as texwise colour charcoal grey with

brass eyes and rod as per texwise No 21

Refrigerator

1.17.14

323L Metallic bottom freezer fridge with semi auto

defrost, water dispenser, sealed crisper draw and

tempered glass shelves No 3





Item

No.

Payment


Bill no 18

BILL NO 18:FIREPROTECTION

WATER SUPPLIES TO FIRE APPLIANCES

Fixing of pipes

Unless specifically otherwise stated, descriptions of pipes

shall be deemed to include for fixing to walls, etc. casting in,

building in or suspending not exceeding 1m below

suspension level. No allowance for holes and drilling for pipes

through walls has been made in these Bills of quantities, the

price for all holes and making good shall be deemed to be

included in the descriptions of the pipes. Note

Galvanised steel pipes:

1.18.1 25mm Pipes. m 85

Extra over galvanised steel pipes for steel fittings:

1.18.2 25mm fittings

No 36

FIRE APPLIANCES, ETC.TYCO OR OTHER APRROVED:

rates must include supplying and putting up signages as per

drawing specifications Note

1.18.3

Kama Industries or similar, Emergency Air Horn type Sirenco

Blaster 300ML, including Sirenco Wall box enclosure and

fixing on wall. No 3

1.18.4

36 x 19m Fire Hose Reel with 220kpa minimum Inlet

pressure, 1000kpa maximum inlet pressure, approximately

22kg with steel signal red back and front plate supported

with mild steel zinc plate, including swivel zinc plate guide

arm, zinc coated ball valve, brass nozzle and rubber gasket

(supply and install new)

No 1

1.18.5

36 x 19m Fire Hose Reel with 220kpa minimum Inlet

pressure, 1000kpa maximum inlet pressure, approximately

22kg with steel signal red back and front plate supported

with mild steel zinc plate, including swivel zinc plate guide

arm, zinc coated ball valve, brass nozzle and rubber gasket

(remove repair and reinstall existing fire hose reel)

No 2



SUNDRIES

1.18.8

Allow a sum of R 30 000 (Thirty Thousand Rands) for

connection to main, including profit and attendance sum 1

1.18.9

Allow a sum of R 20 000 (twenty Thousand Rands ) for pipe

protection and insulation sum 1

TESTING:

1.18.10 Testing fire water pipe system. sum 1





Item

No.

Payment


Bill no 19

Bill no 19: PROVISIONAL SUMS

BUDGETARY ALLOWANCES

The following budgetary allowances are for work to be

executed by the principal contractor at bill rates or at rates to

be agreed in terms of the contract:


dewatering.Sum 1

1.19.2Provide an amount of R 250,000.00 (Two Hundred and Fifty

Thousand Rands) for air conditioning.Sum 1

1.19.3Provide an amount of R 180,000.00 (One Hundred and Eighty

Thousand Rands) for saw cutting.Sum 1


removal and disposal of contaminated material.Sum 1





NEC3 CONTRACT Part C3: Scope of Work FORM: PRO-FAT-0222 Rev04 Page 1 of 163

PART C3: SCOPE OF WORK

Document reference

Title No of page

This cover page 1

C3.1 Employer’s Works Information 163

Total number of pages 164





C3.1 EMPLOYER’S WORKS INFORMATION

Contents

PART C3: SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................. 1

SECTION 1 ..................................................................................................................... 4

1 Description of the works ........................................................................................ 4

1.1 Executive overview ......................................................................................... 4

1.2 Employer’s objectives ...................................................................................... 4

1.3 Interpretation and terminology ......................................................................... 5

2 Engineering and the Contractor’s design .................................................................. 6

2.1 Employer’s design ........................................................................................... 6

2.2 Review and Acceptance of Contractor Documentation ........................................ 6

2.3 As-built drawings ............................................................................................ 7

3 Construction.......................................................................................................... 7

3.1 Temporary works, Site services & construction constraints ................................. 7

3.2 Completion and correction of Defects .............................................................. 14

4 Plant and Materials Standards and Workmanship..................................................... 15

4.1 Employer specifications .................................................................................. 15

4.2 Building works ............................................................................................... 15

4.3 Civil Engineering ............................................................................................ 19

4.4 Electrical Engineering ..................................................................................... 41

4.5 Mechanical Engineering (HVAC, Water Reticulation and Fire Protection) .............. 54

4.6 Structural Engineering .................................................................................... 91

5 List Of Drawings ................................................................................................. 122

5.1 Drawings issued by the Employer .................................................................. 122

SECTION 2 .................................................................................................................. 124

6 Management and start up ................................................................................... 124

6.1 Management meetings ................................................................................. 124

6.2 Documentation Control ................................................................................. 124

6.3 Safety risk management ............................................................................... 126

6.4 Environmental constraints and management .................................................. 130

6.5 Quality assurance requirements .................................................................... 146

6.6 Planning constraints ..................................................................................... 147





6.7 Contractor’s management, supervision and key people .................................... 153

6.8 Training workshops and technology transfer ................................................... 154

6.9 Insurance provided by the Employer .............................................................. 154

6.10 Contract change management ...................................................................... 156

6.11 Provision of bonds and guarantees ................................................................ 156

6.12 Records of Defined Cost, payments & assessments of compensation events kept by

Contractor ............................................................................................................. 156

7 Procurement ...................................................................................................... 156

7.1 Code of Conduct .......................................................................................... 156

7.2 The Contractor’s Invoices ............................................................................. 158

7.3 People ........................................................................................................ 159

7.4 Subcontracting ............................................................................................ 162





SECTION 1

1 Description of the works

1.1 Executive overview

The works that the Contractor shall perform involves electrical, mechanical, civil and building works

for the Temporary Facilities required at the Old MHA Workshop in the Port of Richards Bay.

The scope of the works includes the following:

Clearing of the site of rubble, sand and vegetation

Additions, alterations and refurbishment of the existing Workshop, and Mess and ablution

Buildings

Demolition of the stores buildings

Partial demolition, additions and alterations internally and externally for the creation of

new workshop spaces, offices, mess and ablutions, new oil and flammable stores

new shade cloth carports, security kiosk, refuse area and fencing

Civil Works and service connections (paving, water, sewer, stormwater)

Installation of Electrical LV infrastructure and equipment

Design, supply and installation of Lightning protection and Earthing of the buildings and

structures

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of HVAC infrastructure and plant

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of firefighting system pipework and plant

Supply and installation of fire protection and emergency signage and evacuation plans

Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of Heat Pumps, piping and hot water tanks

with electrical backup elements

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Fire extinguishing Plant

1.2 Employer’s objectives

The Employer’s objectives are to provide temporary staff accommodation during the construction

period of permanent administration, workshops, and mess and ablution facilities for the installation

of a single cell tippler in the Dry Bulk Terminal in the Port of Richards Bay.





In addition to the above, the Employer’s objectives are to achieve Completion of the works by

meeting the Completion Date whilst still maintaining the highest environmental, quality and safety

standards and whilst minimising disruptions to ongoing port and terminal operations.

1.3 Interpretation and terminology

The following abbreviations are used in this Works Information:

Abbreviation Meaning given to the abbreviation

CEMP Construction Environmental Management Plan

DP Data Pack

FEQ Field Engineering Query

GA General Arrangement Drawing

ID Personal identification document

NCR Non-conformance report

NEMA National Environmental Management Act

PES Project Environmental Specifications

PIRPMP Project Industrial Relations Policy and Management Plan

PQP Project Quality Plan

QCP Quality Control Plan

SANS South African National Standards previously South African Bureau of

Standards (SABS)

SES Standard Environmental Specification

SHE Safety, Health & Environment

TPT Transnet Port Terminals





2 Engineering and the Contractor’s design

2.1 Employer’s design

2.1.1 The Employer supplies the following:

Works Information.

Technical specifications.

General Arrangement Drawings.

The drawings for providing the Works are listed in paragraph 5 of this Works Information.

2.1.2 The Employer grants the Contractor a licence to use the copyright in design data presented to

the Contractor for the purpose of the works ONLY.

2.2 Works by the Employer

The Employer has in place agreements with service providers for the provision of ICT services

and infrastructure. The Contractor shall not be required to engage the Transnet service provider

but shall be required to provide certain infrastructure as detailed in drawings supplied for use by

Transnet.. The following are areas where the contractor shall provide infrastructure for ICT use.

2.2.1 Structured LAN Cabling

The structured LAN cabling required in this facility shall be installed by the relevant Transnet

Service provider at the time of this installation being required.

The facility contractor shall ensure that all required wire ways, conduits, drops are installed as

shown on the relevant electrical drawings to allow for the installation of LAN cabling from the

associated Comms rooms.

2.2.2 Comms Pipe and Chamber Connectivity

The facility Contractor shall ensure that sleeves to tie into the main pipe and chamber system

manhole from the associated Comms room are installed as shown on the relevant civil services

layouts. The fibre optic feed to this facility will be installed by the relevant Transnet Service

provider at the time of this installation being required.

2.2.3 Timelines

The facility Contractor shall indicate on the project construction baseline programme when the

infrastructure above will be available for the Transnet service provider to complete the structured

LAN cabling and fibre installations.





2.3 Review and Acceptance of Contractor Documentation

The Contractor submits documentation as the ‘Works Information’ requires to the Project

Manager for review and acceptance.

In undertaking the ‘Works’ (including all incidental services required), the Contractor shall

conform and adhere to the requirements of the ‘Contractor Document Submittal Requirements’

Standard included in Annexure 1 (Refer DOC-STD-0003).

2.4 As-built drawings

The Contractor shall provide all the as-built drawings as called for in the Employer’s standard

specification.

The Contractor submits final documentation to the Project Manager before Completion. This final

documentation is documentation for which no further review is required.

2.4.1 As-Built/Final Documentation

In undertaking the ‘Works’ (including all incidental services required), the Contractor shall

conform and adhere to the requirements of the ‘Contractor Document Submittal Requirements’

Standard included in Annexure 1 (Refer DOC-STD-0003).

2.4.2 Data Books

In undertaking the ’Works’ (including all incidental services required), the Contractor shall

conform and adhere to the requirements of the ‘Data Books and Manuals’ Standard included in

Annexure 10 (Refer DOC-STD-0003) and the ‘Contractor Documentation Submittal Requirements’

Standard included in Annexure 1 (Refer to DOC-STD-0003).

3 Construction

3.1 Temporary works, Site services & construction constraints

3.1.1 Employer’s Site entry and security control, permits, and Site regulations

The Site is located within an operational area of the Employer and the Contractor shall ensure

the safe passage of traffic to and around the Site at all times. This shall entail the provision of

flagmen, protective barriers, lanterns, signs, etc. for protection, direction and control of traffic.

The Contractor shall organise the work to cause the least possible inconvenience to other

construction activities or operations at the Site. Access for Others to adjacent areas shall be

maintained at all times.





The Site is located within a designated Secure Area, and accordingly all access into the area will

be through a gate with access control.

The Contractor shall obtain the necessary entry permits for all staff working within the area in

accordance with the access control requirements of the Employer and shall issue each personnel

member with an appropriate identification card.

All costs incurred in providing construction personnel with ID cards and access permits shall be

borne by the Contractor.

The site establishment area shall be clearly sign posted and be compliant with the relevant safety

regulations and restrictions that might be in place until the Contractor has de-established from

site and comply with OHS Act 85 of 1993.

The Contractor is responsible for the security of the Works until completion and hand-over, and

must make his own arrangements for security and the safekeeping of his property. The

Contractor's watchmen are allowed on Site for this purpose.

If the working area is situated within a Customs controlled area, the Contractor and his people

shall observe all Customs regulations.

The fullest collaboration between the Contractor, the Employer’s Operations Manager and the

Project Manager is essential in regard to the continued operations of the Employer.

Housing of the Contractor's people on site is not permitted.

All work on, over, under or adjacent to railway lines and near high voltage equipment shall

comply with Transnet SOC Limited codes of conduct.

3.1.2 The Contractor complies with the following requirements of the Employer:

As per paragraph 3.1.1 above.

3.1.3 Restrictions to access on Site, roads, walkways and barricades

As per paragraph 3.1.1 above.

3.1.4 People restrictions on Site; hours of work, conduct and records:

The working hours shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Department of Labour or

with the agreement of the relevant trade unions. This information relating to working hours shall

be supplied to the Project Manager prior to commencement of the proposed working hours.





Contractor’s staff shall be confined to the working area and defined access routes and shall not

be allowed to be present in other areas of the Employer. Contractor staff found disobeying this

instruction will be subject to disciplinary action.

The Contractor keeps daily records of his people engaged on the Site and Working Areas

(including Sub-Contractors) with access to such daily records available for inspection by the

Project Manager at all reasonable times.

3.1.5 The Contractor keeps daily records of his people engaged on the Site and Working Areas

(including Subcontractors) with access to such daily records available for inspection by the Project

Manager at all reasonable times.

3.1.6 Health and safety facilities on Site

At all times during construction the Contractor is responsible for the safety of all persons on the

Site and on the equipment and shall have the necessary systems and procedures in place to

effectively manage this in relation to H & S requirements in addition to those of the OHSA Act

and Regulation (85 of 1993, CR 2014.

3.1.7 The Contractor complies with the requirements stated under paragraph 2.3 of C3.1 Employer’s

Works Information.

3.1.8 Environmental controls, fauna & flora, dealing with objects of historical interest

The Contractor shall perform the Works and all construction activities within the Site and Working

Areas having due regard for the environment and environmental management practices.

3.1.9 The Contractor complies with the CEMP and SES in the construction of the works, all as described

in Employer’s Works Information.

3.1.10 Title to Materials from demolition and excavation

Clause 73.2 states that the Contractor has title to Materials from excavation and demolition only

as stated in the Works Information.

3.1.11 The Contractor has title to all Materials arising from excavation and demolition in the performance

of the works. The Project Manager shall instruct the Contractor how to label, mark, set aside

and/or dispose of such Materials for the benefit of the Employer in accordance with ECC Clause

73.1.

3.1.12 Cooperating with and obtaining acceptance of others

During the course of the contract, departments of Transnet and other Contractors may be

working in the general area surrounding the working area. The Contractor must make allowance





for the necessity to interface with the activities of Others, and to allow for safe access and

working conditions.

At least some of the Site work may take place while the adjacent areas will be in operation. The

Contractor shall take all necessary steps for his Works not to interfere with operations and to

ensure that normal traffic flow of the operational terminal is not obstructed.

The success of the project depends on the effective co-operation of all Contractors on site, and

the Contractor, if necessary, must discuss his programme on a day to day basis with the Project

Manager to ensure effective co-ordination.

3.1.13 Publicity and progress photographs

The Contractor treats all information gained through his appointment on this project as strictly

confidential. The Contractor is not allowed to prepare or present any paper, publish any article

in a technical journal, or derive publicity for his business which makes any reference to any

aspect of the work on this project unless the Employer grants special permission, in writing, for

the purpose.

No photographs are to be taken unless the photographer is in possession of a camera permit

issued by the TNPA Chief Security Officer, Port of Richards Bay. Photographs are to be taken for

record purposes only.

The Contractor provides a comprehensive photographic record of the progress of the Works by

taking photographs at weekly intervals. The initial photographs are to be taken at the start of

the project, immediately prior to the commencement of any work. As far as possible each set of

photographs shall be taken from the same locations as the previous set.

The areas to be photographed and the quantity of photographs in each area will be determined

by the Project Manager.

Progress photographs of all manufacturing work carried out off-site are also required.

Photographs are to be submitted in JPEG format, with a minimum resolution of 1200 x 800. Each

set of photographs must be accompanied by an index showing:

o Contract reference

o Photograph file reference

o Date of Photograph

o Subject matter.

3.1.14 The Contractor provides a notice.

3.1.15 The Contractor does not advertise the contract or the project to any third party, nor communicate

directly with the media (in any jurisdiction) whatsoever without the express written notification

and consent of the Project Manager.





3.1.16 Contractor’s Equipment

All Equipment supplied and used by the Contractor on Site shall be selected and operated in such

a way that design loadings of the particular areas are not exceeded and that damage to all existing surfaces and services are avoided. The Contractor will be required to repair, at his own

cost and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, any such damage caused by him.

The Contractor shall keep daily records of all Equipment used on Site and the Working Areas with

access to such daily records available for inspection by the Project Manager at all reasonable

times.

All Equipment necessary for the Works shall be provided and allowed for by the Contractor.

3.1.17 The Contractor keeps daily records of his Equipment used on Site and the Working Areas

(distinguishing between owned and hired Equipment) with access to such daily records available

for inspection by the Project Manager at all reasonable times.

3.1.18 Equipment provided by the Employer

No Equipment will be provided by the Employer.

3.1.19 Site services and facilities:

When required in terms of the delivery methodology, a Site will be made available to the

Contractor as erection Site and for all his Working Areas.

An electric supply point is available to the Contractor at this site, but the Contractor is responsible

for connecting up and for cabling in the working area.

A potable water supply point is available to the Contractor at this site, but the Contractor is

responsible for connecting up in the working area.

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of other services such as

ablutions, fire protection, lighting and all other services required for undertaking the Works. The

Contractor shall provide, maintain and finally remove proper portable latrines of sufficient number

at his cost. Latrines shall be properly constructed and placed in suitable positions and maintained

in a clean and sanitary working condition.

Wherever the Employer provides facilities for the Contractor’s use within the Working Areas and

the Contractor adapts such facilities for use, then the Contractor makes good and provides full

reinstatement to the land (including all apparatus of the Employer and Others in, on or under

the land) and surrounding areas to its original standard upon dismantling of such facilities and

hand-back to the Employer.

3.1.20 Facilities provided by the Contractor:

The Contractor submits the following drawings to the Project Manager for acceptance before

commencing with the establishment of the site facilities:





o Location drawing showing the area to be occupied by the Contractor in relation to the

Port infrastructure.

o Layout drawing of the proposed facilities.

The Contractor must ensure that the working area is well lit at night and that all the fences,

obstacles and hazards are marked.

Project Manager’s approval must be obtained for the use of any temporary lighting on the Site

due to the impact that this may have on surrounding operations.

The Contractor must maintain the working area in a neat and tidy condition to the satisfaction of

the Project Manager.

The Contractor must make his own arrangements for the disposal of sewerage and waste water.

Sewerage may not be disposed of on site. Transnet facilities may not be used.

The Contractor must make his own arrangements for telecommunication facilities, if required,

for his use during the execution of the Works.

The Contractor, within fourteen days after completion, must completely remove from site all his

plant, materials, Equipment, stores and temporary accommodation or any other asset belonging

to him and leaves the site in a tidy condition to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. No excess

or discarded materials, plant or stores may be buried or dumped within the Employer’s

boundaries.

Unless expressly stated as a responsibility of the Employer, Site services and facilities, all residual

requirements for the provision of facilities and all items of Equipment necessary for the Contractor

to Provide the Works remains the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.1.21 Wherever the Contractor provides facilities (either his own or for the Project Manager and/or

Supervisor) and all items of Equipment, involving, inter alia, offices, accommodation,

laboratories, Materials storage, compound areas etc., within the Working Areas, then the

Contractor makes good and provides full reinstatement to the land (including all apparatus of the

Employer and Others in, on or under the land) and surrounding areas to its original standard,

upon dismantling of such facilities and items of Equipment.

3.1.22 Unless expressly stated as a responsibility of the Employer, Site services and facilities, all residual

requirements for the provision of facilities and all items of Equipment necessary for the Contractor

to Provide the Works remains the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.1.23 Existing premises, inspection of adjoining properties and checking work of Others





The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to existing structures and services caused

by him during the execution of this Contract, fair wear and tear excluded, and shall repair damage

to the satisfaction of the Project Manager before completion of the Works.

For this purpose a joint inspection with the Project Manager and the Contractor will be carried

out prior to occupation of the Works and any existing damage noted. Repair work to damaged

existing structures and services may be carried out during the contract period or during the

defect correction period if so authorised. The Contractor will be required to conduct a

photographic site survey of the occupied area showing existing structures and services. This

report must be submitted to the Project Manager for approval and will be used in assessing the

damages to structures and services if applicable.

3.1.24 The Contractor the work of with which the works interfaces in conjunction with the Project Manager:

3.1.25 Survey control and setting out of the works

Immediately after the starting date, and prior to final design, the Contractor shall survey the

complete site of final operation of the equipment or, if the site of final operation is not completed

yet, obtain the necessary site arrangement and interface drawings from the Project Manager.

This survey serves to confirm dimensions and relative positions of all things, existing or to be

supplied by Others, which will interface with the equipment, for example location of electrical

power supply points.

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the equipment supplied in terms of the contract

interfaces successfully with all existing infrastructure.

Any deviation from the data supplied by the Employer in the Works Information must be brought

under the attention of the Project Manager and discussed and finalised with the Project Manager

prior to final design of the equipment.

3.1.26 Excavations and associated water control

All excavations deeper than 1.0m below ground level or as otherwise indicated by the Employer’s

Safety Officer and Supervisor in terms of the current Construction Regulations, shall either be

fully shored or the sides shall be battered back to a safe angle as determined by the strength of

the soil and approved by the Supervisor.

Shallow ground water may be encountered in the excavations. Where this occurs, the Contractor

is to provide suitable de-watering equipment. The discharge from the dewatering equipment

must be controlled in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Environmental

Specification and Construction Environmental Management Plan. Discharge directly into the

storm water drainage system or into the sea is not permitted. All excavations deeper than 1.0m

below ground level or as otherwise indicated by the Employer’s Safety Officer in terms of the





current Construction Regulations, shall either be fully shored or the sides shall be battered back

to a safe angle as determined by the strength of the soil and approved by the Supervisor.

Shallow ground water may be encountered in the excavations. Where this occurs, the Contractor

is to provide suitable de-watering equipment. The discharge from the dewatering equipment

must be controlled in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Environmental

Specification and Construction Environmental Management Plan. Discharge directly into the

storm water drainage system or into the sea is not permitted.

3.1.27 Underground services, other existing services, cable and pipe trenches and covers

The Contractor must, in collaboration with the Supervisor, ascertain whether or not the service

is live. The Contractor shall not uplift any such service unless he is instructed to do so.

The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to known services and he

shall take all necessary measures to protect them. In the event of a service being

damaged, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Supervisor. The Contractor

shall not repair any such service unless he is instructed to do so.

3.1.28 Where the Contractor encounters existing underground services / existing services cables / pipe,

the Contractor should notify the Project Manager.

3.1.29 Control of noise, dust, water and waste

All Site activities must comply with the relevant parts of legislation.

3.1.30 The Contractor notifies the Supervisor of the elements of the works which are to be covered up.

3.2 Completion and correction of Defects

3.2.1 The work to be done by the Completion Date

On or before the Completion Date the Contractor shall have done everything required to Provide

the Works including the work listed below which is to be done before the Completion Date and

in any case before the dates stated. The Project Manager cannot certify Completion until all the

work listed below has been done and is also free of Defects, which would have, in his opinion,

prevented the Employer from using the works and Others from doing their work.

3.2.2 Use of the works before Completion has been certified

In terms of Clause 35.2 in ECC the Employer may use any part of the works before Completion has been certified.

3.2.3 The Contractor ensures that the Project Manager has a full and accurate dossier of As-built

documents that represent the status of the completed works (to include Plant within the works)

to present to the Employer.

3.2.4 Access given by the Employer for correction of Defects





Clause 43.4 requires that the Project Manager arrange for the Employer to allow the Contractor

access to and use of a part of the works, which has been taken over if needed to correct a Defect.

After the works have been put into operation, the Employer may require the Contractor to

undertake certain procedures before such access can be granted.

3.2.5 The Contractor complies with the following constraints and procedures of the Employer where

the Project Manager arranges access for the Contractor after Completion:

Where the Contractor has to return to Site after Completion to rectify notified Defects, the

Employer may either impose the same Site access / egress restrictions as communicated elsewhere

under C3.1 Employer’s Works Information at the starting date / access date stated under Contract

Data - Part One, or as the works are now in use or the Employer’s occupation of the Site may be

incrementally or substantially changed post Completion, there may be further access / egress

restrictions stated here at paragraph 3.2.13 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

4 Plant and Materials Standards and Workmanship

4.1 Employer specifications

4.1.1 Investigation, survey and Site clearance.

The Contractor is responsible to clear the site of all rubble, sand, silt and vegetation.

The Contractor shall confirm all levels, site conditions and site information prior to any Work

commencing.

4.2 Building works

The Model Preamble for Trades as published by the Association of South African Quantity

Surveyors Model Preamble for Trades 2008 shall be applicable to all the building Works associated

with this contract. The following interpretations and meanings shall apply:

In case of any conflict in interpretation, ambiguity or discrepancy between the Model Preamble

for Trades 2008, (any standard or written particular project specification) contained in the Works

Information and the conditions of contract, the conditions of contract shall take precedence.

In case of any conflict in interpretation, ambiguity or discrepancy between the Model Preamble

for Trades 2008 contained in this paragraph 4.2 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information and

specific statements contained elsewhere in C3.1 Employer’s Works Information, the specific

statements contained elsewhere shall prevail, without prejudice to the Project Manager’s express

duty to resolve any ambiguity or inconsistency in the Works Information under ECC3 Clause 17.1.

Within the Model Preambles for Trades 2008, the following amendments and interpretations shall

apply:





Where the word or expression “Principal Agent” is used, read “Project Manager” or “Supervisor”

as the context requires.

Where the word or expression “Contractor” is used, read “Contractor”.

Where the word or expression “Engineer” is used, read “Project Manager” or “Supervisor” as the

context requires.

Where the Model Preambles for Trades 2008 mention “rates” for measured work and any

contractual statements relating to payment, all such statements shall be discounted, with the

ECC3 conditions of contract taking precedence.

Within the Model Preambles for Trades 2008, A. GENERAL, the following amendments and

interpretations shall apply:

Where the word or expression “bills of quantities” is used, this shall be discounted for the

purposes of the Works Information. The ECC3 Contract Data Part One states the main option to

apply within the ECC3 Contract between the Parties.

Within the Model Preambles for Trades 2008, B. ALTERATIONS, B.2 MATERIALS FROM THE

ALTERATIONS, CREDIT, ETC and C. EARTHWORKS, C1.4 Materials from demolitions shall apply.

C3.1 Employer’s Works Information paragraph 3.1.6 states details of the Contractor’s title (if any)

to Materials arising from excavations and/or demolitions and how such Materials are either to be

disposed of or re-used in the works.

Within the Model Preamble for Trades 2008 U. EXTERNAL WORKS, U.3.8 Process control tests

shall be deemed to be included within paragraph 3.2.1 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

The principles, meanings and interpretation stated and established within paragraphs 2.2.8 to

4.2.1 with respect to the Model Preambles for Trades 2008 apply equally to other references

used within C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

Particular specifications provided by the Employer.

4.2.1 South African National Standard

The application of the National Building Regulations (SANS 10400) shall be strictly adhered to.

4.2.2 Manufacturer’s instructions and specifications

All materials and products shall be used and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions and specifications

4.2.3 Use of locally manufactured materials and products

Materials and products manufactured in South Africa shall be used in carrying out the work to

which this specification refers, unless an imported product is prescribed specifically, or when no

suitable locally manufactured product for the specific use is available.

4.2.4 Samples





The Contractor shall furnish samples and/or certificates as called for or may be called for by the

Supervisor / Project manager. Materials and/or workmanship not corresponding with approved

samples may be rejected.

Samples for approval shall be required for paint colours, partitions, joinery with associated

finishes, furniture, wall finishes, ceiling finishes, floor finishes, windows, louvres, shopfronts, all

sanitary fittings and face brick sample wall (2m²). These approved samples shall remain on site

for the duration of the Works.

The Contractor shall provide a sample of 2m2 of cleaned existing facebrick, and Six (6) number

of cleaned ceiling-insulation boards in the existing workshop for approval.

4.2.5 Brickwork and Mortar Joints

The Contractor shall clean the existing face brick as recommended by manufacturer.

New Face brick shall be stored and laid in accordance to the manufacturer’s guidelines and shall

include the blending, selection and tie-in of face brick.

Mortar joints to face brickwork generally shall be 10mm in thickness with level bedding joints,

vertical perpends. Half round recessed and shall be well rubbed with a standard jointing tool of

suitable size to ensure that the entire exposed surface on the joint presents a smooth and

polished appearance.

4.2.6 Waterproofing of roof and wet areas

The Contractor shall test, repair and ensure water tightness of the existing roofs.

The Contractor shall repair and make good any damaged roof sheeting.

The Contractor shall furnish the Employer with a written guarantee covering materials and

workmanship for all waterproofing specified or offered. This guarantee shall be signed by the

Contractor and countersigned by the supplier of the materials used, and underwritten by a

recognised insurance company. The guarantee shall be valid for a 10 year period.

Should any maintenance be required during the guarantee period the Contractor must allow for

the cost of such in his tender price as the Contractor will be held solely responsible for any leaks

that occur during the guarantee period.

4.2.7 Glazing

The Contractor shall ensure that all glass and laminated safety glass comply with SANS 613 and

SANS 10400; and carry the Manufacturer’s warranty against all manufacturing defects and

discoloration for a minimum period of 5 years. A SANS approved stencil mark is to appear in a

prominent place on all types of safety glass.





4.2.8 Shopfronts and windows

The Contractor shall ensure that all Shopfronts are installed by an AAMSA approved contractor

and the installation certification is to be provided for all shopfront installations.

Installations shall comply with SANS 613 and SANS 10400.

The Contractor shall ensure that all shop fronts, window sections and glazing installations are

water tight and able to withstand coastal winds of up to 60m/sec. The drawings provide a

guideline to the type of shopfront and window systems which are to be designed by the

Contractor.

4.2.9 Partitions

Fire rating certificate shall be provided.

4.2.10 Roofing and roof Structure

The Contractor shall provide Engineer’s certificate covering the repair and or design and

installation of the roof structure on completion of the roof structure.

The Contractor shall ensure that the removal and/ or cleaning of asbestos roof sheeting and/ or

asbestos accessories comply with the South African Department of Labour Asbestos Regulations

and the Occupational Health and Safety Act.

The Contractor shall repair, clean and clear roof sheeting, gutters and rain water downpipes of

any debris and dirt. Any broken sheeting shall be replaced to match existing profile and colour.

4.2.11 Protection of works

The Contractor shall provide all necessary dust sheets, hoarding, etc. and shall exercise all

necessary care to prevent marking surfaces, walls, floors, glass, electrical fittings, etc. and shall

keep all parts of the works perfectly clean and free at all times from spotting, accumulation of

rubbish, debris of dirt arising from the operations. Any surface disfigured or otherwise damaged

shall be completely renovated or replaced as necessary by the Contractor at his own expense to

the Supervisor’s approval. The premises shall be left clean and fit for occupation at completion

of the work.

4.2.12 Demolition

The Contractor shall carefully remove, clean and store facebrick that has been demolished for

re-use in the construction works. Any floors, walls and surfaces damaged shall be made good by

the Contractor.

4.2.13 Carports

The shade-cloth covered carports shall be designed, supplied, and installed to the Contractor’s

Design as per drawing 4223745-2-002-A-LA- 0008-01-00-TD. Contractor shall provide certificate

of structural stability. Refer to item 4.6 Structural Work.





4.3 Civil Engineering

4.3.1 The SANS 1200 Series of Specifications are applicable to all Civil Engineering and

Structural works associated with this contract. The following interpretations and

meanings shall apply:

Where the SANS 1200 series of Specifications are used within the Works Information, the

following interpretations and meanings shall apply:

In case of any conflict in interpretation, ambiguity or discrepancy between any SANS 1200

Specification (whether standard or written as a particular project specification) contained in the

Works Information and the conditions of contract, the conditions of contract take precedence

within the ECC3 contract.

In case of any conflict in interpretation, ambiguity or discrepancy between any SANS 1200

Specification (whether standard or written as a particular project specification) contained in this

paragraph 4.3 of the Employer’s Works Information and specific statements contained elsewhere

in C3.1 Employer’s Works Information, the specific statements contained elsewhere shall prevail,

without prejudice to the Project Manger’s express duty to resolve any ambiguity or inconsistency

in the Works Information under ECC3 Clause 17.1.

4.3.2 Variations to the standardised specifications

Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL, the following amendments and interpretations shall apply:

Where the word or expression “Employer” is used, read “Employer”;

Where the word or expression “Contractor” is used, read “Contractor”;

Where the word or expression “Engineer” is used, read “Project Manager” or “Supervisor” as the

context requires;

Where the word or expression “schedule of quantities” is used, this is deleted in entirety.

Assessment and payment is in accordance with the conditions of contract (and the ECC3 main

and secondary options stated therein);

Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 2.3 DEFINITIONS, the following apply:

“Acceptable. Approved (Approval)” is interpreted as either a Project Manager or a Supervisor

communication or instruction in relation to Works Information compliance, consistent with the

conditions of contract as the context requires;

“Adequate” is deleted. The Project Manager notifies the Contractor where the Contractor has not

complied with the Works Information;

“Measurement and payment” and the further definitions contained within 6.3 c) are deleted.


and secondary options stated therein);





Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 2.6 APPROVAL, the following applies:

“Approval” by either the Project Manager and/or the Supervisor is without prejudice to ECC3

Clause 14.1 and, inter alia, ECC3 Clauses 13.1, 14.3 and 27.1.

SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 2.8 ITEMS IN SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES, is deleted in entirety.


and secondary options stated therein).

SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 3.2 STRUCTURES AND NATURAL MATERIAL ON SITE, applies only to

the extent that it is consistent with paragraph 3.1.6 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 7.1 PLANT, the following applies:

Where the word or expression “Plant” is used, read “Equipment”.

SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 7.2 CONTRACTOR’S OFFICES, STORES AND SERVICES, applies but the

Project Manager resolves any inconsistency with statements included within paragraph 3.1.12 of

C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 3.1 SURVEY, applies only to the extent that it is consistent with

paragraph 3.1.14 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 3.2 WATCHING, BARRICADING, LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC

CROSSINGS, the following applies:

Where the word or expression “specification” is used, read “Works Information”.

SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 3.4 PROTECTION OF OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND SERVICES

applies only to the extent that it is consistent with the specific statements made elsewhere in

C3.1 Employer’s Works Information and in any case and at all times consistent with the conditions

of contract.

Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 5 TESTING, the following applies:

Where the word or expression “Engineer” is used, read “Supervisor”.

The principles, meanings and interpretation stated and established within paragraphs 6.3.1 to

6.3.15 with respect to SANS 1200 series and to SANS 1200 A: GENERAL equally apply to the

other SANS 1200 specification references [state particulars of SANS 1200 used ] used within this

paragraph 6.3 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

4.3.3 Demolition and earthworks

Scope of work

This part covers the demolition of the existing stormwater and sewer manholes, pipes and

existing concrete panels.





Supporting Specifications

This specification must be read in conjunction with the following specifications:

SANS Specifications

SANS 1200 DA Earthworks (small works)

SANS 1200 DB Earthworks (pipe trenches)

SANS 1200 M Roads General

SANS 1200 ME Subbase

SANS 1200 MF Base

SANS 1200 MFL Base (light pavement structures)

Existing services

All known services are provided on the drawing, however, due to the lack of adequate as-built

records, the Contractor will be required to prove services prior to removal. The Contractor shall

take the necessary precautions to ensure that the services are not damaged. The existing water

supply to the buildings must be shut off at the closest valve to be determined on site, prior to

the removal of plumbing fittings and demolition.

As soon as any underground service not shown on the drawings is discovered, it shall be brought

to the attention of the Technical Officer. The contractor must in collaboration with the Technical

Officer, ascertain whether or not the service is live. The contractor shall not uplift any such

service unless he is instructed to do so.

The contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to known services (i.e. services that are

within the site of the works and are shown on the drawing) and he shall take all necessary

measures to protect them. In the event of a service being damaged, the contractor shall

immediately notify the Technical Officer. The contractor shall not repair any such service unless

he is instructed to do so.

Demolition of concrete panels

The contractor shall demolish and spoil the existing concrete panels on walkway.

Excavation

The material to be excavated consists of mainly 150mm crusher run and the remainder being

soft. (SANS 1200 DA cl. 3.1.2.).

For the purposes of uplifting of underground pipes, a trench width of 1m shall be used.

Excavation to a depth of 1.5m shall be done by hand.





Compaction of in-situ material

The in-situ material shall be trimmed, levelled out and compacted to 98% MOD AASHTO.

Imported Backfill material

Backfill material shall be selected from the commercial sources and placed in 200mm layers

compacted to 100% MAASHTO density. No clay shall be used as backfill.

Base Course

The base course shall be Type G2, maximum size 37,5mm material from commercial sources.

The Technical Officer may instruct the Contractor to use the previously excavated crusher run

material for the base course.

The base course shall be 150mm thick, compacted to 98% of Mod AASHTO density. Levels,

moisture content and density shall be to degree of accuracy level II. The applicable reference

clauses shall be:

SANS 1200 MFL 8.3.1a

SANS 1200 M Table 3A

SANS 1200 D 6.1 & 6.2

Measurement and Payment

Measurement and payment of all other items not listed below shall be in accordance with the

relevant SANS 1200 clauses. The unit of measurement for the individual items shall be as detailed

in the bill of quantities.

Demolish sewer and stormwater manholes

The unit of measurement shall be Number.

The rate tendered shall include all costs for the demolition of the manholes to the underside of

foundation and disposal off TNPA property.

Uplift and remove sewer and stormwater pipes

The unit of measurement shall be metre.

The rate tendered shall include all costs for the excavation to a depth of 1.5m, uplifting of

unwanted pipes and disposal off TNPA property.

Uplift and spoil concrete panels and paving blocks

The unit of measurement shall be per square metre of paving blocks uplifted and reinstated or

disposed. The condition of paving blocks to be reinstated is subject to the approval of the

Supervisor.

The unit of measurement shall be per square metre of concrete uplifted and disposed.





The rate tendered shall include all costs incurred in uplifting the concrete and disposing of the

spoil material to an approved dump site.

Level and compact existing sub-grade

The unit of measurement shall be square metre.

The rate tendered shall include all costs for trimming to line and level, spreading and compacting.

Backfilling

The unit of measurement shall be per cubic metre backfilled.

The rate tendered shall include all costs incurred for selecting and transporting approved backfill

material, backfilling and compacting to the required level.

Construct Base course

The unit of measurement shall be per cubic metre constructed.

The rate tendered shall include all costs incurred for selecting, backfilling and compacting of

material to the required level.

Saw Cutting

The unit of measurement shall be per linear metre of a 100mm deep of saw cut. The rate shall

include all costs involved in saw cutting through the existing concrete foundations when

instructed by the Supervisor on site.

Reset existing manhole covers

The unit of measurement shall be Number.

The rate for the resetting of the manhole covers shall include for the demolition of the existing

cover slabs, recovery, cleaning, covers for re-use and for reconstructing the cover slabs to the

required levels.

4.3.4 Site Clearance, Earthworks & Layer works

Scope of work

The works for the site clearance, earthworks and layer works include the following:

1. Clearing of site.

2. Exposing of existing services where indicated by Project Manager.

3. Bulk excavation and treatment of in-situ material.

4. Construction of G5 gravel sub base from commercial sources.

5. Construction of G2 crushed stone base from commercial sources.

6. Construction of concrete panels and half round channels

7. Installation of edge restraints





8. And any other work arising out of or incidental to the above, or required of the Contractor

for the proper completion of the works.


This section, “Site Clearance, Earthworks and Layerworks”, shall be read in conjunction with

the following SABS and Transnet standard specifications;

SANS Specifications

S406 Specification for the supply of stone

SANS 1200 C Site Clearance

SANS 1200 D Earthworks

SANS 1200 DM Earthworks (roads, sub grade)

SANS 1200 GM Concrete (small works)

SANS 1200 M Roads General

SANS 1200 ME Subbase

SANS 1200 MF Base

SANS 1200 MH Asphalt surfacing

SANS 1200 MJ Segmented paving

SANS 1200 MK Kerbing

SANS 1200 MM Ancillary roadworks

Earthworks (SANS 1200D)

Classification (Subclause 3.1)

Notwithstanding the provisions of subclause 3.1, the materials excavated will not be classified

for the purposes of measurement and payment. The unit rate for excavation shall cover

excavation in all materials other than hard rock.

Spoil site

All excess material shall be spoiled off site in a spoil area to be identified by the Contractor. The

Contractor is to allow for everything necessary to load, haul, tip, and spread and compact if

necessary. Spoiling on Transnet property shall not be permitted unless a specific authority is

obtained in writing. The contractor shall provide written confirmation that permission has been

obtained from the operator /owner of the spoil site that they have accepted the material and all

obligations in regarding to the spoiling of material has been met.

Where hazardous or contaminated material needs to be spoiled, the Contractor shall do so at

an approved disposal site. The Contractor shall be responsible for receipt of a spoil certificate

from the spoil site, which he shall copy to the Project Manager





Exposing existing services

A multitude of services are known to exist over the whole area of the works and based on the

information available general layout plan indicating services have been prepared. Prior to

commencing work in any area the Contractor shall consult the Project Manager in regard to

the location of services and shall assist him when required in locating the exact position and

depths of services by means of hand excavated test holes. The location and depth of all services

discovered by the foregoing investigations shall be recorded and plotted by the Contractor on

an “as-built” copy of the services plan.

The Contractor shall assist when required in alterations to services by providing labour, plant

and material and shall carry out the necessary work as instructed by the Project Manager.

Test holes to locate services shall be excavated at least 2 weeks ahead of construction in order

to allow time for alterations to services or amendments to the design of the works. Once the

services have been located the test holes are to be backfilled.

Claims for extension of time as a result of existing services will NOT be entertained if the

operation of locating and/or protecting services is less than two weeks ahead of construction.

Responsibility for protection of all known services shall rest solely with the Contractor and he

shall bear all costs, which may arise as a result of any damage which he may cause to such

services or which may arise as a result of his operations.

Materials

Disposal of material

All vegetation, trees, etc. resulting from site clearance shall be removed off site to a disposal

dump to be selected by the contractor. The haulage, dump costs and any levies etc. shall be

deemed to be included in his tendered rates. Burning of materials on site shall not be permitted.

Subgrade

Preparation of the in-situ subgrade will be by means of ripping and compaction. Compaction

of the in-situ subgrade will be done to a minimum of 95% of modified AASHTO maximum

density for all materials, to a minimum depth of 150mm and at between –2% and +2% of the

optimum moisture content.

Sub-base

A 150mm G5 subbase conforming to the requirements of SANS 1200 ME shall be imported

from a commercial source. The layer shall be compacted 150 mm layers to 96 % Mod AASHTO

density.

Base

The base layer shall be 150mm thick using a G2 graded crushed stone, compacted to 98%

MOD AASHTO density. The tolerance on the base levels will be -10mm to 0mm.

Prime coat





The prime coat shall be in accordance with SANS 1200 MH and shall be MSP1 bitumen or similar

approved. The rate of application of the prime coat shall be 0,7 litre/m2. Arrangements shall

be made with the Supervisor to approve the primed areas before the asphalt surfacing is laid.

The Contractor must ensure not to foul concrete surfaces when applying the prime coat. Any

surfaces fouled will be made good at the Contractor’s expense.

Tack coat

The tack coat shall be in accordance with SANS 1200 MH and shall be SS60 anionic emulsion

bitumen or similar approved. The rate of application of the tack coat shall be 0,5 litre/m2

Arrangements shall be made with the Supervisor to approve the primed areas before the asphalt

surfacing is laid. The Contractor must ensure not to foul concrete surfaces when applying the

tack coat. Any surfaces fouled must be made good at the Contractor’s expense. Tack coat shall

be applied along all longitudinal and traverse joints, and on laid surfaces.

Wearing course

A 30mm thick continuous graded hot mix asphalt to SANS 1200 MH is required.

River Sand

The river sand shall be free from substances that may be deleterious to blocks and shall be in

accordance with SANS 1200 MJ. It shall be compacted to the required level as per drawing and

work specification.

Block Paving

The units as supplied shall be free from cracks that detract from their general appearance. No

unit with 15mm exceeding dimension shall be used or with covering more than 3% of the

periphery of the surface that intend to be exposed. No unit shall have any protuberance of height

exceeding 3mm. The surface texture and colour of the units shall fall within the range of texture

and colour represented by the manufactures approved samples. The size, type and areas

requiring cobblestone/ block paving are as per the drawings.

Road marking

The Contractor shall provide all plant required to execute the works. The lines or markings are

to be painted with Plascon - Hysheen Road and Runway Paint or similar approved, at an

application rate the rate of 0,42 l per m2. The colour of paint to be used shall be as specified in

the Schedule of Quantities and indicated on the drawing issued. All paint shall conform to SANS

731-1.

The following must be noted by the Contractor in terms of SANS 731-1:

1. The paint shall be a Type 2 Paint

2. The paint shall be suitable for use in a parking area on a segmented concrete surface

3. The paint is not required to be retro reflective

4. Drying time classification shall be Class 1

5. The colours required for the completion of the contract shall be :

6. White

7. Red





8. Golden Yellow (BS381C-356 or CKS 279 – D26)

9. All the above colours to meet classifications according to SANS 1091

Construction

Base

Any portion of stabilized base that is too high shall be lowered, harrowed and reconstructed to

such depth that, after compaction, the base layer is of the same standard and thickness

throughout, and falls and level shall comply.

Edge restraints

Edge restraints shall be constructed as shown on drawings and shall be constructed on the base

layer before any blocks/units are laid.

Tolerances

Paving as laid

The finished paved surface shall present the smooth surface or meet Supervisors requirements.

Measurement of deviations

Any deviation from the flatness of a plane surface will be measured as the maximum deviation

of the surface from the straight line of length 3m joining two points on the surface, determining

by means of a straight-edge the ends of which are supported on identical unit of suitable

thickness placed over each of the points.

Testing

Checking

The Contractor shall carry out sufficient checks to satisfy himself that the materials used and the

workmanship (construction, tolerances and strength) attained comply consistently with the

specified requirements. The Supervisor will carry out checks and the result made available to the

contractor.

Trial

The Supervisor will identify the trial section and the trial shall be carried in accordance with SABS

1200 MJ – clause 7.2.

Quality Control

Workmanship, tolerances and frequency of testing shall be in accordance with the relevant

specifications with the following exceptions:

An indirect tensile strength and Dynamic Creep Modulus testing shall be carried out as directed

by the Supervisor and allowed for in the Schedule of Prices. One test per area.

A minimum of 8 tests per lot shall be required for density tests. The nature of the remainder of

the tests required is described in clause 7.2 of SANS 1200 ME and SANS 1200 MF

Method statement

The Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement setting out what quality control

procedures will be implemented with respect to:-





Quality assurance during the batching and mixing process. The Contractor shall indicate what

certification, if any, they have in terms of SANS or ISP quality assurance schemes.

Procedures, methods and plant for the transportation of hot asphalt to site.

Procedures, methods and plant to be used for placing and compacting asphalt on site.

4.3.5 Sewer and Stormwater Drainage

Scope of Work

The works for the sewer and stormwater drainage include the following:

1. Excavate, supply, bed and lay of 160mm Class 34 uPVC, 450 and 500mm concrete

stormwater pipes.

2. Excavate, supply, bed and lay 160mm Class 34 uPVC sewer pipes

3. Construction of stormwater grid inlet manholes.

4. Construction of sewer manholes




This section, “Sewer and Stormwater Drainage”, shall be read in conjunction with the following

SANS standard specifications.

SANS Specifications

SANS 1200 DB Earthworks (Pipe trenches)

SANS 1200 LB Bedding (Pipes)

SANS 1200 LD Sewers

SANS 1200 LE Stormwater Drainage

Materials

Class 34 PVC pipes to the 160mm diameter and length as stated on the drawings are to be used

for stormwater reticulation from downpipes160mm and for the entire sewer network. Class100D

Concrete to be used for stormwater pipes of diameter above 160mm.

Construction

Brickwork manholes

All brickwork shall be built in manhole bond i.e. stretchers only on the inside face, using cement

mortar as specified. Bricks shall be well soaked before use and the previous course shall be

wetted before bricks are laid thereon. All joints on the internal face (and the external face

above ground) shall be half round recessed and shall be well rubbed with a standard jointing

tool of suitable size to ensure that the entire exposed surface on the joint presents a smooth

and polished appearance. Intersecting walls shall be properly toothed with each other and all





angles levelled and plumbed. Should cement bricks be utilised, then all internal surfaces shall

be plastered with a 12mm thick 3:1 cement sand mortar mix.

When brick built' manholes are constructed in wet ground, the external surfaces shall be

rendered with 12mm thick 3:1 cement sand mortar mix.

Pipe crossings

Where pipes cross one another with a vertical height difference of less than 150mm, a

polystyrene block must be placed between them, and the fill material around the pipes

thoroughly moistened and compacted. The contractor will be held responsible for any damage

to pipes resulting from the construction of a pipe crossing.

Cut pipe ends

All ends may be cut on site. Reinforcement exposed by such cutting is to be protected with

20mm thick cement mortar.

4.3.6 Cable Ducts

Scope of Work

The works for the cable ducts include the following:

1. Excavation, bedding and backfill for cable ducts.

2. Supply and lay PVC pipes.

3. Laying of cable duct markers.

4. Construction of comms manhole.




This section, “Cable Ducts”, shall be read in conjunction with the following SANS standard

specifications.

SANS Specifications


SANS 1200 LB Medium pressure pipelines

SANS 1200 LC Cable ducts

Materials

All cable ducts shall consist of the indicated number and size of pitch impregnated fibre pipes

or, where indicated, hard setting durable plastic pipes. .

Construction

Laying





Unless otherwise directed by the Supervisor, the ducts shall be laid as shown on plan layout

drawing of the Standard Specification.

Depth, position and marking of ducts

Electrical Cable Ducts

All cable ducts are to be laid 800m below finished road level and the pipes must protrude

500mm beyond the edge of the hardened roadway or stormwater drain. Both ends of each

duct must be sealed with an end cap. The position of each duct crossing shall be indicated on

site using suit-able markers;

Draw wires must be provided in each duct and duct ends must be sealed with suitable stoppers.

A double strand copper wire of at least 2,8mm² cross section that will serve as a screen and is

to be installed approximately 200mm above all ducts over its entire length.

Comms manholes

All brickwork shall be built in manhole bond i.e. stretchers only on the inside face, using cement

mortar as specified. Bricks shall be well soaked before use and the previous course shall be

wetted before bricks are laid thereon. All joints on the internal face (and the external face

above ground) shall be half round recessed and shall be well rubbed with a standard jointing

tool of suitable size to ensure that the entire exposed surface on the joint presents a smooth

and polished appearance. Intersecting walls shall be properly toothed with each other and all

angles levelled and plumbed. Should cement bricks be utilised, then all internal surfaces shall

be plastered with a 12mm thick 3:1 cement sand mortar mix.

When brick built' manholes are constructed in wet ground, the external surfaces shall be

rendered with 12mm thick 3:1 cement sand mortar mix.

4.3.7 Concrete Works

Scope of work

The works for the concrete include the following:

1. Encasing of pipes where required

2. Concrete channel and fillet

3. And any other work Concrete Works arising out of or incidental to the above, or required

by the Contractor for the proper completion of the works in accordance with the true

meaning and intent of the contract documents.

Particular Specifications

This section, “Concrete Works”, must be read in conjunction with the following specifications:

SANS Specifications

SANS 1200 G Concrete

SANS 1083:1994 Aggregates from natural sources





SANS 10100-

2:1992

The Structural use of concrete – Part 2: Materials and execution of work

SANS 50197-1 Cement – composition, specifications and conformity criteria. Part 1:

Common cements

SANS 1491-1 Portland cement extenders – Part 1 Ground granulated blast furnace slag

SANS 1491-2 Portland cement extenders – Part 2 Fly ash.

SANS 1491-3 Portland cement extenders – Part 3 Condensed Silica Fume

Cementitious Binders

Cement

Common cements, complying with SANS 50197-1 shall be used for all concrete work. On no

account shall masonry cements be used for concrete work, even if the strength designations

are the same as for common cements.

Coastal Zone

In this application, which is within one kilometre of the sea, one or more of the following

Portland cementations binders shall be used in all applications:

1. Blast furnace cement, Type III/A, certified as containing not less than 40% and not more

than 50% milled granulated blast furnace slag (MGBS), or a blend of Type 1 Portland

cement with not less than 40% and not more than 50% MGBS. MGBS shall comply with

SANS 1491 Part 1.

2. Fly ash cement Type II/B-V or Portland fly ash cement Type II/B-W, certified as containing

not less than 25% and not more than 30% fly ash shall comply with SANS 1491 Part 2.

Alkali Reactive Concrete

Alkali Reactive Aggregates shall not be used in this project. The equivalent Na2O content of

the concrete shall not exceed 2,0 kg/m3 where % Na2O equivalent = % Na2O + (0,658 x

%K2O)

Aggregates

Fine and coarse aggregate shall comply with the relevant clauses of SANS 1083.

Where aggregates have constituents, which, in the opinion of the Supervisor, may give rise to

damage due to alkali-aggregate reactions, the provisions of PS: C2.3 shall be applicable.

Evidence of compliance of the aggregates with the requirements of PS: C3.1 & C3.2 shall be

furnished as early as practical. If required by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit

40kg samples for approval at least 6 weeks prior to the start of concrete construction. No

aggregate shall be delivered for use in the works until approval is given.

Admixtures





Admixtures containing chlorides will not be permitted in reinforced concrete.

Cover Blocks

Cover blocks used to ensure the cover to reinforcement shall be made of cement mortar.

Cover blocks shall be dense and have a minimum 28 day crushing strength of 50 Mpa and shall

be cured in water for at least 14 days before being used.

Cover/spacer blocks made of plastic will not be permitted.

Concrete Quality

Prior to the start of any concrete work on site, the Contractor shall submit a quality assurance

plan which will ensure compliance with specification and provide acceptable documentary

evidence that all specified operations have been carried out satisfactorily.

Where the minimum dimension to be placed during a single pour is larger than 600mm, and

the cement content of the reinforced concrete exceeds the following:

1. Cement Types I and II/ * S: 400 kg/m3

2. Cement Types II/B-V and II/B-W: 450 kg/m3

The Project Manager may require that measures be instituted to reduce heat development in

the concrete.

Batching

All cementations binders shall be batched by full sack or by mass batching with approved

precision weighing equipment.

All aggregates shall be precisely measured by mass using approved precision weigh-batching

equipment, unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager.

Should any variation in the composition of the aggregate become apparent, the Project

Manager shall be notified and a further sample of aggregate submitted immediately for his

approval.

Concrete Placing

The Project Manager shall approve the size, shape and depth of any excavation before concrete

is placed.

Unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, no concrete shall be placed until he has

accepted the fixed reinforcement and confirmed in writing by way of a release certificate.

Construction Joints

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the exact position of horizontal construction joints

shall be marked on the formwork by means of grout checks in order to obtain truly horizontal

joints.

Stub columns, stub walls and stays on footings shall be cast integrally with the footing and not

afterwards, even where another class of concrete is being used.

Joint lines shall be so arranged that they coincide with features of the finished work.





Where new concrete is to be cast against a hardened concrete surface, neat cement slurry

mixed to a creamy consistency shall be brushed onto the cleaned concrete surface.

Contraction joints shall be smooth and shall have one coat of lime wash or PVA applied to the

older surface prior to casting the fresher concrete.

Curing Compound

Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, the curing compound shall be:

An approved trafficable, resin-based, white pigmented, membrane forming for slopes flatter

than 1:1.

An approved clear, aesthetically acceptable, membrane forming for all other concrete surfaces,

including beam and slab soffits.

The curing compound shall comply with specification ASTM C309, except that the maximum

permissible water loss in the test shall be 0,40 kg/m2.

Alternatively, the curing compound shall be acceptable if the treated concrete retains 90% or

more of its mixing water when subject to the test set out in BS 8110 Part 1 – Chapter 6.6.

Curing Compound Application

The total application rate of the curing compound shall be the greater of the supplier’s

specification or 0,90 l/m2. On textured concrete surfaces, the total application rate shall be

0,90 l/m2.

In cases of concrete surfaces with run-off problems, it may be necessary to apply more than

one coat of membrane forming curing compound to obtain the specified total or cumulative

application rate.

Curing in accordance with SABS 1200 G shall commence on all concrete surfaces as soon as it

is practical in the opinion of the Project Manager.

On unformed surfaces the curing compound shall be applied after finishing and as soon as the

free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but no so late that

the liquid curing compound will be absorbed into the concrete.

On formed surfaces, the exposed concrete shall be wet with water immediately after the forms

are removed and kept moist until the curing compound is applied.

Application of the curing compound shall begin once the concrete has reached a uniformly

damp appearance with no free water on the surface.

Application of the compound may be done by hand or power spray.

The compound shall be applied at a uniform rate with two applications at right angles to each

other to ensure complete coverage.

Pigmented compounds, without a thixotropic agent, shall be adequately stirred to assure even

distribution of the pigment during application.





Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, the initial 24 hour curing of concrete surfaces

not covered by formwork shall be carried out by ponding, covering with constantly wetted sand

or mats, or continuous spraying in accordance with SABS 1200 G when the following climatic

conditions occur:

1. Wind velocity greater than 5 m/s and/or

2. Ambient temperature is above 25 C and/or

3. The relative humidity is below 60 %

If plastic shrinkage occurs, the concrete, while still plastic, shall be re-vibrated, floated and re-

coated with curing compound as if no curing has previously taken place.

Classification of finishes (Sub clause 5.2.1) - The surface condition required on all exposed

finished concrete shall be smooth

Curing Period

The curing period for concrete containing only CEM 1 shall be 7 days.

The curing period for concrete containing CEM 1 plus cement extenders (MGBS, FA) shall be

10 days.

The curing period will start on completion of the concrete pour and for formed surfaces shall

include the time for which forms are still in place after the pour.

Concrete Records

The Contractor shall maintain the following daily records for every part of the concrete structure

and shall make these available at all times during the progress of the work for inspection by

the Project Manager.

The date and time during which concrete was placed

Identification of the part of the structure in which the concrete was placed

The mixed proportions and specified strength

The type and brand of cement

The slump of the concrete

The identifying marks of test cubes made

Curing procedure applied to concrete placed

The times when shuttering was stripped and props removed

The date of despatch of the cubes to the testing laboratory

The test results.

The records shall be delivered to the Project Manager each week except in the case of sub-

standard concrete, when the Project Manager shall be informed immediately.

Tolerances





Deviations shall be within the limits listed in SANS 1200 G for degree of accuracy II unless

otherwise specified.

Testing and Monitoring

Frequency of sampling and testing shall be as specified in SANS 1200 G.

1. If the quantity of concrete from which samples were taken exceeds 40 m3, it shall be

subject to the testing of a minimum of 3 sets of samples per day from each grade of

concrete placed in each independent structure.

2. If the quantity of concrete from which samples were taken is less than 40 m3, it shall

be subject to the testing of a minimum of 2 sets of samples per day from each grade

of concrete placed in each independent structure.

Formwork (Clause 5.2)

All exposed concrete corners shall be provided with 20mm x 20mm chamfers.

4.3.8 Fencing

Scope of work

The works for the fencing shall include the following:

Design, supply, fabrication and installation of High Security Fencing (hereafter referred

to as HSF) with unobstructed views (e.g. Clearvu or similar approved)

Design, supply, fabrication, and installation of security gates (e.g. Clearvu or similar

approved)

And any other work arising out of or incidental to the above, or required by the Contractor for

the proper completion of the works in accordance with the true meaning and intent of the

contract documents.


This part shall be read in conjunction with the following SANS and Transnet standard

specifications.

SANS Specifications

SANS 1200 HC Corrosion protection to structural steelwork

SANS 1200 H Structural steel work

SANS 1200 GA Concrete (small works)

SANS 1200 AH General (Structural)

ISO 1461:1999 Hot dipped galvanizing





SABS 0100-2: 1992 The Structural use of concrete – Part 2:

Materials and execution of work.

Method Statement

A detailed method statement is required; setting out what quality control procedures will be

implemented with respect to:

Procedures, methods and equipment for the manufacturing, galvanizing and anti-

corrosion coating of the HSF and gates.

Procedures, methods and equipment to be used for the construction of the concrete

bases, plinths, etc.

Procedures, methods and equipment to be used for the installation of the HSF and

gates.

Security Fencing

The fence must conform to the following specifications

The minimum life span installed shall be a minimum of 10 years prior to any

maintenance being required.

The fence must be HSF with unobstructed views (Clearvu or similar approved)

All steel materials shall be of good commercial quality, galvanized steel.

All pipes shall be galvanized, one piece without joints. Furnish moisture proof caps for

all posts.

Zinc coating shall be smooth and essentially free from lumps, globs, or points.

Miscellaneous material shall be galvanized.

All HSF posts shall be set in 400 x 400 x 600mm deep footing with a minimum 25 MPa

(28-day compressive strength) concrete, 19 mm aggregate.

Requirements:

Certificate of compliance for materials and coatings

Shop drawing for HSF panels and gates

Quality control program shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review prior to

commencement of any work

Product Performance Guarantee Certificate (min 10 years)

Post foundations

All gate posts shall be set in 400 x 600 x 1200mm deep footing with a minimum 25 MPa (28-

day compressive strength) concrete, 19 mm aggregate.

Setting out





Contractor to set out fence line and gate positions in clearly identifiable markers and are to

verify the actual positions, sizes and lengths on site with the Project Manager prior to

manufacturing.

Gates

This Contract calls for the design, supply, fabrication and installation of four number clear

opening, double leaf swing HSF gates.

The gates must be manufactured of steel and match the HSF panel specification as listed

above. They must be to the full fence height.

Double hinges must be supplied. Allowance to be made for a lock plate and anchor rods for

securing in the closed position.

The gates must be galvanized and corrosion protected using the same method as for the

fence.

4.3.9 Water Reticulation

Scope of Work

This contract covers the construction of the civil works which include the:

1. Provision and installation of a water reticulation system which comprises

75mm diameter HDPE bulk water main

2. Provision and installation of isolation valves, at the connection to the new bulk

main

3. Connection in to the existing water main reticulation, including provision and

installation of isolation valves on the existing water main,

4. Provision for interim inspections and testing to final inspection and testing for

acceptance.

5. And any work arising out of or incidental to the above, or required of the Contractor

for the proper completion of the works in accordance with the true meaning and

intent of the contract document.


In so far as they can be applied, and where they are not inconsistent with the terms of this

Specification, the latest amendment of the relevant parts of SANS 1200 shall be regarded as

being embodied in this Specification. The following list of standards and specifications, not

necessarily comprehensive, are referred to in this part of the Specification:

SANS Specifications


SANS 1200 LB Bedding (Pipes)

SANS 1200 L Medium Pressure Pipelines





SANS 62 Steel Pipes – Part 1 and 2

SANS 966-1 Components of pressure pipe systems – part 1

SANS 1476 Fabricated flanged steel pipework

SANS 664 Cast Iron Gate valves for waterworks

SANS 32 Internal and/or external protective coatings for steel tubes

SANS 10129 Plastics tape wrapping of steel pipes

SANS 1117 Plastic wrappings for the protection of steel pipes

SANS 1123 Pipe flanges

SANS 226 Water taps (Metallic bodies)

SANS 1128 Firefighting equipment part1: Components of underground and above

ground hydrant systems

SANS 1200 LD Sewers

SANS 10214 The design, fabrication and inspection of articles for hot-dip galvanising

SANS 1700 Fasteners

SANS 121 Hot dip galvanising coating on fabricated iron and steel articles-

Specifications and test methods

MATERIALS

Pipes and Fittings

HDPE Pipes

The HDPE pipe shall be of 75mm diameter conforming to SANS 4427 PE 80.

Corrosion Protection

All exposed (i.e. not buried) valves, pipes and specials shall be prepared and protected as

follows:

1. The surface shall be prepared by abrasive blasting to SIS SA 2.5.

2. A twin pack ethyl base inorganic zinc silicate primer shall be applied within 24 hours of

the abrasive blasting, to a minimum dry film thickness of 75 microns.

3. A polymide cured high build epoxy undercoat shall be applied to a minimum of 60

microns dry film thickness.

4. A twin pack polyurethane enamel-finishing coat shall be applied to a minimum of 35

microns dry film thickness.





Step 3 and 4 shall be carried out after erection; any damage to the primed surface shall be

touched up with the zinc rich primer. The above shall be read in conjunction with the paint

manufacturers specifications for that particular paint.

For all buried steel and cast iron fittings clause 3.9.1 and clause 3.9.6 of SANS 1200 L shall

apply. All buried steel pipes shall be protected against corrosion in accordance to SANS 10129

by treatment with a compatible primer, packed with a bitumen- or tar-based mastic and

wrapped with an approved plastic tape to the requirements of SANS 1117

Valves

All valves shall be 80mm diameter Class 16, double-flanged cast iron gate valves, resilient

sealed with non-rising spindle, conforming to SANS 664. Gate valves shall be flanged to SANS

1123 Table 15 and shall be fitted with valve caps per SANS 664. The direction of closing shall

be anti-clockwise and clearly indicated on the valve body.

Taps shall comply with SANS 226 and be suitable for working pressures of up to 12 Bar

Flanges, Bolts and Nuts

Pipe flanges shall comply with SANS 1123 Table 15, drilled to suit mating flanges and shall be

installed square to the axis of the pipeline. Reaming of bolt holes to oversize dimensions in

order to make a particular piece fit will not be permitted. Flanges shall be hot-dip galvanized

to 100micron thickness, in compliance with SANS 10214.

Bolts, nuts and washers shall comply with ANSI B16.5 or the relevant sections of SANS 1700

as applicable, in sizes appropriate to the class of pipe or special and of grade 316 stainless

steel. The length of the bolt shall be such that, after the bolt has been tightened, the end of

the bolt projects a minimum of one thread above the nut and to a maximum of three full

threads.

Plant

Suitable Plant

The contractor shall ensure that only plant suitable for working in the confined limits of the site

of works and able to obtain the required specification of layer works is used.

On-site Storage

The Contractor shall be allocated a storage area on site and shall be responsible for all

materials stored on site until such time that the water main has been tested and handed over

to the main Contractor.

Pipes should be stored on level ground that is free from stones and sharp objects, and should

be so stacked (in a stack of cross formation) that the load on each pipe is uniform throughout

its length.

Socketed pipes should be stacked that the sockets are at different ends in each alternate layer

and protrude from the stack.





The height of the stack should not exceed 1m, and pipes of different diameters and class should

not be stacked together. Protective packing should not be removed until immediately before

use.

CONSTRUCTION

Pipe-Laying Personnel

The laying of pipes and ancillary fittings shall be performed only by a qualified person who is

registered by the local authority as an artisan in the plumbing, pipefitting or drain-laying trades,

or who is qualified by reason of having attended a course on pipe-laying of the Civil Engineering

Industry Training Board.

Preparation of Trench Bottom

All trench bottoms shall be prepared in accordance with SANS 1200 DB clause 5.5.

Cutting of Pipes

A fine-toothed hacksaw with mitre attachment set at 90º should be used to cut pipes to the

required length. Each cut end should be square and the outer edge evenly chamfered by means

of a rasp or file or specifically designed chamfering tool. The chamfer must not extend further

than half the wall thickness. Cut ends must be free from swarf, burrs, channels, and loose

material.

When the length of the pipe to be cut is determined, allowances must be made for the length

of any socket attached to the pipe and for a movement of at least 6mm in any rubber ring type

socket into which the pipe is to be inserted.

Pipe Laying and Jointing

Pipes that have been exposed for several hours to direct sunlight and have become hot should

not be laid until they have cooled to a temperature of approximately 25ºC.

Rubber ring jointing may be carried out in the trench. The pipeline should be laid directly on

to the prepared bedding in the trench, and bricks or other hard bodies must not be placed

under the pipeline for either temporary or permanent support. Rubber rings used must be

those supplied by the pipe or fitting manufacturer. All spigots must be checked to ensure that

they are free from burrs, and spigots, sockets and rings must be cleaned with a dry cloth. The

pipe end must be chamfered to an angle of approximately 15º and the depth of entry must be

marked on the spigot. This mark must be so positioned as to allow a 6mm clearance between

the spigot and the bottom of the socket. A thin film of a recommended lubricant, by the

manufacturer, should be applied to each rubber ring and each spigot.

Pipe-Jointing to Existing Main

Where HDPE pipe systems are to be connected to cast-iron pipes, cast iron flange adapters

manufactured specifically for the purpose must be used.

Depths and Cover





The minimum cover above pipes shall be 900mm where possible, with encasing as indicated

on the drawings to lengths with insufficient cover. At road crossings the minimum cover shall

be 1200mm. The depth shall be gradually increased as specified in SANS 1200 L clause 5.1.4.2

Connection to Existing Water Main

The proposed 75mm diameter HDPE water main shall be connected to the existing main water

supply main at the position as indicated on the drawings.

Where required, the existing pipe shall be cut to provide sufficient space for the proposed

fittings. Any damage to the existing mains or any existing specials shall be repaired to the

Contractors’ account if caused by negligence on the Contractors’ part

TOLERANCES

Tolerances shall be determined on the basis as stated in the relevant clauses of the applicable

sections of SANS 1200, relevant drawings and manufacturers’ specification as applicable. The

Contractor shall ensure that tolerances are complied with.

TESTING

Test Pressure

The test pressure shall be 16 Bar for all water pipes installed under this Contract.

4.4 Electrical Engineering

4.4.1 Executive Overview

The works entails providing lighting and power to the proposed existing facility for Tippler 3 at

the Port of Richards bay. This scope of work carried out by the electrical contractor shall cover,

but is not limited to the following:

Electrical Site Works

1. Dismantling and stripping of existing electrical equipment including lights, socket outlets,

conduit, distribution boards and associated electrical installation. The contractor shall

handover all equipment to the client (Transnet Port Terminal officials).

2. Additions and modifications to existing MHA.

3. Trenching/Saw cutting, backfilling and make good

4. Low voltage cabling and terminations

5. New low voltage surface and floor standing distribution boards.

6. Normal and emergency lighting

7. New power supply points

8. Design, supply and installation of Facility Earthing and Lightning Protection

4.4.2 Standard of Work, Equipment and Materials

1. The electrical installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition and

amendments of SANS 10142 – 1 Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises and any





additional requirements thereto, described in this specification.

2. The contractor shall provide a valid LV wireman’s license prior to commencement

3. All equipment and material used shall be of high quality and the work shall be of a high

standard of workmanship carried out by qualified staff under proper supervision by

experienced and competent officers.

4. All equipment and material shall comply with the relevant National or International

standard specification. Where equipment does not comply, it shall be submitted to the

Project Manager for approval prior to installation.

5. All installation, testing and terminations must be approved by the Transnet Group Capital

(TGC) Engineer prior to commissioning.

4.4.3 Service Conditions

The equipment shall be designed and rated for continuous operation under the following

conditions:-

4.4.3.1. Ambient/Environment Conditions:

All equipment offered shall be rated for continuous operation under the following

conditions:

a Altitude 0 to 1800m above Sea Level

b Ambient temperature -5°C to +40°C (daily average +35°C)

c Relative humidity As high as 96%

d Lightning conditions Severe, with a maximum lightning ground flash

density of 11 flashes per km² per annum

e Atmosphere Salt laden and corrosive industrial chemical and dust

laden nature. Frequent heavy rains driven by wind

reaching speeds of 100 Km/h and above

4.4.3.2. Electrical Conditions

1. The Low voltage system of supply will be three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz alternating current

with earthed neutral at a nominal voltage of 400 / 230V.

2. The voltage may vary within the range of 95% to 105% of the nominal and all equipment

installed shall be suitably rated.

3. All equipment shall be adequately rated for prospective fault level ratings.

4.4.3.3. Lightning conditions





All lightning protection equipment offered shall be rated for with stand the following

conditions:

a. Current: The peak lightning current and its rate of rise shall be regarded severe

when imax = 200kA.

b. Voltage: The highest cloud potential shall be assume to be more that 100MV,

where; Q = CV, where Q is assumed at 100C and C to be 10-7 F.

c. Lightning Flash Density: Severe, with a maximum lightning ground flash

density of 11 flashes per km2 per annum.

4.4.4 Particular specifications

The following publications and specifications (latest edition) shall apply:

CODES OF PRACTICE

SANS Specifications

SANS 10313 Code of Practice for Protection of Buildings against Lightning

SANS 10064: Code of Practice for the Preparation of Steel Flush for Coating

OHS Act, 1993 Occupational Health and Safety Act (Electrical Installation

regulations)

SANS 10142-1 Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises

Part 1: Low-voltage installations and including 3 000 kW

installed capacity

SANS 1019 The design and Installation of Earth Electrodes

SANS 1063:2010 Earth Rods, couplers and connections

SANS 62305-3 Protection against lightning

Physical damage to structures and life hazard

SANS 62305-4 Protection against lightning

Electrical and Electronic systems within structures

SANS 152 Low Voltage Air Break Switches, Connectors, Switch

Disconnectors, Fuse Combination Units

SANS 156 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

SANS 6069-2-1 Wall and Appliance Switches

SANS 60269: Low Voltage Fuses





SANS 61008-1 Earth Leakage Protection Units

SANS 14713-2 Hot Dip Zinc (galvanised) Coatings

SANS 1195: Busbar

SANS 1091 National Colour Standards for Paints

SANS 1180 Electrical Distribution Boards

SANS 1507 Electric Cables with Extruded Solid Dielectric Installation for

Fixed Installations

SANS 1274 Coatings Applied by the Powder-coating Process

SANS 1973 Low Voltage Switchgear

Transnet Projects Specifications (Latest Revisions)

TPD-001-EL&PSPEC Technical specification for the supply and installation of

electrical lighting and power in buildings other than dwelling

houses.

TPD-002-DBSPEC Technical specification for the design and manufacturing of

low voltage distribution boards.

TPD-003-CABLESPEC Technical specification for the installation of medium and low

voltage cables.

TPD-004-

EARTHINGSPEC

Technical specification for the Design supply and installation of

lightning protection and earthing for buildings and structures.

4.4.5 Method of Tendering

Tenderers shall submit their main offers in accordance with the requirements of this works

information and particular specifications. Deviations from the requirements of this works

information which are of a minor nature and do not depart materially, will be considered at the

discretion of the project manager. The acceptance of alternative offers will only be considered if

the main tender is submitted as part of the main tender document.

Where there are deviations from the specifications, alternative offers shall be clearly marked

"Alternative Offer No. _______".

All Technical Data Sheets shall be signed by the Tenderer and returned.





All documents forming part of the tender shall be firmly bound. No loose documents will be

considered.

Tenderers shall be required to be registered with Construction Industry Development Board.

Proof of registration and to be submitted together with all other tender documents.

Failure to comply with the above requirements may preclude a tender from consideration.

Tendering shall be in accordance with Tender Form included in the tender documents.

4.4.6 Works Information

This scope of work carried out by the electrical Contractor shall cover, but not limited to the following:

4.4.6.1. ELECTRICAL WORKS

a. Additions and modifications to existing Substation B

o Supply and installation of new 630A, 3 Pole, 70kA, Moulded Case Low Voltage

circuit breaker in existing terminal substation low voltage panel as per specification

TPD- TPD-001-EL&PSPEC, TPD-002-DBSPEC and drawing no:4223745-2-002-E-

LA-0004-01

b. Cable route laying shall be as follows;

o Prior to work commencement (i.e. cable terminations and installations) the

contractor shall first liaise with the Transnet Port Terminals (TPT) officials to apply

for formal occupation to avoid unplanned operational/ plant downtime.

o The new MHA kiosk shall be fed from the local LV distribution spare panel in

substation B.

o Prior to work commencement the contractor shall make sure that the existing

sleeves from substation B routed under the Norman road, conveyor to their

endpoint (see drawing no. 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0004-01) are clean (blow out any

dust or product) and they won’t cause any obstructions when installing a cable.

o A 185 mm2 4 core ECC cable will be terminated from an existing Sub B low voltage

spare panel, and it will be routed across and under the Norman Road and also

under the conveyor gallery by existing sleeves.

o From the existing sleeves end point onwards the 185mm2 4 core ECC cable will

be buried directly underground with a minimum depth of 800mm as specified on

a drawing no. 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0004-01) and get terminated on the new

MHA kiosk.

o The contractor shall perform a swing-over of circuit breakers from the existing

MHA kiosk to the new MHA kiosk. The contractor shall avoid unplanned

operational/ downtime when performing a swing-over.





o From the new MHA kiosk, there will be 2 times outgoing cables, namely 70 mm2

4 core ECC cable to mess and ablution facility and the other which has been sized

at 50mm2 4 core ECC going to workshop facility. See drawing no. 4223745-2-

002E-LA-0004-01

o Lastly both cables going to mess and ablution, and workshop respectively shall be

installed in existing pipe and chamber with the later feeding local DB-A and the

early feeding local DB-B. For detailed in-situ cable layout details and distances

refer to drawing: 4223745-2-002E-LA-0004-01

c. Trenching/Saw cutting, backfilling and make good

The works for the cable ducts include the following:

o Excavation, bedding and backfill for cable ducts.

o Supply and lay PVC pipes.

o And any other work arising out of or incidental to the above, or required of the

Contractor for the proper completion of the works.

d. Low Voltage Cabling

o The Contractor shall supply and install low voltage cabling from the existing

substation B to the new MHA kiosk as indicated on drawing: 4223745-2-002-E-

LA-0004-01

o The low voltage cabling shall be installed according to specification TPD-003-

CABLESPEC: “Technical specification for the installation of medium and low

voltage cables”.

o Sleeve Pipes, Draw Boxes and Wire ways

o The sleeve pipes for Low Voltage cables shall be installed at least 800mm below

ground level outside the building structures. As indicated on drawing no. 4223745-

2-002-E-LA-0004-01

o Slow bends shall be used where the sleeve pipes enter the buildings or change of

direction

e. New Low Voltage MHA Kiosk

o The kiosk shall be designed and constructed according to drawing 4223745-2-

002-E-LA-0004-01 and specification no. TPD-002-DBSPEC; “The specification for

the design and manufacturing of low voltage distribution boards”.

o The enclosure shall be floor standing outdoor type (IP65) type manufactured from

minimum 1.6.mm 3cr12 and shall be outdoor type (IP65).





o The enclosures shall be supplied with hinged doors and epoxy powder coated (80

microns) in colours specified.

o The power supply cables to the electrical the new MHA kiosk will be supplied and

terminated by the electrical Contractor.

o Termination to the kiosk shall be of non-corrosive high quality type.

o kiosk should have the following signage:

- Name

- Fed From …. With ......mm² 4 Core PVC Insulated PVC bedded SWA

sheathed 600/1000V copper cable (cable size to be indicated and length)

- -Voltage

- -Danger Sign (lightning Bolt)

f. New Low Voltage Distribution Boards

o New Low Voltage Distribution Boards The distribution board shall be designed and

constructed according to drawing 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0005-01 and specification

no. TPD-002-DBSPEC; “The specification for the design and manufacturing of low

voltage distribution boards”.

o The enclosure shall be recessed mounted indoor type (IP42) type manufactured

from minimum 1.6.mm, 3cr12 and shall be outdoor type (IP65).

o The enclosures shall be supplied with hinged doors and epoxy powder coated (40

microns) in colours specified.

o The power supply cables to the electrical distributions board will be supplied and

terminated by the electrical Contractor.

o Termination to the Distribution boards shall be of non-corrosive high quality type.

o Distribution boards should have the following signage:

- Name

- Voltage Rating

- Current Rating

- Fault level and time

- IP Rating





- Fed From …. With ......mm² 4 Core PVC Insulated PVC bedded SWA sheathed

600/1000V copper cable (cable size to be indicated and length)

- Voltage

- Danger Sign (lightning Bolt)

g. Facility Lighting

Workshop Lighting

o The contractor shall dismantle all the existing fittings/lumens and hand them

over to the client (Transnet Port Terminals Officials).

o The Contractor shall supply and install new energy saving luminaires as

indicated on drawing: 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0001-01 and 4223745-2-002-E-LA-

0002-01 as per SANS 10142-1.

o The contractor shall supply and install the unistrut using the threaded rods. The

contractor shall surface mount the new luminaires on the unistrut. All electrical

works pertaining to the electrical lighting should be done in accordance with the

referenced drawing no. 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0001-01 and 4223745-2-002-E-

LA-0002-01. If clarity is needed in any regard the electrical engineer should be

contacted prior to any commencement of work.

o The luminaires shall be wired with cables or wires with a minimum cross

sectional area of 2.5mm2 PVC cable

Mess and ablution lighting

o The contractor shall dismantle all the existing luminaires in the mess and

ablution facility, and hand them over to the client (Transnet Port Terminals

Officials)



0002-01 as per SANS 10142-1.

o The contractor shall surface mount the new on the mess and ablution.

o All electrical works pertaining to the electrical lighting should be done in

accordance with the referenced drawing and specifications, if clarity is needed in

any regard the electrical engineer should be contacted prior to any

commencement of work

Office Lighting


ablution, and hand them over to the client (Transnet Port Terminals Officials).







0002-01 as per SANS 10142-1.

o The contractor shall recess the new luminaires in to the ceiling. For details see

drawing no. 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0001-01 and 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0002-01.





Exterior lighting


ablution, and hand them over to the client (Transnet Port Terminals Officials).



0002-01 as per SANS 10142-1.

o The contractor shall recess the new luminaires in to the ceiling. For details see

drawing no. 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0001-01 and 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0002-01.

All electrical works pertaining to the electrical lighting should be done in




o The contractor shall supply, deliver and install 16A, 6kA photocell (for switching

the pole mast lighting) as per drawing no: 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0001-01 and

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0002-01

o The Contractor shall supply and install new energy saving luminaires, for

heights and distances are indicated on drawing: 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0001-01

and 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0002-01 as per SANS 10142-1.





h. New Power supply points

o The contractor shall dismantle all the existing power supply sockets and hand

them over to the client (Transnet Port Terminals Officials)

o The contractor shall supply and install Power points as per TPD-001-

EL&PSPEC:Technical specification for the supply and installation of electrical

lighting and power in buildings other than dwelling houses, SANS 10142-1 and as

per drawing: 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0001-01 and 4223745-2-002-E-LA-0003-01





o The contractor shall install the welding plugs on the workshop as indicated on

drawing no. 4223745-2-001-E-LA-0001-01

o The must be at least two (2) dedicated power socket outlets for every office

working station, four (4) dedicated socket outlets for boardrooms and two (2)

dedicated socket outlets for areas where there will be computers and computer

associated equipment.

o The contractor shall ensure that the socket outlet are mounted on the electrical

services part of the power skirting and shall comply with the requirements

mentioned above.

i. Design, Supply and Installation of the Facility Earthing and Lightning Protection

o Design, Supply and Installation of the Facility Earthing and Lightning Protection

o The contractor shall supply and install a 35mm2 aluminium bare conductor all

around the roof of the MHA facility for protection against lightning (Physical

damage to structure and life hazard).

o The Contractor shall design, supply and install earthing and lightning protection

equipment to the facility in accordance to specification no. TPD-004-

EARTHINGSPEC; “Transnet Group Projects Specification for lightning protection

and earthing”. This component of work shall be undertaken by a specialist

earthing Contractor. The installation of lightning protection system shall comprise

of the following components

- Test Joints

The Contractor shall supply and install Bolted test joints for the purpose of

testing the earth electrode resistance.

- The test joints shall be a bolt and nut of M25 minimum size.

The bolt and nuts assembly of the test joint shall be constructed from

stainless steel.

- The Contractor shall supply and install signage at each test point as detailed

in attached drawing.

- Earth Electrodes

- Earth electrodes and couples shall be manufactured from copper in

accordance to SABS 1099.

The earth continuity conductor coupled to the earth electrode and the test

joint shall be insulated copper stranded conductor, with a minimum cross

sectional area that complies with SANS 10313 and SANS 10142.





- Earth electrodes shall be installed not less than 500mm away from the

buildings and at a depth of not less than 500mm below finished ground level.

j. Testing, Commissioning and Handover

o The contractor is required to test the installation in the presence of the Employer

and issue compliance certificates for lightning protection systems (SANS 10313)

for all work done to the satisfaction of the Employer.

o Contractor shall submit Compliance Certificate for all the complete electrical

installation in accordance to SANS 10142-1.

o The tenderer shall to be registered and listed with South African Bureau of

Standards and the listing number shall be included in the above mentioned

compliance certificate..

k. Compliance Certificate

o The contractor is required to test the installation in the presence of the Employer

and issue compliance certificates for lightning protection systems (SANS 10313)

for all work done to the satisfaction of the Employer.

o Contractor shall submit Compliance Certificate for all the complete electrical

installation in accordance to SANS 10142-1.

o The tenderer shall to be registered and listed with South African Bureau of

Standards and the listing number shall be included in the above mentioned

compliance certificate.





Summary of Kiosk is as follows:

Description

Mounting Arrangement As specified

Material 3CR12

IP Rating As specified

Colour Orange

Doors Hinged doors

Panel Catches Square Key

Door Catches Turncatch

Door Hinges As per specification

Depth / Tray Size As per manufacture’s discretion

Main Labels As per Line Diagrams and Drawings Number – 4223745-2-002-E-LA-

0004-01

Circuit Breaker Type As per Line Diagrams and Drawings Number – 4223745-2-002-E-LA-

0004-01

Fault Level As per Line Diagrams and Drawings Number – 4223745-2-002-E-LA-

0004-01

Cascading Label Yes

Cable Entry Bottom

Cable Exit Bottom

Test Certificates for Panel / DB Required as per annexure

SANS 10142 Panel/Distribution

board compliance certificate

Required





Summary of Distribution Board is as follows:

Description

Mounting Arrangement As specified

Material 3CR12

IP Rating As specified

Colour Orange

Doors Hinged doors

Panel Catches Square Key

Door Catches Turncatch

Door Hinges As per specification

Depth / Tray Size As per manufacture’s discretion

Main Labels As per Line Diagrams and Drawings Number – 4223745-2-002-E-LA-

0005-01

Circuit Breaker Type As per Line Diagrams and Drawings Number – 4223745-2-002-E-LA-

0005-01

Fault Level As per Line Diagrams and Drawings Number – 4223745-2-002-E-LA-

0005-01

Cascading Label Yes

Cable Entry Bottom

Cable Exit Bottom/Top

Test Certificates for Panel / DB Required as per annexure

SANS 10142 Panel/Distribution

board compliance certificate

Required





4.5 Mechanical Engineering (HVAC, Water Reticulation and Fire Protection)

4.5.1 General Requirements

a) For the purposes of technical decision making in terms of this contract the following

processes shall apply:

The Contractor shall submit an FEQ in accordance with the NEC3 FEQ process to the

Project Manager and NEC Supervisor for the Engineers action and attention.

The responsibility for the decision making resides with the Engineer and shall be

communicated in terms of contractual instruction by the Project Manager and/or NEC

Supervisor.

Under no circumstances shall technical decisions be taken without the approval of the

responsible TCP engineer. Any reference hereinafter to “Engineer” or “acceptance by

Engineer” shall be through the above communication protocol.

b) The works information gives an overview of the work to be done for the purposes of tender

pricing. The tenderer shall allow time for shop drawings in the schedule.

c) This installation shall be suitable in all respects for operation under the atmospheric

conditions and electricity supply as outlined in the schedules. The responsibility is on the

tenderer to ascertain any other local conditions or peculiarities which might affect the

working of the plant, and no allowance in price or standards of materials or workmanship

shall be made for any ignorance on the part of the tenderer in this respect.

d) All materials and workmanship supplied under this contract shall be of the highest quality.

Installation work shall be done in accordance with the best modern engineering practice.

The Engineer shall have the right to reject and demand satisfactory replacement at the

Contractor's cost, or any part of it, which in his opinion, does not conform to the highest

standards of material and workmanship. The equipment shall be suitable for continuous

duty operation, and it is essential that all installations shall be capable of operating

continuously and satisfactorily over such periods.

e) The tenderers shall submit the completed Appendix 1 as part of the documents listed in

the returnable schedule. Failure to submit the documents will be reason for disqualification

form the tender bid.

4.5.2 Scope Of Work

a) This specification covers the supply, delivery, installation and commissioning, testing, and

handing over in complete working order ready for immediate use and subsequent

maintenance as per the NEC contract.

b) Principal Items of work include the supply, delivery, installation and commissioning of:

Air Conditioning

Ventilation





Heat Pumps

Insulated hot water tanks with electrical backup elements

Hot and cold water reticulation

Fire protection

Electrical work including wiring between switchboards, unit mounted sensors, control

devices, etc. and wiring between controllers and remote sensors, remote set point

adjusters, etc.

Painting and corrosion protection of equipment.

Commissioning and testing of the installations herein specified.

Maintenance and guarantee for twelve (12) months after “practical completion” date

of the completed installation, or sections thereof. This is the date confirmed in writing

by the Project Manager.

Training of the Employer’s maintenance staff in the operation and maintenance of the

installations during the contractual twelve (12) month maintenance and guarantee

period.

Domestic water storage and all necessary accessories

Removal of the existing air-conditioning and ventilation equipment

Removal of the existing firefighting equipment

4.5.3 Visit To Site

a) Tenderers must acquaint themselves with local site conditions such as access area

available on site, type of ground, space available for on-site fabrication, storage, transport,

loading and unloading facilities, scaffolding, tackles and tools needed, as no claims by the

Contractor, which may arise from ignorance of the site conditions, shall be considered.

4.5.4 Materials And Workmanship

a) The contract works shall be executed in accordance with the specified standards and level

of workmanship, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

b) All materials shall be of the quality specified and the Contractor shall, upon request of the

Engineer, furnish him with proof to his satisfaction that the materials are of the specified

quality. The Engineer is not responsible for Quality Assurance on behalf of the Contractor

but shall be entitled to condemn unsatisfactory work.

c) All materials and equipment used for the installations shall be new and undamaged. The

Contractor shall, if requested by the Engineer, provide samples of material and equipment

for approval. If judged necessary by the Engineer, such samples may only be returned





after the completion of the installation, in order to ensure that the quality of the installed

product is the same as that of the approved sample

d) Material for which an SABS specification exists, shall be in accordance with such a

specification, and shall bear the SABS mark.

e) For fire protection equipment, all equipment used shall originate from suppliers which have

been certified in accordance with SABS ISO 9001 (ISO 9001) or SABS ISO 9002 (ISO 9002)

for Quality assurance. Copies of certificates of approval shall be provided by the tenderers

with their tenders. Equipment designed to BS 5446, Fire systems for residential premises,

or similar other standards, are not acceptable.

4.5.5 Design And Drawings

a) Design Responsibilities

The Engineer is responsible for the system design. In the execution of the design, the

Contractor is responsible to ensure that:

o Equipment is positioned and installed in such a way as to ensure proper access for

service and maintenance. That all control panels, wiring and components of the

electrical installation forming part of this sub-contract comply with all application

safety codes standards and regulations.

o In addition to abovementioned, the contractor may comment on aspects of the

design with a view to improvement or cost saving, but must draw to the attention

of the Engineer any aspect of the design which in his view is not appropriate. The

final decision and responsibility rests with the Engineer.

o The Contractor shall comply with all acts of parliament and all regulations and by-

laws of local or other authorities having jurisdiction regarding the execution of the

works. The Contractor shall not be responsible for non-Compliance where this

results from the system Design.

o Specific aspects of equipment selection which must be carried out by the

Contractor together with the Suppliers of such equipment in order to achieve the

design system performance are listed below.

b) Equipment Supports

The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of supports, stands, hangers

suspended platforms for machinery, tanks or other equipment. Where such elements

involve major structural design which is beyond the capability of the Contractor than

these shall be referred to a suitably qualified person for design.

c) Workshop Drawings

Preparation of complete shop drawings is the responsibility of the Contractor. The

shop drawings must be prepared on the basis of:





o The latest Architect's, Structural Engineer's and Electrical Engineer's drawings

regarding co-ordination and layout.

o Actual equipment offered in the Tender and accepted by the TCP Engineer. No

work may be put in hand before the relevant shop drawings have been reviewed

by the TCP Engineer for NEC3 acceptance. The TCP Engineer's responsibility in

this regard is limited to checking conformance with the works information and co-

ordination with other disciplines where necessary. This does not absolve the

Contractor of any responsibility in terms of the Subcontract or for errors or

omissions in the shop drawings.

o The Contractor shall include time in the schedule for approval of shop drawings

and equipment by the TCP Engineer.

d) Builders Work Drawings

Openings

The Contractor shall show all openings and other finishes on layout drawings in such

a way as to constitute a clear instruction to others.

e) Equipment Submittals

Before ordering, the following equipment shall be submitted to the TCP Engineer for

acceptance:

o Air Conditioning Equipment

o Heat Pumps

o Tanks

o Pumps

o Air and water filtration equipment

f) Noise and Attenuation

In respect of noise control and attenuation the Contractor shall be responsible for the

supply and installation of all equipment as per the relevant standards and

specifications, including sound attenuators, spring mounts, mass bases, flexible

connections etc., to limit undesirable noise generation and transmission. Correct

selection of the items listed below shall be the responsibility of the Contractor together

with the Specialist Supplier:

o Spring Mounts

o Vibration Isolating pads

o Spring Hangers and Supports for Pipes





o Vibration Isolating Hangers and Supports for Pipes

o Flexible connections

The Contractor shall also be responsible to ensure that where ducts and pipes pass

through concrete, brick or other structural members and finishes. This is achieved

without transmission of noise and vibration

4.5.6 Responsibilities Of The Contractor

a) Sub-Contractors

Any work which Tenderers intend subcontracting must be listed in the Tender showing

the names of intended Contractor. If these are deemed suitable then no deviation

will be permitted without the authorization of the TCP Engineer.

b) Ordering of Equipment and Materials

The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the project programme is adhered

to and that no delays are caused by late deliveries of equipment and materials. All

other activities which must proceed placing of orders must be taken into account

when the Contractor schedules his activities.

c) Storage of Materials and Equipment

The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper storage of all materials and

equipment on site to ensure protection against the elements, damage by impact, dirt,

builder’s rubble dust theft etc.

d) Protection of the Works

The Contractor shall programme his work to avoid damage by other Trades and shall

be responsible for protection of the works against such damage until handover to the

Client.

e) Accessibility

The Contractor shall plan suitable accessibility for thermometers, gauges, controls,

dampers and other devices which require reading adjustment, inspection, repair

removal or replacement.

f) Weather Proofing

All outdoor equipment shall be weatherproof and corrosion resistant including minor

items such as screws fixers, brackets, etc.

The IP rating for waterproofing must be approved by the Electrical Engineer from

Transnet Capital projects.

4.5.7 Reference Specification And Standards





a) The latest revision of any Specification referred to in this specification, shall be applicable.

b) Where a specification or standard is not specifically referred to, it shall be assumed that

the relevant SANS, ISO, BSS, DIN or equivalent American standard, listed in order of

preference shall apply.

c) The SI (“Le Systeme International d’ Unites”) – Metric System of Units shall apply. Refer

to SANS – M33A: The International Metric System: Guide to the use of the SI in South

Africa.

d) The entire new installation shall be carried out in accordance with the following standards:

SANS Specifications

SANS 10400 The Application of the National Building Regulations

SANS 347:2012 Categorisation and Conformity Assessment Criteria for all Pressure

Equipment

SANS 62 Steel pipes - Part 1 and 2

SANS 10142 Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises

SANS 1424 Filters for use in Air-conditioning and General Ventilation

Other Specifications

API 5L Welded and Seamless pipe

ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware

Government Notice Pressure Equipment Regulations, 2009

The General Electrical Specification for the Provincial

Administration of the Republic of South Africa Part 2E

The Municipal Fire Regulations.

The Municipal by laws and any special requirements of the Supply

Activities of the area or district concerned.

The Occupational Health and Safety Act No 85 of 1993





Transnet Projects Specifications (Latest Revisions)

EEAM-Q-006 Structural steelwork

EEAM-Q-008 Corrosion protection

EEAM-Q-009 Quality management

EEAM-Q-013 Commissioning and handover

EEAM-Q-028 M Specific requirements and conditions (mechanical)

4.5.8 Design Conditions

a) The following design conditions were used in designing the systems for this project:

External Conditions:

o Summer ambient : 30 ˚C Dry Bulb – 22.5 ˚C Wet bulb

o Winter ambient : 13 ˚C Dry Bulb – 10 ˚C Wet Bulb

Internal Conditions:

o Summer : 22.5 ˚C Dry bulb – 50 % Relative Humidity

o Winter : 23 ˚C Dry bulb – Humidity not controlled

Design Conditions:

o Lighting load : 20.66 W/m2

o Glass shade coefficient : 0.94

o Ventilation : as per SANS 10400

o U’ values – Glass (all facades) : 3.66 watt/m2/˚C

o Outside walls (all facades) : 1.28 watt/m2/˚C

o Partitions : 1.256 watt/m2/˚C

o Roof : 1.9 watt/m2/˚C

b) The subcontractor shall test, commission and adjust the air-condition and ventilation

installations so that they will maintain the inside design conditions specified above, subject

to the capacity limits hereinafter specified during hours of operation

c) Noise levels

Maximum noise levels caused by the operation of the air-conditioning system and

ventilation shall comply with the OHS Act 85 of 1993 and all other regulations.





The specified noise levels shall be those that read at a distance of not more than 2

metres from any air outlet, return air grille or opening.

4.5.9 Technical Requirements

a) Erection of Equipment

The Contractor shall allow for a complete installation, including the provision of mobile

cranes, air compressors, lifting tackle, measuring equipment, precision levels, and all

other special or regular tools and equipment that may be needed to complete the

entire installation in accordance with the specification.

The Contractor will be responsible for any damage caused to buildings, equipment,

etc. during the course of the erection of the equipment.

b) Equipment Plinths

Plinths as specified hereunder shall not be confused with any form of inertia or anti-

vibration base.

Plinths shall be provided for all floor standing mechanical equipment. Plinths cast on

concrete surfaces shall protrude at least 100mm above floor levels and depending on

the position of the vibration mountings.

Plinths for equipment which do not need inertia bases or plinths for inertia bases with

recessed vibration mountings shall be of the same size as the equipment or bases

mounted on top.

The Plinths shall be designed to be able to support the weight of the equipment being

fixed on them and the surface shall be completely horizontal and even.

c) Holding Down Bolts and Bolts for Equipment

The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of all necessary holding down bolts

for the machines supplied by him. He shall also supply all bolts necessary for

assembling all the equipment supplied by him.

Holding down bolts shall preferably be cast into concrete bases when the bases are

being cast. All bolts shall, in this instance, be provided with hot dip zinc galvanised

sheet metal sleeves approximately three times the diameter of the bolt, and projecting

a minimum of four-bolt diameters below the surface of the concrete. This sleeve must

be kept free of concrete until the final grouting takes place.





Where galvanised bolts are called for, they shall be fully galvanised all over. No re-

cutting of threads will be permitted after galvanising. All nuts must run freely on the

threads.

d) Bed Plates

All bedplates shall be of fabricated hot dip zinc galvanised mild steel with surfaces on

which the pumps, motors, heat exchangers etc. are mounted.

All bedplates shall be stress relieved after welding but before machining. Each

bedplate shall be provided with approximately eight horizontal jacking screws with

locknuts for each unit mounted thereon to assist in aligning the pumps and motors,

etc.

It will not be necessary to dowel equipment in place, provided the jacking screws

specified above are fixed and locked.

e) Packing of Equipment

All base plates and steel work shall be suitably packed with steel packs to ensure that

they are true to level, line and grade. The thickness of packing shall be such as to

allow for not less than 25mm, and not more than 50mm of grout under all base plates

or steel work. Packings shall be of suitable size to support the base plates and one

pack must be situated immediately on each side of each holding down bolt as well as

in any position as may be required in order to adequately support the base plates and

its superimposed load.

All packs shall be as near as possible to the exact height in one thick piece. Thinner

shims may be used for final adjustments, but large piles of thin shims will not be

accepted. All packs must be of parallel shims. Taper packs or wedges will not be

accepted. Packs must be bedded on a flat and smooth area on the surface of the

concrete foundation. Packs resting on rough concrete will be rejected.

After final levelling and lining up, it is essential that all packs are tight. Loose packs

will be rejected.

No shims will be permitted between a machine base and plate and the machine's

feet except as mentioned hereinafter.

f) Alignment of Equipment

Bedplates:

Where equipment is delivered completely assembled on a bedplate, these items of

equipment shall be removed from the bedplate prior to installation. The bedplates

shall first be installed, levelled, lined up and packed to ensure that there is no twist

or distortion therein. The machines shall then be installed on their bedplates and the

final alignment carefully checked and adjusted until it is completely level.





Minor corrections to the alignment of machines may be carried out using thin shims

between the machinery feet and the machined surface of the bedplate. This applies

particularly to electric motors.

Couplings:

The alignment of all couplings must be carefully checked for both the parallelism and

eccentricity of their shafts. Alignment must be carried out to the manufacturer’s

tolerances.

In any event, a misalignment of more than 0,05mm will not be permitted for either

parallel or eccentric misalignment as measured at the periphery of the couplings. It

is essential that a dial micrometer is used to set the final alignment, which must be

witnessed by the Project Manager’s Representative.

g) Assembly of Components

It is essential that all mating components such as couplings, taper lock bushes,

machined faces, etc., be thoroughly cleaned with a suitable solvent before assembly.

All surfaces must be free from burrs or irregularities, which may prevent the correct

mating of the surfaces.

A molybdenum-disulphide lubricant similar or equivalent to Mobil-grease Super shall

be used on the threads of all bolts and between the mating surfaces of all parts closely

fitted together, such as shafts and couplings, keys and base plates. PTFE tape shall

be used in all screwed pipe connections.

h) Welding

Welding shall be carried out in accordance with the current edition of SANS 10044

where applicable.

All welded filler or butt joints shall be free from porosity, cavities and entrapped slag.

The joints in the weld run, where welding has been recommended, shall be as smooth

as possible and shall show no pronounced hump or crater in the weld surface.

The profile of the weld shall be uniform, of approximately equal leg length and free

from overlap at the toe of the weld. Unless otherwise specified the surface shall be

either flat or slightly convex in the case of fillet welds and with reinforcement of not

more than 3mm in the case of butt welds. The weld face shall be uniform in

appearance throughout its length.

Filler metal electrodes shall be of an approved type for the material being used and

shall be kept in a dry condition. All electrodes shall conform to the latest edition of

SANS 2560.





Only welders in possession of a valid approved competence certificate shall be

employed.

All welds must show proper fusion.

i) Galvanising

All fabricated mild steel sections, pipework, fixtures and fittings shall be hot dip zinc

galvanised to comply with SANS 62 and SANS 1182:2013 and shall be of minimum

mean coating thickness 170μm.

Items to be galvanised shall be entirely pre-fabricated and then dismantled in sections

for galvanising. No cutting of threads or welding will be accepted after galvanising.

Mild steel plate and sections shall be of good commercial quality, or higher grades,

best suited for galvanising. The materials shall be free from slag or coarse laminations,

fine fissures and rolled-in impurities.

Welding flux shall be chipped away and all welds wire brushed before galvanising.

The surface to be galvanised shall be free from paint, oil, grease and similar

impurities.

All exposed surfaces including welds shall be thoroughly sand blasted prior to

galvanising.

The Project Manager reserves the right to inspect all steel components before

galvanising, and shall have the right to reject or ask for remedial treatment of any

material which is considered to be unsuitable. This applies particularly to welds.

The hot dip galvanizing bath shall primarily contain molten zinc. The total of the other

elements (as identified in ISO 752, EN 1179 or EN 13283, excluding tin and iron) in

the molten zinc shall not exceed 1,5% by mass.

The significant surface(s) of all the hot dip galvanized article(s), when first examined

by normal or corrected vision from a distance of not less than 1 m, shall be free from

nodules, blisters (i.e. raised areas without solid metal beneath), roughness and sharp

points (if either can cause injury) and uncoated areas. Flux residues shall not be

permitted. Lumps and zinc ash shall not be permitted where they might affect the

intended use of the hot dip galvanized article or its corrosion resistance requirement.

Articles that fail visual inspection of the galvanising shall be renovated according to

the criteria mentioned in clause 6.3 of SANS 121:2011

j) Vibration Control

Vibration Isolation





Proper provisions shall be made in the foundations and mountings of all equipment

capable of transmitting vibration forces to its environment, whether local or remote,

(as is the case with pipes) for vibration isolation.

Selection of vibration isolation equipment and in particular, mountings for equipment

and machines, shall be done with due regard to the forcing frequency of the driven

machinery and the mounted natural resonant frequency of the machine.

In the case of installation of equipment on upper floors, suspended floors, roofs etc.

it is of prime importance that floor stiffness, floor deflection and natural frequency of

the floor be taken in to consideration to ensure that resonant conditions cannot occur.

Driven machinery and isolator deflections shall be carefully selected in these

applications.

Should added mass inertia blocks be required to comply with these vibration isolation

requirements, proper provision shall be made at tender stage for the provision of

such.

Damping

Where static deflections in excess of 8mm are indicated, steel springs shall be

employed incorporating acoustic sound pads in series with the spring.

The horizontal stiffness of the springs shall not exceed that in the vertical, in particular

for systems mounted at vertical frequencies below 5Hz.

Low frequency mounts shall incorporate rubber snubbers to accommodate extreme

horizontal or vertical motions such as can occur near resonance during start up.

The snubbers shall however not be relied upon to provide the necessary horizontal

stability of the machine in normal operational conditions. Spring layouts and inertia

blocks shall be employed to avoid this situation.

For static deflections below 8mm, rubber in sheer mounts may be used provided the

frequency is above 6Hz.

For small static deflections less than 4mm and particularly for high-speed machines

and general acoustic isolation, ribbed rubber neoprene composite pads may be

employed subject to the specified requirements.

Sufficient stability and damping shall be incorporated in the mountings to minimise

the movement of the machine during start up or changes in the operating conditions.

The selection of mounts shall take proper cognisance of unequal distribution of the

mounting weight of equipment and rotational and/or pressure forces acting thereon.

k) Painting

The paint colour scheme shall comply fully with the SANS 10140 requirements.

All steel surfaces that need to be painted shall be prepared as per SANS 8501-3 and

SANS 10322.





All exposed portions of hot water tanks, heat exchangers, cylinders, etc. shall be

properly cleaned, primed and painted two coats of heat resistant paint.

All other exposed metal parts such as pumps, belt guards, all piping, pipe lagging,

fittings, dampers, fans, coils, motors

Packaged units, control panels, steelwork, exposed ducts and lagging, expansion

tanks, make-up tanks, cooling tower, unit shelters, etc. shall be cleaned, primed,

undercoated and finished in a high quality gloss paint of approved colour.

All external equipment exposed to the weather must be cleaned, primed and painted

with two coats of epoxy paint.

The lagged surface of calorifiers, headers and pipes shall be primed, undercoated and

finished in a high quality gross of approved colour. Unlagged steam piping shall be

painted with heat resistant paint.

Machinery, Structural Steelwork Colours:

Checker plates, Pipe supports, Handrails, Base plates Black

Body portions of machines Olive Green

All machinery external to the building (except piping. valves and

fittings)

Dove Grey

All moving parts which are visible when operating In-side surfaces

of all machine guards, belt guards etc.

Orange

All handles, levers, handwheel centres adjustment knobs, etc. Yellow

All lagging on boilers, calo-rifiers, tanks, cylinders etc. except on

piping and pump sets and ducting)

Aluminium

Electrical distribution boards (except where transparent covers are

used)

Light Grey

Control panels and Indicator panels, Water treatment plant (except

on piping), Air Conditioning plant (except on piping)

Light Blue

All points which constitute a physical hazard, e.g. (stay-wires, low

pipes, access areas)

Yellow and

Black

Doorways, Cross Hatch, Drainage piping Black

Piping, Pumps, Valves, Fittings, etc.





o All unlagged black piping, holder bolts, supports anchors fittings, etc. shall be

painted in accordance with British Standard Specification No. BS 1710.

o Except where otherwise specified all piping on surfaces shall be painted with a

primer, an undercoat and a finishing coat in approved high quality gloss paint to

the colour indicated in the schedule. This also applies to all holder bolts, supports,

anchors, fittings and valves.

o Pump sets, valves, fittings, etc. shall be painted the same basic colour as the

pipelines, except those of firefighting services, which shall be painted red.

o Were bands are painted for identification purposes over a base colour, the length

of the band shall be same as the final pipe diameter, but not less than 100 mm.

Where three strips are required per band, each strip shall be one third of the final

pipe diameter but not less than 35 mm.

o The direction of flow shall be indicated with a 25 x 100 mm long black arrow at

intervals of approximately 4 m and at valves and junctions. Flow lines shall be

marked with an F and return lines with an R at each arrow.

o Where outlets require identification the colour identification shall take the form of

coloured centre pieces on hand wheels or cocks, and/or other suitable approved

marking on the neck of the outlet fittings as specified. The colour shall primarily

be that of the pipe colour and where banding is used, the colour shall be that of

the band and stroke.

o All radiators, pipes, fittings etc. in finished areas such as wards, offices, passages,

etc. shall be cleaned, primed, undercoated and finished in a high gloss paint to

match the existing finish.

o Identification Colours:

Basic Pipe Colour Banding Colour

Drinking Water Brilliant Green (D10) Cornflower (F29)

Condenser Water Brilliant Green (D10) White

Boiler Feed Water Brilliant Green (D10) Crimson(A03)/white/crimson(A03)

Boiler Condensate Brilliant Green (D10) Crimson(A03)/Emerald Green(A14)

Chilled Water lines Brilliant Green (D10) White/Emerald Green(A14)

Domestic Hot Water Brilliant Green (D10) Crimson(A03)/Cornflower(F29)

Fire Fighting Mains Signal Red (A11)





4.5.10 Mechanical Equipment

The mechanical equipment designed, supplied and installed by the Contractor shall comply

with the requirements set out in this document as well as all relevant SANS requirements.

The water line providing the main supply to the MHA Temporary Facilities shall be metered

in order to simplify the control and monitoring of the water usage

a) Type Air-conditioning Units

Two Daiken VRV Condenser units (or equal approved) one servicing mess room with

four ceiling cassette and the other servicing boardroom, four close offices, open office.

The units shall be of a specification equal or similar accepted to that provided in

Appendix 1.

It is essential that the acoustical characteristics of the units are considered during

selection and that they are installed to ensure compliance with the noise criteria laid

down. The sound pressure level from these machines shall be within the set criteria

throughout the frequency range.

The indoor fan coil unit shall be ceiling cassette mounted or above ceiling ducted type.

Above ceiling units shall be properly insulated, particularly where exposed to high roof

or lighting heat loads.

The indoor units shall be equipped with a suitable and easily accessible adjustable

intake damper, control thermostat, drain pan and drain piping, cooling coil, controls

and control panel and complete wiring, including interlocking with outdoor unit.

The outdoor units shall contain the matching compressor unit, air-cooled condenser,

condenser fan within a waterproof painted and corrosion protected casing.

The indoor/outdoor units shall be interconnected with refrigerant piping (separately

insulated suction and delivery piping for reverse cycle units), electric wiring and

interlocking control cabling. Where visible and/or exposed to the weather or possible

mechanical damage refrigerant piping and cabling shall be run inside galvanised sheet

steel trunking, neatly erected and painted as specified.

Outdoor units shall be installed on raised plinths or where wall mounted on unistrut

or similar accepted galvanised steel brackets, properly braced and fixed.

Provision shall be made in all cases for the drainage of excessive condensate to the

nearest building drain by means of uPVC tubing.

For reverse cycle heating units, including split type units, a proper drip-pan with

drainage piping as above shall be provided for the outdoor units where dripping can

create unacceptable conditions.





Where drainage piping is required to be installed flush mounted, positioning and

chasing shall be done in good time to meet construction programmes.

All panels shall be neat fitting with hardwearing exposed surfaces of baked enamel or

equal finish of approved colour.

b) Fans

The fans shall be of a specification equal or similar accepted to that provided in

Appendix 1. The fans shall be selected to comply with the ventilation requirements of

SANS 10400.

All fans shall be selected for the highest possible efficiency and comply with the noise

criteria specified.

Fans shall be installed with anti-vibration mountings to match the fan characteristics.

Where fan noise characteristics cannot meet the requirements of this specification

such fans shall be replaced or other approved steps taken by the contractor at his

own expense until the installation meets the requirements.

Fans shall be selected for the highest possible efficiency with the lowest possible blade

tip speed.

Fans shall be fitted with manufacturer's nameplates permanently fixed to the casing

in a prominent position clearly indicating manufacturer, model number, maximum

operating speed, maximum power absorbed, size and serial number for larger fans.

Indicating arrows for both direction of rotation and direction of airflow shall be

provided on fan casings.

Fans shall be of the aerofoil type with non-overloading characteristic with peak power

requirements occurring in normal operating pressure range and motor rating

exceeding this requirement.

The complete fan unit shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940 G6,3.

Fan performance shall be based on tests carried out in accordance with BS 848: Part

1 as amended.

Fan motors shall be totally enclosed squirrel cage induction type with protection to IP

55.

Fans shall be suitable for continuous operation in high humidity conditions.

All fan Casings and fasteners shall be hit dip zinc galvanised steel.

c) Sound Attenuators





Where required, in order to comply with the noise and vibration criteria already laid

down, or where specified in the drawings, sound attenuators shall be provided for

ventilation, air conditioning and all other equipment (Duct mounted and/or as

applicable).

The attenuators selected shall match the specific fan or plant characteristics to ensure

the correct insertion loss to meet the sound criteria laid down.

Unless otherwise specified, sound attenuators shall be installed with flexible

connections at the inlet and outlet connections.

The sound attenuators shall in addition be selected to produce the minimum pressure

loss across the attenuator coupled to the least re-generated noise level produced by

the flow through the attenuator.

Unless otherwise specified, air path sound attenuators shall be manufactured from

galvanised sheet steel with the sound absorption material moisture repellent and

erosion resistant up to 20 m/s air speed, and preferably flange connected.

Wherever possible attenuators shall be proprietary type supplied by the same

manufacturer as the equipment manufacturer to ensure complete compatibility.

The internal free area of sound absorbers shall be not less than the cross sectional

area of the connecting duct as indicated on the drawings

d) Air Filters

Air filters shall be provided on all air inlet points in order to maintain good air quality

in the facilities.

Filter efficiency and arrestance shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Test Standard 52-

76.

Construction and manufacture of all components shall be such that under no

circumstances any unfiltered air can by-pass filters or filter banks.

Sufficient space shall be allowed in front or behind filters, as applicable, to enable

inspection and servicing.

Tubes for the measuring of the pressure drop across each filter bank shall be fitted

as standard to enable connecting a manometer or other instrument as specified.

All filters shall be fitted with inclined pressure differential manometer gauges, clearly

marked with filters clean (green) and filters dirty (red) indicators of a permanent type.

Fan and system selection shall allow for expected final filter resistance to ensure a

supply air quantity in excess of 90% of design air quantity immediately prior to filter

replacement.





Filter duct casings shall be made of galvanised sheet steel with de-contaminable

powder coating RAL 9010

The filter duct casing shall ensure precise fitting of the filter elements.

e) Grilles/Diffusers

Grilles/diffusers (except door grilles) shall be manufactured of stamped, extruded or

rolled galvanised steel sections, finished as specified and mounted in a neat frame.

Each diffuser shall be selected in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations to be capable of passing the specified air quantity without creating

excessive resistance, noise or local draughts.

Door grilles shall be manufactured from aluminium extruded sections, natural

anodised (9E6-C-0)

f) Ductwork

Sheet metal ductwork shall be manufactured in accordance with SABS 1238: 1979 as

amended and installed, balanced and tested as set out in SABS 0173: 1980, as

amended.

Ductwork layouts, dimensions etc. shall be as indicated on drawing

Unless otherwise specified ductwork shall be manufactured of galvanised sheet steel.

Flexible joints shall be provided between all fans, air handlers, vibration inducing

equipment, etc. and ducting.

Flexible joints exposed to weather shall be provided with protecting galvanised sheet

steel cover strips.

Flexible connections shall be made of fireproof fabric reinforced airtight material

attached both sides with approved galvanised steel collars or frames.

Flexible ducting shall comply with local fire codes, NFPA Bulletin 90A and SABS 0400

fire resistance requirements.

Flexible ducting shall be supported with sufficient and correct brackets that will ensure

maintenance of shape.

Duct joints shall be welded flanges or male/female socket type welded all-round.

Unless otherwise specified the total ductwork installation shall be tested for leakage

as per SABS0173.

g) Louvres

Weather louvers shall be finished in natural anodised aluminium, powder coated or

painted is specified. (E6-C-0)





Weather louvers shall be watertight even with nominal air velocity up to 3,0m/s.

Weather louvers shall in all cases be selected with free air passage areas not less than

that indicated on the drawings.

h) Pumps

All pumps shall comply with the requirements already laid down for noise vibration

and noise criteria.

Each pump motor shall be sized so that it will not overload.

The Contractor shall provide raised concrete plinths of the appropriate structural

integrity to hold the weight of each pump. A single plinth may be provided for pumps

which are located next to each other. The plinth surfaces must be completely

horizontal and even.

Each pump base-plate shall be hot dip zinc galvanised to a minimum mean coating

thickness of 200μm.

A low flow switch shall protect the pump from damage due to closure of valves in the

pumping circuit.

Each pump shall be mounted on a concrete inertia base which shall include Mason

Industries (or other accepted) spring mounts selected by the suppliers of the pumps.

All pumps shall have mechanical seals of types to suit the service application and as

recommended by the pump manufacturer. The seals shall be guaranteed by the pump

manufacturer for the service intended.

Provide an emergency latching type stop button adjacent and within reach of the

respective pump motor.

When connecting the pump to the piping, the pump should not be used as an

anchorage point for the piping. The pipelines shall be anchored in close proximity to

the pump and connected without transmitting any stresses or strains. The forces

exerted at the pump nozzles shall be kept below the maximum permissible forces as

per the pump manufacturer’s directions.

The suction lift line shall be laid with a rising slope and the suction head line with a

downward slope towards the pump.

In order to stabilise the flow before entering the pump, the suction piping entering

the pump shall have a straight length equivalent to at least two and a half times the

diameter of the suction flange.





Before installing the pump in the piping, remove the flange covers on the suction and

discharge nozzles of the pump to check that the inside of the pump is free from any

foreign objects.

The pump and motor shafts shall be aligned to prevent damage to the pump.

i) Heat Pumps

The heat pumps shall be of a specification equal or similar accepted to that provided

in Appendix 1.

The heat pumps shall be carefully selected with due regard to vibration transmission

to pipework and the surrounding and airborne noise transmitted.

Heat Pumps shall be installed on spring mountings of the correct deflection

characteristics in order to prevent the transmission of vibration.

The heat pumps shall be supplied with an integrated hydronic module which includes

a Victaulic screen filter, expansion tank, safety valve, dual variable speed pumps, air

purge valve, water drain valve, pressure sensors (pump suction and unit leaving

pressures) and Temperature probes (entering and leaving heat exchanger).

The heat pumps shall include a Micro channel heat exchanger constructed totally of

aluminium with a factory applied coil treatment. The treatment shall be an epoxy

polymer coating by an electro coating process and a UV protective topcoat. The

treatment should provide very minimal heat transfer variation and be tested 6000

hours constant neutral salt spray per ASTM B117 and have superior impact resistance

as per ASTM D2794.

Heat pumps shall be completely self-contained units with stainless steel or epoxy

powder coated casings and cladding.

Condenser and condenser piping circuits shall be properly insulated.

A condensate drip-pan of stainless steel 430 shall be fitted and piped to the nearest

building drain, allowing for defrost cycles.

Reverse cycle automatically controlled defrost shall be provided as standard. Defrost

shall be demand controlled and not timer controlled.

The heat pumps shall be suitable for operating with ambient wet bulb temperatures

as low as -10ºC and as high as 40ºC.

Each heat pump shall be fitted with a control and a fault indication panel to provide

status indication on fault occurrence and operation mode.

After the unit has been received and before it is started up, it shall be inspected for

damage. Check that the refrigerant circuits are intact, especially that no components





or pipes have shifted or being damaged. If in doubt as to the condition, carry out a

leak tightness check.

When moving the equipment only slings at the designated lifting points which are

marked on the units shall be used.

All protection devices such as fuse plugs and relief valves shall not be covered or

obstructed in any way.

Special equipment shall be used when working on the refrigerant circuit as the unit

utilises high-pressure R410A refrigerant (common operating pressures are above 40

bar).

Any manipulation (opening or closing) of a shut-off valve shall be carried out by a

qualified and authorised engineer, observing applicable standards (e.g. during

draining operations). The unit shall be switched off during maintenance.

No work shall be carried out on the unit while still energized. All work done on the

electrical components shall be observed once the general power supply to the unit

has been cut and the unit has de-energized. The variable speed drives are fitted with

capacitor banks and enough time shall be given as per the manufacturer’s

recommendations to ensure that these have discharged completely after

disconnecting the power supply.

An indicating device shall be installed that will be able to show if part of the refrigerant

has leaked from the relief valve.

The unit utilises a refrigerant which is a fluorinated greenhouse gas covered by the

Kyoto protocol. It is paramount that the refrigerant is prevented from being release

to atmosphere during installation or maintenance. If a leak does occur a qualified

service technician shall stop the leak and repair it as soon as possible. Any handling

of fluorinated gas contained in this product shall comply with the F-Gas Directive (the

latest revision) and any other applicable local legislation.

Only dry nitrogen with an appropriate tracer gas shall be used for leak tests. No gases

containing oxygen shall be used due to the reactive nature of pressurised oxygen

when in contact with oil and grease.

Any work that needs to be carried out on the machine at a high level should be via

the use of a platform of staging equipment. No personal shall be allowed to climb or

walk on the equipment and piping.

In order to prevent cavitation the water circuit shall be pressurised to a pressure

above the Net Positive Suction Head of the pump included in the heat pumps, however

the pressure shall be lower than the maximum allowable pressure at the pump inlet

as per the manufacturer’s documentation.





j) Hot Water Tanks

The hot water tanks shall be of a specification equal or similar accepted to that

provided in Appendix 1.

All tanks shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of SANS 347.

Tanks shells shall be manufactured from 4.5mm mild steel plate and tank ends shall

be 6mm thick mild steel. The tanks shall be hot dip galvanised after manufacture.

All tanks shall be pressure tested to 600kPa by suitably approved personal.

All tanks shall be insulated with 100m m mineral wool insulation of minimum density

224 Kg/ m³. Insulation shall be clad with 1mm aluminium cladding.

k) Water Pipework and Fittings

Full radius bends and sweep fittings must be used wherever possible. Elbows may

only be used under exceptional conditions and only with written permission of the

Department. Where it is necessary to reduce pipes in size, reducing sockets only shall

be used and not bushes.

Piping shall not be bent or formed in any manner during installation.

In horizontal runs of piping, where there is only a slight fall eccentric fittings are to

be used.

Under no circumstances shall any piping be directly connected to noise generating

equipment such as pumps, heat pumps etc. Connections to such equipment shall be

made with correctly selected flexible rubber type connectors of the spherical type.

Where tubing passes through walls or ceilings, etc., neat PVC sleeves shall be used.

The inside diameter shall be such that the insulated piping can pass through the

sleeves. Gaps between the insulation and PVC sleeves must be sealed with anon-hard

setting putty

All underground piping shall be HDPE Class 12 unless otherwise indicated.

All above ground pipework shall be Class 1 copper and shall comply with the minimum

standard when tested in accordance with the latest edition of SANS 6509.

All solder, fluxes and the method of soldering shall comply with the latest edition of

SANS 460.

All fittings shall comply with the requirements of the latest edition of SANS 1067, as

relevant.

All pipework shall operate effectively under all normal conditions likely to be

experienced when the water installation is in service.





All cold water pipework shall be able to withstand up to 40 °C water temperature.

All hot water pipework shall be able to withstand up to 100 °C water temperature.

Piping shall be supported (unless otherwise indicated on the drawings) as per figure

3 below:

Figure 3

All supports and anchors shall compensate for thermal expansion of the piping. Pipe

supports fixed to sensitive building elements shall not be permitted.

Fittings shall be ANSI (ASA) B16.9 standard thickness with table flanges up to

1000kPa.

All butterfly type valves shall include for spool pieces to enable removal of equipment.

Before piping is installed the internal surfaces shall be cleaned of all mill scale and oil

to prevent the clogging of strainers, plate heat-exchangers, control valves and

constant flow valves.

Before any pump is operated, thoroughly flush out piping systems and remove, clean

and reinstall all strainers elements and built-in strainer elements of water balancing

valves. Repeat periodically until all water circulating systems specified herein are

completely free of foreign matter.

In order to avoid clashing of services and unnecessary disputes the Selected

Subcontractor shall liaise with the Plumbing, Electrical and Fire Services

Subcontractors with regard to piping, ducting, cable trays, cable racks, etc., routes

shown on the drawings and co-ordinate the installations with them.

All low points in the water circuit shall have drain points to allow the circuit to be

drained.

All high points in the water circuit shall have automatic air purge valves to allow for

purging of air.

Stop valves shall be installed close to the entering and leaving water connections to

the Heat Pumps.





All rubber components that are in contact with potable water, such as joint rings, tap

washers and flange packings, shall, in order to control the multiplication of Legionella

pneumophila bacteria in water installations, be of a composition that will not promote

microbiological growth. Rubber joint rings shall comply with the relevant requirements

of the latest edition of SANS 4633.

l) Strainers

Water strainers shall be of the pot or angle type. Strainers shall be designed for not

less than 1000kPa or 1,5 times the maximum system working pressure whichever is

the greatest. Strainer screens shall be of bronze or stainless steel and shall have

maximum perforation as per Figure 4 below.

Figure 4

The effective free area of the screen shall in all cases be not less than 3 times the

cross sectional area of the inlet opening.

Strainers shall be installed in accessible positions where the strainers can be easily

removed and cleaned.

m) Pressure Gauges and Thermometers

Pressure gauges shall have at least a 100mm dial and be calibrated in kPa with the

maximum range not exceeding 1,5 times the system working pressure. Forged brass

or gunmetal gauge cocks must be fitted with each pressure gauge.

Thermometers shall be of the replaceable glass type with bronze casings, fitted into

pockets for removal without draining the system. The thermometers shall be

calibrated in ˚C and the scale length shall be at least 170mm. Pockets shall be of

brass, filled with oil and shall be installed vertically. On pipes smaller than 50mm

diameter, pipe sizes must be increased locally to install the sockets.

n) Air Release Valves

Automatic air release valves shall be provided where shown on the drawings, but shall

in addition also be fitted to piping at all high points and other places where air may

accumulate. As these points depend on the installation of the system, full

responsibility for fitting these valves rests with the Contractor.





Valves shall have either integral shut-off valves or be preceded by a lock shield valve.

Connections to the service pipe shall be made at the highest point to ensure complete

venting. Valves shall be mounted with the inlet connection exactly vertical.

o) Valves

All valves shall comply with the regulations of the latest version of SANS 1808.

Drain valves shall be fitted to all low points in the installation to ensure full draining

of the system.

Diaphragm type valves and gate valves shall not be used for balancing or throttling

purposes.

p) Insulation

General

o Insulation shall in all instances be applied by specialist contractors and be of the

highest standard. Any section not installed to the approval of the Engineer shall

be re-done at the Contractor's expense.

o Data sheets for all insulation and accessories shall be submitted to the engineer

for acceptance that they meet the requirements listed.

o Material shall be delivered in non-broken, factory furnished packaging and stored

in a clean, dry indoor space that provides protection against the weather.

o Progressive testing of the systems to be insulated shall have been completed,

inspected and approved by the owners' representative before the insulation is

applied.

o Insulation shall not be applied until all surfaces are clean, dry, and free of dirt,

dust, grease, frost, moisture and other extraneous elements.

o Insulation, cladding and vapour barriers shall be painted as specified.

o All items of plant likely to operate at temperatures below the surrounding ambient

dew point shall be insulated and provided with a vapour barrier.

Hot Water Piping, Fittings, Equipment

o All pipes through which water that has been heated is running, including return

and circulation piping, pipe fittings and equipment such as pumps shall be

insulated with pre-formed insulation matching pipe size and specified thickness,

painted and colour coded as specified.

o The insulating material shall be mineral wood sections of long fine fibres, bonded

with temperature resistant binder. The thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.038





W/mºK, and the density shall not be less than 80kg/m3. The sections shall be rot-

proof, odourless, non-hygroscopic and non-combustible.

o The minimum resistance to heat flow (R-value) of all insulation shall be 1.7. The

minimum thicknesses shall be in accordance with the Figure 5 below, should the

minimum thickness not be sufficient to provide the required resistance to heat

flow, the contractor shall utilise insulation which is thicker than the minimum such

that it conformed to the requirements. However, no insulation thinner than the

minimum from Figure 5 may be used even if the requirements for heat resistance

are met.

Pipe Inner Diameter (mm) 15-40 41-60 61 and larger

Insulation Thickness (mm) 25 40 60

Figure 5

o Hot water storage tanks shall be insulated with 100mm mineral wool with

galvanised cladding.

o Pipes shall be insulated as described in the previous clauses even where they pass

through walls and slabs.

o Insulation shall be held in position by galvanised steel straps. These straps are to

be located at butt joints between lengths of insulation and at 300mm centres over

the length of the insulation.

o Insulation to bends on unexposed pipework (e.g. in roof spaces etc.) may be

formed from mitred and trimmed sections, cut to ensure that a good contact with

the surface to be insulated is made.

o To ensure maximum continuity of insulation, adjoining sections shall be firmly

butted together and sealed with a self-adhesive tape at least 50mm wide.

o Flanges, couplings and valve bonnets shall be covered with an oversized pipe

insulation section sized to provide the same insulation thickness as on the main

pipe section. An oversized insulation section shall be used to form a collar between

the two insulation sections with low-density blanket insulation being used to fill

gaps. Jacketing shall match that used on straight pipe sections. Rough cut ends

shall be coated with suitable weather or vapour resistant mastic as dictated by the

system location and service. On systems where fittings are to be left exposed,

insulation ends should be bevelled away from bolts for easy access.

o Where specified piping shall be painted prior to application of insulation.

o Where hangers and/or supports occur along the run of the insulated pipes, a

segmental section of hardwood approximately 70mm long shall be inserted, the





outer diameter being identical to that of the insulated pipe and the ends thereof

butted to the insulation. The insulation finish shall be continued over the hardwood

insert and the finish shall be protected by means of sheet metal hoops under the

bracket, against movement of the pipe and/or hanger. Supports compressing the

insulation will not be accepted.

o Flanged joints shall be separately covered by pre-formed insulation flange boxes

(muff covers) held in position by removable metal bands and finished similarly to

the lagging on piping. The flange boxes shall be capable of removal without

damage to any other portion of the insulation.

o All bends on indoor pipework are to be insulated with moulded plastic lagging (see

below) of same or better insulation property than the sectional insulation,

trowelled to a smooth finish to the same diameter as the sectional insulation and

then neatly bound with an approved tape and painted, or alternatively insulated

with mitred sections.

o Pipe insulation not covered with sheet metal cladding shall be covered with canvas

having at least a 50mm overlap at joints. Overlaps shall be sealed down with a

suitable adhesive.

4.5.11 Fire Protection System

a) Requirements

The facilities can be classified as offices, low risk industrial and Hospitality. Due to the

size of the facilities being small there are no SANS requirements for Fire detection and

alarm systems, and Sprinkler systems.

The existing Fire hydrants shall be refurbished used around the facilities for assistance

in the case of a fire.

b) Equipment

Material for which an SABS specification exists, shall be in accordance with such a

specification, and shall bear the SABS mark.

All equipment used shall originate from suppliers which have been certified in

accordance with SABS ISO 9001 (ISO 9001) or SABS ISO 9002 (ISO 9002) for Quality

assurance. Copies of certificates of approval shall be provided by the tenderers with

their tenders.

Equipment designed to BS 5446, Fire systems for residential premises, or similar other

standards, are not acceptable.

c) Fire Hydrants





The fire hydrants shall comply with the latest edition of the SANS 10400-T and SANS

1128-1 standards.

The inlet of hydrant valve shall be of nominal size 80mm and shall be threaded

complying with the relevant requirements of the latest edition of SANS 1109-1.

The outlet of the valve shall be right angle pattern, be of nominal size 65mm and shall

be threaded complying with the relevant requirements of the latest edition of SANS

1109-1. The outlet shall have a 65mm instantaneous connection integrally cast with

the body.

The valve spindle shall be of the fixed type with a fixed wheel type operating device

with an outside diameter of 150mm with a tolerance of maximum 10mm.

A blank cap shall be furnished for each outlet and shall be fixed to the component by

means of a chain.

d) Fire Hose Reels

The fire hose reels shall rotate around a spindle, consist of five discs with a maximum

diameter of not more than 700mm and inside drum with a minimum diameter of not

less than 200mm. the hose reels shall comply with the latest edition of the SANS 543

standard.

The hose shall be semi-rigid, of nominal bore 20mm and shall be 30m long. The hose

shall comply with the latest editions of the EN 694, EN 854, SANS 1086 and SANS

2398 standards.

The hose shall terminate in a shut-off nozzle which shall have the following settings:

o Shut

o Spray

o Jet

All hose reels shall be fitted with a manual inlet stop valve.

e) Portable Fire Extinguishers

The portable fire extinguishers shall be 5Kg and 9Kg carbon dioxide extinguishers with

an aluminium casing and shall comply with the latest edition of the SANS 1567

standard.

The total mass of the fully equipped, fully charged extinguisher (excluding the

bracket) shall not exceed 23Kg and shall be equal to that marked on the extinguisher

with a maximum tolerance allowed of +-5%.





All plastics components used in the extinguisher shall comply with the latest edition

of the EN 3-8: 2006 standard. However, no components under working pressure shall

be manufactured from plastics materials.

The extinguishers shall be equipped with a discharge hose assembly of minimum

length of 400mm.

All discharge horns shall comply with the latest edition of the EN 3-7 standard.

The extinguishers shall be fitted with a handgrip on the discharge horn constructed

of a thermally insulated material that will protect the operator’s hand from the freezing

effects of the discharge.

The extinguishers shall have suitable handles for carrying purposes as well as fittings

and brackets that shall enable them to be effectively mounted and allow easy removal

from the bracket.

4.5.12 Testing, Commissioning & Balancing

The testing of the systems shall be done in the presence and to the satisfaction of an

authorised representative of the TCP Engineer. The test results shall be forwarded to the

TCP Engineer for acceptance.

Commissioning shall be done by an ECSA registered Professional Engineer who shall be

provided by the Contractor. The Engineer provided shall have reasonable experience in

the commissioning of similar types of systems. The contractor shall provide in the Bill of

Quantities and Programme for the time and cost associated with the commissioning of all

the works.

4.5.13 Training Program

Tenderers shall allow in their tender prices for a training course, to train on site at least

four (4) persons, as nominated by the User Client from his own operating personnel. The

training shall be adequate for the installation, to ensure that operating staff fully

understand the system. During this period the personnel shall be made fully conversant

with the operation of, and daily maintenance required for, each item of equipment of the

system. The training especially on computer equipment and control panels, shall be of

such a standard that will enable the Client to carry out his own in-house training of other

personnel.

The training course shall start only after first take-over inspection of the system.

The training course shall be carried out in the language medium as chosen by the Client.





The Operating Manual of the contract shall include a full description of the contents of the

training course.

4.5.14 Operating & Maintenance Manuals

a) Five sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be by the Contractor.

b) Plant schematic and wiring diagrams shall be the latest revision and shall be framed behind

glass and displayed adjacent to switchboards.

c) A concept copy of the Operating Manual(s) shall be submitted to the Transnet Capital

Projects consultant, at least two (2) weeks prior to the anticipated first hand-over of the

installation, for scrutiny and possible amendment.

d) Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall consist of the following sections:

Descriptive Information

This section shall comprise at least the following:

o General Description

o Design Parameters

o Building Load

o Installed Capacities

o Principal Components

o Electrical Board Schematics

o Control Schematics

Equipment Data Comprising

This section shall comprise at least the following:

o Equipment Designation

o Manufacturer and Model

o Size and Rating

o Pressure, Speed and Temperature Limitations

o Manufactures Local Representative.

Operating Instructions

Complete instructions for all equipment including:

o Starting and Stopping Procedures.

o Time Switch Functions.

o Seasonal Adjustments.

o Sequence under Loading and Unloading.





o Normal Operation and Tripped Conditions.

o Logs and Records to be kept.

Inspection and Maintenance

o Inspection Schedules and Checklist.

o Lubrication Schedules.

o Routine Replacements, Adjustments and Calibrating.

o Routine Cleaning, Painting and Protection.

o Inspection and Maintenance Logs and Records to be kept.

Reference Documents

Reference documents to include:

o Tender Specification & Drawing List

o As built Record Drawings

o Test Reports

o Commissioning Reports

Equipment: Manufacturers Data

This part of the Manual shall consist of manufacturer’s data including:

o Descriptive Literature

Catalogue Cuts, Brochures or Shop Drawings

Dimensioned Drawings

Materials of Construction

Parts Designations

o Operating Characteristics

Performance Tables and Charts

Performance Curves

Pressure, Temperature, and Speed Limitations

Safety Devices

o Operating Instructions

Pre-start Checklist

Start-up Procedures

Inspection during Operation





Adjustment and Regulation

Testing

Detection of Malfunction

Precautions

o Inspection Instructions and Procedures

Normal and Abnormal Operating Temperature, Pressure and Speed Limits.

Schedule and Manner of Operation

Detection Signals

o Maintenance Instructions and Procedures

Schedule of Routine Maintenance.

Procedures.

Troubleshooting Chart.

o Parts List

o Service Contract

4.5.15 Maintenance

a) Allow for the maintenance of the complete installation for a period of TWELVE (12)

MONTHS after ‘practical’ completion certificate has been issued by the Engineer. Visit the

installation once a month on the basis of a proper preventive programme approved by the

Engineer.

b) Report to an official nominated by the Client on arrival and again on leaving their premises

on the occasion of each visit. Such person, who has been nominated by the Client, shall

sign a Service Report giving details of corrected temperature and humidity readings taken,

etc.

c) A log book shall be supplied by the Contractor. The log book shall be kept on site in charge

of the responsible person appointed by the Client for this purpose. The Contractor shall

complete the log book, showing all maintenance done by him, as well as repairs of faults

which may have occurred.

The log book shall also contain the following information:

o Date

o Type of fault reported and by whom

o Date of fault report

o Work done





o Name and signature of person carrying out the work

o Name and signature of the person in charge of the site.

The log book shall be completed in TRIPLICATE. One copy shall accompany the monthly

report to the Regional Representative of Transnet Capital Projects, one copy shall be

for the Contractor's own use, whilst the third copy shall remain in the log book as a

record.

d) At each service visit, maintenance personnel shall, inter alia, perform the following duties

in addition to any other which may be necessary.

Check all fans, drives and variable speed drives, lubricate moving part and tighten

where applicable, belts, as required, and check all lock-out stops. Check drip trays,

drainage systems for cleanliness and correct functioning.

Check differential pressure gauges and switches, etc.

Check all switchboards. Tighten connections, check switchgear for burnt contacts,

check overload settings, phase failure relays, etc. Relays etc. Replace defective

voltmeter, ammeters, transformers, pilot lights, hour meter, timers. Time switches,

etc.

Check all control systems and safety devices, air flow switches, manometer, etc. for

correct functioning and replace defective items or any other as necessary.

4.5.16 Guarantee

a) The selected subcontractor shall guarantee the materials, apparatus and workmanship

delivered and installed by him. The guarantee shall be valid for a period of twelve months

starting on the date when the practical completion certificate is issued, the complete

installation shall be guaranteed against defects as a result of patent and latent defects of

the apparatus, as well as against faulty materials and workmanship. Fair wear and tear is

excluded from the guarantee.

b) The guarantee shall provide all parts, spares and appurtenances which become defective

during the guarantee period, to be replaced free of charge to the client. All costs of labour,

out-of-town town allowances, materials and transportation required to replace such part

of a defective installation shall be borne by the selected subcontractor and shall be included

in his guarantee. The selected subcontractor shall cede to the client the remainder of any

equipment guarantee which he has received from his suppliers and which may extend

beyond the period of twelve months mentioned herein.

c) Where certain equipment have supplier’s standard guarantee clauses of which

do not correspond with the guarantee clause 22.1 the selected subcontractor

shall allow in the tender price for the extensions of guarantees and additional

charges thereof, in order to comply with guarantee clause.





APPENDIX 1 – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

DETAILS VRV DUTY CONTRACTOR'S

OFFER: VRV DUTY

CONTRACTORS

OFFER: PRICE

MHA-Mess room

Outdoor unit CONTRACTOR'S

OFFER: VRV DUTY

CONTRACTORS

OFFER: PRICE

Make

DAIKIN VRV IV Non

Continuous Heating

Indoor unit Model number RXYQ16T

Quantity 1

Power requirements 400V / 3Phase / 50Hz

Running current 31 A

Indoor units

Make

DAIKIN VRV FXFQ-A -

Round flow cassette

Indoor unit Model number FXFQ125A

Quantity 4


Running current 1.6 A

MHA-Workshop

Outdoor unit

Make DAIKIN - Heat Pump

Outdoor unit Model

number RXYQ12T

Quantity 1






Running current 30.2 A

Indoor units

Make DAIKIN

Indoor unit Model number FXFQ100A

Quantity 2


Running current

Indoor units

Make DAIKIN

Indoor unit Model number FXZQ25A

Quantity 4


Running current

Indoor units

Make DAIKIN

Indoor unit Model number FXZQ80A

Quantity 1


Running current





Ventilation Equipment:

The ventilation Equipment shall have the following minimum specifications. The list of equipment shall

be sent to the TCP engineer for acceptance before purchasing any equipment.

All ventilation equipment shall be suitable for the application as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Axial fans shall be used for extraction directly to the outside through a wall or window. However, if the

window or wall faces a prevailing wind a centrifugal fan with a higher pressure performance shall be

utilised.

DETAILS FAN DUTY CONTRACTOR'S

OFFER: VRV DUTY

CONTRACTOR’S

OFFER: PRICE

Make XPELAIR

Country of origin UK

Type Axial flow fan

Model No GX 9

Quantity 6

Air Volume (l/s) 202

Case type Wall / Window mounted

Electrical supply 240V / 1Phase / 50Hz

Wall kit ref. 89372AA


OFFER: VRV DUTY

CONTRACTOR’S

OFFER: PRICE

Make XPELAIR


Type Axial flow fan

Model No GX6

Quantity 2

Air Volume (l/s) 74

Case type Wall/ Window mounted






Wall kit ref. 2


OFFER: VRV DUTY

CONTRACTORS

OFFER: PRICE

Make XPELAIR


Type Axial flow fan

Model No GX12

Quantity 5

Air Volume (l/s) 448

Case type Wall/Window mounted


Wall kit ref.

HEAT PUMPS :

The water heating equipment shall have the following minimum specifications. All hot water storage tanks

shall have backup elements for heating of water in the event of the heat pumps not heating the water

sufficiently. The backup elements shall be able to heat the water in the tank to 60 degrees Celsius within

3 hours. The list of equipment shall be sent to the TCP engineer for acceptance before purchasing any

equipment.

UNITS VALUE

Make ITS Industrial heat pump

Type

Model

Heating Capacity kW 17

Power Supply V/ɸ/Hz 220/1/50

Input Power kW 4.25

Running Current A 20





Casing Metal

Refrigerant R407c

Air Temperature °C 0 - 45

Hot Water Generated L/hr 475

Water Temperature °C 60

Noise Levels dB 52

Water Connection inch 1”

Net Weight kg 110

Net Dimensions mm (L x W x H) – (1015 x 430 x 690)

HOT WATER TANK SPECIFICATION - MALE

Make Heat Transfer Engineering

Model HT1200S

Size mm 1020 x 1910

Capacity Litres 1200

Mass kg 275

HOT WATER TANK SPECIFICATION - FEMALE

Make Heat Transfer Engineering

Model HT1000S

Size mm 1020 x 1610

Capacity Litres 1000

Mass kg 250

4.6 Structural Engineering

4.6.1. Concrete, Formwork and Reinforcement

This section covers the construction of all new reinforced concrete and associated concrete works

requirements for the proposed repair of the existing reinforced concrete structure, as directed by the

Engineer.





4.6.1.1 Particular specifications for concrete

The following specifications shall apply:

NB: All in situ concrete work (mass and reinforced) shall comply with SANS Specification 1200G

(“8 Measurement and Payment” is not applicable) supplemented by the clauses in this section.

Where SANS Specification 1200G and the clauses in this section are in conflict the clauses in

this section shall take precedence.

In addition the "Model Preambles for Trades" as recommended and published by the Association

of South African Quantity Surveyors, 1999 Edition, shall be read in conjunction with and shall

apply to all items in the Bill of Quantities not covered by the 'SANS Standardised Specifications'

SANS 1200 Series

Where the term “plain concrete” appears in SANS Specification 1200G it shall be read as “mass

concrete”.

SANS Specifications

SANS 1200 G Concrete

SANS 2001: CC1 Construction Works: Concrete Works (Structural)

SANS 1083: 2006 Aggregates from natural sources

SANS 10100-2:2000 The Structural use of concrete – Part 2: Materials and execution

of work

SANS 50197-1:2000 Cement – composition, specifications and conformity criteria. Part

1: Common cements

SANS 1491-1:2005 Portland cement extenders – Part 1 Ground granulated blast

furnace slag

SANS 1491-2:2005 Portland cement extenders – Part 2 Fly ash

SANS 1491-3:2006 Portland cement extenders – Part 3 Condensed Silica Fume

S437 (Transnet) Concrete Pavement

4.6.2. Cement

Common cements, complying with SANS 50197-1 shall be used for all concrete work. On no account shall

masonry cements be used for concrete work, even if the strength designations are the same as for

common cements.





The Supervisor for test purposes may require samples of cement from any one, or from every

consignment. Cement in any consignment from which a sample may have been taken for testing shall

not be used until it has been approved. Allowance must be made for possible delay in that tests may

take 10 days to carry out.

Bags of cement shall be stacked in a waterproof, solidly constructed shed with a central door and a floor

rendered damp-proof with a tarpaulin. The bags of cement shall be closely stacked (but not against

walls) in order to reduce air circulation in such a manner that the cement is used in the order in which it

was received, i.e. first in first out.

4.6.2.1. Alkali reactive concrete

Alkali Reactive Aggregates shall not be used in this project. The equivalent Na2O content of the concrete

shall not exceed 2, 0 kg/m3 where % Na2O equivalent = % Na2O + (0,658 x %K2O)

4.6.2.2. Aggregates

Fine and coarse aggregate shall comply with the relevant clauses of SANS 1083.

Where aggregates have constituents, which in the opinion of the Project Manager, may give rise to

damage due to alkali-aggregate reactions, the provisions of 6.3.3.3 shall be applicable.

Evidence of compliance of the aggregates with the requirements of 6.3.3.1 & 6.3.3.2 shall be furnished

as early as practical. No aggregate shall be delivered for use in the works until approval is given.

Sand (fine aggregate):

The fine aggregates shall comply with the requirements of SANS Specification 1083. Other aggregates

may be approved if they have a satisfactory history and / or test results.

No aggregate may be used until it has been approved. Samples having a mass of 25kg

(16.5 litres) of the proposed aggregate to be used may be required by the Supervisor for test purposes.

Samples having a mass of 25kg shall be forwarded every 3 months during concreting work and also if

the source of supply is changed. Allowance must be made for possible delay in that the tests may take

14 days to carry out.

4.6.2.3. Admixtures

Admixtures containing chlorides will not be permitted in reinforced concrete.

4.6.2.4. Cover Blocks

Cover blocks used to ensure the cover to reinforcement shall be made of cement mortar.

Cover blocks shall be dense and have a minimum 28 day crushing strength of 30 MPa and shall be cured

in water for at least 14 days before being used.

Cover/spacer blocks made of plastic will not be permitted.





4.6.2.5. Concrete Quality

Prior to the start of any concrete work on site, the Contractor shall submit a quality assurance plan which

will ensure compliance with specification and provide acceptable documentary evidence that all specified

operations have been carried out satisfactorily.

Where the minimum dimension to be placed during a single pour is larger than 600mm, and the cement

content of the reinforced concrete exceeds the following:

1. Cement Types I and II/ * S : 400 kg/m3

2. Cement Types II/B-V and II/B-W : 450 kg/m3

The Project Manager may require that measures be instituted to reduce heat development in the

concrete.

4.6.2.5.1. Unreinforced concrete

Class A Concrete:

Filling to cavity of hollow walls.

4.6.2.5.2. Unreinforced concrete cast against excavated surfaces

15 Mpa/19mm Concrete

Surface blinding under footings and bases.

4.6.2.5.3. Reinforced concrete

30 MPa/19mm Concrete

Bases

Foundation beams

Surface beds cast in panels on waterproofing

Walls in foundations (Provisional)

Columns in foundations (Provisional)

4.6.2.6. Batching

All cementitious binders shall be batched by full sack or by mass batching with approved precision

weighing equipment.

All aggregates shall be precisely measured by mass using approved precision weigh-batching equipment,

unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager.

Should any variation in the composition of the aggregate become apparent, the Project Manager shall be

notified and a further sample of aggregate submitted immediately for his approval.

4.6.2.7. Concrete placing





The size, shape and depth of any excavation shall be approved by the Project Manager before concrete

is placed.

Unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, no concrete shall be placed until the fixed

reinforcement has been accepted by him and confirmed in writing by way of a release certificate.

4.6.2.8. Construction joints

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the exact position of horizontal construction joints shall be

marked on the formwork by means of grout checks in order to obtain truly horizontal joints.

Stub columns, stub walls and stays on footings shall be cast integrally with the footing and not afterwards,

even where another class of concrete is being used.

Joint lines shall be so arranged that they coincide with features of the finished work.

Where new concrete is to be cast against a hardened concrete surface, neat cement slurry mixed to a

creamy consistency shall be brushed onto the cleaned concrete surface.

Contraction joints shall be smooth and shall have one coat of limewash or PVA applied to the older surface

prior to casting the fresher concrete.

4.6.2.9. Slip Joints between Concrete and Brickwork

Slip joints shall be provided between brickwork and concrete slabs and beams by levelling up and

towelling smooth the bearing surfaces of brickwork with 3:1 cement mortar and covering the bearings

before the concrete is baste, with two layers of one side smooth tempered hardboard, with the smooth

sides in contact.

The ends and sides of beams and edges of concrete slabs shall be separated from the brickwork with

13mm thick bitumen impregnated soft board or expanded polyethylene strips placed vertically against

the brickwork before the concrete is cast.

Similar slip joints shall be provided between brickwork and concrete lintels cast In situ, but without soft

board or expanded polyethylene strips at ends.

4.6.2.10. Movement Joints

All movement joints are to be filled in with approved bitumen impregnated soft board or expanded

polyethylene strip unless otherwise specified or detailed on drawings. Descriptions (prices) of movement

joints shall be deemed to include formwork.

4.6.2.11. Grouting

25 MPa non-shrink cementitious grout:

Bedding approximately 25mm thick under base plate including chamfered edges all round.

4.6.2.12. Curing Compound

Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, the curing compound shall be:





An approved trafficable, resin-based, white pigmented, membrane forming for slopes flatter than 1:1.

An approved clear, aesthetically acceptable, membrane forming for all other concrete surfaces, including

beam and slab soffits.

The curing compound shall comply with specification ASTM C309, except that the maximum permissible

water loss in the test shall be 0, 40 kg/m2.

Alternatively, the curing compound shall be acceptable if the treated concrete retains 90% or more of its

mixing water when subject to the test set out in BS 8110 Part 1 – Chapter 6.6.

4.6.2.12.1. Curing compound application

The total application rate of the curing compound shall be the greater of the supplier’s

specification or 0.90 l/m2. On textured concrete surfaces, the total application rate

shall be 0.90 l/m2.

In cases of concrete surfaces with run-off problems, it may be necessary to apply

more than one coat of membrane forming curing compound to obtain the specified

total or cumulative application rate.

Curing in accordance with SANS 1200 G shall commence on all concrete surfaces as

soon as it is practical in the opinion of the Technical Officer.

On unformed surfaces the curing compound shall be applied after finishing and as

soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible,

but no so late that the liquid curing compound will be absorbed into the concrete.

On formed surfaces, the exposed concrete shall be wet with water immediately after

the forms are removed and kept moist until the curing compound is applied.

Application of the curing compound shall begin once the concrete has reached a

uniformly damp appearance with no free water on the surface.

Application of the compound may be done by hand or power spray.

The compound shall be applied at a uniform rate with two applications at right angles

to each other to ensure complete coverage.

Pigmented compounds, without a thixotropic agent, shall be adequately stirred to

assure even distribution of the pigment during application.

Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, the initial 24 hour curing of

concrete surfaces not covered by formwork shall be carried out by ponding, covering

with constantly wetted sand or mats, or continuous spraying in accordance with SANS

1200 G when the following climatic conditions occur:

1. Wind velocity greater than 5 m/s and/or

2. Ambient temperature is above 25 C and/or





3. The relative humidity is below 60 %

If plastic shrinkage occurs, the concrete, while still plastic, shall be re-vibrated, floated

and re-coated with curing compound as if no curing has previously taken place.

4.6.2.12.2. Curing period

The curing period for concrete containing only CEM 1 shall be 7 days.

The curing period for concrete containing CEM 1 plus cement extenders (MGBS, FA)

shall be 10 days.

The curing period will start on completion of the concrete pour and for formed

surfaces shall include the time for which forms are still in place after the pour.

4.6.2.13. Concrete records

The Contractor shall maintain the following daily records for every part of the concrete structure and

shall make these available at all times during the progress of the work for inspection by the Project

Manager.

The date and time during which concrete was placed

Identification of the part of the structure in which the concrete was placed

The mixed proportions and specified strength

The type and brand of cement

The slump of the concrete

The identifying marks of test cubes made

Curing procedure applied to concrete placed

The times when shuttering was stripped and props removed

The date of despatch of the cubes to the testing laboratory

The test results

The records shall be delivered to the Project Manager each week except in the case of sub-standard

concrete, when the Project Manager shall be informed immediately.

4.6.2.13.1. Tolerances

Deviations shall be within the limits listed in SANS 1200 G for degree of accuracy II

unless otherwise specified.

4.6.2.13.2. Testing and monitoring

Frequency of sampling and testing shall be as specified in SANS 1200 G

4.6.2.13.3. Cost of tests





The costs of making, storing and testing of concrete test cubes as required

under clause 7 'Tests' of SANS 1200 G shall include the cost of providing

cube moulds necessary for the purpose, for testing costs and for submitting

reports on the tests to the Project Manager. The testing shall be undertaken

by an independent firm or institution nominated by the Contractor to the

approval of the Project Manager (Test cubes are measured separately)

If the quantity of concrete from which samples were taken exceeds 40 m3, it shall be

subject to the testing of a minimum of 3 sets of samples per day from each grade of

concrete placed in each independent structure.

If the quantity of concrete from which samples were taken is less than 40 m3, it shall

be subject to the testing of a minimum of 2 sets of samples per day from each grade

of concrete placed in each independent structure.

If the Contractor disputes the results of the tests on concrete cubes, the concrete

represented by the cubes will be considered acceptable if the Contractor, at his own

cost, proves to the satisfaction of the Project Manager that the estimated actual

strength of cores taken from the structure, determined in accordance with SANS

Standard Method SM 856, is not less than the specified strength.

If the strength of the concrete fails to meet the acceptance criteria stipulated, the

Project Manager may in his sole discretion and in addition to the options listed in

SANS 1200 G:

Accept the concrete subject to approved remedial measures being undertaken by

the Contractor; or

Permit the concrete to remain subject to the payment of a penalty

The penalty referred to will be determined as follows:

Penalty = V x R x F

Where

V = Volume (in the opinion of the Project Manager) of concrete of unsatisfactory

strength represented by the test result.

R = Relevant scheduled rate

F = MPastrengthSpecified

concretetoryunsatisfacofstrengthAverage

61

Where the relevant scheduled rate (R) includes the cost of formwork or





F = MPastrengthSpecified

concretetoryunsatisfacofstrengthAverage

61

Where the relevant scheduled rate (R) excludes the cost of formwork or where no

formwork was involved.

4.6.3. Formwork

Descriptions of formwork shall be deemed to include use and waste only (except where described as left

in or permanent), for fitting together in the required forms, wedging, plumbing and fixing to true angles

and surfaces as necessary to ensure easy release during stripping and for reconditioning as necessary

before re-use

Formwork to sides of bases, pile caps, ground beams, etc. have been measured provisionally and will

only be paid for where it is specifically prescribed by the Technical Officer for design reasons. Formwork

necessitated by irregularity or collapse of excavated faces will not be measured and the cost thereof shall

be deemed to be included in the allowance for taking the risk of collapse of the sides of the excavations,

provision for which is made in Earthworks

4.6.3.1 Rough formwork (degree of accuracy ii)

Rough Formwork to Sides:

Strip footings.

Bases.

Walls in foundations.

Outer face of walls flushes with perimeter of concrete structure.

Rectangular columns in foundations.

Edges not exceeding 300mm high

Rough Formwork to Circular Columns

4.6.3.2 Smooth formwork (degree of accuracy ii)

Smooth Formwork to sides:

Inner face of shaft walls.

Edges not exceeding 300mm high

4.6.3.3 Movement joints etc.

Expansion joints with soft board between vertical concrete surfaces:

12mm Joints not exceeding 300mm high.

4.6.3.4 Saw cut joints

3.2 x 50mm And 6.4 x 20mm saw cut joints in two operations in top of concrete.

Seal Sikaflex-11FC on backing chord to manufacturer’s specification





Horizontal toggle construction joints through concrete including thick cement slurry to one face.

Surface beds not exceeding 300mmm thick.

4.6.3.5 Reinforcement (provisional)

High tensile steel reinforcement to structural concrete work:

In various diameters and lengths

Mild steel reinforcement to structural concrete work

In various diameters and lengths

High tensile steel reinforcement to structural concrete work

Fabric reinforcement:

Fabric reinforcement type as specified on structural drawings.

4.6.3.6 Forming key to concrete for plaster, mosaic tiles and other finishes

Where rough formwork has been used, surfaces of concrete to receive plaster, mosaic tiles and other

finishes, shall, immediately after the formwork has been removed, be well wetted and wire brushed whilst

the concrete is still green and then shushed over with 2:1 cement grout to form a key for the finish, all

to the approval of the Supervisor. The shushing is to be allowed to set hard before the finish is applied.

Where smooth formwork is used, surfaces of the concrete to receive plaster, mosaic tiles and other

finishes shall be hacked, on the distinct understanding that hacking of concrete shall be at no extra cost

to the employer.

Surfaces of concrete receiving plaster or other finishes shall not be plastered or finished until the

Supervisor has signified his opinion in writing that the surfaces are suitable to receive plaster or other

finishes.

4.6.3.7 Sleeve Pieces and Ties

Where it is necessary to leave plugs or holes in beams, slabs or any other reinforced concrete, all such

plugs or holes must be situated in positions approved by the Supervisor before concreting. Where it is

necessary to carry pipes, bolts, wires or any other fittings through reinforced concrete members,

approved pipe sleeves must be provided and placed in position before concreting.

Where waste, ventilation water, heating or other pipes under 100mm diameter pass through concrete

slabs and beams, galvanised mild steel sleeve pieces or diameters shown or required shall be cast into

such concrete slabs and beams.

Chases shall be formed in edges of slabs or slots shall be formed in the slabs, or sizes required, where

two or more pipes pass through together.





All necessary bolts, plugs, brackets, cramps, etc. shall be cast into the concrete as the work proceeds.

Where brickwork abuts against concrete, the brickwork is to be tied to the concrete with galvanized hoop-

iron ties 1.6m thick by 32mm wide and approximately 600mm long to every third course of brickwork

with one end of each tie cast approximately 150mm deep into the concrete. Where such fixing is

impossible, i.e. where steel formwork is used, the ties are to be gun-nailed against concrete with steel

nails to less than 38mm long.

4.6.3.8 Bagged Finish to Concrete

Concrete surfaces to receive bagged finish shall be prepared by removing sharp projections and making

good defects with 3:1 cement mortar. Finish by rubbing over the whole area with wet rough sacking and

cement grout to obtain an even surface.

4.6.3.9 Power Floated Finish

Power floated finish to floors etc. means that surfaces shall be floated c\mechanically to a smooth and

even finish before the concrete has set. Small areas inaccessible to the machine are to be floated by

hand. Under no circumstances is cement mortar to be added while floating the concrete.

4.6.3.10 “No Fines” Concrete

“No-fines” concrete, for grading flat concrete roofs and the like to falls, shall be in the proportion of 12

parts 19 iron cubical stone to 1 part cement mixed with 20 litres water per bag of cement and be laid to

falls of not less than 15mm per linear metre for mastic asphalt and not less than 20mm per linear metre

for sheet roof covering. For heavy load applications special mix designs may be required.

(a) Fillets against up stands:

Form triangular fillets, size 100 x 100mm, in corners with walls, kerbs, etc. neatly mitred at

angles, stopped where necessary and finished smooth ready to receive waterproofing.

(b) To raised floor, bases, etc.:

No-fines” concrete for raised floors, bases, etc. shall be in the proportions specified. Finished

smooth with 3:1 sand/ cement screed to receive waterproofing.

4.6.3.11 Precast Concrete

4.6.3.11.1 Materials

Cement, water, aggregates and reinforcement shall be as described under:

CONCRETE, FORMWORK AND REINFORCEMENT.

4.6.3.11.2 Concrete

Concrete shall be as described under: CONCRETE, FORMWORK AND

REINFORCEMENT and, unless otherwise specified. Class E concrete shall be used

but with coarse aggregate of an appropriate size.





4.6.3.11.3 Smooth Finish

Where described as “finished smooth from the mould” such surfaces shall have a layer

of fine stuff composed of 1:4 (1 part cement and 4 parts clean fine sand by volume)

packed against the faces of the mould before placing the concrete backing. The

concrete backing shall be disposed into the moulds in a wet state (not dry pressed)

whiles the facing is still wet.

Projections shall be rubbed off the faces shall be of even colour and free from

blemishes, cracks and other imperfections. Salient angles shall be arras rounded.

4.6.4. Steel Work

4.6.4.1. Governing Codes and Standards

SANS Specifications

SANS 10094 The use of high strength friction grip bolts and nuts

SANS 135 ISO metric bolts, screws and nuts (hexagon and square) (coarse

thread free fit series)

SANS 136 ISO metric precision hexagon-head bolts and screws, and hexagon

nuts (coarse thread medium fit series)

SANS 435 Mild steel rivet

BS Specifications

BS-EN 287 Part 1 Approval testing of welders/fusion welding

BS-EN 288 Part 3 Specification and approval of welding procedures for metallic

materials

BS 5135 Metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels

BS 4360/SANS 50025 Weldable structural steel

BS 2573 Part 1 Classification, stress calculations and design of structures

BS 3923 Methods for ultrasonic examination of welds

BS 2600 Radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints in steel





Other Specifications

ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel

DIN 1026 Metric channels

ISO R657 Angles

4.6.4.2. Structural Steelwork

All existing structural steel members surfaces shall be detergent washed and fresh water rinsed to remove

all oil, grease and surface contaminates.

The design of all structural steelwork shall be such as to provide a robust and rigid structure requiring

the minimum of maintenance and providing a long service life.

In the design of steel structures, due cognisance shall be taken of environmental and wind load conditions

as specified in the main specification.

Due to the highly corrosive conditions experienced in South African Ports, the permissible stresses shall

not exceed those set out in British Standard No. 2573. The minimum thickness of steel for load bearing

members shall be 15mm for gussets, 10mm for angles, tees, plates and flats and 9mm for webs of

channels and joists. Punching of holes over and above that permitted in BS 2573, shall not be permitted.

Other structural steel shall be of not less than 6 mm thickness.

The design of mobile structures shall be such that the induced von Mises stress (effective stress in triaxial

loading) will not exceed 90% of the elastic limit strength of the steel when the equipment is travelling at

maximum speed and colliding with either other stationary equipment or fixed stop blocks. In calculating

von Mises stresses, due cognisance must be taken of stress concentrations. If the elastic limit strength

of the steel is not known, it will be determined by using a 0.5% strain offset on the stress-strain curve

of the material.

Where applicable, the design may be in bolted, riveted or welded box construction except that no site

welding will be permitted in the final erection at the port except with the approval of TNPA

Alternatively, a welded hollow section lattice type structure will be acceptable, subject to the following

requirements:

The members must be structural sections made from BS 4360/SANS 50025 grade S355JR / 43C

weldable structural steel - welded for sizes up to and including 110mm outside diameter (BS 1775

HFW) - seamless for sizes over 110mm outside diameter (BS 1775 HFS).

Tube wall thickness must not be less than 6mm.





All joints must be completely seal welded in accordance with BS 5135. Special care must be taken

to prevent the ingress of moisture into hollow section members by ensuring that each member is

airtight.

Bolted or screwed attachments which require drilled holes through a hollow section will not be

permitted.

Non-hollow structural sections and plate used on the structure, in conjunction with the hollow

section framework, must comply with the relevant requirements of this specification.

All steel sections shall be manufactured in accordance with the following standards :-

Weldable structural steel : BS 4360/SANS 50025

I and H sections : BS 4 Part 1

Metric channels : DIN 1026

Structural steel, hot rolled sections : BS 4 Part 1

Angles : ISO - R657

Hot finished hollow sections : BS 4848 Part 2

Cold formed sections : BS 6363

Forgings : BS 29

Steel castings : BS 3100

Cast iron : BS 1452

All steel plates and rolled steel sections used in the construction of the structures shall be of steel made by

the open hearth process (acid or basic) and shall comply in every respect with BS 4360, "A" quality Structural

Steel for Bridges and General Building Construction, Grade 43A or Grade 50B or SANS 50025 grade S355JR,

where sections sizes allow. That is, the percentage of phosphorous and sulphur shall not exceed 0,06.

The above is laid down as a standard, but tenders will also be considered for rolled steel not conforming

strictly to the above standard. Full particulars of the guaranteed properties of the steel tendered for should

in this case be furnished, i.e. chemical composition, tensile strength, yield point, reduction in area, bend

tests, etc.

Forgings and drop forgings shall be free from flaws and surface defects of any kind and be accurately finished

to the prescribed dimensions.

Steel castings shall be sound, clean and free from all defects and distortion of any kind and should, except

where otherwise specified, conform with the conditions and tests specified in B.S. No. 3100/Latest Edition,





for grades A, B and C according to requirements. They shall be thoroughly annealed and all working parts

and bearing surfaces shall be machined and turned accurately with correct finish.

Cast iron used throughout must be close grained, tough and free from all defects, and shall conform to the

conditions and tests specified in B.S. 1452/Latest Edition, for grades 12 to 14 according to requirements.

This applies to functional components only. A lower grade is acceptable for portal and machinery house

ballast. Tenderers to state grade of cast iron proposed.

The dimensional and out-of-square tolerance as specified in the above Standards shall also apply to built-up

components. Edge preparations, welding techniques, straight beds and material fit-up shall be considered

when welded joints are designed.

The shape of all members and connections must allow easy accessibility for maintenance painting of all

surfaces. No members shall comprise a double member which cannot be painted and maintained.

Structural details must be so designed as to eliminate or seal off any cavities or pockets where water or

condensation could collect and promote corrosion. Horizontal members with upstanding flanges require

special drainage.

All hollow sections shall be completely closed and airtight, and all welding is to be of such size and quality as

to ensure complete airtightness. No tapping or drilling of holes into sealed sections will be permitted.

4.6.4.3. Welding

All the provisions of BS 5135 shall be complied with as far as applicable.

Design of weld joints shall be such that crevices, overlaps, pockets, arc strikes and dead ends do not exist.

All joints shall be completely seal welded in accordance with BS 5135. Special care must be taken to prevent

the ingress of moisture into the tubular members by ensuring that each such tubular member is airtight.

“Stitch” welding will not be permitted. Only continuous welding will be accepted.

Weld cracks, undercut, or pock marks will not be accepted.

All welds on the load bearing frame structure, containers, piping, pipe line flanges, etc., shall be continuous

and shall be visually inspected for cracks and other discontinuities.

Welds on the main chords must be tested ultrasonically in accordance with BS 3923 or X-rayed in accordance

with BS 2600 and those on minor joints by the dye-penetrant method. The equipment required for these

tests must be supplied by the Contractor and the testing done at his cost.

Steel, except in minor details, which has been partially heated, shall be properly annealed. (Electrically welded

structural members excepted.)





All brackets, clamps, lugs, straps, suspenders, etc. required for attaching mechanical and electrical equipment

must be welded on prior to erection and special precautions must be taken not to damage welds or puncture

tubes during erection.

The welding of all rails shall be done by an approved method.

Welding shall only be carried out by a coded welder according to SANS 10044, BS-EN 287 Part 1 and BS-EN

288 Part 3 or ANSI/AWS D1.1.

All parts to be welded shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried before welding. The welding will only be done

in dry surroundings and all steps taken to prevent hydrogen embrittlement.

Where materials of different compositions are joined by welding, especially carbon steel to chrome steel, the

filler welding method and post welding treatment shall be such that embrittlement and other degradation

of both steel and filler is prevented.

It must be ensured that welded joints are ductile.

4.6.4.4. Fasteners

All bolts, nuts and rivets shall be manufactured in accordance with the following standards:-

Commercial bolts and nuts Grade 4.6 : SANS 135

Precision bolts and nuts Grade 8.8 : SANS 136

Friction Grip Bolts and nuts Grade General : SANS 10094

Rivets : SANS 435

All friction grip fasteners shall be hot dip galvanised, including high tensile bolts (and their nuts and washers),

structural rivets and Huck bolts.

All holding down bolts and nuts and brackets, as well as all fixing bolts, studs, nuts and washers shall be of

stainless steel. Fixing rivets shall be of either stainless steel or brass.

Bolts and set screws shall be locked in an approved manner and shall not be stressed in tightening to beyond

the recommended loads.

The quality of friction grip bolts, nuts and washers, bolt lengths, sizes of holes, tightening standards, surface

condition of clamped components, shop and site assembling and acceptance inspection of friction grip joints

shall comply with the latest edition of SANS 10094. Certificates shall be supplied for all bolts of grade 8.8

and 10.9.

All bolt and rivet holes must be accurate to size and location, the centres of holes shall not be placed nearer

the edge of a plate than 1,5 diameters with an extra allowance of 3mm for sheared edges. All holes in the





structural work shall be drilled or otherwise punched to a diameter not exceeding 1,5mm less than the

diameter of the finished hole on the die side, and afterward reamed out to the exact size

Where possible the adjoining parts forming a connection shall be drilled or reamed together, with holes not

exceeding 1,5 mm diameter the rivet or bolt for which it is made. No rough or broken edge shall be left

around any of the holes.

For turned and fitted bolts, the holes shall be accurately drilled or reamed; the diameter of the hole shall not

exceed the finished diameter of the bolt by more than 0,25mm.

The holes, after assembly of the parts, shall be true throughout the thickness of all the parts and

perpendicular to the axis of the member.

Rivets shall be cup-headed or countersunk as required, unless otherwise specified. No rivet head shall

contain less metal than does a length of the rivet equal to 1,25 times its diameter. All loose and defective

rivets shall be cut and replaced by sound ones; also others when required for the purpose of examining the

work. Rivets shall be driven with pressure tools whenever possible and pneumatic hammers shall be used

in preference to hand driving.

All field rivets must be supplied with shanks of suitable length for pneumatic riveting.

Bolts shall be of such a length as to accommodate a full nut when tightening up, and project at least two

thread pitches beyond the nut. Excessive projection of threads beyond the nuts should be avoided.

All bolts having countersunk heads shall have strong feathers forged on the neck and head to prevent turning

and the bolt holes shall be cut to receive same. All nuts and bolts (excluding countersunk bolts) shall be

furnished with circular washers of sufficient thickness, the outside diameter being at least twice the nominal

diameter of the bolt, and washers fitted correctly.

Where bolt heads or nuts are seated on bevelled surfaces of beams or channel flanges, bevelled washers

must be inserted.

4.6.4.5. Joints and Mating Surfaces of Members

Mating surfaces of members to be joined by high tensile steel bolts in friction grip shall be cleaned and

primed as specified for the rest of the steelwork. Mating surfaces shall lay flat against each other to eliminate

gaps which may allow ingress of water. After joining, the edges shall be sealed with an approved brand of

Butyl/ Rubber sealing compound by means of a suitable caulking gun, or shall be seal welded.

Other joints shall be formed by one of the following methods:

The mating surfaces of members shall be blast cleaned, primed and protected prior to sub-assembly by the

liberal application of caulking compound. While the compound is still wet, the members shall be bolted

together and caulking compound which is squeezed out shall be completely removed.





The mating surfaces shall be protected with the full corrosion protection system as specified, the surfaces

joined together and the joint so formed shall be sealed with butyl rubber sealer.

After being cleaned and primed the surface shall be joined together and the joint so formed shall be seal

welded.

The primer coating on mating surfaces must be applied not more than 4 hours after cleaning and the edges

must be sealed within 3 weeks of assembly of the part.

4.6.4.6. Fabricated Parts

All fabricated parts shall be properly fitted during assembly to result in properly aligned equipment having

a neat appearance. Fabrications of load bearing members shall have no abrupt changes in cross section

and regions of severe stress concentration. All sharp corners accessible by personnel during erection or

operation shall be ground, rounded, or removed by other methods. Burrs, welding spatter and stubs of

welding wire shall be removed.

4.6.4.7. Ballast or Counter Mass

Tenderers must include for the supply of all necessary ballast or counter mass.

These must preferably be of cast iron and be removable for maintenance of structural steelwork.

Concrete ballast is not recommended but will be accepted provided the Tenderer satisfies Transnet that it

will not cause corrosion of any steel parts.

Fastenings used for removable pieces must be of non-corrosive material.

Ballast must be in suitable shapes to be secured in position against movement but in sizes easily removable

for maintenance.

Lifting hooks or eyes of non-corrosive material and of adequate strength must be provided in the removable

ballast pieces.

Concrete ballast must be reinforced so as to prevent cracking or breaking, and must be coated with an

approved corrosion protection system for concrete.

4.6.4.8. Corrosion Protection (Specification HE9/2/8 - [Version 16] - July 2002)

4.6.4.8.1. Scope

Structural steelwork in coastal area (within 10km from coast):

Structural steelwork is to be protected against corrosion as follows:

This specification covers requirements for protective coating of iron and steel structures,

electrical motors, gear boxes etc. against corrosion and must be read in conjunction with

the main specification as well as the following (latest editions):-





SANS 10064 "Preparation of steel surfaces for coating"

SABS 121 "Hot-dip (galvanized) zinc coatings"

SANS 1091 "National colour standards for paint"

BS 5493 "Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures

against corrosion"

4.6.4.8.2. Types of Corrosion Protection to BE USED

The coatings specified in this specification are chosen according to BS 5439, Table 3,

part 9, to ensure that the condition of the surface will be at least RE2 on the European

scale of degree of rust, after 10 years in an environment of frequent salt spray,

chemicals and polluted coastal atmosphere. During the 10 years, the normal

maintenance painting will be done.

The paint manufacturer shall guarantee the paint for at least 10 years.

Should a tenderer wish to offer coating systems other than those specified, as an

alternative, he shall submit full technical details and a list comparing all appropriate

details of the alternatives proposed, with the original specified.

Tenderers must ensure that the different coats they offer in their tenders are

compatible with each other.

The coating of proprietary items must be done according to Clause 3.

All galvanized components including bolts and nuts but excluding walkway gratings,

must be painted with the specified system, unless otherwise approved.





The following coating systems must be used unless otherwise specified in the main

specification:-

Substrate Coat

No

Generic

Description

Approved Brand Products Dry Film

Thickness

(m)

3CR12 steel 1 Surface tolerant

epoxy primer

DULUX /SIGMA

Sigmacover primer

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Intergard 269

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS) Carboline 193 Primer

65-75

2 Two component

recoatable,

polyurethane

finish (Gloss)

DULUX / SIGMA Sigmadur gloss

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Interthane 990

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS) Carboline 134

65-75

Galvanized

Steel

1 Surface tolerant

epoxy primer

DULUX /SIGMA- Sigmacover primer

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Intergard 269

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS) Carboline 193 Primer

65-75

2 Two component

recoatable,

DULUX /SIGMA- Sigmadur gloss

INTERNATIONAL

65-75





polyurethane

finish (Gloss)

(PLASCON)

Interthane 990

STONCOR


Mild steel 1 Two component

self-curing

inorganic zinc

ethyl silicate OR

two component

zinc rich

polyamide cured

epoxy primer

DULUX /SIGMA- Sigma MC60 OR

Sigma-cover primer

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Interzinc 233 OR

Interzinc 52 or 53

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS) Carbo Zinc 11 OR

Carbo-line 658 Primer

65-75

2 Flexible

recoatable high

build polyamide

cured MIO epoxy

DULUX/SIGMA – Sigmacover CM MIO

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Interseal 010 MIO

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS) Carboline 190 HB M.I.O.

or Carboline 193 M.I.O.

125-150

3 Two component

recoatable,

polyurethane

finish (Gloss)

DULUX/SIGMA Sigmadur gloss

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Interthane 990

STONCOR


65-75

The paint manufacturer's recommendations for the application of the different coating





systems, curing time before handling or application of subsequent coats, health and

safety recommendations etc. must be carefully adhered to.

Paint contractors must have a quality management system which must be submitted

to the Engineer for approval before commencement of the work.

Galvanizing shall be done to SANS 121 heavy duty hot dip galvanizing to a thickness

of at least 85m. Electroplated components in zinc or cadmium are not acceptable.

All mounting bolts, nuts, washers and brackets as well as all fixing bolts, studs nuts

and washers shall be of stainless steel. Fixing rivets shall be of either stainless steel

or brass.

High tensile bolts for friction grip joints must be hot dip galvanized and painted. High

tensile bolts must be certificated after galvanizing.

The full paint system shall be applied to all surfaces which are to be covered with

wear pads, linings etc.

For steelwork which will be transported over long distances and erected on site the

two pack epoxy primers is preferred.

4.6.4.8.3. Propriety Items

Proprietary items such as gearboxes, motors, brakes etc. must either be painted

according to this specification or where the coating system is equal to or exceeds this

specification sufficient proof of the coating system applied must be provided. Items which

are nearly equal to this specification shall be given a finishing coat according to this

specification's thicknesses and final colours and to the following procedure:

A cross cut test must be done to SANS SM159 to determine if the original coating

adheres correctly to the substrate;

The original coating shall be rubbed down to remove any smooth finishing to form a

suitable key for the finish coat and any damaged areas prepared and patch primed

with a suitable primer;

The item must then be detergent washed to remove any foreign matter, taking care

that no dust, solvent etc. contaminates any working part of the item;

A test shall be done on the existing coat to ensure that the finish coat will not react

with and cause undue dissolving and lifting of the existing coat. This can be done by

applying a small quantity of the finishing coat thinners.

Should any undue dissolving or lifting occur, a suitable intermediate or barrier coat





must be applied before the finishing coat is applied.

Proprietary items which failed the cross cut test and which generally have inadequate

protection shall be dismantled and the full corrosion protection specification applied.

4.6.4.8.4. Surface Preparation

All steel surfaces shall be detergent washed and fresh water rinsed to remove all oil,

grease and surface contaminates before shot blasting.

Sharp edges shall be radiused and major roughness of welds shall be removed by

grinding. Welding spatter and flux shall be removed.

Components manufactured from hot rolled steel sections and steel plate shall be blast

cleaned to base metal in accordance with SANS 10064 grade SA2½ - very thorough

blast cleaning, to remove all mill scale, rust, weld spatter etc.

o “Sharp” chilled iron shot, chilled iron grit, or granular abrasive slag is to be used

to produce a proper degree of surface roughness.

o Blast profile shall be determined by micrometre profile gauge, Keane-Tator surface

profile comparator or Testex press-o-film.

o The profile height shall be between 40 and 50m at any point.

Good quality blast cleaning and spray painting equipment shall be used. Air used for

spraying and blast cleaning shall be free from all traces of oil, water and salinity.

Water and oil traps must be fitted to all equipment.

Wheel abrading equipment shall not be used unless an angular profile the same as

clause 4.3.3 is achieved.

When wet blasting is done the primer shall be applied before oxidization starts or

surface contamination occurs.

Components manufactured from 3CR12 steel shall be lightly abraded. The

components shall then be passivized by using a mixture of 10 - 15% nitric acid in

water which is rinsed off after 10 - 15 minutes. The surface shall be neutralized to

pH 7 before it is coated.

Hot-dip galvanized components, galvanized bolts and nuts etc. shall be lightly

abraded with a galvanizing pre-cleaner. The components shall then be washed with

detergent and water and washed down with clean water until a water break free

surface is achieved. Allow to dry thoroughly.





4.6.4.8.5. Joints and Mating Surfaces of Members

Mating (faying) surfaces of members which have to be joined by high tensile steel

bolts in friction grip shall be cleaned according to Clause 4 and painted with primer

only.

o After being assembled joints so formed shall be seal welded and painted or after

the intermediate coat was applied the edges shall be sealed with an approved

brand of paintable flexible sealant or mastic (e.g. Butyl rubber, polyurethane

sealer or two component epoxy), by means of a suitable caulking gun.

All rivets, bolts, welds, sharp edges etc. must be covered with a "stripe coat" of the

primer or intermediate coat specified to ensure the correct dry film thickness on sharp

edges, as well as sealing of bolt threads to head etc.

All other mating surfaces must be sealed with an approved brand of flexible Butyl

rubber, paintable Silicone, polyurethane sealer or two component epoxy sealer, and

joined while still wet. All excess compounds must be completely removed.

4.6.4.8.6. Painting Procedures

Directly before the application of paint, the area to be painted shall be degreased

with a suitable degreaser and left to dry.

Paint shall only be applied under the following conditions:-

o There is adequate light.

o The steel temperature is between 5 and 50°C and at least 3°C above the dew

point of the air.

o The relative humidity of the air is between the limits specified by the paint supplier.

o Wind does not interfere with the method used and sand and dust cannot be blown

onto wet paint.

Steelwork shall be supported on trestles, at least 900 mm off the ground for painting

purposes.

An adequate number of test readings shall be taken per square meter in order to

determine the dry film thickness.

o The paintwork shall be acceptable if the average of the test readings taken falls

within or exceeds the ranges given.

o Paintwork shall not be acceptable if any single test reading is less than the





specified minimum thickness.

An ultrasonic or electronic magnetic flux thickness measurement gauge shall be used,

but in case of dispute, destructive testing shall be applied. The painted steelwork shall

present a clean, neat appearance of uniform colour and gloss as applicable to the

paint used. Each coat of paint shall be applied as a continuous, even film of uniform

thickness. More than one application of paint may be required to achieve the dry film

thicknesses specified or to obliterate the colour of the previous coating.

The use of thinners or solvents at any stage of the work is prohibited, unless specified

by the paint manufacturer.

Precautions shall be taken to prevent coatings from being applied to equipment

nameplates, instrument glasses, signs etc.

4.6.4.8.7. Colour Codes

Machinery and equipment shall be painted in the following final colours:-

Area Colour Code No. [SABS

1091 and

International No's]

Mobile equipment (cranes, loaders etc.)

a) Structure, machinery and electrical houses,

operator’s cabins, chutes, hoppers etc.

Transnet White RAL 9016

b) Undercarriage, travel bogies, rubber tyred

rims

Transnet dark grey RAL 7024

(Graphitgrau)

SABS 1091 GO4

(Bluegrey)

BS 381C-633

Industrial buildings, conveyor structures

a) Roofs and canopies Pantone cool grey 10 RAL 7037

(Staubgrau)

b) Painted walls Pantone cool grey 3 RAL 7035

(Lightgrau) or





SABS 1091 G62

(Pale grey)

c) Steel columns, rafters, trusses

Pantone cool grey 5 RAL 7004

(Signalgrau)

General

a) Guards Golden yellow SABS 1091-B49

RAL 1003

b) Sheaves Orange RAL 2008

c) Cable reels (Stainless steel) Orange RAL 2008

Machine buffers and parts of machine which

could constitute a serious hazard

Golden Yellow (High Gloss)

with Luminous green stripes

in chevron pattern

SABS B49 and

Luminous green






1091 and

International No’s]

e) Any exposed rotating part of machinery,

electrical Switch-gear (other than starting and

stopping devices and emergency stop

control), electrical services e.g. conduit and

allied fittings

Light Orange (High Gloss) SABS 1091 B26

BS 381C-557

f) Low voltage switchgear panels where

orange is not aesthetically acceptable

Light grey SABS 1091-G29

BS 381C-631

g) Medium voltage cable trays, switchgear

and motors (3,3 kV and up)

Oxford Blue SABS FO2

BS 381C-105

RAL5003

h) Starting devices, low voltage cable trays

and switchgear

Mid Brunswick green (high

gloss)

BS 381C-228

SABS1091-EO4

RAL6005

i) Parts of stationary machinery (Electrical,

motors, gearboxes, brakes, transformers,

etc.])

Light Grey SABS G29

BS 381C-631

j) Hand levers, hand wheels, oiling points,

handrails on walkways, ladders

Golden Yellow (High Gloss) SABS 1091 B49

BS 381C-356

k) Stopping devices, grease points , motor

fan covers and danger signs (not symbolic

safety signs for which see SABS 1186)

Signal red (High Gloss) SABS 1091 A11

BS 381C-537

RAL3001

l) Walkways (non slip surfaces) (galvanized

gratings not to be painted)

Shop floor green

m) Informatory signs and notices (not

symbolic safety signs for which see SABS

1186)

White on Emerald Green

(High Gloss)

White on

SABS 1091 E14

BS 381C- 228






1091 and

International No’s]

Pipe lines

a) Reclaim water piping Aluminium

b) Slurry pipe lines Dark admiralty grey SABS 1091-G12

c) Fire protection piping Signal red SABS 1091-A11

d) Washwater drain pipes Light grey SABS 1091-G29

e) Instrument air White with Strong blue band White and SABS

1091-F11

f) Plant air White with Flag blue band White and SABS

1091-FO4

g) Potable water Grass green SABS 1091-D14

Colour bands for pipes shall be 75 mm wide for pipe sizes up to 150 mm diameter

and 100 mm wide for 150 mm and above. The colour bands shall be applied to the

pipe flanges, valves, junctions, walls or structures etc. in such a manner that the pipe

may be easily identifiable. On straight sections the maximum spacing shall be 100 x

the pipe diameter.

4.6.4.8.8. Field Touch-up Painting

Damaged and unpainted areas, fasteners, welds, etc. shall be cleaned by wire

brushing with hand tool or power tool in a manner which will minimize damage to

sound paint. Grinding will not be allowed. Rust spots shall be cleaned to bright

metal. Thick edges of old paint abutting on bare metal surfaces shall be feathered

by scraping and sanding.

Where welding is required on areas already coated with the coating system, the coat

should be stepped back for ± 30mm around the weld area.

The paint shall be applied to match the original coats in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations for the specific paint system.

Note: Inorganic zinc primers shall not be re-covered with an inorganic primer, but

only with an organic zinc primer.

Areas of damaged galvanizing shall be repaired with an approved cold galvanizing





product or metal sprayed by the wire spraying process with Zinc, and then touched

up with the specific paint system.

4.6.4.8.9. General

All walkways, floors, maintenance platforms etc. must be painted with a durable, non-

skid coating of the appropriate colour.

Exposed machined surfaces must be coated with a strippable corrosion inhibitor (e.g.

Tectyl).

Where different materials will be in contact with each other and galvanic corrosion

can occur the contact areas of the materials must be isolated from each other or the

joints made water proof to prevent ingress of moisture.

All components must be designed with corrosion prevention in mind and specifically

the following:-

No entrapment of dirt, product, moisture etc.

No areas must be inaccessible for maintenance such as too narrow gaps etc.

Large flat areas rather than complicated shapes and profiles.

No sharp corners and discontinuous welds.

Parts of equipment which are exposed to high temperatures must be coated with

the following system:-

Coat

No

Generic Description Approved Brand Products

Dry Film

Thicknes

s (m)

1 Two component self-

curing inorganic zinc

ethyl silicate

DULUX /SIGMA- Sigma MC60

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Interzinc 233

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS) Carbo Zinc 11

65-75

2 Single component high

temperature moisture

DULUX/SIGMA – Sigmatherm Silicate 40





curing silicone with

aluminium flakes

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Intertherm 50

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS)

Carboline 1248

4.6.4.8.10. Maintenance Painting of Structures

Areas which are only lightly corroded must be cleaned by means of high pressure water blasting

or wire brushing by power tool and the following system applied:-

Coat

No

Generic Description Approved Brand Products

Dry Film

Thickness

(m)

1 Surface tolerant two

pack epoxy primer with

aluminium pigments

Dulux/SIGMA Aluprimer

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS)

Carbomastic 15

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Intergard 468

125-150

2 Same as first coat OR

micaceous iron oxide

(MIO) epoxy

DULUX/SIGMA – Sigmacover CM MIO

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Interseal 010 MIO

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS) Carboline 190 HB

M.I.O. or Carboline 193 M.I.O.

125-150





3 Two component

recoatable, polyurethane

finish (Gloss)

DULUX/SIGMA Sigmadur gloss

INTERNATIONAL

(PLASCON)

Interthane 990

STONCOR

(CHEMRITE COATINGS)

Carboline 134

65-75

Alternatively, the Noxyde paint system can be used, consisting of two to three coats

of water based Noxyde paint to achieve a DFT of 350 to 400 microns. Where the

Noxyde system is used on areas other than slightly corroded structural areas, the

following additional requirements must be observed:

o Very smooth surfaces (e.g. 3CR12, stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized

components, bolts, nuts and fittings, and HT bolts): Parts must be thoroughly

degreased using OptiDegreaser, washed down with potable water, and

immediately when dry, a single coat of OptiPrimeAqua applied.

o Paintable flexible sealant/mastic: Only sealant approved by the paint

manufacturer may be used, and an initial coat of OptiPrimeAqua applied over it

before the further coats of Noxyde are applied.

o Bolted/riveted connections: After blasting or and/or cleaning as required, apply a

coat of OptiPrimeAqua and an additional stripe coat of Noxyde, in contrasting

colour, to all bolt/nut and plate edges and crevices.

The adhesion of old coatings must be verified by doing a cross cut adhesion test on

selected areas.

The compatibility of the new paint system on the old coating must be tested and

guaranteed in writing by the paint supplier.

The work and coating system must be guaranteed for a minimum of 12 months.

All heavily corroded areas must be shot blasted to minimum SA2 and the three coat

system indicated in clause 2.6 applied.

Areas where the old coating is still sound need only be high pressure cleaned with a

suitable solvent and coated with one of the primers suggested in clause 10.2 (as tie

coat) and then with one of the top coats suggested in clause 2.6 to get the

appropriate colour and finish. The minimum dry film thickness of this tie coat must





be 75 microns and top coat must be 50 microns, but the previous coating colour shall

be completely obliterated to present a uniform colour.

Note: Inorganic zinc primers shall not be re-covered with an inorganic primer, but

only with an organic zinc primer.

Repairs to the insides of all the enclosed sections of the booms as well as the insides

of the crane legs, sill beams, cross beams, pylon cross bracing members etc. shall be

done as above but the top coat need not be applied.

5 List Of Drawings

5.1 Drawings issued by the Employer

This is the list of drawings issued by the Employer at or before the Contract Date and which

apply to this contract.

Note: Some drawings may contain both Works Information and Site Information.

Description

Drawing No. Revision Description

4223745-2-002-A-LA-0001-01 0A Mess & Ablution - Plans

4223745-2-002-A-LA-0003-01 0A Mess & Ablution- Sections and Elevations

4223745-2-002-A-DE-0001-01 0A Mess & Ablution - Details

4223745-2-002-A-SC-0004-01 0A Mess & Ablution - Schedules

4223745-2-002-A-LA-0004-01 0A Workshop - Plans Sections & Elevation

4223745-2-002-A-SC-0005-01 0A Workshop - Schedules

4223745-2-002-A-SC-0007-01 0A Workshop – Furniture schedules

4223745-2-002-A-LA-0007-01 0A Oil Stores - Plans sections & Elevations

4223745-2-002-A-LA-0008-01 0A Carport - Plans sections & Elevations

4223745-2-101-A-LA-0008-01 0A MHA demolition

4223745-2-002-C-LA-0003-01 0A MHA Facility Combined Services Layout

4223745-2-002-C-LA-0003-02 0A MHA Facility Setting Out Details

4223745-2-002-C-SE-0003-01 0A Stormwater Long Sections

4223745-2-002-C-SE-0003-02 0A Sewer Long Sections

4223745-2-002-C-DE-0003-01 0A Water Details

4223745-2-002-C-DE-0003-02 0A Electrical Details





4223745-2-002-C-DE-0003-03 0A Sewer Details

4223745-2-002-C-DE-0003-04 0A Sewer Connection Details

4223745-2-002-C-DE-0003-05 0A Stormwater Details

4223745-2-002-C-DE-0003-06 0A Transtel Details

4223745-2-002-C-DE-0003-07 0A Rain Water Sump

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0001-01 0A Workshop Lighting and Power

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0002-01 0A Mess and Ablution Lighting

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0003-01 0A Mess and Ablution Power Layout

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0004-01. 0A Electrical Site Plan

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0005-01 0A Workshop/Mess and ablutions Distribution Board

Layout

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0006-01 0A Mess and Ablutions Earthing and Lightning Layout

4223745-2-002-E-LA-0007-01 0A Workshop Lighting Layout

4223745-2-002-M-GA-0004-01 0A MHA-M&A : Air-conditioning & Ventilation layout

4223745-2-002-M-GA-0005-01 0A MHA-M&A : Elevations Air-Conditioning &

Ventilation layout

4223745-2-002-M-GA-0009-01 0A MHA-Workshop: Air-conditioning & Ventilation

layout

4223745-2-002-M-GA-0009-01 0A MHA-Workshop : Elevations Air-conditioning &

Ventilation layout

4223745-2-002-T-LA- 0001-01 0A Workshop: Foundation Layout , Sections & Details

4223745-2-002-T-LA- 0002-01 0A Workshop: Surface Slab Layout, Sections & Details

4223745-2-002-T-LA- 0003-01 0A Mess: Structural Steel Layout, Sections and Details

4223745-2-002-T-LA- 0004-01 0A Workshop: Crawl Beam Layout , Section and

details

4223745-2-002-T-SE- 0001-01 0A High Restriction 3.5 x 7m

4223745-2-002-T-DE- 0001-01 0A Crawl Beam Details

4223745-2-002-T-DE- 0002-01 0A Refuse Area & Oil Store Layout, Section And

Details





SECTION 2

6 Management and start up

6.1 Management meetings

Regular meetings of a general nature may be convened and chaired by the Project Manager as

follows:

Title and

purpose

Approximate

time & interval

Location Attendance by:

Risk register and

compensation events

Weekly TBA Project Manager (and

appropriate delegates),

Supervisor (and appropriate

delegates) and Contractor

(appropriate key persons)

Overall

contract progress and

feedback

Weekly TBA Project Manager (and





SHE meetings Monthly TBA Project Manager (and





Meetings of a specialist nature may be convened as specified elsewhere in this Works Information

or if not so specified by persons and at times and locations to suit the Parties, the nature and the

progress of the works. Records of these meetings are to be submitted to the Project Manager by

the person convening the meeting within five days of the meeting.

All meetings are to be recorded using minutes or a register prepared and circulated by the person

who convened the meeting. Such minutes or register are not to be used for the purpose of

confirming actions or instructions under the contract as these are to be done separately by the

person identified in the conditions of contract to carry out such actions or instructions.

6.2 Documentation Control

In undertaking the ‘Works’ all documentation and data prepared and submitted by the Consultant

shall conform and adhere to the requirements of:-

‘Documentation Submittal Requirements’ Standard (DOC-STD-0001) included in Annexure 01

Programme CAD Standards (ENG-STD-0001) Annexure 02





Note:

A ‘Starter Kit’ containing the standard Project drawing templates shall only be issued upon

Contract Award in electronic ‘native’ format under cover of the Project Transmittal Note.

Each supplier of documentation and data to the Project is responsible for ensuring that all

documentation and data submitted conforms to the Project Standards and data Quality

requirements in terms of numbering, uniqueness, quality, accuracy, format, completeness and

currency of information. Data not meeting the Project Standards and data Quality requirements

will be cause for rejection and returned to the Consultant for corrective action and re-submission.

Should any change be made to documentation or data, which has already been submitted to the

Project, then new or revised documentation or data shall be issued to replace the outdated

information.

All drawings supplied shall comply with the Programme CAD Standards, i.e. ENG-STD-0001.

It is the responsibility of all Project Participants undertaking work on the Project to ensure they

obtain and comply with the relevant requirements to suit their deliverables and Scope of Work.

The Consultant is to ensure that the latest versions of the required application software and a

suitable ‘IT’ Infrastructure are in place to support the electronic transmission of documentation.

Electronic files submitted to the Project shall be clear of known viruses and extraneous “macros”.

The supplier of documentation is required to have, at all times, the latest generation of virus

protection software and up-to-date virus definitions.

All documentation and data created for the Project shall be numbered and named according to

the TCP Codification Procedure. Such numbering is only available from the Project’s Document

Control Group.

The Consultant shall, prior to acceptance of a Purchase Order/Contract, determine that he has

the ability to satisfy the requirements for documentation and data as specified within the

standards, i.e. DOC-STD-0001: ‘Contractor Documentation Submittal Requirements’ and ENG-

STD-0001: Programme CAD Standards.

The Consultant shall be responsible for the supply of all Sub-Supplier/Consultant/Manufacturer,

etc. documentation and data related to their package of work, and shall ensure that these Sub-

Suppliers have the capability to supply the necessary documentation and data in the required

time-frame and quality as outlined in the specified standards prior to awarding sub-orders.

The required format of documentation and data shall as a minimum be as follows:-

Pre-Construction – Hard Copy (full size), PDF and ‘Native’ file format

Construction – Hard Copy (full size), PDF and ‘Native’ file format

Red Lined – Hard Copy (full size) and PDF format

Certified As-Built/Final – Hard Copy (full size), PDF and ‘Native’ file format

The required number of copies of documentation and data shall be specified in the ‘Contractor

Documentation Schedule’ (CDS). The required number of copies shall as a minimum be four (4)

hard copies, with the corresponding PDF and ‘Native’ file formats upon final submission, unless

otherwise specified in the ‘Contractor Documentation Schedule’ (CDS).

The Consultant shall apply “wet signatures” to the original Documentation before scanning the

signed original and prior to formal submission to the Project.

Final issues of all documentation shall be supplied to the Project in “wet signature” format along

with the associated corresponding electronic ‘native files’ and PDF renditions.

The Consultant shall ensure adequate resources are available to manage and execute the

Document Control function as per the requirements of the Project.





The Consultant shall retain copies of all documentation issued in connection with the Project for

a minimum period of five years after the completion of the Construction Phase of the Project.

6.3 Safety risk management

TCP HSS Contractor Requirements – refer to TCP H&S Plan and specification – refer to HAS

–STD -0001.

Classification and Control.

Contaminated area and areas where workers may be exposed to contamination are classified:

Non-controlled. Supervised or Controlled according to the prevailing exposure conditions in such

areas.

The Dry Bulk Terminal site is classified as follows:

Uncontrolled areas: All areas mentioned except:-

Supervised area: Tipplers, Major Transfer station, Phosphate Rock Store (GP3 Shed),

Waste material storage area.

Controlled area: No area at the Dry Bulk Terminal is designated as Controlled.

6.3.1 Classification and Registration of Personnel

All personnel shall be classified as either occupationally exposed persons or non-occupationally

exposed persons according to the definitions and requirements in Sections 8.2 of Annexure D.

The Contractor shall ensure the full registration procedures are adhered to.

6.3.2 Personnel Protective Measures Shall include:

Area Designation and Signposting

Access/Egress Control

Personal protective Equipment Personnel Monitoring and Decontamination

Contamination Control in the Workplace

Prohibited Practices

Eating, drinking and smoking.

Storage of food, beverages, cigarettes inside the shed

Entering shed with open wound and minor cuts and abrasions etc.

Records

Health Records





Training records

Dose Register

Personal Medical Files.

Retention of Records and retention period.

Self-Risk Assessments

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor’s Safety Officer to ensure that all employees

are familiar with performing Self Risk Assessments which shall be performed prior to starting

any job. Self-Risk Assessments should not take longer than three minutes to perform. It

shall be the responsibility of the Site Supervisor to ensure that Self Risk Assessments become

a way of life and are carried out before commencing work.

The question the employee must ask himself:

What work am I about to do?

Are the tools and equipment I am using correct for the job?

Is the work I am about to perform is safe?

If not safe, what actions must I take to make it safe?

What precautions must I take to prevent injury to myself or my colleagues?

Self-Risk Assessments shall be carried out when:

Starting a new job.

At the start of the shift.

After tea or lunch breaks.

When the work routine changes or area of work changes.

Reminders

The Site Supervisor shall remind all employees at the end of the Tool Box Talks to perform

Self Risk Assessments before commencing work.

The Self Risk Assessment is meant to create an awareness of the work area and surrounding

conditions that may influence safety and working conditions at the work place.





Toolbox Talks

Prior to commencement of any work on site each day, the Contractor’s Supervisor shall

inspect the Works; take note of all probable safety and environmental hazards. He shall make

amendments to Risk Assessment if required to, and hold Toolbox Talks with all his personnel,

explicitly explaining the dangers, environmental and safety precautions required for that

particular area.

Minutes of the briefing session shall be taken and names of all attendees recorded and signed

(by attendees) to be made available to the Project Manager.

Health and Safety Requirements

The Contractor and his employees shall have valid safety induction and medical certificates

from a registered Occupational Health Medical Practitioner when accessing or working on site.

Copies of which shall be submitted to the Project Manager at the commencement of the

contract.

Personal Protective Equipment

The following personal protective equipment shall be worn at the Works.

Full overalls

Hard hats

Respirators to protect against inhalation of dust.

Acceptable Hearing Protection to eliminate the amplified sound, jack hammering or

associated concrete breaking/cutting/ equipment

Provision of Safety Glasses/Goggles whichever offers the better protection against dust

entering the eyes.

Sufficient fresh drinking water to replace body fluids and prevent dehydration.

All persons working within TPT shall wear either yellow or orange reflective vests.

Safety Officer – Refer to CR8(5), New Legislation

The Contractor must make provision for a full time Safety Officer on site and be in a possession

of registration with SACPMP or other Professional body.

C2.3. O.H.S. ACT COMPLIANCE





The terms and conditions contained with-in the O.H.S Act 85 of 1993 and applicable

Regulations shall be strictly complied with.

The Contractor shall ensure that all staff on site is in possession of a valid Medical Certificate

from a Registered Occupational Health Medical Practitioner.

The Contactor shall ensure that all staff are in possession of the relevant P.P.E including

reflective vests for visibility and that such P.P.E is in good condition and is worn as

appropriate.

Any person found contravening these provisions may be removed from site. Continued

breach of these regulations may result in action being taken against the Contractor.

All staff working on site shall attend a Safety Induction course at the cost of the Contractor.

The following additional Risks have been identified:

Dust and air born pollutants emanating from the stockpiled material.

The site conditions can be considered as dusty, unpleasant, noisy and dangerous.

Construction activity will be at ground level – A dedicated entry and exit point to the Works

area must be clearly demarcated and sign posted

The wearing of appropriate Personal Protective Equipment is compulsory.

All vehicles, tools and equipment shall undergo decontamination procedures

All site and excavations left open overnight must be clearly barricaded and demarcated.

Controlled entry into the Works to prevent entry by authorised persons.

Earthmoving equipment will be in use. All must have the reverse warning siren operational.

The above risks must be included in the Risk Assessment and included in the Daily Toolbox

talks.

The Contractor must take cognisance of the following site conditions:

The Contractor shall submit a Work Method Statement for each phase of the Works for

approval by the Project Manager prior to commencing with the Works.

All persons entering and working within the construction area must wear the correct Personal

Protective Equipment for the site conditions and reflective vests.





The method and design of barricading and demarcating the Works area must be approved by the

Project Manager prior to erection. The Contractor shall make provision for this when pricing the

tender.

6.4 Environmental constraints and management

6.4.1 The Contractor complies with the following ENV-STD-002 Rev02 (SES):

The Contractor performs the works and all construction activities within the Site and Working

Areas having due regard to the environment and to environmental management practices as

more particularly described within the SES and PES.

The SES describes the minimal acceptable standard for environmental management for a range

of environmental aspects commonly encountered on construction projects and sets

environmental objectives and targets, which the Contractor observes and complies.

The PES may require higher minimal standards than those described in the SES as may be

required by the Project Manager or Others.

The overarching obligations of the Contractor under the CEMP before construction activities

commence on the Site and/or Working Areas is to provide an environmental method statement

for a particular construction operation at the Site and/or Working Area by the Contractor and

where requested by the CM and to comply with the following:

Where relevant, method statements, as detailed in the SES and PES, shall be provided by the

Contractor. These include, but are not limited to, the following where applicable:

Establishment of construction lay down area

Hazardous and non-hazardous solid waste management

Storm water management

Contaminated water management

Prevention of marine pollution

Hydrocarbon spills

Diesel tanks and refuelling procedures

Dust control

Spoil dumping

Sourcing, excavating, transporting and dumping of fill material

Noise and vibration control

Removal of rare, endemic or endangered species

Removal and stockpiling of topsoil

Rodent and pest control

Environmental awareness training





Site division

Emergency procedures for environmental incidents

Contractor’s SHE Officer

Closure of construction laydown area

The Contractor shall ensure that his management, foremen and the general workforce, as well

as all Contractors and visitors to Site have attended the Induction Programme prior to

commencing any work on Site. If new personnel commence work on the Site during construction,

the Contractor shall ensure that these personnel undergo the Induction Programme and are

made aware of the environmental specifications on Site.

Where applicable, the Contractor ensures that he appoints a suitably qualified Subcontractor, to

be approved by the Project Manager, to undertake the “Removal of rare, endemic or endangered

species”. This appointment must be completed at least three weeks before commencement of

any other work on Site.

Declaration of understanding shall be signed and submitted to the CM within 14 days after the

Contract Date.

Where required, one of the first actions to be undertaken by the Contractor shall be to erect and

maintain a temporary fence along the boundaries of the Site and Working Areas as applicable,

and around any no-go areas identified on the layout plans, to the satisfaction of the Project

Manager.

The plant search and rescue (if applicable) must be undertaken and completed prior to any Site

clearance or any other construction activity that may damage the vegetation can commences on

Site.

The Contractor must appoint a sufficient number of named assistants to the CSHEO to monitor

environmental issues e.g. litter, spills, illegal activities, fence patrol, dust etc. These

appointments, along with details of the individuals being appointed and job descriptions, must

be sent to the Project Manager for his approval.

During the construction period, the Contractor complies with the following:

A copy of the SES, and the relevant PES shall be available on Site, and the Contractor shall ensure

that all the personnel on Site (including Subcontractors and their staff) as well as Contractors are

familiar with and understand the specifications contained in the SES (as amended by the PES).

Method statements that are required during construction must be submitted to the Project

Manager for approval at least 20 days prior to the proposed commencement of the activity.

Emergency construction activity method statements may also be required. The activities requiring

method statements cannot commence if they have not been approved by the Project Manager.





The method statements for Completion by the Contractor are contained within Annexure CEMP

– TCP-ENV-STD-002

Where applicable, the Contractor shall provide job-specific training on an ad hoc basis when

workers are engaged in activities, which require method statements.

The Contractor shall ensure that any Materials delivery drivers are informed of all procedures and

restrictions (e.g. which access roads to use, no go areas, speed limits, noise, etc.) required by

the CEMP before they arrive at Site and off load any Materials.

The Contractor shall be responsible for rehabilitating and re-vegetating all areas to the

satisfaction of the Project Manager as detailed in the SES and PES.

The Contractor shall clear and clean the Site and Working Areas and ensure that everything not

forming part of the works is removed from the Site and Working Areas and that all rehabilitation

has taken place in accordance with the PES. An Environmental Closure Certificate per Annexure

5 has been issued by the SHEC and signed off by the Project Manager.

The Contractor complies with environmental inspections and audits as contained within Annexure

ENV-STD-001.

The Contractor makes copies of the CEMP, SES and PES available at the offices of the Contractor

on Site. The Contractor ensures that all personnel on Site (including Subcontractors) are familiar

with and understand the requirements of the CEMP.

6.4.2 The Contractor complies with the following SES:

The Contractor shall identify the kinds of environmental impacts that will occur as a result of his

activities and then prepare separate method statements describing how each of those impacts

will be prevented or managed so that the standards set out in this document are achieved. These

method statements will be prepared in accordance with the requirements set out in the CEMP.

To ensure that environmental issues are taken into account in the establishment of the Site

offices and all other facilities on Site.

Scope

The standard applies to all activities relating to the planning of the Site, Site establishment, and

operation of the Site and closure of the Site.

Site plan

The Contractor shall establish his construction camps, offices, Workshops, staff accommodation

and any other facilities on the Site and Working Areas in a manner that does not adversely affect

the environment. However, before construction can begin, the Contractor shall submit to the

Project Manager for his approval, plans of the exact location, extent and construction details of

these facilities and the impact mitigation measures the Contractor proposes to put in place.





The plans shall detail the locality as well as the layout of the waste treatment facilities for litter,

kitchen refuse, sewage and Workshop-derived effluents. The Site offices should not be sited in

close proximity to steep areas. It is recommended that the offices, and in particular the ablution

facilities, aggregate stockpiles, spoil areas and hazardous material stockpiles are located as far

away as possible from any water course as possible. Regardless of the chosen Site, the

Contractor’s intended mitigation measures shall be indicated on the plan.

Sewage

Particular reference in the Site establishment plan shall be given to the treatment of sewage

generated at the site offices and staff accommodation and at all localities on the Site where there

will be a concentration of labour. Sanitary arrangements should be to the satisfaction of the CM.

Safe and effective sewage treatment will require one of the following sewage handling methods:

septic tanks and soak-aways, dry-composting toilets such as “enviro loos”, or the use of chemical

toilets which are supplied and maintained by a Sub-Contractor. The type of sewage treatment

will depend on the location of the Site and the surrounding land uses, the duration of the contract

and proximity (availability) of providers of chemical toilets. Should a soak-away system be used,

it shall not be closer than 800 metres from any natural watercourse or water retention system.

The waste material generated from these facilities shall be serviced on a regular basis.

Toilets and latrines shall be easily accessible, clearly marked and shall be positioned within

walking distance from wherever employees are employed on the Works. Use of the veld shall

not, under any circumstances, be allowed.

Outside toilets shall be provided with locks and doors and shall be secured to prevent them from

blowing over. The toilets shall also be placed outside areas susceptible to flooding. The Contractor

shall arrange for regular emptying of toilets and shall be entirely responsible for enforcing their

use and for maintaining such latrines in a clean, orderly and sanitary condition to the satisfaction

of the Project Manager.

Effluent Management

All effluent water from the camp / office Sites shall be disposed of in a properly designed and

constructed system, situated so as not to adversely affect water sources (streams, rivers, pans

dams etc.). Only domestic type wastewater shall be allowed to enter this drain.

Waste Management Objective

To ensure that all waste generated during construction and commissioning of the facilities is

properly disposed of.

Examples of typical construction waste which, could be expected on the Site are indicated in the

following table:

TABLE 2: EXAMPLE OF CONSTRUCTION WASTE CLASSIFICATION





WASTE

CLASSIFICATION

HAZARDOUS NON-

HAZARDOUS

Clean soil X

Construction debris contaminated by oil or organic compounds X

Empty drums (depends on prior use) X X

Empty paint and coating containers X

Waste paint and/or solvent X

Waste oil X

Phenolic waste X

Waste concrete X

Rubble (not contaminated by oil or organic compounds) X

Waste containing appreciable properties of fibrous asbestos X

Sewerage sludge X

Scrap metal X

Explosive waste X

Waste timber X

Waste Cable X

PCB waste X

Waste plastic X

Aerosol containers X

Batteries, light bulbs, circuit boards, etc. X X

Domestic waste X

Scope

The standard applies to all construction, commissioning and Site activities that may lead to the

generation of waste.

Approach

Waste is grouped into general or hazardous, depending on its characteristics. The classification

determines handling methods and the ultimate disposal of the Material.

General waste to be expected during construction includes the following:





• Trash (waste paper, plastics, cardboard, etc.) and food waste from offices, warehouses and

construction personnel.

• Uncontaminated construction debris such as used wood and scrap metal.

• Uncontaminated soil and non-hazardous rubble from excavation or demolition.

Hazardous waste is waste, which has the potential, even in low concentrations, to have a significant

adverse effect on public health and/or the environment. This would be on account of its inherent

chemical and physical characteristics, such as toxic, ignitable, corrosive, carcinogenic or other

property.

Waste avoidance and minimisation

A ladder approach to waste management is encouraged. Waste should preferably be managed in

the following order:

• Prevent: by waste avoidance and minimisation during production

• Recycle: waste recycling, recovery and utilisation

• Treat: waste treatment in order to reduce toxicity and to minimise the quantities of waste

• Disposal: waste disposal, probably by incineration, destruction or landfill

Waste Management

The Contractor is responsible for the removal from Site of all waste generated through the

Contractor’s activities. The Contractor shall ensure that all waste is removed to appropriate licensed

waste management facilities.

The classification of waste determines handling methods and the ultimate disposal of the Material.

The Contractor shall manage hazardous wastes that are anticipated to be generated by his

operations as follows:

• Characterise the waste to decide if it is general or hazardous.

• Obtain and provide an acceptable container with label.

• Place hazardous waste material in container.

• Inspect the container on a regular basis as prescribed by the Contractor’s waste environment

management plan.

• Track the accumulation time for the waste.

• Haul the full container to the disposal Site.

• Provide documentary evidence of proper disposal of the waste.

The EO will work in conjunction with the Contractor’s construction safety and industrial hygiene

personnel to create a Contractor’s Hazardous Materials Management Program as per annexure 5.





This program will establish the necessary protocol for proper handling and removal of hazardous

Materials on the Site.

Information on each hazardous substance will be available to all persons on Site with the EO.

Training and education about the proper use, handling, and disposal of the material will be

available to all workers who will be handling the Material.

The EO must be informed of all activities that involve the use of hazardous substances to facilitate

prompt response in the event of a spill or release.

The Contractor shall manage NON-HAZARDOUS / GENERAL WASTE that is anticipated to be

generated by operations as follows:

• Determine if waste is non-hazardous and obtain containers for waste storage.

• Notify waste hauler when container is full so that it can be removed and replaced with an

empty.

• Provide documentary evidence of proper disposal of waste.

On the Project, however, waste generating entities are directed to control the generation of non-

hazardous waste by:

• Eliminating waste generation or reducing the total volume

• Reducing the degree of contamination of waste generated

• Reclaiming materials otherwise considered waste

The Contractor shall therefore recycle NON-HAZARDOUS / GENERAL WASTE that is anticipated to

be generated by its operations as follows:

Obtain and label recycling containers for:

• Office Waste

• Aluminium and steel cans

• Glass Bottles

• Scrap Metals

• Waste Timber

And locate them within temporary office building and trailers

Establish recycled material collection schedule

Arrange for full bins to be hauled away

Spent batteries, circuit boards, and bulbs, while non-hazardous, require special collection and

handling.

Vehicle and Equipment Refuelling Objective





To eliminate / control fuel and oil spillage at refuelling facilities

Scope

The standard applies to all refuelling, lubrication and oil changing requirements on all vehicles and

machinery.

Refuelling

Engine driven compressors, pumps, air conditioners, and arc welders can have small leaks (usually

oil) that can accumulate to become spills, which require clean up. These leaks become more

evident if the equipment remains in the same place for an extended period of time. Damaged fuel

tanks, fuel hoses, and fuel pumps can be sources of significant fuel leaks. Hydraulic systems can

blow gaskets or hoses resulting in large quantities of hydraulic fluid spilled to the ground and under

lock and key arrangements.

Control

No vehicles or machines shall be serviced or refuelled on Site except at designated servicing or

refuelling locations, no oil or lubricant changes shall be made except at designate locations, or in

case of breakdown or emergency repair.

The Contractor shall store fuel and oil at a secure area, which shall be bounded and designed with

a liner or paved surface to prevent spillage from entering the ground.

The Contractor shall provide details of its proposed fuel storage and fuelling facility to the EO for

approval, the design shall comply with the regulations of the Water Act (Act 36 of 1998), the

Hazardous Substances Act (Act 15 of 1973), and the National Environment Management Act (Act

73 of 1989).

Spill Response

The Contractor shall comply with the regulations of the Water Act (Act 36 of 1998), the Hazardous

Substances Act (Act 115 of 1973), and the National Environment Management Act (Act 107 of

1998).

The Contractor shall provide details for approval of its spill response plan in the event of any spills

of fuel, oils, solvents, paints or other hazardous Materials. The plan will show measures to be taken

to remove contaminated soils from Site and demonstrate complete removal of contamination.

The Contractor shall instruct construction personnel on the following spill prevention and

containment responsibilities:

• Repair all leaks of hydrocarbons or chemicals as soon as possible

• Take all reasonable means to prevent spills or leaks

• Do not allow sumps receiving oil or oily water to overflow

• Prevent storm water run-off from contamination by leaking or spilled drums of oil or chemicals





• Do not discharge oil or contaminants into storm sewer system

• If a spill to land occurs, the Contractor is responsible for:

• Immediate action to stop or reduce the spill and contain it

• Actions necessary to prevent the spill from contaminating groundwater or off Site surface water

• Disposal of contaminated Material to location designated thereto.

Any spill to water has the potential to disperse quickly; therefore, the spill must be contained

immediately using appropriate containment Equipment.

If a spill to water occurs, the Contractor is responsible for:

• Immediate action to stop or reduce the spill and contain it

• Notifying the appropriate on-Site authorities

• Actions necessary to prevent the spread of the contamination by deploying booms and/or

absorbent Material

• Proper disposal of spilled Material

Dust Management

Objective

The Contractor (associated with activities such as earthworks, geotechnical surveys, piling, storm

water drainage, construction of roads and railways, foundations, brick building, operating

Workshops, fencing, erecting construction camps, and batch plant activities, etc.) shall submit a

dust control plan for approval by the EO.

Scope

Control of dust on the construction Site and access roads

Dust Management

Material in transit should be loaded and contained within the load bin of the vehicle in such a way

as to prevent any spillage onto the roads and the creation of dust clouds. If necessary, the load

bin of the vehicle shall be covered with a tarpaulin to prevent dust.

Dust to be controlled on unsurfaced access roads and Site roads using sprayed water. The

Contractor is responsible for managing dust generated as a result of his activities. The CM will be

responsible for the dust control of the Site and Working Areas.

Some dust control measures, which are normally applied during construction, are presented in this

section for inclusion by the Contractor in the Contractor’s dust control method statement.

These dust-mitigating procedures include the following:





• Limit vehicle speeds on unpaved roads to 20 km/h

• Wash the paved surfaces within the construction area twice a week

• Minimise haulage distances

• Apply water to gravel roads with a spraying truck when required

Environmental friendly soil stabilisers may be used as additional measures to control dust on gravel

road and construction area

Dust suppression measures will also apply to inactive construction areas. (An inactive construction

Site is one on which construction will not occur for a month or more.)

Construction Material being transported by trucks must be suitable moistened or covered to

prevent dust generation.

Strip and store topsoil in separate stockpiles with mounds not exceeding 2m in height to, among

other things, to prevent wind-blown dust.

Minimise disturbance of natural vegetation during right-of-way construction (e.g. transmission lines

and erection of fences) to reduce potential erosion, run-off, and air-borne dust.

Implement a system of reporting excessive dust conditions by construction personnel (as instructed

through Environmental Awareness Training).

Water for dust control shall be taken only from approved sources.

Storm Water and Dewatering Management

Objective

To ensure that storm water and dewatering drainage across the Site occurs in a manner that will

negate contamination by oils, fuels, litter and other waste and that will prevent erosion of the

construction terrace.

Scope

All dewatering activities

Storm Water and Dewatering Management

Water is a valuable resource in the area. Both the quality and quantity of water used by the

Contractor should be considered in making resource conservation plans.

Potential construction phase impacts on surface water and groundwater are associated with

construction are run-off and percolation, dewatering activities, and miscellaneous liquid wastes

associated with construction activities.





In general, construction activities may affect water quality and/or quantity of ground water and/or

surface water of the area.

The Contractor shall be aware that, apart from run-off from overburden emplacements and stock

piles, storm water can also be contaminated from batch plants, Workshops, vehicle wash-down

pads, etc., and that contaminates during construction can include hydrocarbons from fuels and

lubricants, sewerage from Employee ablutions, even excess fertiliser from rehabilitation areas, etc.

The Contractor shall take cognisance of the fact that discharges to controlled waters such as the

sea, rivers, or groundwater or to sewerage systems are controlled under the South African Water

Legislation.

Surface run-off

Construction activities such as surface grading and excavation will disturb surface areas on Site.

This will increase the potential for soil erosion and subsequent sediment transport during periods

of precipitation run-off or when excavation dewatering is required. Construction activities also have

the potential to change local surface drainage and sediment transport patterns, Site floodplain

delineation, and percolation rates into the soil.

Dewatering

Dewatering during the groundwork produces a surface water discharge that may require collection

and sedimentation. Dewatering has also the potential to effect groundwater quality and quantity.

Wastewater

Liquid wastes including used solvents, used lubricating oils, chemical flushing agents, spill clean-

up wastes, painting wastes, and concrete mixing drum washings, etc., have the potential to affect

surface water and groundwater quality.

General

Temporary drainage must be established on Site during the construction period and until

permanent drainage is in place. Contractors are responsible for maintaining the temporary drainage

in their areas. The Contractors must provide secondary drainage that prevents erosion

Contractors must effect good housekeeping in their areas to prevent contamination of drainage

water

The Contractor shall clear stagnant water

Specific water Management measures (surface and groundwater) for incorporation by the

Contractor in the CEMP include the following:

• The Contractor shall ensure that no contaminated surface water shall flow off Site as a result

of Contractor operations. Silt traps shall be constructed to ensure retention of silt on site and





cut-off ditches shall be constructed to ensure no run-off from the SITE except at points where

silt traps are provided.

• If applicable, the Contractor shall be responsible for collection, management, and containment

within the Site boundaries of all dewatering from all general Site preparation activities. The

dewatering water shall be contained within the Site boundaries by sequentially pumping or

routing water to and from sub-areas within the Site as the construction activities proceed. No

discharge of dewatering water to off Site land or surface water bodies will be allowed

• On Site drainage shall be accomplished through gravity flow. The surface drainage system

shall consist of mild overland slopes, ditches, and culverts. The graded areas adjacent to

buildings shall be sloped away with a 5% slope. Other areas shall have a minimum slope of

0,2% or as otherwise indicated.

• Ditches shall be designed to carry a 25-years storm event with velocities in accordance to

minimise erosion. Erosion protection shall consist of suitable stabilising surfaces in all ditches

• Culverts shall be designed to ensure passage of the 25-year storm peak run-off flow.

Both structural and non-structural (vegetative) erosion control measures will be designed,

implemented, and properly maintained in accordance with best management practices which will

include the following:

• Scheduling of activities to minimise the amount of disturbed area at any one time

• Implementation of re-vegetation as early as feasible

• Limiting construction traffic and/or avoidance thereof on access roads and areas to be graded

to the extent feasible at drainage ditches.

• Compacting loose soil as soon as possible after excavation, grading, or filling

• Using silt fences, geo-textiles, temporary rip-rap, soil stabilisation with gravel, diversionary

beams or swales, small sedimentation basins, and gravelled roads to minimise transport of

sediment

• Implementing the erosion and sedimentation control plan and ensuring that construction

personnel are familiar with and adhere to the plan

• Managing run-off during construction

The Contractor shall be responsible for checking and maintaining all erosion and sedimentation

controls.

Rehabilitation

Objective





To ensure that all areas affected by the project are appropriately rehabilitated and revegetated in

a manner congruent with the surrounding biophysical environment. The prevention of the spread

of alien invasive species.

Scope

All areas affected by the project including laydown areas.

Rehabilitation

The Contractor shall rehabilitate their laydown area upon Completion of work on Site. A

rehabilitation plan will be submitted to the EO for approval at least six weeks before Completion.

The following are critical issues to be included in that rehabilitation plan:

• Details of soil preparation procedures including proposed fertilisers or other chemicals being

considered for use.

• A list of the plant species that will be used in the rehabilitation process. Note that these should

all be indigenous species, and preferably species that are endemic to the area. The assistance

of an appropriately qualified botanist should be sought in developing this list.

• Procedures for watering the planted areas (frequency of watering, methodology proposed).

• An indication of the monitoring procedures that will be put in place to ensure the successful

establishment of the plants (duration and frequency of monitoring, proposed criteria for

declaring the rehabilitation successful).

• Procedures for the prevention of the establishment and spread of alien invasive species.

Noise Management

Objective

To maintain construction noise at the Site within required limits.

Scope

Construction noise at the construction Site.

Noise Management

Keep all Equipment in good working order

Operate Equipment within its specification and capacity and don’t overload machines

Apply regular Maintenance, particularly with regards to lubrication

Operate Equipment with appropriate noise abatement accessories, such as sound hoods

Noise control measures for incorporation by the Contractor in its noise control plan shall include

the following:





• Ensure that the potential noise source will conform to the South African Bureau of Standards

recommended code of practice, SABS Code 0103:1983, so that it will not produce excessive or

undesirable noise when it is released.

• All the Contractors’ Equipment shall be fitted with effective exhaust silencers and shall comply

with the South African Bureau of Standards recommended code of practice, SABS Code

0103:1983, for construction plant noise generation.

• All the Contractors’ vehicles shall be fitted with effective exhaust silencers and shall comply

with Road Traffic Act (Act 29 of 1989) when any such vehicle is operated on a public road.

If on Site noise control is not effective, protect the victims of noise (e.g. ear-plugs) by ensuring

that all noise-related occupational health provisions are met. (Occupational Health and Safety Act

(Act 85 of 1993).

Normal machine working hours will be 06:00 – 22:00 Monday to Saturday. Outside these hours

machine operations will be subject to approval. This does not define shift hours

Fire prevention

Objective

To minimise the risk of uncontrolled fires.

Scope

All activities on or near the Site that could initiate an uncontrolled fire.

Fire control

Fires shall only be allowed in facilities or Equipment specially constructed for this purpose. A

firebreak shall be cleared and maintained around the perimeter of the camp and office Sites. All

conditions incorporated in the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act shall also

be implemented.

Supply of water for human use

Objective

To ensure that there is an adequate, safe water supply for all personnel on Site.

Scope

Managing the water supply on Site and controlling the abstraction of water from natural resources

in the area.

Collection of water from natural resources

No water for domestic use (drinking water or for bathing or washing) shall be abstracted from any

water resource (stream, river, or dam) without the express permission of the Project Manager.





Such permission shall only be granted once it can be shown that the water is safe for use that

there is sufficient water in the resource to meet the demand, and once permission has been

obtained from the Department of Water Affairs in accordance with the requirements of the Water

Act.

Provision of drinking water

Water for human consumption shall be available at the Site offices and at other convenient

locations on site. The generally acceptable standard is that a supply of drinking water shall be

available within 200m of any point on the construction Site.

Environmental Awareness Training

An Environmental Awareness Program is considered a necessary part of the Construction

Environmental Management Plan for the Project. Training of the appropriate construction

personnel will help ensure that all environmental regulations and requirements are followed to be

defined in the relevant Method Statement to be prepared by the Contractor.

Objectives of environmental awareness training are:

• Environmental Management – protecting the environment from the effects of construction by

making personnel aware of sensitive environmental resources

• Regulatory compliance – complying with requirements contained in project – specific permit

conditions, also complying with requirements in regional and local regulations

• Problem recognition and communication – training personnel to recognise potential

environmental problems, i.e. spills, and communicate the problem to the proper person for

solution

• Liability control - non-compliance with regulatory requirements can lead to personal and

corporate liability.

All individuals on the Project construction Site will need to have a minimum awareness of

environmental requirements and responsibilities. However, not all need to have the same degree

of awareness. The required degree of knowledge is greatest for personnel in the Safety, Health,

and Environmental Sections and the least for the manual personnel.

The Contractor shall keep a record of all the environmental related training of the personnel.

Roles and responsibilities

The roles and responsibilities of the various personnel acting on behalf of the Project Manager with

respect to environmental issues are as stated in the paragraphs following:

Construction Manager





The CM is responsible (in the context of the CEMP only) for environmental management on the

Site and Working Areas and reports to the Project Manager. The CM acts on behalf of the Project

Manager.

The CM specific tasks (in the context of the CEMP) include:

• Reviewing the monthly reports compiled by the Environmental Officer

• Identifying the need for remedial measures with regard to proposed Works

• Communicating directly with the Contractor

• Issuing non-conformance notification to the Contractor for items do not comply with the

requirements as set out in the CEMP

Project Environmental Manager

The PEM is responsible for ensuring that the Contractor complies with the CEMP and its associated

documents. The PEM acts on behalf of the Project Manager.

The PEM specific tasks include:

• Liaison with the authorities, when required

• Preparation of the project specific Project Environmental Specification

• Review reports from the Employer’s Environmental Officer

• Chair any environmental incident and environmental non-conformance enquiries

• Ensure induction material includes project appropriate environmental issues

• Approve environmental training programmes and other awareness initiatives

• Conduct Quarterly audits on the construction site and the Employer’s Environmental Officer to

determine how effectively the CEMP is being implemented

The PEM will be responsible for the following deliverables:

• Quarterly audits of construction site compliance with the CEMP

Environmental Officer

The EO is responsible for conducting day-to-day tasks required to ensure the CEMP is correctly

implemented at the Site and Working Areas. The EO reports to the PEM.

The EO will typically conduct the following tasks:

• Prepare site environmental induction programmes to all staff of the Contractor.

• Monitor the Contractor’s compliance with the CEMP on site.

• Conduct monthly observation and environmental audit of the Contractor and all work areas.





• Ensure that all environmental monitoring programmes (sampling, measuring, recording, etc.,

when specified) are carried out according to protocols and schedules.

• Measurement of completed work (e.g. areas top-soiled, re-vegetated, stabilised, etc.).

• Maintain site documentation related to environmental management (permits, CEMP, method

statements, reports, audits, monitoring results, receipts for waste removal, etc.).

Documentation to be maintained on the relevant site Document Control System.

• Attendance at scheduled SHE meetings and project coordination meetings.

• Inspect and report on environmental incidents and check corrective action.

• Keep a regular photographic record of all environmental incidents.

• Implementation of environmental-related actions arising out of the minutes from scheduled

meetings.

The Contractor complies with the CEMP, SES and PES. The Contractor abides by the instructions

of the Project Manager regarding the implementation of the CEMP.

Lines of Communication

The following personnel act on behalf of the Project Manager and may communicate directly with

the Contractor and his key persons with respect to the CEMP:

• Construction Manager (CM)

• Project Environmental Manager (Proj EM)

• Environmental Officer (EO)

All communication must be copied to the Project Manager.

6.5 Quality assurance requirements

6.5.1 The Contractor shall have, maintain and demonstrate its use to the Project Manager (and/or the

Supervisor to satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 7.4, 7.5, 3.2.1 and 3.2.8 as appropriate)

the documented Quality Management System to be used in the performance of the works. The

Contractor’s Quality Management System shall conform to International Standard ISO 9001 (or

an equivalent standard acceptable to the Project Manager).

6.5.2 The Contractor submits his Quality Management System documents to the Project Manager as

part of his programme under ECC Clause 31.2 to include details of:

Project Quality Plan for the contract;

ISO 9001:2015 certificate

Quality Policy

Index of Procedures to be used/method statements ; and

Quality Control Plans (QCPs)





Quality qualifications for Quality Manager and Officers.

6.5.3 The Contractor develops and maintains a comprehensive register of documents that will be

generated throughout the contract including all quality related documents as part of its Quality

Plan.

6.5.4 The Project Manager indicates those documents required to be submitted for information, review

or acceptance and the Contractor indicates such requirements within his register of documents.

The register shall indicate the dates of issue of the documents with the Project Manager

responding to documents submitted by the Contractor for review or acceptance within the period

for reply prior to such documents being used by the Contractor.

6.5.5 The Project Quality Plan means the Contractor’s statement, which outlines strategy,

methodology, resources allocation, QA and Quality Control co-ordination activities to ensure that

the works meet the standards stated in the Works Information.

6.5.6 Q.C.P’s means all inspections, tests and verification requirements to meet Contractual

obligations, specifications, drawings and related details including destructive and non-

destructive testing, witnessing and hold points.

6.6 Planning constraints

6.6.1 The Contractor’s construction programme shall correspond with the stipulations included in

Section 3 of the Employer’s Works Information, which details the minimum construction

constraints to be considered in providing the Works.

6.6.2 The Contractor’s construction programme shall comply with the stipulations included in Section

6.4 of the Employer’s Works Information, which details the minimum Environmental

Management constraints as imposed on the provision of the Works.


Error! Reference source not found. of the Employer’s Works Information, which details the m

inimum Health & Safety constraints as imposed on the provision of the Works.


Error! Reference source not found. of the Employer’s Works Information, which details the m

inimum Quality Assurance constraints as imposed on the provision of the Works.

6.6.5 The Contractor’s construction programme shall include any reasonable foreseen and

unforeseen constraints, assumptions and conditions which may arise in line with the overall

scope as outlined under but not limited to Section Error! Reference source not found. of t

he Employer’s Works Information.

6.6.6 The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of NEC ECC Clauses 25.1, 27.1 and 27.2 among

others, when providing occupations to the Working Areas to allow for works which will be

undertaken by Others.





6.6.7 Key Dates are detailed in the relevant section(s) of the Works Information will be in accordance

with the dates stipulated within Contract Data Part One; pending approval of Project Manager

and subject to the requirements as stipulated in NEC ECC Clause 25.3.

6.6.8 The Contractor is required to comply with the Employer’s stipulations regarding all required

approvals, permissions, licences and permits, prior to commencing works and or specific

activities.

Programming constraints

6.6.9 The Contractor’s construction WBS shall correspond with the client’s Pricing Data. As a minimum

shall include but not be limited to the following WBS Elements:

Procurement and delivery of all long lead items necessary to provide the Works in

line with the stipulations of the Employer’s Works Information. Long lead items

include but are not limited to; plant, equipment, materials and any other

resources, as required to provide both temporary and permanent works.

Procedure for Contractor’s design submission and approval any portion of the

works and/or plant and equipment as stipulated under section 2.1 of the Works

Information in accordance with stipulations for submission, acceptance and

approval as stipulated under section Error! Reference source not found. of the W

orks Information; including any other additional design requirements and or

alterations in existing design which may stem from the aforementioned.

Correction of Defects, testing and commissioning, as-built, hand-over and close-

out procedures in accordance the Works Information.

All Trades & Headings from the Bill of Quantities are to be captured in the WBS

6.6.10 The Contractor uses Primavera 6 version 8.2 for his programme submissions. In the event that

the Contractor will be using earlier or later/more recent versions of the software, the onus is on

the Contractor to ensure that a conversion is done in order for XER file (soft copy) submissions

to be compatible with Primavera 6 version 8.2.”The Contractor shows on each programme he

submits to the Project Manager, the requirements of the [CEMP, SES, PES and SMP] as

described under the relevant sections of the Works Information, together with the associated

environmental method statements.

6.6.11 The Employer (including the agents of the Employer) operates on Site during dates or timings

when the Contractor has completed certain elements of the Works.

6.6.12 Others operate on Site during dates or timings when the Contractor has completed certain

elements of the Works.





6.6.13 The Contractor’s first accepted programme may be agreed during the pre-contract negotiation

period, and no later than the period stipulated under Contract Data Part One (2 weeks after the

Contract Date).

6.6.14 The Contractor complies with the Employer’s programme, if provided, when he submits his first

programme.

6.6.15 The Contractor shows on his Accepted Programme and all subsequently revised programmes

the critical path or paths and all necessary logic diagrams demonstrating sequence of

operations.

6.6.16 The Contractor presents all programme submissions including but not limited to his tender

programme, first programme and all subsequently revised programmes (see ECC Clauses 31.2

and 32.1) in hard copy and soft copy format; with the programme model being a Level 4

project schedule – decomposed to appropriate levels of detail in order to accurately

substantiate activity duration estimates.

6.6.17 The Contractor shows on his Accepted Programme and all subsequently revised programmes

showing the critical path or paths and all necessary logic diagrams demonstrating sequence of

operations.

6.6.18 The Contractor’s programme shows duration of operations in working days as per the

stipulated definition of the work days and hours under C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

6.6.19 Each programme submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager, is fully Cost and

Resource Loaded (People, Equipment, Plant, Materials & Other Resources).

6.6.20 The Contractor shows on each programme he submits to the Project Manager, the

requirements as listed in the NEC3, ECC, Clause 31.2.

6.6.21 The Contractor attends, participates in and makes a meaningful contribution to, planning

initiation & set–up meetings held during the pre-contract negotiation period and no later than

the period stipulated under Contract Data Part One (2 weeks after the Contract Date); to agree

and set-up - including but not limited to - the first schedule for acceptance; methodology for

calculation of physical progress percentage for the project, monitoring, control and reporting

requirements; proposed templates and planning/scheduling procedures to be complied with for

the duration of the project.

6.6.22 The Contractor shows on each revised programme he submits to the Project Manager a

resource histogram showing planned progress versus actual, deviations from the Accepted

Programme and any remedial actions proposed by the Contractor, including a spreadsheet

identifying instances of resource over-allocation and/or conflicts, accompanied by proposed

resolutions.

6.6.23 The Contractor’s programme shows the following levels:





Level 1 Master Schedule – defines the major operations and interfaces between

engineering design, procurement, fabrication and assembly of Plant and Materials,

transportation, construction, testing and pre-commissioning, commissioning and

Completion.

Level 2 Project Schedule – summary schedules ‘rolled up’ from Level 3 Project

Schedule described below

Level 3 Project Schedule – detailed schedules generated to demonstrate all

operations identified on the programme from the starting date to Completion.

Individual operations will be assigned a code. The Employer notifies any

subsequent layouts and corresponding filters on revised programmes. Activities at

this level should not be longer than one update cycle unless exceptional

circumstances exits justifying longer durations.

Level 4 Project Schedule – detailed discipline/speciality level schedule decomposed

to appropriate levels of detail in order to accurately substantiate activity scope and

activity duration estimates; developed and maintained by the Contractor relating

to all operations identified on the programme representing the daily activities by

each discipline, with activities and operations adequately decomposed in order to

accurately represent the effort required to execute said activity/operation and

support accurate duration estimates.

6.6.24 The Contractor submits revised programmes to the Project Manager at least 1 (one) full

working day prior to progress meetings at fortnightly intervals in addition to the intervals for

submission of revised programmes stated under Contract Data Part One.

6.6.25 A Basis of Programme/Schedule document is provided with each revised programme

submission, which includes but is not limited to:

Basis of latest accepted programme, including an overview of assumptions,

constraints, specific and quantified resource allocations, productivity assumptions

and basis of calculation, identification and justification of general scheduling

provisions such as calendars and working times, lags, date constraints, activity

durations longer than one reporting period, etc.

Description of network logic and sequencing.

Description of general construction approach and proposed impact of and changes

hereto.

Description of approach to allocation, use and management of all resources

dedicated to the project and proposed impact of and changes hereto.

Description of and trend analysis of critical risks as identified through schedule risk

analysis and included in schedule contingency and or Time Risk Allowance

provisions.





Discussion regarding the basis, method of calculation and validity of the critical

path and near critical paths, (interrogate longest path and total float as contained

in the programme for accuracy and validity).

Reporting on change management, i.e. identify and record any deviations/changes

that have taken place within the previous reporting cycle, and their resultant impact

on the remaining works and as identified and highlighted in the current revision of

the programme for acceptance.

Identification critical activities, as well as top 10 near critical activities and

undertake tends analysis on such activities with the aim of identify any deviations

from planned performance.

Identification of any recovery and or mitigation action required in order to

neutralise any deviations.

Reporting and Monitoring

6.6.26 The Contractor attends meetings as included but not limited to section 6.1 of the Employer’s

Works Information.

6.6.27 The Contractor submits programme narrative report to the Project Manager at fortnightly

intervals as well as status/target sheets detailing planned/targeted activities and actuals at in

addition to the intervals for submission of revised programmes stated under Contract Data Part

One.

6.6.28 The Contractor completes an assessment of all activities in progress and to completion to

determine physical percentage complete, forecasted completion dates, deviations from the

Accepted Programme and proposes remedial actions to rectify deviations.

6.6.29 The Contractor submits the programme narrative report detailing the status and performance

of operations on the site and working areas status and performance of operations outside the

Working Areas, man-power histograms, plant and equipment histograms, S-curve of overall

progress, and critical action items (top 10). Report shall indicate “progress this period” and

“progress to date”.

6.6.30 The Contractor’s fortnightly project progress reports (narrative report) includes but is not

limited to:

Level 4 Project Schedule – decomposed to appropriate levels of detail in order to

accurately substantiate activity duration estimates and showing two separate bars

for each task i.e. the primary bar must reflect the current forecast dates and the

secondary bar the latest Accepted programme.

Progress Spreadsheet detailing actual progress achieved (target/planned quantity

versus actual quantity) on current (critical) activities for the previous week, planned

progress for the current week, deviations and proposed recovery for each activity





in question. A 1-week Look Ahead Spreadsheet in line with the aforementioned

stipulations to be included. Priority to be given to identification of critical and near

critical activities, progress and any deviations from planned performance in this

regard.

3-week Look Ahead Schedule showing two separate bars for each task i.e. the

primary bar must reflect the current forecast dates and the secondary bar the latest

Accepted programme.

Dependencies/Deliverables matrix detailing interim approvals and/or any other

inputs/requirements from Employer/Supervisor/Project Manager/Others or any

other project stakeholder in line with the activities identified in the 1 and 3- week

Look Ahead Schedules.

Interfacing Matrix, detailing timeous identification of any requirements for

providing the Works and/or works to be executed by Others and any other

Stakeholders party to this contract in line with the stipulations of the Works

Information.

Manpower Histogram – reflecting actual, forecasted and planned activities

Plant and Equipment Histogram – reflecting actual, forecast and planned activities.

S-curves – reflecting the actual physical percentage complete versus the planned

physical percentage for the overall contract.

Identification critical activities, progress and any deviations from planned

performance.

Adherence and actual performance achieved with regards to Environmental, Health

& Safety and Quality Management.

6.6.31 The Contractor’s monthly project progress report includes but is not limited to:

Monthly, the Contractor completes an assessment of the physical progress of all

activities in progress and to completion, accordingly calculates physical progress

complete for the project overall (represented as a percentage) in line with the

methodology and resultant tools agreed in 6.11.14; revises and submits the

updated programme for acceptance and cash flow forecast report; detailing any

variances and proposes remedial actions to rectify deviations.

The Contractor’s monthly programme narrative report is submitted a week before

the last Friday of each month, or as required by the Project Manager. The report

shall indicate “progress this period” and “progress to date” and shall include, but

is not limited to, the following;

- Summary of progress achieved during the reporting period

- Latest Accepted Programme submitted for approval





- Deviations from the current Accepted Programme and action plans to rectify

- Project milestones table – planned versus actual and forecast

- Status and performance of operations on the site and working areas

- Status and performance of operations outside working areas

- Cash flow forecast report

- Digital photographic record of the progress of the works

- Manpower histograms, including a control spreadsheet detailing specific

current and future over-allocation and/or conflicts in allocation of resources.

- Contractor’s plant and equipment histograms, including a control spreadsheet

detailing specific current and future over-allocation and/or conflicts in allocation

of resources.

- S-curves of overall progress

- Critical action items list (top 10)

- Identified Risks (top 10)

- Earned value summary report detailing SPIt, SVt, EVt, PVt, EACt and resultant

earned values.

6.7 Contractor’s management, supervision and key people

6.7.1 The Contractor employs a CSHEO as a key person under ECC Clause 24.1

6.7.2 The CSHEO reports to the SHEC on the Site. The CSHEO ensures that the works (to include any

part thereof) are subject to a prior environmental method statement(s) approved by the Project

Manager, CM or SHEO and ensures that the CEMP is implemented by the Contractor in a timely

and proper manner. The SCHEO provides the Project Manager with all environmental method

statements.

6.7.3 The CSHEO tasks are:

Daily, weekly and monthly inspections of the Site and Working Areas.

Monitor compliance with the CEMP (to include the SES and PES) and the environmental

method statements submitted to the Project Manager

Reporting of an environmental incident to the Project Manager

Attendance at all SHE meetings, toolbox talks and induction programmes

Litter control and ensuring the Contractor clears litter from the Site and Working Areas; and

Ensuring that environmental signage and barriers are correctly.





The CSHEO submits daily, weekly and monthly checklists to the SHEC.

6.7.4 The Contractor employs a CIRP as a key person under ECC Clause 24.1.

6.7.5 The CIRP is based on the Site and ensures that all reports and IR requests are submitted

accurately and in a timely manner to Project Manager.

6.7.6 The CIRP tasks are:

Dedicated to human resources, industrial relations and any other Contractor employee related

function;

Resolve all human resources and industrial relations matters arising from the Contractor’s

employees;

Represent the Contractor at all industrial relations meetings;

Represent the Contractor on the IRCC;

6.7.7 The Contractor employs an HSR as a key person under ECC Clause 24.1

6.7.8 The Contractor provides an Organogram of all his key people (both as required by the Employer

and as independently stated by the Contractor under Contract Data Part Two) and how such key

people communicate with the Project Manager and the Supervisor and their delegates all as

stated at paragraph 6.5 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.

6.8 Training workshops and technology transfer

The Contractor is encouraged to submit relevant details of any courses or Workshops

recommended by him for the preparatory and/or follow-up training of the Employer’s personnel.

6.9 Insurance provided by the Employer

The insurance provided by the Employer with the applicable limits and deductibles required by the

conditions of contract (if any) is given in the Contract Data. The Employer’s insurance is applicable

to work undertaken on the site only, and the Contractor provides insurance for the Works for the

period up to delivery to the site. This includes insurance during transit and off loading at the site.

The Employer advises that the following exclusions apply to the insurance which the Employer

provides for Loss of or damage to the Works, Plant and Materials:

1. Loss of monies or the like;

2. Aircraft, waterborne vessels or craft;

3. Losses discovered by taking of routine inventory;

4. Defective workmanship / defective design, re-design betterment or improvement;

5. Consequential loss;





6. Delay damages or penalties for delay;

7. Guarantees for performance or efficiency;

8. Air transit outside territorial limits;

9. Ocean transit or whilst in storage thereafter (unless inspected by an independent third party

after off-loading);

10. Maintenance and/or low performance damages;

11. Defects;

12. Wear, tear or gradual deterioration;

13. Electrical and mechanical breakdown or explosion to Plant after Completion tests have been

satisfied;

14. Damage to any property insured due to ingress of mud, silt, water, debris unless pipe ends

have been sealed at the end of each working day; and

15. Damage to any property exposed or in excess of 10,000 metres of open trench.

The Employer advises that the following exclusions apply to the insurance which the Employer

provides for Liability for loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant and Materials

and Equipment) and liability for bodily injury to or death of a person (not an employee of the

Contractor) caused by activity in connection with this contract:

1. Death or injury to the Contractor’s employees;

2. Motor vehicle cover;

3. Aircraft / watercraft ownership cover;

4. Delay damages or penalties for delay;

5. Guarantees for performance or efficiency;

6. Defective workmanship;

7. Gradual pollution and contamination;

8. Vibration cover;

9. Contractual liabilities;

10. SASRIA risks (inter alia riot, strike, political malicious damage)

11. Punitive damages;

12. War, nuclear risks; and





13. Removal of support in excess of R5,000,000

Where the Works involve the assembly, erection and installation of Plant, the Contractor declares

the full replacement value and not the value included in the NEC3 contract.

The Contractor liaises with the Employer and the Project Manager when a claim is made and

assists in completing the Claims Advice Form.

6.9.1 Insurance provided by the Employer is contained in the Contract Data – Part 1.

6.10 Contract change management

6.10.1 No additional requirements apply to ECC Clause 60 series.

6.11 Provision of bonds and guarantees

6.11.1 The form in which a bond or guarantee required by the conditions of contract (if any) is to be

provided by the Contractor is given in Part 1 Agreements and Contract Data, document C1.3,

Sureties.

6.11.2 The Contractor provides a bond or guarantee as required by the conditions of contract

concurrently with the execution by the Parties of the form of agreement for the ECC contract.

The Employer may withhold payment of amounts due to the Contractor until the bond or

guarantee required in terms of this contract has been received and accepted by the person

notified to the Contractor by the Project Manager to receive and accept such bond or guarantee.

Such withholding of payment due to the Contractor shall not affect the Employer’s right to

termination stated in this contract.

6.12 Records of Defined Cost, payments & assessments of compensation events kept by Contractor

6.12.1 The Contractor keeps the following records available for the Project Manager to inspect:

Records of design employee’s location of work (if appropriate).

6.12.2 The Contractor keeps the following records available for the Project Manager to inspect:

Records of design employees location of work (if appropriate);

Records of Equipment used and people employed outside the Working Areas (if applicable).

7 Procurement

7.1 Code of Conduct

Transnet aims to achieve the best value for money when buying or selling goods and obtaining

services. This however must be done in an open and fair manner that supports and drives a

competitive economy. Underpinning our process are several acts and policies that any Contractor

dealing with Transnet must understand and support. These are:





The Transnet Procurement Procedures Manual (PPM);

Section 217 of the Constitution - the five pillars of Public PSCM (Procurement and Supply Chain

Management): fair, equitable, transparent, competitive and cost effective;

The Public Finance Management Act (PFMA);

The Broad Based Black Economic Empowerment Act (B-BBEE); and

The Anti-Corruption Act.

This code of conduct has been included in this contract to formally apprise Transnet Contractors

of Transnet’s expectations regarding behaviour and conduct of its Contractors.

Prohibition of Bribes, Kickbacks, Unlawful Payments, and Other Corrupt Practices

Transnet is in the process of transforming itself into a self-sustaining State Owned Enterprise,

actively competing in the logistics industry. Our aim is to become a world class, profitable, logistics

organisation. As such, our transformation is focused on adopting a performance culture and to

adopt behaviours that will enable this transformation.

1. Transnet will not participate in corrupt practices and therefore expects its Contractors to act

in a similar manner.

Transnet and its employees will follow the laws of this country and keep accurate business

records that reflect actual transactions with and payments to our Contractors.

Employees must not accept or request money or anything of value, directly or indirectly,

to:

- Illegally influence their judgement or conduct or to ensure the desired outcome of

a sourcing activity;

- Win or retain business or to influence any act or decision of any decision

stakeholders involved in sourcing decisions; or

- Gain an improper advantage.

There may be times when a Contractor is confronted with fraudulent or corrupt behaviour

of Transnet employees. We expect our Contractors to use our “Tip-offs Anonymous” Hot

line to report these acts. (0800 003 056).

2. Transnet is firmly committed to the ideas of free and competitive enterprise.

- Contractors are expected to comply with all applicable laws and regulations

regarding fair competition and antitrust.

- Transnet does not engage with non-value adding agents or representatives solely

for the purpose of increasing B-BBEE spend (fronting)

3. Transnet’s relationship with Contractors requires us to clearly define requirements, exchange

information and share mutual benefits.





Generally, Contractors have their own business standards and regulations. Although

Transnet cannot control the actions of our Contractors, we will not tolerate any illegal

activities. These include, but are not limited to:

- Misrepresentation of their product (origin of manufacture, specifications,

intellectual property rights, etc.);

- Collusion;

- Failure to disclose accurate information required during the sourcing activity

(ownership, financial situation, B-BBEE status, etc.);

- Corrupt activities listed above; and

- Harassment, intimidation or other aggressive actions towards Transnet

employees.

Contractors must be evaluated and approved before any materials, components, products

or services are purchased from them. Rigorous due diligence is conducted and the

Contractor is expected to participate in an honest and straight forward manner.

Contractors must record and report facts accurately, honestly and objectively. Financial

records must be accurate in all material respects.

Conflicts of Interest

1. A conflict of interest arises when personal interests or activities influence (or appear to

influence) the ability to act in the best interests of Transnet.

Doing business with family members

Having a financial interest in another company in our industry.

7.2 The Contractor’s Invoices

7.2.1 When the Project Manager certifies payment (see ECC Clause 51.1) following an assessment

date, the Contractor complies with the Employer’s procedure for invoice submission.

7.2.2 The invoice must correspond to the Project Manager’s assessment of the amount due to the

Contractor as stated in the payment certificate.

7.2.3 The invoice states the following:

Invoice addressed to Transnet SOC Ltd;

Transnet SOC Limited’s VAT No: 4720103177;

Invoice number;

The Contractor’s VAT Number; and

The Contract number.

The invoice contains the supporting detail.

7.2.4 The invoice is presented either by post or by hand delivery.





7.2.5 Invoices submitted by post are addressed to:

Transnet Capital Projects

Old Naval Base

1 Commodore Close

Meerensee

Richards Bay

3900

For the attention of The Contract Administrator, Transnet Capital Projects

7.2.6 Invoices submitted by hand are presented to:

Transnet Capital Projects

Old Naval Base

Richards Bay

3900

For the attention of The Contract Administrator, Transnet Capital Projects

7.2.7 The invoice is presented as an original.

7.3 People

7.3.1 Minimum requirements of people employed on the Site

The Contractor shall ensure that all his people on the site work in accordance with the South African

Basic Conditions of Employment Act, 75 of 1997 and the Basic Conditions of Employment

Amendment Act, 11 of 2002, irrespective of being a local or oversees employee.

The Contractor shall ensure that all the necessary work permits are obtained and available for his

overseas employees on the site.

7.3.2 The Contractor complies with the following PIRPMP.

7.3.2.1 CONTRACTOR LIABILITY

1.1. The Contractor warrants that it will be liable to Transnet for any loss or damage caused by

strikes, riots, lockouts or any labour disputes by and/or confined to the Contractor’s employees,

which loss will include any indirect or consequential damages;

1.2. The Contractor warrants that no negotiations or feedback meetings by the Contractor’s

employees shall take place on Transnet premises, whether owned or rented by Transnet.

1.3. The Contractor shall give notice to Transnet of any industrial action by the Contractor’s

employees immediately upon becoming aware of any actual or contemplated action that is or

may be carried out on Transnet’s premises, whether owned or rented, and shall notify Transnet

of all matters associated with such action that may potentially affect Transnet.





1.4. The Contractor is responsible for educating its employees on relevant provisions of the Labour

Relations Act which deal with industrial action processes, and the risks of non-compliance.

1.5. The Contractor is required to develop a Contingency Strike Handling Plan, which plan the

Contractor is obliged to update on a three monthly basis. The Contractor must provide Transnet

with this plan and all updates to the Plan. The Contractor is responsible to communicate with

its employees on site details of the plan.

2. INDUSTRIAL ACTION BY CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES

2.1. In the event of any industrial action by the Contractor’s employees, the Contractor is required

to provide competent contingency resources permitted in law to carry out any of the duties that

are or could potentially be interrupted by industrial action in delivering the Service.

2.2. The Contractor warrants that it will compensate Transnet for any costs Transnet incurs in

providing additional security to deal with any industrial action by the Contractor’s employees.

2.3. In the event of any industrial action by the Contractor’s employees, the Contractor is obliged:

2.3.1. To prepare and deliver to Transnet, within two (2) hours of the commencement of

industrial action an Industrial Action Report. If the industrial action persists the

Contractor is required to deliver the report at 8h30 each day.

2.3.2. The Industrial Action Report must provide at least the following information:

2.3.2.1. Industrial incident report,

2.3.2.2. Attendance register,

2.3.2.3. Productivity / progress to schedule reports,

2.3.2.4. Operational contingency plan,

2.3.2.5. Site security report,

2.3.2.6. Industrial action intelligence gathered.

2.3.3. The final Industrial Action Report is to be delivered 24 hours after finalisation of the

industrial action.

2.3.4. The management of the Contractor is required to hold a daily industrial action

teleconference with personnel identified by Transnet to discuss the industrial action,

settlement of the industrial action, security issues and the impact on delivery under the

contract.





2.4. The resolution of any disputes or industrial action by the Contractor’s employees is the sole

responsibility of the Contractor.

2.5. Access to Transnet premises by the Contractor and its employees is only provided for purposes

of the Contractor delivering its services to Transnet. Should the Contractor and its employees

not, for any reason, be capable of delivering its services Transnet is entitled to restrict or deny

access onto its premises and unless otherwise authorized; such person will deemed to be

trespassing.

7.3.3 The Contractor performs the works having due regard to the PLA that are negotiated between

the Employer and the appropriate trade unions on this contract.

7.3.4 The Contractor complies with the requirements of the IRCC involving the engineering

construction Contractors engaged (including all future Contractors) by the Employer.

7.3.5 The roles and responsibilities of the various personnel acting on behalf of the Project Manager

with respect to IR issues are stated in the paragraphs following:

The PIRM is responsible for ensuring that the Contractor complies with the PIRPMP. The PIRM

acts on behalf of the Project Manager.

7.3.6 The PIRM specific tasks are:

To complete the PLA prior to the Contract Date; and

To assign specific duties to the PSIRM.

7.3.7 The PSIRM is responsible for IR (to include the PLA) on the Site and Working Areas and reports

to the Project Manager.

7.3.8 The SIRM is responsible, inter alia, for day-to-day IR on the Site and Working Areas through the

implementation of the PIRPMP. The SIRM reports directly to the PSIRM and the Project Manager.

7.3.9 The SIRM specific tasks are:

To liaise with the Contractor prior to the commencement of construction activities (as per the

Contractor’s programme accepted by the Project Manager) with respect to IR issues under

the SIP.

7.3.10 B-BBEE and preferencing scheme

Points will be awarded to tenderers based on preferencing using the balanced Department of Trade and

Industry (DTI) scorecard. The application of the Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment recognition

levels and score preferencing points are as follows:

Contribution

Level

Qualification Points on the

generic scorecard

Broad-Based BEE

Recognition Level

Preferencing

Points Scored





Level 1 Greater than or equal to 100 points 135% 20

Level 2 Greater than or equal to 95 points

but less than 100 points

125% 18

Level 3 Greater than or equal to 90 points but less than 95 points

110% 16



100% 12



80% 8

Level 6 Greater than or equal to 70 points but less than 75 points

60% 6



50% 4



10% 2

Level 9 Less than 40 points 0% 0

On the basis the tenderer with a B-BBEE recognition level of 135% will achieve 20 points, and the points

will be allocated accordingly on a pro-rata basis as per the table above.

In addition to the above, provision is made for the case where a tenderer has greater than 50% black ownership. In this instance, provided the requisite documentary evidence is supplied, the tenderer will

then be awarded preference points one level above that awarded based on the DTI scorecard. For example, a tenderer with > 50% black ownership obtaining a Level 6 contribution equating to 6 points

will be awarded 8 preferencing points (Level 5).

Tenderers claiming Preference Points must submit together with the tender document their generic

scorecard, evaluated by an independent accreditation agency. Transnet therefore requires tenderers to

have been accredited by one of the various Accreditation Agencies in accordance with the latest relevant Codes of Practice applicable not more than 3 months prior to the date of tender. Should the B-BBEE

rating not be provided, Transnet reserves the right to award no points. Transnet also reserves the right to carry out an independent audit of the tenderers scorecard components at any stage from the date of

close of the tenders until completion of the contract.

Tenderers with no accreditation will score zero points for preferencing.

7.4 Subcontracting

7.4.1 Preferred subcontractors

The Contractor shall submit his schedule of proposed sub-Contractors for the acceptance of the

Project Manager prior to their appointment. This list shall not deviate from the tender schedule

of proposed sub-Contractors, unless discussed with, and accepted by, the Project Manager.

7.4.2 Where the Contractor employs a Subcontractor who constructs or installs part of the works or

who supplies Plant and Materials for incorporation into the works which involves a Subcontractor

operating on the Site and/or Working Areas, then the Contractor ensures that any such

Subcontractor complies with the CEMP, SES and PES (described under paragraph 2.4 of the

Works Information) as appropriate and that the subcontract documentation places back-to-back

obligations on the Subcontractor which reflect the Contractor’s obligations under the CEMP, SES

and PES, all within the Contractor’s Quality Management System as per paragraph 2.5 of the

Works Information.





7.4.3 Where the Contractor employs a Subcontractor who constructs or installs part of the works or

who supplies Plant and Materials for incorporation into the works which involves a Subcontractor

operating on the Site and/or Working Areas, then the Contractor ensures that any such

Subcontractor complies with the PIRPMP (described under paragraph 4.1.1 of the Works

Information) as appropriate and that the subcontract documentation places back-to-back

obligations on the Subcontractor which reflect the Contractor’s obligations under the PIRPMP, all

within the Contractor’s Quality Management System as per paragraph 2.5 of the Works

Information.

7.4.4 Limitations on subcontracting

The Contractor shall not appoint or bring sub-Contractors onto site without the prior approval of

the Project Manager, and all sub-Contractors will be required to conform to the requirements as

set out herein as if they were employees of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall not deviate from the approved sub-Contractors list without prior approval

of the Project Manager.

7.4.5 Attendance on Subcontractors

The Contractor shall ensure that the quality assurance requirements placed on him under this

Contract are transferred into any subcontracts.

Quality system requirements shall be applied on all subcontracts to the point where the

acceptability of supplies can be demonstrated solely by the conduct of inspection and/or

examination of goods upon receipt at the designated point of delivery.

The Contractor must notify the Project Manager of all inspections at his sub-Contractors at least 3

working days in advance of such inspections. The Contractor must ensure that his sub-Contractor

has the relevant quality management plans available at such inspections. The Supervisor will give

the Contractor 24 hour notice in writing of his intention to be present at the inspections.



Contract PAGE 1 Part C4 PRO-FAT-0226 Rev02 C4. Site Information

PART 4: SITE INFORMATION

1. Description of the Site and its surroundings

1.1. General description

Richards Bay is located approximately 160 km north-east of Durban in northern KwaZulu-Natal (KZN), close

to the southern extremity of the Zululand Coastal Plain with the following GPS coordinates: 28°47'08.8"S

32°02'18.2"E. The climate is subtropical with warm to hot summers with a relatively low diurnal temperature

range. Mean maximum and minimum temperatures during summer (December, January and February) are

approximately 29°C and 21°C respectively. Winters (June, July and August) are mild with mean maximum

and minimum temperatures of approximately 23°C and 12°C respectively. Although the area is a summer

rainfall region significant falls may occur at any time of year. Wind directions are typically from the north-

east or south-west throughout the year.

The Contractor shall attend a site visit and acquaint himself with the nature of the services, the conditions

under which the work is to be performed, and the means of access to the site, any limitations or other

authorities and in general with all matters that may influence or affect the contract.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in their tender for any additional cost to be involved due to

the foregoing.

The site located within the Port of Richards Bay and in an operational area. Access is only granted with full

PPE.

The photo shown indicates the positioning of the site with reference to the area within the Port operations.

The circled area (in yellow) is the MHA site.




1.2. Existing buildings, structures, and plant & machinery on the Site

The MHA Building is an existing workshop facility that has been vacated, and is no longer in use. Refer to

the layout drawing (Appendix 1 - MHA layout drawing). It is positioned alongside an existing commodity

stockpile area. There is movable concrete barriers that form a boundary line / fence between the stockpile

area and the MHA site.

The contractor is to visit the site and assess a suitable lay down area for the site office and the area to park

any plant equipment, within the MHA site.

1.3. Subsoil information

The MHA scope will not require major excavation or replacing of any layer works.




1.4. Hidden services

The contractor is to treat the site as having unknown services in the ground. Test pits may be required, and

a survey of services underground may be done should the need arise.